Alejandro j-\dem
R. Jan1es Milgram
Cohomology of -roup
i"
Springer -Verlag Berlin Heidelberg N e'vv York
London Paris Tokyo Hong I{ong Barcelona Budapest
Alejandro Adem Department of Mathematics University of Wisconsin Madison, WI 53706, USA
Table of Contents
R. James Milgram Department of Applied Homotopy Stanford University Stanford, CA 94305-9701, USA
Introduction ................................................
1
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology O. 1.
2.
Mathematics Subject Classification (1991): 20105, 2OJ06, 20Jl 0, 55R35, 55R40, S7S17, I8GIO, 18GIS, 18G20, 18G40
ISBN 3-540-5702S-X Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York ISBN 0-387-S702S-X Springer-Verlag New York Berlin Heidelberg
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Adem, Alejandro. Cohomology of finite groups/ Alejandro Adem, Richard James Milgram. p. em. - (Grundlehren der mathematischen Wissenschaflen; 309) Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 0-387-S7025-X 1. Finite groups. 2. Homology theory. I. Milgram, R. James. II. Title. III. Series. QAI77.A34 1995 SI2'.5S-dc20 94-13318 CIP This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation, broadcasting, reproduction on microfilm or in any other way, and storage in data banks. Duplication of this publication or parts thereofis permitted only under the provisions of the German Copyright Law of September 9, 1965, in its current version, and permission for use must always be obtained from SpringerVerlag. Violations are liable for prosecution under the German Copyright Law.
7 8 12 14 16 18 20 23 27 32 34 35 36 36 38 40 43
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology O. 1.
2.
© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 1994 Printed in Germany Typesetting: Camera-ready copy produced by the authors' output file llsing a Springer TEX macro packagc SPIN 10078665 41/3140-5432 I 0 Printed on acid-free paper
Introduction .............................................. Group Extensions ......................................... Extensions Associated to the Quaternions .................... The Group of Unit Quaternions and SO(3) ................... The Generalized Quaternion Groups and Binary Tetrahedral Group ................................................... Central Extensions and 8 1 Bundles on the Torus T2 ........... The Pull-back Construction and Extensions .................. The Obstruction to Extension When the Center Is Non-Trivial .. Counting the Number of Extensions ......................... The Relation Satisfied by p,(gll g2, g3) ....................... A Certain Universal Extension .............................. Each Element in H~(G; C) Represents an Obstruction ......... Associative Algebras and H~(G; C) .........'................. Basic Structure Theorems for Central Simple IF-Algebras ....... Tensor Products of Central Simple IF-Algebras ................ The Cohomological Interpretation of Central Simple Division Algebras ................................................. Comparing Different Maximal Subfields, the Brauer Group
3. 4.
Introduction .............................................. Preliminaries on Classifying Spaces .......................... Eilenberg-MacLane Spaces and the Steenrod Algebra A(p) Axioms for the Steenrod Algebra A(2) ....................... Axioms for the Steenrod Algebra A(p) ....................... The Cohomology of Eilenberg-MacLane Spaces ................ The Hopf Algebra Structure on A(p) ........................ Group Cohomology ........................................ Cup Products .............................................
45 45
53 55 55 56 57 57 66
VI
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
5. Restriction and Transfer 6. 7. 8.
Transfer and Restriction for Abelian Groups ................. An Alternate Construction of the Transfer ................... The Cartan-Eilenberg Double Coset Formula ................ Tate Cohomology and Applications ......................... The First Cohomology Group and Out(G) ...................
. . . . .
69
Chapter V. G-Complexes and Equivariant Coho1110logy
71 73 76 81 87
O. 1. 2. 3.
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
o. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Introduction ............................................. General Invariants ........................................ The Dickson Algebra ..................................... A Theorem of Serre ...................................... The Invariants in H*((Zjp)n; lFp ) Under the Action of 5 n The Cardenas-Kuhn Theorem .............................. Discussion of Related Topics and Further Results ............. The Dickson Algebras and Topology ........................ The Ring of Invariants for SP2n (IF 2) ........................ The Invariants of Subgroups of GL 4 (lF 2) .....................
. 93 . 93 . 100 . 105 108 . 112 . 115 . 115 . 115 . 116
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems O. 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
Introduction .............................................. The Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence: Geometric Approach ................................................ Wreath Products .......................................... Central Extensions ........................................ A Lemma of Quillen-Venkov ................................ Change of Rings and the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence ................................................. The Dihedral Group D 2n ................................... The Quaternion Group Qs ................................. Chain Approximations in Acyclic Complexes .................. Groups With Cohomology Detected by Abelian Subgroups Structure Theorems for the Ring H* (G; IF p) .................. Evens-Venkov Finite Generation Theorem .................... The Quillen-Venkov Theorem ............................... The Krull Dimension of H* (G; IF p) .......................... The Classification and Cohomology Rings of Periodic Groups ... The Classification of Periodic Groups ........................ The Mod(2) Cohomology of the Periodic Groups .............. The Definition and Properties of Steenrod Squares ............ The Squaring Operations ................................... The P-Power Operations for p Odd ..........................
VII
Introduction to Cohomological Methods ..................... . Restrictions on Group Actions ............................. . General Properties of Po sets Associated to Finite Groups Applications to Cohomology ............................... . 54 ...................................................... . SL 3 (lF 2 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sporadic Group Mll .................................. . The Sporadic Group J 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161 165 170 176 178 178 179 179
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
O. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Introduction Detection Theorems for H* (5n ; IF p) and Construction of Generators .............................................. Hopf Algebras ........................................... The Theorems of Borel and Hopf ........................... The Structure of H* (5n ; lF p ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More Invariant Theory .................................... H*(5n ), n = 6,8,10,12 .................................. The Cohomology of the Alternating Groups .................
181 . 184 . 197 . 201 . 203 . 206 . 211 . 214
117 Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type 118 119 122 124 125 128 131 134 140 143 143 144 144 146 149 154 156 157 159
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Preliminary Remarks ..................................... The Classical Groups of Lie Type .......................... The Orders of the Finite Orthogonal and Symplectic Groups ... The Cohomology of.the Groups GLn(q) ..................... The Cohomology of the Groups O~(q) for q Odd ............. The Cohomology Groups H*(Om(q);lF2) .................... The Groups H*(SP2n(q);lF2) ............................... The Exceptional Chevalley Groups .........................
. 219 . 220 . 227 . 231 . 235 . 240 . 241 . 246
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
O. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Introduction .............................................. The Cohomology of Mll .................................. . The Cohomology of J 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Cohomology of M12 .................................. . The Structure of Mathieu Group M12 ....................... . The Cohomology of M12 .................................. . Discussion of H*(M12;lF2) ................................. . The Cohomology of Other Sporadic Simple Groups ........... . The O'Nan Group 0' N ................................... .
251 252 253 254 254 258 263 267 267
VIII
Table of Contents
The Mathieu Group M22 The Mathieu Group M 23
Introduction
268 271
Chapter IX. The Plus Construction and Applications O. 1. 2. 3.
4.
Preliminaries ............................................. Definitions ............................................... Classification and Construction of Acyclic Maps ............... Examples and Applications ................................. The Infinite Symmetric Group .............................. The General Linear Group Over a Finite Field ................ The Binary Icosahedral Group .............................. The Mathieu Group M12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Group J 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . The Mathieu Group lvI23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Kan-Thurston Theorem ...............................
273 273 275 277 277 278 279 281 281 282 283
Some Historical Background
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group O. 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Introduction ............................................. . The Brauer Groups of Complete Local Fields ................ . Valuations and Completions ............................... . The Brauer Groups of Complete Fields with Finite Valuations .. The Brauer Group and the Schur Subgroup for Finite Extensions of 0. .......................................... . The Brauer Group of a Finite Extension of 0. ................ . The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group ................... . The Group (0./71..) and Its Aut Group ....................... . The Explicit Generators of the Schur Subgroup .............. . Cyclotomic Algebras and the Brauer-Witt Theorem .......... . The Galois Group of the Maximal Cyclotomic Extension of JF .. . The Cohomological Reformulation of the Schur Subgroup The Groups H;ont(G rr ; 0./71..) and H;ont(G v ;0./71..) ............. . The Cohomology Groups H;ont(G rr ; 0./71..) ................... . The Local Cohomology with Q/Z Coefficients ................ . The Explicit Form of the Evaluation Maps at the Finite Valuations ............................................... . The Explicit Structure of the Schur Subgroup, S(JF) .......... . The Map H;ont(G v ;o./Z)------tH;ont(Gv ;Q;,cycl)' ............... . The Invariants at the Infinite Real Primes ................... . The Remaining Local Maps ................................ .
289 290 290 293 295 295 297 298 299 299 300 301 304 304 307 309 310 311 314 316
References ................................................. . 319 Index ...................................................... . 325
~(
This book deals with the cohomology of groups, particularly finite ones. Historically, the subject has been one of significant interaction between algebra and topology and has directly led to the creatiori. of such important areas of mathematics as homological algebra and algebraic K-theory. It arose primarily in the 1920's and 1930's independently in number theory and topology. In topology the main focus was on the work of H. Hopf, but B. Eckmann, S. Eilenberg, and S. MacLane (among others) made significant contributions. The main thrust of the early work here was to try to understand the meanings of the low dimensional homology groups of a space X. For example, if the universal cover of X was three connected, it was known that H 2 (X; A) depends only on the fundamental group of X. Group cohomology initially appeared to explain this dependence. In number theory, group cohomology arose as a natural device for describing the main theorems of class field theory and, in particular, for describing and analyzing the Brauer group of a field. It also arose naturally in the study of group extensions, N
2
Introduction
(IV.6). The simplest of them is (71/2) and its classifying space, the infinite real projective space lRlPoo , was the main tool used by J.F. Adams in solving the problem of vector fields on spheres. Likewise, Quillen used the structure of the cohomology of the finite groups of Lie type (Chapter VII) to prove the Adams conjecture identifying the im( J) groups as direct summands of the stable homotopy groups of spheres. More recently, with the proof by G. Carlsson of the Segal conjecture, it is evident that the dominant influence on the structure of stable homotopy theory is contained in the structure of the finite symmetric groups. From a more algebraic point of view the cohomology ring H* (G; IK) of a finite group with coefficients in a finite field is connected via work of D. Quillen, J. Alperin, L. Evens, J. Carlson, and D. Benson to the structure of the modular representations of G. This connection and its ramifications have provided a vast increase in interest in the subject among algebraists. The theoretical underpinnings here have been discussed at length in the excellent books of D. Benson, [Be], and L. Evens, [Ev2], so we do not repeat them here. What we do is to supply the. techniques and examples needed to flesh out the theory. For example see Chapter VIII where we discuss the cohomology of some of the sporadic groups, notably the Mathieu groups MIl, M 1 2, M22 and the group 0' N, and Chapter VII where we discuss the finite Chevalley groups. In topology the main source of examples and test spaces are classify-ing spaces of groups, various natural subspaces, and maps induced by homomorphisms of the groups. This is hardly suprising since the Kan-Thurston theorem and Quillen's plus construction (both discussed in Chapter IX) show that any simply connected space can be constructed from the classify-ing spaces of groups in very simple ways. For example the plus construction on the class ify-ing space of the infinite symmetric group, Soo, is identified with the space limn on sn, the infinite loop space of the infinite sphere. Also, the groups of Lie type over finite fields lead to models for Bo, Bu, Bsp , etc. Related to this, and a major motivation for the study of group cohomology in algebraic topology was Steenrod's construction of cohomology operations in arbitrary topological spaces using the cohomology of the symmetric groups. (This construction is reviewed in (IV. 7) and the cohomology of the symmetric groups is discussed in Chapter VI.) Another reason for the significance of group cohomology stems from its direct relationship with both group actions and homotopy theory. Methods developed by P. Smith to study finite group actions uncovered substantial cohomological restrictions in transformation groups (Chapter V) which led A. Borel to develop a systematic method for analyzing group actions.
Sornc Historical Background
3
Objectives Our main purposes in writing this book were to collect and make available the theory and its major applications, and provide the backround and techniques necessary for serious calculations. Even today we still hear it said by otherwise knowledgeable mathematicians that group cohomology is a theory without examples (and even if there are any, they are too complex to understand). With Chapters VI, VII, VIII, and X we hope we are able to lay this view to rest. There we discuss the cohomology rings of the symmetric and alternating group, most of the finite Chevalley groups and some of the sporadic groups. Additionally we show how (Chapter X) the theory can be used effectively, even with twisted coefficients, to determine those division algebras which occur in the rational representation rings of finite groups. The role of classical modular invariant theory is emphasized throughout as a major means of explaining the cohomology classes which occur, and hints are given as to the role in topology of many of the cohomology groups and classes. Space and time prevented us from going into this further, but it should be possible for the interested reader to understand the genesis of most of the cohomology classes for the groups above. We have tried to layout the subject to enable us to get to the foundational ideas and techniques as quickly as possible. After Chapter I which, as we have indicated, is primarily a historical introduction to the subject, we turn to its modern development. The basic theory is contained in Chapters II, III, and IV, where we develop the three building blocks of the subject: classifying spaces, invariant theory, and spectral sequences. We have tried throughout, and particularly in these chapters, to provide useful but accessible examples to help clarify the material. After these core chapters we deal with the areas of interaction previously described, keeping track of their relationship to the cohomology of finite groups. We describe applications to group actions in Chapter V. We also analyze the symmetric groups (Chapter VI) and the general linear groups over a finite field (Chapter VII) in some detail, as they are key groups for stable ho·motopy theory and algebraic K-theory respectively. Chapter VIII is devoted to the sporadic simple groups, where we describe recent work by the authors aimed at trying to understand the role of some of these groups in topology. In Chapter IX we provide a description of Quillen's plus construction with applications, as well as a proof of the Kan-Thurston Theorem, which states that the cohomology of any topological space is the cohomology of a group. Finally in Chapter X we use co homological methods to present a solution to the Schur subgroup problem, which classifies all the division algebras that can occur in the rational group rings of finite groups.
4
Introduction
Prereq uisites
The book has come about from a series of seminars and occasional courses by the second author over a large number of years at Stanford, Aarhus Universitet, and the University of Minnesota, and above all from a two year continuing seminar at Stanford that the authors ran jointly. The first author has also used parts of the book for a second year graduate course at the University of Wisconsin. Overall, the book only assumes that the reader has the backround of a beginning second year graduate student, that is, a one year graduate course in algebra and at least a half year of algebraic topology. This is certainly all that is needed for Chapter I. Chapter II requires more topology however. Familiarity with the first half of the classic text of Milnor and Stasheff, [MS], should be more than sufficient. From Chapter III on the book is largely self contained, though at a few points (IV.7) and (VI.I), some familiarity with the book of Steenrod and Epstein, [SE], is useful, and in Chapter X where we discuss the interplay between group cohomology and classical representation theory useful texts would be Serre's book on local fields, [Se4] , and Pierce's book on Associative algebras, [Pl. For supplementary material on homological algebra we recommend the text by Cartan and Eilenberg [CE], which has an excellent chapter on Tate cohomology. Likewise the text by K. Brown [Brown] is a nice introduction to group cohomology and given its emphasis on infinite groups we recommend it as a complement to our text. We would like to thank the students at Stanford for their remarks, as well as Su Han Chan for pointing out several typos in an early draft. Notation and Closing Remarks
The only peculiarity of notation is with regard to coefficients. As abelian groups and even as rings Zip and IF p are the same, though the second notation emphasizes that this ring is the finite field with p-elements. At times throughout the text the reader will see cohomology with coefficients H* (G; Zip) or H*(G; IFp). vVhen (Zip) is the coefficients we regard Zip as an additive abelian group, possibly acted on by G. This occurs when, for example, we are studying group extensions. When IF p occurs we mean to emphasize the ring structure of the coefficients. Typically, when this occurs the action is trivial and we are interested in the ring structure of the resulting cohomology groups. Currently the cohomology of groups is a fertile common ground for exchange of ideas between areas such as homotopy theory, modular representation theory, group actions, number theory, etc. We hope that this text will provide a solid background for any person interested in probing deeper into a subject which has been so influential in the development of contemporary algebra and topology. We would like to acknowledge being partially supported by NSF grants while vvorking on this project. The first author was also supported by an
Some Historical Background
5
NSF Young Investigator Award (NYI) and the University of Wisconsin Research Foundation. We would like to thank Beno Eckmann for his advice and encouragement. The first author would like to express his sincere appreciation to Jim Milgram for inviting him to participate in this project, thereby sharing his unique insight, wealth of knowledge and enthusiasm for group cohomology. Finally, we would like to thank Melania and Judy for their patience, support and love while we were fighting through the writing of this book. It could not have been done without them. We dedicate the book to them.
Chapter I. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
o. Introduction In this chapter we will study the structure of extensions of groups and the structure of central simple algebras over a field IF. The theory of group extensions, N<JE-'rG, their existence and classification, will be reduced to two questions about low dimensional cohomology groups. Specifically, we will associate to G and the center C of N, abelian groups H~(G; C) and H~(G; C), depending only on G, C, and the action 1; of G on C. The second group will contain an element, unambiguously defined for each triple (N, G, T: G -+ Out(N)) so that T induces 1; on restriction to C, and a necessary and sufficient condition for the existence of an extension with the data (N, G, T) will be that that element be zero. Then, once it is known that some extension exists, the elements in the first group will count the number of distinct extensions which are possible up to an appropriate notion of isomorphism. These results are due to S. Eilenberg and S. MacLane, and first appeared in a paper in the Annals of Mathematics in 1947, [EM]. Our exposition of these results begins in §1 with a preliminary discussion of extensions. We associate to the extension a homomorphism G-+Out(N), and begin to study the question of when an extension exists with a given homomorphism, and if so, how many. Then, the next two sections give important examples of how such extensions occur. In §2 we study extensions arising from the unit quaternions, thought of as a non-trivial extension by (1../2) of the special orthogonal group SO(3). Specializing to finite groups this leads to the binary icosahedral, tetrahedral, and octahedral groups. In §3 we consider the extensions by (1..) of the fundamental groups of 2-dimensional surfaces, particularly the torus. We see that they correspond to bundles over the surfaces with the circle 8 1 as fiber. Then we turn to the general situation. We first study a special case, the pull-back construction. With this example in hand we go on to the general case. Then, in §7, we use certain explicit extensions associated to free groups to show that every element in H~(G; C) actually occurs as an obstruction to the existence of an extension for some N with center C.
8
1. Group Extensions
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
After this, §8 is devoted to the discussion of how similar cohomological techniques enter into, and indeed, completely determine, the structure of finite dimensional division algebras with center a given field IF. Here, we first review the standard theory of simple algebras, the Wedderburn and NoetherSkolem theorems, and then construct factor sets associated to maximal subfields of the algebras. These are then connected to the cohomology groups H~(G; C) which arise naturally in the classification of group extensions. Finally we describe the Brauer group in terms of these H~'s. This chapter is written so that it can be read with a minimum of backround, a first year graduate course in algebra and a half year course in topology should be sufficient. It is mainly historical in nature, introducing the concepts and main properties of these low dimensional cohomology groups in very much the manner they originally appeared. In chapter II we begin again with a modern approach to their definition through "resolutions" and "classifying spaces" .
9
is no reason that Tg should be inner. Indeed, in our example, Zlp
subgroups N
C
W, then f induces a well defined
Proof. Define j{g} = 7rf(g) where 7r:H-tHIW is the projection. Then if g' also represents {g} we have 'g' = gn and 7r f (gn) = 7r (f (g) f (n)) = 7r f (g) since fen)
E
w.
0
Thus since Inn(N) is a normal subgroup of Aut(N) we have a well defined homomorphism
¢:E/N-tOut(N) = Aut(N)/Inn(N) .
1. Group Extensions Let N
N = Zip
Example 1.2 The simplest extension is the Cartesian product E = N x G with group structure (n,g)(n',g') = (nn',gg'). Here ¢: G-tOut(N) is the trivial map ¢(g) = 1 all 9 E G.
>.: G-tAut(N) be a homomorphism, then there is a group E with N as a normal subgroup and E / N = G . Moreover, the associated map, ¢: G-+Out(N), is just 7r>'; where 7r: Aut(N)-tOut(N) is the projection.
Theorem 1.3 Let
Proof. On the Cartesian product N x G define a new multiplication by the rule
(n,g)(n',g') = (n)...(g)(n'),gg'). It is direct to show that this multiplication gives the product the structure of a group with N as a normal subgroup and G as the quotient by N. However, to give the reader experience with such formal arguments we give the details of the verification now. The definition shows that (1, l)(n',g') = (>.(l)(n'),g') and this, in turn is (n', g') since >'(1) = id. Likewise, (n, g)(l, 1) = (n>.(g)(l), g) = (n, g) since >.(g) is a homomorphism N -tN. Hence (1,1) is a unit. Also,
(n, 9 )(>.(g-l) (n -1), g-l)
(n)...(g)()...(g-1)(n- 1 )),1) (n>'(l)(n-l),l) (1,1)
while
10
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
(A (g -1) (n -1) , 9 -1 ) (n , g)
(A(g-1)(n-1).\(g-1)(n),1) (A(g-1)(n-1n),1)
(A(g -1 ) ( 1), 1) (1,1) . Thus (A(g-l )(n- 1), g-l) is a 2-sided inverse to (n, g). We now show that the product is associative.
(n, g)( (n', g') (nil, gil))
(n, g)(n' A(g')(n"), g' gil) (nA(g)(n' A(g')(n")), g(g'g")) (n(A(g) (n')A(g )A(g') (nil)), g(g' gft)) (nA(g) (n')A(gg') (nil), g(g' gil)) (nA(g)(n'), gg') (nil, gft) (( n, g) (n', g')) (nil, gft).
Hence N x G with the new multiplication is a group. It remains to evaluate the map ¢: G---tOut(N). We have G'---+ N x G as the set of pairs (l,g). Associated to 9 E G we obtain (l,g)(n, 1)(1,g-1) = (A(g)(n), 1). Thus the map ¢: E---tAut(N) restricted to G is our original map (A). 0
Examples 1.4 Aut(Z/nm) = Aut(Z/n) x Aut(Z/m) when nand m are relatively prime. Also, Aut(Z/2 T) = Z/2 x Z/2 T - 2 for r ~ 3 with generators, multiplication by -1 giving the element of order two, and multiplication by 5 or -3 giving the element of order 2T-2. (Note that (1 + 4k)2 = 1 + 8k(1 + 2k), r 2 r 3 so (1 + 4)2 - == 1 mod (2T) while (1 + 4)2 - ¢. 1 mod (2T).) In general, if p is prime, then Aut(Z/pT) is given by multiplication by the elements of Z/pT which are not divisible by p, and there are pT-1(p _ 1) of them, which is thus the order of Aut(Z/pT). If p is odd then 1 + p has order pT-1, and hence generates the p-Sylow subgroup. The projection Aut(Z/pT)---tAut(Z/p) induced from the surjection Z/pT ---tZ/p is onto, but Z/p = IFp is a field so its multiplicative group, being finite, consists of roots of unity, and hence is cyclic and isomorphic to Z/(p-1). From this Aut(Z/pT) = Z/(p - 1) x Z/pT-1 for p an odd prime. As a particular example, Aut(Z/7) = Z/6 with generator, multiplication by 3. Explicitly, the automorphism is given by n I--t 3n mod 7, so its square is n I--t 9n == 2n which has order 3. Hence there is a homomorphism Z/3---tAut(Z/7) sending the generator T to multiplication by 2. Consequently (1.3) gives a group extension Z/7 <1 E---tZ/3 with 1;: Z/3---tAut(Z/7) = Out(Z/7) generated by ¢(1) = x2.
1. Group Extensions
11
Similarly Z/2 '---+ Aut(Z/n) is just the map { Il--t 1 where u(o:) = 0:- 1 T 1-. U all 0: E Z/n. (Written additively this is just O:---t - 0: so it is multiplication by -1.) Then the associated extension Z/(n)---tE---tZ/2 given by the construction in the theorem is the dihedral group of order 2n, which we generally write D 2n . More generally, the types of groups arising above, extensions of cyclic groups, Z/n, by abelian groups, A, where the multiplication is twisted by a homomorphism cp: A---tAut(71/n) are called metabelian groups and playa key role in the study of periodic groups in (IV.6) and of important subgroups of the Brauer groups discussed in Chapter X and 1.8. Definition 1.5 Given a triple (N, G, A) where Nand G are groups and A: G---tAut(N) is a homomorphism, then the group N x G with multiplication
(n, g)( n', g')
I--t
(nA (g) [n']' gg')
constructed in the proof of (1.3) is called the semi-direct product of Nand G twisted by A, and is written N x,\ G. Let us take a slightly different point of view now. We have Definition 1.6 Let N <1E with quotient group E/N = G. A section v: G---tE is a map v: G---tE, which selects, for each 9 E G, an element v(g) E Jr-1(g).
A section v: G---tE gives us a way of writing E as a product, E = Nv(G). That is to say, every element in E has a unique expression nv(g). In particular, suppose N is abelian and T: G---tOut(N) = Aut(N) is known. Then we have v(g)n = v(g)nv(g)-l v (g) = T(g)(n)v(g). This implies that in the multiplication table for E we know how to multiply all elements of N with elements in E. What we do not quite know are the products
Indeed, this last formula shows that our uncertainty corresponds to a map
Exactly what the conditions on this map might be is not clear at this point but will be discussed later. It measures the degree to which T fails to determine the extension E completely. We remark at this point that the semi-direct product is the group which results when it is assumed that it is possible to pick a section v so that Av (g1, g2) = 1 for all gl, g2 E G. An extension is called split when there exists a section Av which is a homomorphism, and any split extension is isomorphic to the semi-direct product.
12
Chapter I. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
Example 1. 'l Consider the set of distinct extensions of the form (2/4,2/2, T) where T: 2/2-+Aut(2/4) = 2/2 is the non-trivial map, i.e. T(T) = x (-1), T(I) = id. Given an extension of this form, 2/4 <1 E---'>2/2 , consider a lift v: 7L/2-+E. There are 2 cosets of N in E. Pick v so that = IE and v(T) is some element in the other coset. We have V(T)2 E N; and
2. Extensions Associated to the Quaternions
13
2. The multiplication in (2.1) has a two sided identity, 1 = (1 + OJ). 3. There is a conjugation operation w: lHI -+ lHI defined by w (Zl + z2j) = Zl - z2j and (Zl + z2j)W(Zl + z2j) = W(ZI + z2j)(Zl + Z2j) = ZlZl + Z2 Z2 2: 0, and W(ZI + z2j)(Zl + Z2j) = 0 if and only if both Zl and Z2 are O. Moreover, for any a E 1HI, aw(a) is contained in the center oflHI which is just JR.
4· w(a(3)
= w((3)w(a).
v(l)
T(T)[v(T)2]
= v(T)v(T)2 v (T)-1 = V(T)2.
Hence V(T)2 is fixed under x (-1). Moreover, given any other choice for v(T), Vi (T) = v(T)e we have Vi (T)2 = v(T)2e- l e = v(T)2, so this class is independent of the choice of lifting. Writing the elements of 2/4 as (1, e, e2 , e3 ) . only 1 and e 2 are fixed under x ( -1) so these are the only choices for v ( T) 2 . If v(T)2 = 1, then we get the dihedral group D s ,
Ds
=
{a, b 1 a4 = b2 = 1, bab
=
{a,b
I a 4 = 1,
(Zl
+
-
z2j) .((Z3 + z4j) .(Z5 + Z6j)): ~i;~~;~~~f~; Z4Z6'~I}Y
= a3 } .
But if v(T)2 = e2, we obtain the quaternion group Qs,
Qs
Proof. Again, as in (1.3), the proof consists of a sequence of formal expansions. We write down the details for (2.2(1)) as an example.
b2 = a2, bab- 1
+Zl (Z3 Z6 + Z4Z5)]j Similarly
= a3}, ((Zl
+ z2j) . (Z3 + z4j)) . (zs + z6j)= (ZlZ3 - Z2 Z4
which is not isomorphic to Ds.
+(ZlZ4 + Z2 Z3)j) . (zs = (ZlZ3 - Z2Z4)ZS -(ZlZ4 +Z2Z3)Z6
2. Extensions Associated to the Quaternions In this section we introduce the quaternions. Then we show that the unit quaternions can be regarded as an extension of the special orthogonal group SO(3), indeed, the group N = 2/2 in this case. vVe then restrict to certain subgroups of SO(3), obtaining extensions like the binary tetrahedral group as an extension of the alternating group on 4 letters A4 by (2/2), and the generalized quaternion groups of order 4n as extensions by (7L/2) of the dihedral groups D 2n . These results are classical, and a modern but different exposition of them can be found in [Wo], §3.5. We write JR for the real numbers, C for the complexes, and represent the quaternions as lHI = C EEl C, i.e., pairs of complex numbers Zl + z2j, with IR-linear multiplication given by the formula (2.1)
(Zl
+ z2j) . (Z3 + z4j) = (ZlZ3 - Z2 Z4) + (ZlZ4 + Z2Z3)j
+ z6j)
+(ZlZ3 Z6 - Z2 Z4Z6 +(ZlZ4 + Z2Z3)Z5)j and comparing coefficients these expressions are the same.
o
Corollary 2.3 lHI - {O} is a multiplicative group under the quaternion multiplication, (2.1). (The inverse is given by a-I
= w(a)/aw(a.)
It is a special kind of group, though, one in which the multiplication is
continuous with respect to the usual topology on IR and the Cartesian product topology on lHI.
Definition 2.4 The map Norm: lHI-+lR+, which maps lHI into the non-negative reals, is defined as Norm(a) = w(a)a.
(Here if Z = a + bi then z = a - bi is the usual conjugation.) The following theorem describes the basic properties of the quaternions.
Theorem 2.2 1. The multiplication in (2.1) is associative.
Corollary 2.5 Norm is a homomorphism onto the multiplicative group of positive reals, Norm: lHI - {O}---'>lR+ .
14
2. Extensions Associated to the Quaternions
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
15
Also note that
Proof.
,-1(r,8 + s,8')f
Norm(a,8) = a,8w(a,8) = a,8w(,8)w(a) aNorm(,8)w(a) = Norm(,8)aw(a) =
Norm(,8)Norm(a) = Norm(a)Norm(,8).
o
Norm- 1 { +I} = S3 C lHI - {O}, the subgroup of unit quaternions, which is thus the kernel of Norm. We may embed R+-tlHI - {O} by setting "\(r) = r1. Then the composition is the map .,\-t.,\2 which is an isomorphism lR+-tlR+. Also, the image, im("\) C centerlHI - {O}, and we have a map
=
r,-l,8,
+ s,-l(3',
so the conjugation action of S3 on vV is a map ¢: S3-tGL3(lR), where GL3(lR) is the group of lR-linear isomorphisms of W. But also, Norm({-l(3,) = Norm((3), and, for (3 E W so (3 has the form v
ri
+ 3j + tij
Vii + Vjj + vijij,
we see that Norm( v) = r2 + 3 2 + t 2. Thus, the linear transformation of IV is length preserving in the usual metric on W, and consequently image( ¢) C 0(3), the subgroup of orthogonal transformations.
r: R+ x S3--+lHI - {O} defined by r(r, a) = .,\(r)· a. Thus we obtain the following structure theorem which describes the multiplicative group ]HI - {a}.
Proof. Conjugation by a(3 is conjugation first by a and then by (3. This shows that ¢ is a homomorphism. We now determine the kernel of ¢. Consider a non-zero mEW, w(m) = -m so m 2 = -Norm(m). Also, suppose v.lm, i.e., (V,1/1) = Vimi + vjmj + V'ijmij = 0, then vm E W since the coefficient of 1 in vm is -(v, m), and
Theorem 2.6 r is an isomorphism. Proof. First note that r is a homomorphism
r((r1' ad(r2' a2))
=
r(r1r2' a1 a 2) .,\( rl )A( r2) (al a2) A(rl)alA(r2)a2 r(r1' al)r(r2' a2)'
-vm = w(vm) = w(m)w(v) = m(3.
But the converse is also true. We have
Now note that r(r, 1) and r(I, a) are both injections, hence the kernel of r is determined by the intersection r(r, 1) n r(l, a) which is just the single element {I}! Finally, suppose ,8 E ]HI - {O}, then, setting v = Norm (,8) , we have "\(V)-I,8 E S3. Hence,8 = A(V)("\(V)-I,8). 0
We now study the group S3 of unit quaternions. We will construct a surjective homomorphism S3-tSO(3) with kernel 7L/2, a basic non-split extension which allows us to construct many other non-trivial extensions by specializing to subgroups. Note that S3 can be characterized as those a E JH[ - {a} for which w(a) = a-I.
Let W 3 C lHI be the (-I)-eigenspace of w, the "pure imaginary" subspace of vectors ri + z2j with r real. Thus, for ,8 E W, , E S3 we have
and it follows that
=
wh- 1 )w(/3)w(,)
,/3,-1
E
W if /3
E
W.
=
,(_/3),-1
Proposition 2.8 Let m, v E W be non-zero, then (m, v) = 0 if and only if mv = -vm. Proof of 2.8. It suffices to show w(mv) vm = -mv.
=
-7nv. But w(mv)
== w(v)w(m)
=
o
Corollary 2.9 If m, v E Ware non-zero and orthogonal, then m, v, rnv form a mutually orthogonal basis for W.
The Group of Unit Quaternions and SO(3)
wh/3,-l)
Lemma 2.7 ¢: S3-t0(3) is a homomorphism with kernel7L/2 = {±1} C S3. Moreover, the image of ¢ is exactly the component of 1, 80(3) C 0(3).
=
_,/3,-1
Proof of 2.9. mmv = m 2 v, mvm = -m 2 v, so m.lmv. Also v(mv) = (vm)v = -mv 2 so v.lmv. Moreover since Norm(mv) = Norm(m)Norm(v) f. 0 it follows that mv f- O. 0
Now, consider an element, = A + m E 53 with mEW, A real. Then = A - m, and we have
,-I
(A
+ m)m(A -
m)
(Am - Norm(m))(A - m)
(A2 + Norm(m))m m.
16
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
2. Extensions Associated to the Quaternions
N<37!'-l(V)~V.
Moreover, if z-Lm, then
(A
+ m)z(A -
m)
17
=
(Az - zm)(A - m)
=
z(A 2 + m 2) - 2zmA .
Now, noting that A2_m 2 = 1 implies we can write A = cos(B), Norm(m)I/2 = sin( B), so the previous proposition shows that we are dealing with a rotation through an angle 261 in the plane perpendicular to m. If A + m E Kernel, then m must be zero or A2 + m 2 = 1. However, since, by assumption A2 - m 2 = 1, this implies again that m 2 = 0, so m = 0, A = ±1 and Kernel(¢) = Z/2. To show the third statement of (2.7) consider 0: E 0(3) with det(o:) = 1. Then its characteristic polynomial det(xI - 0:) = x 3 - tr(0:)x2 + a2X - 1 has a real root A, and A is not 0 (cubics with real coefficients always have real roots). Hence, there is a non-zero vector v E R3 so that o:(v) = AV, and, since 0: preserves length, A = ± 1. v gives a splitting R 3 = (v) -LR 2, and since 0: preserves angle, 0:(R2) = R2. Moreover 0: restricted to R2 is also length preserving, hence, 0: is either a reflection or a rotation. But det(o:) = 1 = Adet( 0:) on R 2. Hence, if A = 1, then 0: restricted to R 2 is a rotation, and we have already seen that all such 0: are in the image. It remains to check the case A = -1. Here 0: on R 2 is a reflection, and so has an eigenvector v' with eigenvalue +1. We now choose v' instead of v and use the above argument. 0
<3
S3 ~ SO(3) .
We claim this extension is not a semi-direct product Z/2 x.\ SO(3). Indeed, if it were, since Aut(Z/2) = 1, it would, of necessity, be a product. In particular, if we take the matrix
1 -0
0:
(
o
01 00) 0-1
E
SO(3)
we have 0: 2 = I d, so one of the two elements in 1f- 1 (0:) would also satisfy this relation. However, 1f-l(o:) = ±j and (±j)2 = -1, so the splitting is not possible!
We now consider some special subgroups of 80(3). 7r
Lemma 2.11 Let N <3G-1G/N be rriven with N finite. Let V subgroup, then theTe is an eTtension
C
G/N be a
G. Indeed, 11f- 1 (V)1
(This is clear.) Example 2.12 Z/2 x Z/2 c SO(3) as the subgroup generated by
0-~ j) and~
a
We thus have an extension G
Z/2
=
C~ ~
j)
= 1f-l(Z/2 x Z/2),
<3 7!'-1 (Z/2
x Z/2) ~Z/2 x Z/2 .
IGI = 8 and, since i-+o:, j-+j3, the elements in G are ±1, ±i, ±j, ±ij. The squares of each of the last 6 elements are -1, and this G is just the quaternion group Q8 discussed briefly in 1.7. Example 2.13 Let
0
o cos(B) sin( B)
Si~(B)) ,
(3 =
cos(B)
(-~ ~ ~) o
0-1
with 61 = 21f/k, for some integer k. Then the subgroup H(k) generated by 0:, (3 in SO(3) has order 2k. In fact it is the dihedral group, as we can easily check that (30:(3-1 = a-I, a k = 1, and j32 = 1. Then the extension group 1f-l(H(k)) C S3 has order 4k. It is called the generalized quaternion group of order 4k, and is written Q4k. Example 2.14 Let 0- 3 be the regular tetrahedron with center at the origin. Let T3 be the subgroup of SO(3) consisting of rigid motions which take 0- 3 to itself. For each vertex there are 3 rotations (including the identity) fixing that vertex. Moreover, if 0: E T3 fixes VI, then it must be one of those 3 rotations. Also, the only rigid motion fixing 2 or more vertices must be the identity. Thus the homomorphism
¢: The Generalized Quaternion Groups and Binary Tetrahedral Group
c
INIIVI·
a.=
Summarizing, we have shown that there is an extension
Z/2
In paTticular, if V is finite, then so is 7!'-l(V)
T3~S4,
taking 0: to the permutation on the 4 vertices which it generates must be an injection. We claim that im( ¢) is the subgroup of S4 of order 12 consisting of exactly the even permutations. Denote the four vertices of 0- 3 by the symbols 1,2,3,4. Note that by our remarks every permutation of the form (i,j, k) of 3 of the 4 vertices (fixing the fourth) is in the image of ¢. There are 8 of these. Then note that the product (i,j,k)(i,j,l) = (i,l)(j,k), and there are 3 new elements obtained
18
3. Central Extem;ions and 8 1 Bundles
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
in this way. Finally, there is the identity element, making 12 in all. The
OIl
the Torus
H)
]''2
Then G n is given as a (non-split) cent.ral extension
remaining elements in the group fix no vertices or fix 2 vertices. But if one of the remaining elements fixing no vertices is in the image of cp, then an
Z <J C n ---tZ EB Z
element fixing 2 vertices is in the image, and this is impossible. Thus, we have identified T3 as the subgroup of even permutations, the alternating group A4 C S4' Now, the inverse image 1f- 1 (T3 ) is called the binary tetrahedral group, and has order 24. S4 also has order 24, but we will see later that the two groups are distinct.
where the defining relations are ABA- 1 B- = cn,. AC = CA, BC = ~B. Note that since C n is a subgroup of UT3(JR.! It act~ freely ~n UT3(lR) with quotient a compact three dimensional mamfold Factonng out by f N e get lR 2 /Z 2 - T2 the two dimenSIOnal torus, and the · t 11e Image 0 w -'.. . Sl associated projection 1f: M3-+T2 is a fibenng wIth fiber .th~ cIrcle . We now show that these fiberings are topologically dlstmct.
Remark 2.15 There are two other groups which may be obtained in this way, the binary octahedral group (from the rigid motions of the cube) and the binary icosahedral group (from the rigid motions of the icosahedron). See (IV.6) for a more complete discussion of these groups.
Lemma 3.1 The first integral homology g:-ou p of the q~otient UT3 (lR)/G n ,
1
N! .
the group H 1 ( UT3(JR.)/C n ;Z), is isomorphz.c ~o Z/nEBZ . Consequently, the quotients for different n are topologically dzstmct. Proof. Recall that HI (X; 7l) = 1fl (X) /[1fl (X), 1fl (X)] where [C, C] denotes the commutator subgroup of G. We now determine 1f1(UT3(lR)/Cn).
3. Central Extensions and 8 1 Bundles on the Torus T2 In this section we give another class of examples of extensions which occur quite naturally in algebraic geometry and topology. They are connected with complex line bundles over Riemann surfaces since each line bundle is uniquely associated with a circle bundle over the surface, and these circle bundles all arise in the manner described here. As it is most direct we concentrate on the case where the surface is a torus. We consider the subgroup of GL3(IR) consisting of the upper triangular matrices,
UT3(~)
=
{O ~ D
a, b, c, E
~}
.
Proposition 3.2 1fl(UT3(lR)/Gn) ~ G n
·
Proof of 3.2 UT3 (lR) is contractible, with a contraction being given by H:
(t, G~
Consequently 1f1 (UT3 (JR.))
n) ~ Gtr ~n .
= 0 and UT3 (JR.)
is the universal cover of
UT3(JR.) /G n which thus has 1f1 equal to the group of covering transformations, and th~ is Crt'
UT3(lR) has the form of an extension
It remains to determine Gn/[G n , G n ]· We write the defining relations for G n additively. A + B - A - B = nC, A + C = C + A, B + C = C + B, so we see that the commutator quotient is presented as
where the normal subgroup is the set of matrices
Cn/[G n , G n ]
= {A, B, C I nC = O} = Z/n EB Z2
o
as required. Let G n , n a positive integer, be the subgroup of UT3(JR.) generated by the three matrices Bn
=
1 0 n0) ,
(0 0 1 0
1
c
Remark 3.3 Using the results of Chapter II we wil~ be able ~o show that these groups G n are the only non-trivial central extenSIOns of Z by Z. Remark 3.4 The fundamental group of the general Riemann surface M; of genus 9 has a presentation 1fl(M;)
= {aI, b1J a2, b2 , ... , a g , bg I [aI, b1][a2, b2]··· lag, bg] =
I}
20
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology 1
where [a, b] = aba-1b- is the commutator. For each integer n E 1,+ there is a central extension 1, <1 G n (g) --------", 1fl (lvIi) where the extension data is [aI, bt)[a2' b2]··· rag, bg] = en and e generates the central Z. As in the case of the torus, these are all the central extensions of 1fl (M;) by Z. Again, they are all topologically distinct.
4. The Pull-back Construction and Extensions
21
Proof. (a) If (91, g2), (gi,g~) E G 1 XC s G 2 then, since both It, /2 are homomorphisms it follows that (919i, 92g~), (911, 9:;1) E G 1 xCs G 2. (a) follows. (b) hI and h2 induce the homomorphism hI' x h2: L----+G 1 x G2 defined on elements by hI X h2(l) = (h 1 (l),h 2(l)). Since !Ihi = hh2 we have im(h1 x h 2) C G 1 xC g G 2. Then e(hl' h 2) is hI x h2 regarded as a homomorphism to G 1 xC g G 2 . It is clearly unique. 0
4. The Pull-back Construction and Extensions In our previous discussion of group extensions we considered triples (N, G, ¢: ) where ¢ is a homomorphism ¢: G---+Aut(N)). Using this data we constructed the semi-direct product N x¢ G as an example of a group extension N <1N x¢ G---+G. However, the more general situation N <1 E----+G gives rise to a map ¢: G ----+ OuteN), not into Aut(N), and the next three sections discuss this more general situation. It turns out that the critical consideration for defining an extension from a map G---+Out(N) is the structure of the center C(N). When C (N) = {I} there is no difficulty, and that is the situation we discuss in this section. Then in §5 we begin the analysis for the case C(N) =j:. {I}. Here there are two questions, existence, discussed in §5, and the number of distinct extensions which we analyze in §6. The key construction we need in this section is given as follows. Definition 4.1 Let G l , G 2, G 3 be groups, h: G l ---+G 3 , 12: G 2----+G 3 homomorphisms then the pull-back G l XC3 G 2 C G l X G 2 is defined as the set of all pairs (91,92) satisfying the condition h(9l) = 12(g2) in G 3 , {(91,92) I h (9t) = 12(92) E G 3 }. The two coordinate projections P( G 1 x G 2----+G i restrict to give maps Pi: G 1 XC3 G 2---+G i and the following diagram commutes
Example
4.4
Let G 1
G2
= 1,/4,
= DB =
G 3 = {1, T} ~ 'll/2, and {a,b I a 2 = b4 = 1,aba- 1
= b- 1 } .
Let !I be the projection and define 12 by setting /2(a) = T, h(b) = 1, where T generates G3. The generators of G 1 xC s G 2 are the pairs (1, b), (T, a) E G 1 x G 2, and we have relations (T, a)4 = 1, (T, a)(l, b)(T3, a) = (1, b3 ). Consequently we ,have a presentation for the pull-back given as
G1
xC s
=
G2
{a,b I a4 = b4 = 1,aba- 1
= b- 1 }.
In particular IG 1 XCg G 2 = 16, and P2: G 1 xC s G 2----+G 2 is onto, so we can think of G 1 XCg G 2 as an extension of 'll/2 by G2. 1
This second example illustrates the following principle: Theorem 4.5 Let h: G 1----+G3 be surjective, with kernel N, then P2: G 1 XCg G 2----+G 2 is surjective with kernel N' isomorphic to N. In other words we have an extension
N'
<1
G1
xCa
G 2---+G 2 = (GI
xCs
G 2)/N'
where N' = (N,l). Moreover, if ¢: G 3----+Out(N) is associated to G b then the corresponding (j/ for G 1 XC s G 2 ->G 2 is ¢/2: G2----+0ut(N). Proof. For g2
E
G 2, we can always find gl
E
G 1 so that h(g2) = !I(gt) since
It is onto. Thus P2 is onto. The kernel of P2 is the set of pairs (n, 1) with It (n) = 1 E G3 . But this is precisely N. The remaining assertion follows Lemma 4.2 a. G 1 x C3 G2 is a group and PI, P2 above are homomorphisms. b. G 1 x C 3 G2 is the unique group satisfying the universal property that if L is a group and there are homomorphisms hi: L----+G i , i = 1,2 so that fIh l = hh 2) then there is a unique homomorphism
= e(hl' h2):
hI
X
h1
so that Pi' e(hl' 11,2)
=
hi) i
= 1,2.
L--------+G 1
XC 3
G2
when we observe that the action of (gl, g2) on (n, 1) is precisely the action of 91, so
o
Example 4.6 Let G 1 = Aut(G), G 3 = Out(G) and 7T' = It: Aut(G)----+Out(G) is the usual projection with kernel Inn(G). Let /2: G 2----+Out(G) be any homomorphism, then we have an extension Inn(G)
22
Chapter I. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
5. The Obstruction to Extension When the Center Is Non-Trivial
23
Lem~a 4.7 The usual surjection c; G -7 Inn( G) with kernel Z (G)) the center of G, znduces homomorphisms
implies P2 e (P, -\) is surjective onto G2. Thus e(p, -\) is an isomorphism preD serving G, G 2 and ¢.
f.L: Aut(G)---+Aut(Inn(G))
Example 4.9 If G is a non-abelian simple group then given any homomorphism, ¢, from G 2 to Out(G), ¢: G 2-+Out(G), there is one and only one extension G
fl: Out(G)---+Out(Inn(G)) so that the diagram
Aut(G)
J.L
---+
Aut(Inn( G))
1·
1· Out(G)
---+
Corollary 4.11 If Sn
XOut(G)
G 2 , the twisting map
¢ = fl· 12: G 2---+Out(Inn(G)) . Proof. Any automorphism a: G-+G must take the center of G to itself. Hence it induces a well defined automorphism &: Inn(G)-+Inn(G). Then f.L is defined by J.L(a) = &. If a(g) = kgk- 1 for kEG, then &(g) = {k}{g }{k- 1 } for all {g} E Inn(G), so J.L takes Inn(G) into Inn(Inn(G)), hence fl exists. Moreover, ~or -\ E Aut(G), {n} E Inn(G) we have -\{n}-\-l = {-\(n)} so fl can be Identified with the twisting map for the extension Inn(G)
This example shows that the existence of an extension G
there
~s
=.{l}, then given any triple (G, G 2 , ¢: G2-70Ut(G))
a unIque extenswn G
Proof.. Since Inn( G) = G it follows that fl above is the identity map. Hence the extension G
suppose there is a second such extension G
G2
4>
---+
i-
6 then Aut(Sn) = Inn(Sn) so Out(Sn)
G with quotient Hand n
i- 6
=
1
then G = Sn x H.
Out(Inn( G))
commutes, and in the extension for Aut(G)
Theo~em 4.~ If Z(G)
Example 4.10 If G = Sn for n and we have
Remark 4.12 A group G with trivial center and Out( G) = {I} is called complete. We will show in the next sections that these are precisely the groups for which any extension with G as normal subgroup must be a product.
In the next section we consider the problem of constructing extensions when N has a non-trivial center.
5. The Obstruction to Extension When the Center Is N on-'frivial We now assume N has a non-trivial center C, we assume given a homomorphism cP: G-+Out(N) and wish to analyze the obstruction to constructing an extension N
1·
Definition 5.1 Let cP: G-70ut(N) be a homomorphism and L: G-+Aut(N) any lifting of cPo Then the obstruction to L being a homomorphism is the two variable map, f: G x G-+Aut(N) defined on elements by the formula
Out( G)
l(g1,92) = L(92)-lL(91)-lL(9192)'
and co~seque~tly ~ homomorphism e(p,-\):E'-+Aut(G) XOut(G) G 2 • Note that -\ IS the IdentIty on G = Inn( G), and p is the composition P2e(P, -\)
Chapter 1. Group Extentlion::;, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
24
5. The Obstruction to Extension When the Center Is Non-Trivial
The map 1 has the following properties 1. 1(1, g) = l(g,l) = 1 for all 9 E G, 2. 1(g1, g2) = 1 for all gl, g2 E G if and only if L is a homomorphism 3. l(gl, g2) E Inn(N) for all gl, g2 E G. We see that (3) is true since ¢ is a homomorphism, and 7r . L = ¢, so
Theorem 5.4 An extension N
Proof. Suppose E exists, then we have the commutative diagram
7r(L(g2) -1 )7r(L(gd -1 )7r(L(glg2))
E
¢(g:;l )¢(gl) -1 ¢(glg2)
1p
1.
G
The following is less obvious.
= (L(g3) )-1 l(gl, g2)L(g3)I(glg2, g3)I(gl, g2g3)-1 l(g2, g3)-1 .
l(glg2,g3) l(g1, g2g3)-1 l(g2,g3)-1
so we can choose 1'(g1,g2) = 1;}l;./lglg2' But the proposition showing the four fold product = 1 in Inn(N) is really a proposition about functions in 2 variables which can be expanded as l;/l;/l9192' Hence
L(g2)-1 L(gl)-1 L(glg2)
l;31l' (g1, g2)l93 l' (g1g2, g3)I' (91, g2g3)-1 l' (g2, g3) -1 = 1
L(g3)-1 L(glg2)-1 L(glg2g3) (L(g2g3)-1 L(gl)-1 L(glg2g3))-1 (L(g3)-1 L(g2)-1 L(glg2))-1
o
and (5.2) follows by direct substitution.
Since im(1) C Inn(N) we can lift f to f: G x G----+N. The indeterminacy of I' is C and it is here that C enters into the discussion. For convenience choose f so that if l(g1, g2) = 1 then 1'(g1' g2) = 1 as well. Thus we have that the class
(5.3)
Out(N)
f(g1,g2)(n) = l;}I;/l9192nl;1~2l91l92
Proof. Expanding out we have l(gl,g2)
if> ----+
Pick for 9 E G some 19 E p-l(g) and define L(g) L(g)(n) = Ignl;l, and
Proposition 5.2 For any triple (gl, g2, g3) E G 3 we have the relation 1
25
f-L(g1,g2,g3) = L(g3) -1 [I' (gl, g2)]1' (g1g2, g3) (1' (gl, g2g3)) -1 (1' (g2, g3))-1
is contained in the center of N, C.
and we have shown the first part of the theorem. Let us now assume that there exist liftings L: G----+Aut(N) and 1': G x G----+N so that the above formula holds. A multiplication, w is defined on the Cartesian product G x N, by setting
w((g, n), (g', n')) = (gg', 1'-I(g, g')L(g')-I[n]n') . We verify that w defines a group structure on G x N. First, since 1'(1, g) =f(g, 1) = 1 and L(l) = 1, we have (1, l)(g, n) = (g, n)(l, 1) = (g, n). Likewise, setting m = L(g)[1'(g-1,g)n- 1] we have (g-1, m)(g, n) = (1,1). Thus it suffices to show the multiplication above is associative. We have
(g, n)((g', n')(g", nil)) = (g, n)(g' gil, 1'-1(g', gl)L(g")-1 [n']n") Remark. Here we have introduced the notational convention that we use throughout the remainder of this chapter, o:[h] = o:ho:- 1 , but see the proof of (5.4) for more details. It follows that we have defined a map f-L: G x G x G----+C depending on ¢, our choice of L lifting ¢ and our choice of
= (gg' gil, 1'-1 (g, 9' g")L(g' gil) -1 [nlf'-1 (g', gl)L(g") -1 [n'] nil) = (gg' gil, 1'-1 (g, g' gil) 1'-1 (g', gl)L(g") -1 L(g')-1 [n]L(g") -1 [n'] nil) On the other hand
= (gg', 1'-1(g, g')L(g')-1[n]n')(g", nil) = (gg' gil, j'-1 (gg', g")L(g") -1 j'-1 (g, g')L(g") -1(L(g') -1 [n])L(g") -1 [n']n") ((g, n)(g', n'))(g", nil)
f'
lifting
J.
26
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
and these two expressions are equal if and only if p,(g 9
(gl,g2,g3) E (i3.
1,
The Dependence of J.L(gl,g2,g3) on
~ote that ~ny tw~ liftings
C:.
f'
)
6. Counting the Number of Extensions
1 for all
2,g3
o
and the Lifting L
!', l' associated to the same L differ by elements
Preclsel~ 1 (gl, g2) 1 -1 (gl , g2) E C for each pair (gl, g2) E G 2. Or eqUIvalentl!, 1 (gl,g2) = f'(gl,g2)h(gl,g2), where h:G x G-+C is an arbitrary functlOn only constrained by the requirernent h(1, g) = h(g 1) = 1. III
,
~h~
Lemn: a 5.5 Let (L, I'), (L,I') be two li/tings associated to the same ¢. Then there zs a two variable map h: G x G-+C with h(l, g) = h(9, 1) = 1 so that
jl(91,92,93)
=
P,(gl, 92, g3 )L(g3) -1 [h(gl, 92)] h(9192, 93 )h(gl, Q2g3) -1 (h(92, g3))-1 where 11 is associated to (L, 1) ar:d jl corresponds to (L, 1'). Next consider the effect of varying the lifting L (g), so that L (g) =_ (Q) (n(g)), where (n(g)) represents the inner automorphism on N induced by the element n(g) EN. Then we easily calculate L
1'(gl,Q2)
= n(g2)-1(L(92)-1[n(gr)]1'(Q1,g2)n(Q192) .
N ow, expan d'mg out 11-( gl, Q2, g3) and doing some obvious cancelling we obtain
fl(gl, g2, g3) = L(g3) -1 [L(g2) -1 (n(gr) -1 )]L(93) -1 [f' (91, g2)]
l' (9192,93)1'-1 (g1, 9293) [n(91) 11'-1 (92,93)
27
In (7.2) we will show that p, is not an arbitrary element in C3 , but rather lies in a certain subgroup Z3 C C3 and thus the triple (N, G, ¢) gives a well defined coset ()(N,G,¢) contained in the quotient Z3/B3. Moreover, this coset is zero if and only if (N, G, ¢) comes from an extension N <J E ------t G with ¢ as the twisting map. Anticipating (7.2) we make a definition. Definition 5.7 The quotient group Z3 / B3 is called the 3 rd cohomology group of G with coefficients in C and twisted by ¢. It is written H'j(G; C). (Here
¢ is
given by the action of G by ¢ after restricting to C.)
Remark 5.8 H~(G; C) is part of a very important family of invariants which we can associate to G, the cohomology groups of G with (twisted) coefficients C which, from Chapter II on form the main topic of this book. However, before we specify the group Z3 exactly we turn to the question of how many distinct extensions we can construct if the class () (N, G, ¢) = O.
Remark 5.9 The constructions above and (7.1), (7.2), which show that Z3 is defined only in terms of C and the action of G on C, shows that as we vary N over all groups with center C, (without varying the effect of restricting ¢ to its action on C) we will always obtain the same group H~(G; C) as our obstruction set, but (7.7) shows that the obstructions ()(N, G, ¢) will run over all the elements in H~ ( G; C) provided that G I- Z /2. In particular when H~(G; C) I- 0 and G I- 7L/2 there are triples (N, G, ¢) which correspond to no extension at all! The simplest cases where this happens are G = 7L/3, C = 7L/3, where, as we will see in Chapter II, H 3 (G; C) = Z/3 and G = (Z/2)2, C = 7L/2 where H3(G; C) = (7L/2)4.
which can be rewritten as
6. Counting the Number of Extensions
3 I / ' G3 -+C} where C l'S "Remark I5.6 fThe ' set of maps C = {. ,.... an a b el'Ian group IS Itse an abelIan group when we set
(I1V)(91,g2,93) = 11(91,92,93)V(gl,g2,g3).
T~us ~e ha~e defined the obstruction as a well determined coset in C3/ B3 WIth Bee the set of maps 1 where l(g1, g2, g3) = L(93)-1 [h(91, g2)]
+ h(glg2, g3)
- h(gl, g2g3) - h(g2, g3) .
In 6.2 we define a very natural notion of equivalence classes of extensions, which amounts to isomorphism of the extension groups together with the extension data. Then in 6.8 we identify the set of equivalence classes of extensions with the quotient of a certain naturally occuring abelian group by an appropriate subgroup. Finally, in 6.11 we use this identification to define the second cohomology group H~(G; C). We suppose that (N, G, ¢) as well as L: G-+Aut(N), f: G x G-+N are given with 11(91,92, g3) = 1 for all (91,92,93) E G 3. Then this gives an extension group which as a set is (G x N) but with a twisted multiplication u(L, 1)( (9, n), (9', n')) = (gg', 1-1 (9, g')L- 1(g') [n]n'). Definition 6.1 We say that the pair (L,1) is equivalent to the pair (L', 1') if there is an isomorphism
28
o.
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology 7:
that 7(1 identity.
SO
X
(G
X
N,f-J,(L,J))~(G
Counting the Number of Extensions
29
Proof. It is formal to check that if we set 7(g,1) = (g,n(g)-l), then 7((g, l)(g', 1)) = 7(gg', 1) = 7(g, 1)7(g', 1). But this is all that is needed. 0
X N,f-J,(U,jI))
N) is the identity and the induced map f: G--,;G is also the Consequently we can assume that L = L' for our classification.
Definition 6.2 Two extensions E, E' are equivalent if and only if there is an isomorphism 7: E --'; E' so that the diagram
X N, f-J,(L,f)) rv (G x N, f-J,(L,jI)) if and only if !'(gl, g2) can be written as a product f(g1, g2)k(gl, g2) where k: Gx G--,;C satisfies the property that there exists A: G--,;C and k(gl' g2) = L(g2) -1 (A(g1) )A(g1g2)-1 A(g2)'
Theorem 6.6 (G
Proof. Suppose E'
7
exists then 7 (
~
7(gg', f- 1(g,g')) (gg', r;,(gg')f- 1(g,g')),
(g, 1) (g', 1))
commutes. while
Remark 6.3 If E is an extension, then E = G X N as a set, and choosing an element 9 in each coset we have (g, l)(g', 1) = (gg', f- 1(g, g')). Moreover, we also have (g,n)(g',n')
= (gg',f- 1(g,g')(g,-l ng')n') = (gg',f- 1 (g,g')L(g,)-1[n]n')
and we see that the two definitions of equivalence above are actually the same.
7(g, 1')7(g', 1) = (g, ~(g))(g', ~(g')) = (gg', j'-1(g, g')L(g')-1(~(g)]~(g')).
On the other hand, since L = L' and r;,(g) E C for all 9 E G, so, comparing, we have 1'(g,g') = L(g')-1[r;,(g)]r;,(g')~(gg')-1f(g,g')· Then, setting A(g) = ~(g) gives the result in one direction. On the other hand if we define 1'(g, g') by the above equation we easily check that the J.L associated to f' is
0
1.
Let C2 be the set of all maps vVe now introduce a series of algebraic constructions designed to give computable invariants which distinguish extensions. At this stage they will appear somewhat ad hoc. However, after the bar construction is introduced in II.3.4, they will appear in a natural context.
h:
GxG~C.
(As before C2 is an abelian group).
3
Proposition 6.4 Any homomorphism 7: (G X N,f-J,(L,J))--,;(G X N,f-J,(LI,jI)) satisfying the condition that 71N = id] and the quotient map f: G--,;G is also
the identity must have the form 7(g, n) = (g, r;,(g)n) where r;,(g) = c(g)n(g)-l with c(g) E C] L(g)(n(g)) = L'(g). Proof. Certainly (1, n)--,;(l, n) and (g, l)--,;(g, r;,(g)) for some r;,: G--,;N. It follows that (1, n) (g, 1) --'; has image (1, n) (g, r;,(g)) which can be rewritten as (g,V- 1(g)[n]r;,(g)). But (l,n)(g, 1) = (g,L(g)-l[n]) = (g, l)(l,L(g)-l[n]) which maps to (g, r;,(g))(l, L(g)-l[n]) = (g, r;,(g)L(g)-l(n)). Comparing, we must have r;,(g)L(g)-1[n] = L'(g)-l[n]r;,(g). 0
8(h) (g1, g2, g3)
= L- 1(g3) [h(g1' g2)]h(g1, g2g3) -1 h(g1g2, g3)h(g2, g3)-1 .
We also denote by B2(G, C) the set of all
h(g1' g2) = (g2)-1(~(gI))~(g1g2)-1 ~(g2) . With these definitions of Z2(G, C) and B2(G, C) we have Theorem 6.8 B2(G, C) c Z2(G, C) and the set of equivalence classes of extensions is isomorphic to Z2 / B2 .
Lemma 6.5 Suppose that
f'(g,g') = n(g')-lL(g,)-l[n(g)-llf(g,g')n(gg,)-l, then] setting r;,(g) = n(g)-1 we have an equivalence (G (G X N, f-J,(U,JI)) where L'(g) = L(g)(n(g)).
Definition 6.7 Let Z2(G, C) be the kernel of the homomorphism 8: C2--,;C , where
X
N, f-J,(L,j)) ~
Proof. h E Z2(G,C) if and only if, setting !'(gI,g2) = f(g1,g2)h(gl,g2) then the f.l associated to f' is identically 1. But these J' represent the set of possible extensions. Now, the previous theorem completes the proof. 0
30
6. Counting the Number of Extensions
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
Example 6.9 Consider the case N = Q8 = {a,b I a2 = b2 = (ab)2}, G = 2/2. To begin the analysis of the extensions we need to note that Aut(Qs) = 54 where the inner automorphisms of Qs correspond to the Klein group, so Out(Qs) = 53. Here, the outer automorphism, t, which switches generators, t: a f-t b, is represented by a transposition, while the automorphism, t, which is given on generators by t(a) = (b), t(b) = ab, represents an element of order 3. It follows that any extension data is conjugate to either (Qs, 7l/2, 1) or (Qs, Z/2, t). There certainly exist extensions here, namely the Cartesian product in the first case and the semi-direct product in the second, E = Z/2 X Qs or E = Qs x t 7l/2. To evaluate the number of other extensions we need only determine f(t, t) E 7l/2 = (b 2 ,1) = C(Qs).
Hence f(t, t) = 1 (giving the product or semi-direct product) or f(t, t) = b2 . We check the associated p,. In general
:31
and so xa is of order 8. In fact, this group is just the quaternion group of order 16, since xxax 3 = xb, and xaxb = 1. Consequently, its center is 7l/2, so it is not isomorphic to either of the two groups above. In the semi-direct product we have again that xa has order 8. But here, x is a non-central element of order 2, and one easily checks that Q16 has no elements of order 2 except for its center. Corollary 6.10 There are exactly 4 distinct groups H of order 16 which contain Q8 as a subgroup. Proof. Q8 must be normal in H so H is one of the extensions above.
o
Remark 6.11 As before, for given G, C and ¢ restricted to C, define 2
p,( t€l , t€2 , t€3) = f (t€l , t€2 ) f (t€\ t€3 ) -1 f (t€l t€2 , t€3 ) f (t€l , t€2 f 03 )-1
H;(G, C) = Z2(G, C)/B (G, C) .
a~d if f(t,;) = b2 , it is easily seen that p, == 1. On the other hand, given h'(t) = b ,th~n h (t,t) = h(t)h- 1 (1)h(t) = 1 and we see that Z2(G,C)/B2(G,C) =
This is called the second cohomology group of G with coefficients in C twisted by ¢. This group counts the number of distinct extensions of N by G with twisting ¢ (on C) if, indeed, there are any at all.
7l/2 wIth f(t, t) = b2 as representative for the non-trivial element. The second extension group in the case of the trivial twisting is given as the quotient 7l/4 x Q8 Z/2 :vhich is ~n example of a central product, a quotient obtained by identifying IsomorphIc subgroups of the centers of two groups. In this case the generator of the 7l/2 maps to (2, b2 ). This group has center Z/4 whereas Qs x Z/2 has center 7l/2 x 7l/2, and these groups are not only not isomorphic as extensions they are not isomorphic. ' Remark. We will see in (II.3.S) that H 2 (71/4; Z/4) = Z/4 where the action of Z/4 on Z/4 is trivial. However, as isomorphism classes of groups there are only two extensions of the form 7l/4<JE----+Z/4, (Z/4)2 and Z/16. Indeed the extension is determined by x4 = yi where x generates the quotient Z/4' and y the central 7l/4, and for Z/16 the two distinct extension classes are x4 = y and X4 = y3.
In the non-trivial case the extension is given as the quotient
Example 6.12 It is direct (but tedious at this stage) to calculate that
Hi~ (71/2 x 7l/2; 7l/2)
=
(71/2)3.
Efficient techniques for finding groups of this type will be given in Chapter 2 II, see especially (II.4.3). In terms of the elements in C the generators for
H?d (71/2 x Z/2; 7l/2) are given as (T, T)
ef:
(T, T)
f---+
1
(TT, TT)
f---+
1
f---+
(TT, TT) f----t 1 bT:
(TT,T)f---+l (T,TT) f---+ 1 (the remaining generators go to zero)
(TT, T) f----t 1 (T, TT) f---+ 1 (the remaining generators go to zero)
(T,T)f----tl
(TT,T) f----t 1 (T,TT)f----tl the 2/2 generated by the element (b of the others. Indeed, we have
2
,
2). This group is not isomorphic to any
1
(TT, TT) f----t 1 (the remaining generators go to zero).
32
Here Qs is the extension group associated to the class bT + br + el. The dihedral group Ds is associated to each of the following three classes el, el + bT, ef + br · Z/4 x 7l/2 is associated to each of the three classes bTl bT, br + bT, and 7l/2 x 7l/2 x 7l/2 is associated to O.
33
7. The Relation Satisfied by J.L(91, 92, 93)
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
L(93) -1 [1(91, 92))f(9192, 93) (f(91, 9293)) -1 (f(92, 93)) -1 . We have Theorem 7.2 Let j.L(91 , 92, 93) E C3 be the obstruction class associated to the homomorphism ¢: G----tOut(N) then (8 3p,) (gb 92, 93, 94) = 1 for all (91,92,93,94) E G4, i.e~, 83 (p,) = 0 when we write C additively.
7. The Relation Satisfied by /-L(gl, g2, 93) Proof. Write In this section we return to the remaining question, the obstruction to the existence of an extension N
L(94) -1 [J (91,92,93)]1(91,92,9394)-1
f(91,9293,94)f(9192,93,94)-1f(92,93,94), and, as in (5.5), recall the similar map which defined the variation in j.L, 82 : C2 -rC 3 , given by the formula
Remark. Generalizing this we let Cn be the set of all maps Gn ----tC and define map
8p,(91, 92, 93, 94) = {L(94)-1[p,(91, 92, 93))P,(92, 93, 94)} {P,(91,9293,94)P,(9192,93,94)-1p,(9~,92,9394)-1} Then note that since p,(91, 92, 93) E C, and I(x, y) E N which centralizes C, we have
L(93) -1 [1(91 ,92))f(9192, 93)(f(91, 9293)) -1 (1(92,93)) -1 = (1(92,93)) -1 (L(93)) -1 (1(91,92)) 1(9192,93) (f(91, 9293)-1,
i.e. we can cyclically permute the elements in the product without changing its value. Hence, we can write the product above as
'i(94)-1 [p,(91' 92, 93)) {f(92, 9394) -11(93,94) -1 L(94) -1[J(92, 93)]1(9293, 94)} {f(9293, 94) -1 L(94) -1 [J(91, 9293)]f(919293, 94) (1(91,929394)) -1 } {(f(919293,94))-lL(94)-1[f(9192, 93)-1]f(93, 94)1(9192,9394)} {f(92, 9394)1(91, 929394) (f(9192, 9394) )-1 L(9394)-1 [1(91, 92)-1]} . Similarly, we can pass elements of N over elements of C. So, for example, we can move the term 1(92,9394) in the last bracket of (7.3) to follow L(94)-1[p,(91,92,93)]. Using these shifts we cancel 1(92,9394) and 1(91,929394), After this the three terms 1(9192, 9394),1(919293, 94) and 1 (9293, 94) pair directly with their inverses and so cancel. The result IS
a
L(94)-1 [p,(92, 93, 94))J(93, 94)-1 L(94) -1 [J(92 , 93)1(91, 9293)1(9192, 93)-1) 8(1(91, ... ,9n,9n+d
=
1 L(9n+ 1l- [1(91, ... , 9n) I where
Ei
(~1 (91, ... , 9,9i+1, ... )") 1(92,· .. , 9n+I)"
= (_1)n+1-i. We have
f(93, 94)L(9394) -1 [1(91,92)-1] At this point recall, from (5.1), that I(x, y) = L(y)-l L(X)-1 L(xy). When we replace 1(93,94) in the expression above by this expansion we get
L(94) -1 [j.L(9b 92, 93))L(9394) -1 [L(93) [p,(91, 92, 93) -1]] but since the action restricted to C is obtained via the lifting L, it follows that the second term is L(94) -1 [p,(91 , 92,93) -1], and the result follows. 0
(This is a direct calculation.) Now, recall the element P,(91, 92, 93) E C3 that we associated to the extension data (N, G, ¢) in (5.3), where the center of N is C, in (5.3).
Consequently, if we define Z3(G, C) = Ker(8 3) C C3 then im(8 ) C Z3(G, C) and p,(91, 92, 93) E Z3(G, C). Thus, the map f1 gives a well defined coset 2
34
35
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
which is the zero element if and only if cjJ is associated with an extension. We now show that the entire group H~(G; C) is needed, that is, every element occurs as an obstruction to the existence of an extension for some N and cjJ: G-+Out(N). A Certain Universal Extension Given a group G then for any set of generators {gj I j E J} there is a surjective map, p, of the free group F(J) onto G, p: F(J)-+G, defined on points by (p(j) =,gj)' Write N(J) for the kernel of p, then N(J) <JF(J)-+G is an extension of N (J) by G. Moreover, such an extension is universal in the sense that if N <J L-+G is any extension by G then there is a homomorphism cjJ: F(J)-+L so cjJ restricted to N(J) has image in Nand ¢: G-+G is the identity. That is, we have a commutative diagram
N(J)
<J
1 N
F(J)
-+
1~
1·
<J
L
G
-+
G
N(J), being a subgroup of a free group is also free. We now study the particular universal extension obtained when J = G - {I} using the technique of §4. The surjection p: F( J) -+G is given by p([g]) = 9 where we denote the generator of the free group corresponding to the element 9 E J by [g]. Also, for any two elements, g, g' in J, we define the class Ig,g'l as the product [g']-l[g]-l[gg']. Clearly, Ig,g'l E Ker(p). Lemma 7.4 N (J) is the free group on generators Ig, g' I, g, g' E J with action defined by the formula [g]-l (19', g"l) = 19", gllg', g" gllg' g", gl-l.
and this belongs to JvI. Hence the original word belongs to the coset [gl'" gr]M. It remains to show that the Ig, gil are free generators. To this end consider the space Y = V "EJ S} which is defined as the union of a collection of disjoint circles obtained b~ identifying all their base-points to a single point *. Now take the (G) covering X -+Y associated to the subgroup M. A maximal tree consists of all the arcs I j starting at *' and covering the identification map I -+SlJ C Y. Then any other arc in X starts at the end-point of one such arc Ig1 and ends at the end point of another I g2 , and is the lift of an I -rS~3' But this implies g3g1 = g2 in G. 0 Corollary 7.5 The map l: G-+Aut(JvJ) defined by
l(g)-l (Ig', g"l) = Ig", gllg', g" gllg' gil, gl-l induces an injection (jJ: G-+Out(M) whenever G F(J) = Aut(M) XOut(M) G.
i:-
Z/2. For this cjJ, we have
Proof. Any automorphism ex: F(J)-+F(J) must certainly take the commutator subgroup to itself, hence it induces an automorphism F(J)/ F( J)' -+F(J)/ F(J)' where F( J)' is the commutator subgroup. But F( J) / F( J)' is the free Abelian group in the set J, and any inner automorphism of F(J) clearly goes to the identity map on F(J)/ F(J)'. Now, note that l(g)-l(lg,g-ll) = Ig-1,gl, hence l(9) on F(J)/F(J)I is not the identity unless, possibly, 9 = g-l, or g2 = 1. Now, suppose, if g2 = I, that there is an h E G so that I, g, h, gh are all distinct. Then l(g)-l(lh,gl) Ig,gllhg,gl-l and, again l(g) is not the identity on F(J)/ F(J)'. 0
Example 7. 6 When G = Z/2 we have that J = {g} and F( J)
Proof. We have
Z. In
2
[g]-l [g', g"][g]= [gr1 [g"]-l[g']-l[g' g"] [g] = ([gr 1 [g"r 1[g" g]) ([gil gr1 [g,]-1 [g' g" g])([g' g" g]-1 [g' g"] [g]) so the subgoup generated by the Ig, g'l is normal in F( J), and the action is as specified. To verify that these elements span N(J), let M = (.. 'lg,g'I"') and consider the cosets U = MUgEJ [g]M. (These cosets are all distinct since M c N(J).) We claim U = F(J). Indeed, let [gr][gr-l]' .. [gl] E F(J) be any word. Then we have
[glg2'" 9r]-I[gr][gr-l]'~' [gl] ([gl'" 9rr 1[gr][gl'" gr-l])([gl'" gr-d- 1[gr-l][gl'" gr-2])
... (glg21) ((glg2t 1 (g21[glD
this case the extension is Z -+ Z-+Z/2 and ¢ is the trivial map. Each Element in H¢(G; C) Represents an Obstruction Theorem 7.7 Assume G #- Z/2. Given an action ¢: G-+Aut(C), and an element {a} E H~ (G; C), there is a group N with center C, a homomor-
phism ¢: G-+Out(N), inducing extension for ¢ is {a}.
¢ on restricting
to C, and the obstruction to
Proof. Let N' = F(J) where J = (G - {1})2, and define an action of G on N' as before by the formula
JG
Chapter I. Croup Extellsions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
8. Associative Algebras and H$(G;C)
Since G i=- 7l/2, the free group N' is non-commutative and hence has trivial center. Extend this action to the product N = C X N' by
L(g)-l[(c,l)] L(g)-1[(l,lg',g"I)]
¢(g -1 (c), 1) (a(g', g", g) , ([(g)) -1 (Ig', g"I))
where a E Z3 (G, C) represents {a}. The fact that this is an action is exactly the fact that (8 3 (a) (g', g", 9 , h) == 1, since this and the formula for ([(g))-1 implies h -1 ( a (g' , g" , g) ) a (g" , g, h) a (g' , g" 9 , h) a (g' g" , 9, h) -1
= a (g' , g" , 9h) .
Next, note that, as we have seen in our discussion of the universal extension we can choose I'(g,g') = f(g,g') contained in N' = Inn(N) as Ig,g'l. But from this
(L(g3)) -1 (f' (g1, g2))1' (glg2, g3) (f' (g1, g2g3)) -1 (f' (g2, g3) )-1
=
(a(gl,g2,g3),1)
and the obstruction class is indeed represented by {a}.
o
8. Associative Algebras and H'¢ (G; C) In this section we review another major algebraic question connected to the groups H~(G; C) that we have introduced in (6.11), the classification of finite dimensional central simple IF-algebras. This section culminates in the definition of the Brauer group, B(lF), and its identification with limIK H~(Gal(IK/lF); IKe) as IK runs over all finite Galois extensions of IF. The major focus of Chapters II - IX will be the structure and some applications of the cohomology of finite groups. But in Chapter X we will combine the two subjects in our solution of the Schur' subgroup problem, which classifies all the division algebras which can occur in the rational group rings of finite groups.
37
Theorem 8.1 A, as above, is a matrix ring Mn(D), where D is a division ring with center IF . Moreover, D and n are uniquely associated to A. Next, as regards subalgebras of A, the Noether-Skolem theorem gives a great deal of information. Theorem 8.2 Let lE and C be subalgebras of A that contain the center IF. If a: lE-+C is an algebra isomorphism which is the identity when restricted to IF then there is (3 E A so that a(b) = (3b(3-1 for all b E lEo
Example : Twisted Group Rings . Suppose that IF c IK is a finite Galois extension, so, from the fundamental theorem of Galois theory, dimJF(IK) = IGal(IK/lF)I = n <
00 .
Define the algebra IK 8 Gal(IK/lF) as the IK-vector space with basis Gal(IK/lF) and multiplication on basis elements given by the rule kgk' g' = kg[k']gg' and extend to linear combinations via the distributive law. Then we have Lemma 8.3 IK 8 Gal(IK/lF) is a central simple IF algebra.
Proof. Associativity is formal, as usual. Now we verify that the center of IK 8 Gal(IK/lF) is IF. Suppose that A = ~ kgg is contained in the center with kg i=- 0 for some 9 i=- 1. Then, for all k E IK we have kA = Ak so kkg = kgg[k] and so we must have k = g[k] for all k E IKe. But this is impossible. Hence kg = 0 for 9 i=- 1 and A E IK. Now commuting with Gal(IK/lF) shows that A E IF. To show that IK 8 Gal(lK/lF) is simple suppose there is a two sided ideal B c IK 8 Gal(IK/lF), and let b E B be a non-zero term, b = ~ bgg, with a minimum number of non-zero coefficients bg . If this minimal number is 1 then clearly B = IK 8 Gal(lK/lF). On the other hand if it is greater than 1 we can assume that b = 1 + ~9:;i:1 bgg with the second summand non-zero. Suppose bg i=- 0 in this second summand. Then there is a k E IK so that k . g[k]-l i=- 1. Now consider w = b - kbk- 1 . Clearly w i=- 0 and w = ~(1 - kg[k]-l )bgg is contained in the ideal B. But the number of non-zero coefficients in w is clearly less than the number for b. 0
Basic Structure Theorems for Central Simple IF-Algebras In fact we have From now on, in this section, A will always denote a simple unitary algebra with center IF where IF is a field. We also assume A is finite dimensional as a IFvector space. The basic structure theory for such algebras A, is well known, see for example, [P], or [Hu, pp. 450-461]. First there is the fundamental Wedderburn theorem.
Theorem 8.4 Under the assumptions above, the central simple IF -algebra IK 8 Gal(lK/lF) is the matrix ring Mn (IF).
Proof. For A = E bgg E K 0 Gal(lKjIF), define .,\: 1K~1K by "\(k) = L: bgg[k]. Clearly, A is an IF-linear map of lK, thought of as a IF-vector space, into itself.
38
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
This correspondence is non-trivial and defines a unitary algebra homomorphism lK 0) Gal (lK/JF) -+ Mn OF). Since lK 0) Gal(lK/JF) is simple this map must be an embedding, and now, a dimension count shows that it is also an isomorphism. 0
Example : Cyclic algebras . Suppose as above that IF C IK and IK is a finite Galois extension of IF. Also, assume that Gal(IK/lF) = '!lIn, a cyclic group with generator T. Then we can define an algebra A(IK, T, "') for any non-zero", E IF as the IK-vector space with basis Gal(IK/lF), multiplication given by Tk = T(k)T, and also Tn = "'. For example A(C, T, -1) = lHI, the quaternions, where T is conjugation. An obvious modification of the proof of (8.3) gives
Lemma 8.5 A(IK, T, "') is a central simple IF -algebra. But these examples are, as the quaternions show, not necessarily just matrix rings. Lemma 8.6 A(IK, T, "')
~
A(IK, T, ",') if there is a k E IK so that
(Indeed, if we replace T by kT then (kT)n above.)
= ",'
where ",' has the form
8. Associative Algebras and H,i (G; C)
vVe write a ® b for the equivalence class of (a, iJ) in A 01F lli\ and every element of A ®IF lli\ can be written as a linear combination 2.:= ai 0 bi . IF acts on A 011' JE by f(a 0 b) = fa 0 b. If al,"" al form an IF-basis for A and h, ... , br are an IF-basis for lB, then, as an IF-vector space A 0JF JE, has a basis consisting of the elements ai 0 bj , 1 :::; i :::; l, 1 :::; j :::; s. A 0lF lB becomes a ring when we define the multiplication by the rule (a 0 b) (c 0 d) = ac 0 bd on generating elements and extend to sums using the distributative law. It is direct to check that this operation is well defined. Here are some standard results about tensor products of cent.ral simple IF-algebras. Theorem 8.7 Let A and JE be central simple IF -algebras, then the tensor product algebra A 0lF JEl is also a central simple IF -algebra. Proof To check that IF is the center of A 0lF JE consider an element A = L ai 0 bi in the center. Write it A = L (Ji ('9 bi where the bi now run over a fixed basis of JE and commute it with elements of the form c ('9 1. Since the bi are independent it follows that dJ i = (JiC for all c E A and (Ji E IF for each i. Consequently A = 10 b, and commuting with elements of JE, we see that b is in the center of JEl. The verification that A 0JF JE is simple is similar to the argument in (8.3). Write the elements in the ideal I in the form 2.:= ()i 0 bi and look for an element with a minimal number of non-zero entries (Ji. Then, using the fact that A is simple we can choose such an element so that it has the form 1 0 bi + ()j 0 bj .
L
j=fi
Now conjugate by units, c 01 and reduce the number of non-zero Remark. The map N: IK--+lF- defined by N(k) = rr~:ol Ti[k] is a multiplicative homomorphism and is generally called the norm map.
For example, the norm map N: C-+lR. has image the set of all positive reals, and hence the number of possible distinct algebras of the type A(C, T, "') where T is conjugation is exactly two, with A(C, T, 1) ~ M2(lR.) and A(C, T, -1) = lHI. Tensor Products of Central Simple IF-Algebras The tensor product A 0JF lB of two central simple IF-algebras is the quotient of the free abelian group generated by the elements of the cartesian product A x lB by factoring out the subgroup generated by the relations
{
(a,b+b') - (a,b) - (a,b') (a + a', b) - (a, b) - (a', b)
(fa, b) - (a, fb)
for all a, a'
39
EA, b, b' EIE, f ElF}
(Jj's.
0
A mild, but useful variant of (8.7) occurs in (8.8). Its proof is the same as that of (8.7). Theorem 8.8 Let A be a central simple IF -algebm, and suppose that IK is a finite field extension of IF, then A 0lF IK is a centml simple IK-algebm. The next result involves the structure of maximal subfields of a central simple division algebra, D. These are the basic tool in analyzing the structure of all central simple algebras. Theorem 8.9 Let D be a central simple IF -division algebm. Let IK be a maximal subfield of D containing IF. Then D0lFIK = Mn(IK) where n = dimJF(IK). In particular, dimlF(D) = n 2 and, iflF C IK c D then IK is a maximal subfield of D if and only if dimJF(IK) = n. These theorems are discussed in standard textbooks. For example [Hul, where these results and proofs are given on pp. 450-463. Another good source is [Pl. A classic reference is [ANT].
40
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
8. Associative Algebras and H~(G; C)
Corollary 8.10 Let D be a central simple division algebra over the field IF. Then there is a finite Galois extension IK of IF with Galois group G = Gal (IKjIF) and a representation of Mm(D), for an appropriate m, as an alA = IK1 EB IK,i12 EB· .. EB OCg
gebra of the form
II gfi
= kR E
(8.13)
1. P(l, 9)
= p(g, 1)
=
1 for all 9 E Gal(IK/IF),
2. 0(<1»(g1,92' 93) = 1 for all triples (91,92,93) E Gal(lKjlF)3.
= I1 gfi =
1
OC
Then A(lK, Gal(lK/lF), <1» is the vector space lKl EB lK92 EB ... EB lK9n where the 9i run over the elements of Gal(lKjlF). A(lK, Gal(lKjlF), ifi) has an IF-linear multiplication A ®IF A-rA defined by the rules
3. 9i k = 9dk]9i'
for appropriate kR E IK.
4. (9i)(9j) = (9i9j)<1>(9i,9j)-1 where (9) is the basis element corresponding
Proof. First find OC 1 with IF c IKl and IK1 maximal in D, and a further extension, IK of IK 1, IF C IK1 C IK, so that IK is a finite Galois extension of IF. Then, if m = de9OC1 (IK) we have that IK C Mm(D) is a maximal subfield, and, by the Skolem-Noether theorem, there are elements 9i E Mm(D) whic.h act on OC as Gal(OCjIF). By the independence of the elements of the GalOls group these elements are independent in Mm(D), regarded as a left OC-vector space. Hence we have constructed an (mn1)2 dimensional sub IF-vector space in Mm(D), where n1 = dimJF(IK1)' By a dimension count this subspace must be the entire algebra. 0
The Cohomological Interpretation of Central Simple Division Algebras Suppose that we have IF C IK c A and IK is both maximal and G~lois over IF. Also suppose that IK is its own centralizer in A. Then we can wnte
where 9i E Gal(OCjlF) = G as above. We associate to this decomposition a map ¢A: G x G-rIK· where OC· denotes the units in IK, by
(gl, 92)
f--t
.9:;1.911 (91g2) EA.
But since 91 19:;1(9192) centralizes OC it follows that the product is in OC and we have our association. Lemma 8.11 The map ¢A satisfies O(¢A)
to 9. This construction defines a central simple IF-algebra as we see from the next result. Lemma 8.14 Assume the triple (OC, Gal (OCjlF), tfJ) satisfies the conditions of (8.12). Then we have 1. A(IK, Gal(IK/lF), tfJ) is a central simple IF-algebra of dimension n 2 over IF where n = IGal(lKjlF) I and the centralizer of lK in A is lK, 2. Any central simple IF -algebra, lB, of dimension n 2 over IF with lK as a maximal subfield has the form A(lK, Gal(IKjIF), tfJ) with P as in (8.12), 3. A(IK, Gal (lKjlF), tfJ) ~ A(OC, Gal(lKjlF), tP) if and only if there is aT: G-rlK· with ,(I) = 1 and <1>(91, 92)tP(91, 92)-1 = 9:;1 ['(91)JT(92)T(9192)-1 for all (gl, 92) E Gal (lK/IF) 2.
A = IKI EB IK.92 EB ... EB IK.9n
= 1.
Proof. The boundary
o( ¢A) (91,92,93)
Definition 8.12 Let P: Gal(IKjIF)2-rIK· satisfy the two conditions
n
where the gi E G and gik = gdklg i , but for each relation R which holds in G, the relation in A takes the form
41
Proof. (1). (8.12.1) assures that 1 E Gal(IKjIF) is the identity for this multiplication and (8.12.2) assures that the multiplication is associative. Next, using essentially the same argument as in the proof of (8.3) or (8.7) one formally checks that the resulting algebra is a central simple IF-algebra. Finally, the same argument can be used to show that OC is its own centralizer in A. (2). The argument here is very similar to the proof of (8.10). There are elements .9i E lB so that .9ik.9;l = 9i[k] for each element 9i E Gal(IK/IF). Moreover, by the independence of the elements of Gal(IKjlF), the .9i are linearly independent in lB, thought of as a vector space over IK. A dimension count now shows that we have
1
.93 [¢A (91,92) l¢A (9192, g3)¢A (g1, 9293) -1 ¢A (92,93)-1 1 1 .93 1{.9:;1 .91 (glg2)}.93 {.93 (9192) -1 (919293)}
Then the discussion preceeding (8.11) shows that <1> = A(IK, Gal(IK/lF), tfJ) .
. {(91g293) -1.91 (9293)}{ (9293) -1 .92.93} after expanding out, and this directly cancels to 1.
o
(3). The elements
gi
are not well defined from their action on
¢A, and JB
42'
8. Associative Algebras and H,i(G; C)
Chapter 1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
lK
c A(lK, Gal (lK/lF) , p)
since giki has exactly the same action on lK as does gi. However, any other element, A, which acts on JK in the same way as 9 satisfies the condition that A-I 9 centralizes lK, and hence, since lK is its own centralizer, this is the only indeterminacy which is allowed. Consequently, given lK, two different choices of the elements 9i E .A lead to the following change in ¢A, ¢~ = ¢A92 1[kg/]kg;lkg192 , or the same,
¢A(gl,92)¢~(gl,92)-1
= 921[k;/]k~lk(9192) . P(91, 92)1]/(91, 92)-1 = g2 1[T(91)]T(92)T(9192)-1
Likewise, if we have then the resulting algebras are isomorphic. Suppose now that A(JK, Gal (lK/F), (jJ) ~ A(JK, Gal(lK/F) , 1]/). Then, by the Noether-Skolem theorem there is an isomorphism tp: A(lK, Gal (lK/lF), (jJ)--rA(lK, Gal(lK/F), 1]/)
43
Comparing Different Maximal Subfields, the Brauer Group To continue further we must compare the algebras A(lK, Gal(IK/lF), p) and A (IK' , Gal(IK' /F), 1]/) for different IK and IK'. To do this we tensor A with Mn(F). By the Wedderburn theorem, this does not change the underlying division algebra, D. But this enlargement does allow us to compare the distinct IK's since we can use the composite field, IKlK', as a maximal subfielcl of A ®IF Mn(F) for an appropriate n. We begin by determining the class ¢A0M n(lF)' Assume that IKl is a degree n Galois extension ofIK so that IK1 is Galois over IF. Since Mn(IK) C A®IF Mn(lF) we see that IK1 is a maximal sub field in A®IF lvIn(F) , and Gal(lKd lF ) is given as a normal extension <J
7r
Gal(IKdOC) - - r Gal(IKdlF)
--r Gal(IK/F)
.
Then, we see that ¢A0Mn(lFf Gal(IKdF)2--+IKi is defined by
so that tp maps lK to lK and is, in fact, the identity when restricted to lK. But then, as pointed out above, tp(9i) must have the form 9~ki for each 0 9i E Gal(lK/F).
¢A0 Mn(lF) (91,92) = ¢A (7r(91)' 7r(g2)) 1 since 921n21911nll(n191n292) = 92 191 (9192) when we make appropriate choices for the lifting classes. We may formulate this in terms of a homomor-
Example. The class ¢A for lK0Gal(lK/F) is ¢A (91, g2) == 1 for all pairs (91,92), and this clearly represents the trivial element in the group H~(Gal(lK/F); lKO). Shortly we will introduce the Brauer group B(F) and describe the relation between these groups H~(Gal(lK/lF),lKO) and B(F). Additionally this twisted cohomology group plays a very basic role in class field theory.
phism
Example. Let A be central simple over the finite field IF. Then any finite extension lK of F is cyclic. Also, it is well known that for finite fields the norm map lKo --+Fo is surjective. Indeed, suppose for explicitness that IFI = pT', IlKl = pT'n. Then a generator for Gal(lK/F) is the map x 1---+ xpr. Hence the norm map has the form x 1---+ xt where t = 1 + pT' + p2T' + ... pT'(n-l). But pT'n -1 = (pT' -l)t, so, in the cyclic group 7L/(pnT' -1) raising elements to the power t is a surjective homomorphism onto the cyclic subgroup 7L/(pT' - 1). It follows that when F is a finite field any central simple division algebra D has a maximal subfield lK with cyclic Galois group. But we have already seen that, in this case, A(lK, T, K) ~ A(lK, T, N(k)K) so A(lK, T, K))~ A(lK, T, 1) = Mn(F) and there are no non-commutative central simple F-a;Igebras. On the other hand the discussion above shows that H~(Gal(lK/F); OC O ) corresponds to the central simple F algebras which contain JK as a maximal subfield so HJ(Gal(lK/F); lKO) = 0 when F is a finite field. '
(8.15) called the inflation map, which decomposes as the composition of two maps, res
first the map H~ (Gal(IK/lF); OCO) --+ H~ (Gal(IKI/lF; IKO) defined via a map on res#: Ci--r(C')i whereres#(f)(91, ... ,9i) =!(7r(9d,···,7r(9i))' It is routine to check that res#6(f) = 6(res#(1)). Consequently, res# maps Zi for the first Ci's to the Zi,S for the second, and similarly for the Bi's. Thus we get a well defined map of quotients. The second map is induced by including IK as a multiplicative subgroup of IKi and has the form i: H~(Gal(IKdF); OCO)----rH;(Gal(OCd lF ); IKi)· Now, suppose that IK and IKf are maximal subfields in A which contain F, both are Galois over F, and both are their own centralizers. Then we have that the composite field IKJKf = OC 1 is Galois over IK, IK' and F. Hence, setting n = dimIK (lK 1) we get that the inclusion A C A ®IF Mn (IF) allows us to use the e argument above on both the representative of A in H~(Gal(OC/lF); OC ) and f the representative in H~(Gal(IK' /F); (IK ) . ) . We get the diagram G
in!
But for a fixed A this is as far as we can go. It can well happen that there are non-isomorphic maximal subfields of A which are Galois and contain F. For example M 2 (Q) contains any quadratic extension of Q as a maximal subfield.
--r
44
C}U.11)tcr
1. Group Extensions, Simple Algebras and Cohomology
and each inflation map in! takes the class corresponding to A to the class corresponding to A Q9lF Mn (IF). N.ow, ~ote that Mr(D)' Q9IF Ms(IF) = Mrs(D), so that passing to limits ~ver lllflatlOn maps we get that every central simple division algebra over IF IS represented by a unique class in the abelian group
We write this limit as H2 (IF) and it is commonly called the second cohomology group of the Galois group of the separable algebraic closure of IF with c?efficients in the multiplicative group of this algebraic closure, (separable ~lllce w.e ~nly use Galois extensions). But we emphasize that, in actuality, it IS the lImIt over finite Galois extensions, IF c lK, of the H2 's above.
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
1
Definition 8.16 The group B(IF) defined above is called the Brauer group of the field IF. Its elements are in one to one correspondence with the distinct isomorphism classes of central simple IF-division algebras.
Remark. If a E B(IF) corresponds to D and f3 corresponds to D' then the class a + (3 corresponds to the division algebra in the simple algebra D Q9 D'. (Check explicit representative classes for the generating classes ¢B, and note that Ms(D) Q9lF lvIr(D') = lvIrs(D Q9lF D').) Remark. A more leisurely discussion of the topics in this section can be found in the book [Pj pp. 250-270.
o.
Introduction "''...
This is one6fthB basic chapters in the book. We start in §1, §2, with preliminaries from topology. The results reviewed in §1 on the basic structure and properties of classifying spaces are essential throughout the remainder of the text. The material in §2 on the Steenrod algebra is not needed in the rest of this chapter and is placed here only for continuity. It is used, however, in Chapter III, §3, and, from then on, more and more frequently throughout the book. Here we only review the basic facts and give Steenrod's axiomatic treatment of the pth power operations. However, in Chapter IV, §7 we will use the cohomology of groups to provide the construction of the Steenrod operations. In §3 we give the definition of group cohomology and devote the remainder of this chapter, with the exception of §8 to basic facts and techniques for calculating these cohomology groups, particularly for finite groups. §8 gives a nice application of these ideas to construct non-trivial outer automorphisms for p-groups. The reader will notice that this chapter is very different from the preceding one, in that it assumes a considerable background in algebraic topology. This is an inevitable consequence of the historical development described in the introduction. However, there are some excellent sources for this material available in the literature, notably [Sp] for general background in homotopy theory and [MS1 for bundle theory. Rather than burden the reader with full details on what we need, we have on occasion opted for introducing material as we go along, hoping that the reader will look into it on his own. The main reason for doing this is to afford a quick route into interesting aspects of group cohomology, avoiding potentially soporific generalities whenever possible.
1. Preliminaries on Classifying Spaces For the purposes of the material in this chapter we will use the following conventions. 1. X a topological space will always mean X is a CW complex, probably a simplicial complex, with the compactly generated topology. (A subset
1. Preliminaries on Classifying Spaces
46
47
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
uc X
is open in the compactly generated topology if and only if U n C is open in C for every compact subset C eX.)
G G . ht t h e ng on , action
l·S
free to act from the left, and we have a fiber preserving G x Prin(E)--tE
2. X x Y will mean the Cartesian product of the spaces X and Y with the compactly generated topology. 3. Let G be a topological group; the unit e E G will always be the distinguished base point. We will also assume that e is regular, i.e. e has a regular neighborhood, but more, we will assume (G, e) is an N DR pair. This means there is a neighborhood N of e and a homotopy of the identity, H t , so that Ht(N) C N, H t ( e) = e for all t, 0 :S t :S 1, and HI (N) = e. This is a technical condition which is trivially satisfied if, for example G is discrete which is the usual condition we consider, or if G is a CW complex. 4. Assuming that G is a CW complex we will also assume that the multiplication f.L: G x G-.G is cellular. Again, this is a technical condition which is trivially satisfied when G is discrete, since then the points of G are the (0) cells of the CW decomposition of G, and there are no higher dimensional cells. 5. Moreover the same conditions will hold for every subgroup H c G which we discuss. Specifically, H will always be a sub-CW complex of G, and the N DR structure will preserve N n H.
which is transitive on fibers. ,Conversely, given a principal G bundle ~--;:E; B and a right action of G on a space F we can form the assocW e -. E B (f ) rv (fg y) rv (f gy) for all 9 E G, Vie have the bundle F Xc - . , ,y , ,. theorem of Milnor,
Next we review the following facts about fibre bundles: 1. Let F-.E' -.1 x B be a fibering. Then E' = 1 x E for some unique fibering F-.E-.B and the map to 1 x B preserves the t coordinate in 1. 7r 2. Given a fibering F-.E-.B and a map f:X-.B, there is an induced bundle, denoted l(E) which is the subspace of X x E consisting of the set of pairs (x, y) with 7r(Y) = f(x), and we have the commutative diagram
[X, Be) = {the set of isomorphism classes of principal G bundles over X}
F
P2
1
Theorem 1.1 Given a group G theTe exists a space Be and a G-bundle with
total space Ee,
·f G-tE-tX is any principal G-bundle oveT X there is a unique so th at 'l !( ) _ E h0111: oto py class of maps f: X - t Be so that f Ee . In particular this implies that Be is unique up to homotopy~r~e·dIf ,~e and B' are clas~ifying spaces for G there must be maps f: Be --t e l~ UClllg Cd g. B' -tBe inducing E G. Then the composite fg: Be-tBe lllduces E e an . G . ·1 I f f · B' -tB ' E so must be homotopic to the identity, an d Slm1 ar y or 9 . e c·. G. B. lIed the classifying space for G and has the followlllg Th1S space e 1S ca basic property
k
:e~~:d
as the Steenrod recognition principle which gives a quite explicit of constructing and recognizing the classifying space for G.
Th
1 2 G-tE-tB is a classifying space if and only if E is con-
tm:t~;l~m1f E-tB is a principal G bundle with E n-connect.ed, th.en the .f:" P f· B-tBe is a homotopy equivalence thTough dzmenswn n. class'l y'lng ma . Remark 1.3 If G is discrete, the exact homotopy sequence of the fibration shows that
----+
G--tEe--tBe ,
_
'Tri(Be) -
X
f ----+
B
Given a fibre bundle F-.E-.B with group G '-+ Homeo(F) , where Homeo( F) is the group of homeomorphisms of F with the compact-open topology, we can form the associated principal bundle, Prin( E), by replacing the fiber F by G and using the same transition functions as previously in measuring the change of product structures as one moves from chart to chart. (Recall that the group G of the bundle is the subgroup of Homeo(F) generated by these transition functions.) Since the transition functions act from
{O
G
i i
>1
=1
.
A space having a non-zero homotopy group in a single dimension is call.ed an Eilenberg-MacLane space. Such a space is unique up to homod~oPY ~qU1~d· t) P G provided the 1menSlon 1S alence and one exists for any ( lscre e grou G· Ab r If the group o or 1 or the· dimension is greater than one but is ~ Ian. 11 d t d is G a~d the dimension n, the Eilenberg-MacLane spac: IS usua y eno ~ K(G, n). We will shortly introduce an ~xplicit constructlOn of the spaces e and Be which will make the constructlOn of the K(G, n) very easy. Corollary 1.4 A model fOT the classifying space for the product G x H of
two groups, Bexf[, can be chosen to be Be x BH·
Chap;,cr II.
Cia~;sifying
Spaces alld
CiOlljJ
1. Preliminaries on Classifying Spaces
CDhOl!lulugy
Proof. A principal G x H bundle over Be x BH is TrG XTrll
Ee x EH ------+ Be x BH but the product of two contractible spaces is itself contractible, so the result follows. 0 The set of homotopy classes of maps X -+Be which is denoted [X, Be] is equal to the set of isomorphism classes of principal G-bundles on X when X is a CW-complex, and the isomorphism is explicit, i'(Ee), the pull-back of the principal G-bundle Ee-+Be is defined as the set of pairs (x, l) E X x Ee for which f(x) = p(l). This is the bundle over X associated to f. In the case of the K(G, n) for n > 1 the set [X, K(G, n)] ~ Hn(x; G) and the isomorphism is again explicit. Note that Hn(K(G, n); G) = Hom(G, G) and if we set I- = {id} then {f} 1-1 J*(I-) E Hn(x; G) gives the correspondence. In particular, K(G,n) x K(G,n) = K(G x G,n) by (1.4), and Hn(K(G x G, n); G) = Hom(G x G, G) for n > 1 so that G is abelian. The element 1-+ E Hn (K (G x G, n); G) is the class corresponding to the sum
We now explicitly construct a model for the classifying space Be. Let O'n be the usual n dimensional simplex. It is given with barycentric coordinates as the set of all n + 1- tu pIes of non-negative real numbers (to, t 1, ... , t n ) with L:~=o h = 1. The n + 1 faces are the sets Fi where ti = 0, 0 :S i :S n. A more convenient coordinatization for our purposes is given by
Proof. Set Ti = to + tl + ... + ti-l' This defines a map from barycentric coordinates to the coordinates in the lemma. Conversely, given 0 :S Tl :::; T2 :::; .. , :::; Tn :::; 1, define to = Tl, ti-l = Ti -Ti-l, 1 < i < n, and tn = I-Tn· This defines the inverse map. 0 Let Ee as follows.
=
U~=o G
x o-n
X
(g, Tl,"" Tn, gl,"" gn)
Gn j(relations) where the relations are given
rv
+
map G x G-+G and, in the correspondence above between [X,K(G,n)] and Hn(x; G) we have that a + (3 is represented by the composition 1.5
X
L1 --+
X xX
c<x/3 --+
if Tn= 1.
Examples 1. G 1. Sl is the Eilenberg-MacLane space K('!L,I), and Ee-+S1 is the usual exp map lR __ Sl where exp(t) = e2Trit . 2. For the group G = '!Ljn we have a free action
S2m-l------+S2m-l
Here the 1\ over the coordinate Ti or gi means that we simply delete that coordinate. This space Ee admits a free G action\~ x Ee--+Ee, which is defined as
(g,(g,T1, ... ,Tn ,gl, ... ,gn))
=
lim cpm m.~oo
(gg,Tl, ... ,Tn ,gl, ... ,gn),
and then, using the relation, to pass to equivalence classes. It is routine to check that this is well defined and G-free in the quotient. Also Ee is contractible. The contraction is given by
Ht((g, Tl,"" Tn, gl, ... ,gn))
defined by T(Zl, ... ,Zm) = (PnZ1, ... Pnzm) where Pn = e / n is a primitive nth-root of 1. The quotient is the Lens space L;m-l. The inclusion s2m-l C s2m+l as the set of points (Zl"'" Zm, 0) commutes with the '!Ljn action and consequently induces an inclusion of quotients L;m-l '---+ L;m+l, so, using the Steenrod Recognition theorem and passing to limits we see that BZ/n = limm~oo L~m-1. 3. We have the principal (Hopf)-fiberings Sl-+S2m+l-+((]p'm, which, as above, under the inclusion s2m+1 '---+ s2m+3 induce inclusions ([]p'm '---+ cpm+l, and passing to limits we have
1-1
= (e, t, Tl + t, ... , Tn + t,g,gl,'"
,gn)
- {t1 tt <- 11. . The quot'lent space
2Tri
BSI
=0
(g, T1, ... , Tn-1 , gl, ... , gn-l)
&+
X
(g, Tl ... , Ti, ... ,[li, gigHl,"" gn) if gi = e or Ti = TH 1 (ggl,T2,T3, ... ,Tn ,g2," .,gn) if T1
K(G, n) x K(G, n) --+ K(G, n).
In the case of K(G,I), [X, K(G, 1)] is the set of conjugacy classes of homomorphisms ¢: Til (X)-+G. In particular [K(G, 1), K(G, 1)] = Out(G), but generally, for G non-commutative [X, K(G, 1)] is just a set.
G
49
on passing to equivalence classes, where t =
~
Be is given explicitly as 00
Be
II o-n
X
Gnj(relations)
o where the relations are those given above, but we set the leading term 9 equal to a single point, pt. Explicitly
50
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology (11"'"
In, gI, ... gn)
rv
(11""
Ti,"" [h, gigHl,···, gn)
if gi = e or Ii = li+ 1 (12, 13, ... , In, g2, ... , gn) if II = 0 (11, ... , In-I, gl,"" gn-l) if In = 1. Of course it must be proved that the quotient map EG---+BG is a fibration with fiber G, but this is a direct inductive construction. There is a natural filtration E& C Eb c E't; c ... covering a similar filtration B& C Bb c B't; c ... where Eb is the image in EG of G x a i x G i . Using the NDR assumption on e E G we obtain the existence in Bb+ l of a neighborhood of Bb in which Bb is a deformation retract Ht(i). Now, assuming we have product neighborhoods Nl EBb, we easily obtain that in this neighborhood H 1 (i)-I(NI) is also a product neighborhood. On the other hand it is evident that B:fI_Bb is a product neighborhood (there are no identifications in this region and the original map G x a i x G i ---+a i x G i over it was a product). It follows that Bb+ l has an open covering by product neighborhoods, and the inductive step is complete. The above construction has very good naturality properties. First, if !: G ---+ H is a (continuous) homomorphism then the map E f defined by Ef(9, 11,·'" In, gl,···, gn) 1-+ (J(g), 11,···, In, !(gl), ... , f(gn)) evidently preserves relations and induces maps
so that Efg = EfEg, Bfg = BfB g for compositions of homomorphisms. It can also be verified that BGxH = BG X B H , and, if H <J G is a normal subgroup then the natural map BG---+BG/H is a fibration with fiber B H . The following theorem of N. Steenrod gives one of the most important properties which distinguishes this construction of the classifying space from others.
Theorem 1.8 Let G = H x K, a (compactly generated) product of two groups, then the two projections PI and P2 give a homeomorphism BpI X B p2 : BG---+BH X B K . Moreover, let A C G be a central subgroup. Then the homomorphism A x G---+G, (a, g) 1-+ ag, induces a map of classifying spaces BA x BG-+BG which is (1) natural, (2) if G = A makes BA into a commutative topological group, (3) if G =I- A makes BG into a B A -space.
Proof. We construct the inverse map, ¢: BH x BK---+BHxK by
{(h, ... , tn, hI, ... , hn)X(/I, ... , 1m, k l , ... , k m )} 1-+ ()\l, ... ,}.n+m, el ,. " ,en+m ) where the AI,"" An+m are the terms in the set (tl,"" tn, II, ... , 1m) arranged in increasing order, and
51
1. Preliminaries on Classifying Spaces
ifAi=ts, if Ai = IV
.
This identification is ambiguous only when ti = Ij for some i, j. But in this case, since (e,kj)(hi,e) = (hi,e)(e,k j ) the equivalence relations remove the ambiguity. Moreover, when we decompose the product an x am into regions where a given (n, m )-shuffie in Sn+m puts the terms (tl,'" ,tn, II, ... ,1m) into ascending order, this gives a triangulation of the product where the map is continuous on the interior of each simplex. Since they agree on faces it follows that the map is continuous on BH x BK-+BHxI<· It is formal to check that this is the inverse map to BPI x B p2 ' The remainder of the claims in 1.8 follow by expanding the composition Bx
¢ . B x: BA
X
BG ---+ B A x G
---+
BG on points.
0 l
Theorem 1.9 Let f: G---+G be an inner automorphism, f(g) = kgk- for some kEG, then the induced map B f: BG---+Bc i8 homotopic to the identity.
Proof. We construct the homotopy to the identity explicitly. Let
H t ((/1, .. · ,/n,gl," .,gn)) = (11,"" Ti, t, THI,"" Tn, f(gl), .. · f(gi), k, gHl,"" gn), 1
where Ii ::::; t ::::; IH1. The only points to check are at the boundaries Ti = t, or t = IH1. In the first case note that kg i = kgik-Ik so coming from below, Le. for t < Ii gives k, gi and as t becomes equal to Ii this is set equal to kg i via the first relation. Similarly, by the remark above, if t approaches Ti from above. There is no difference at the upper point. Consequently, H t is continuous as a function of t. Clearly, Ho = id, and HI = Bf. 0 When A is a discrete abelian group we have from (1.8) that B A is an abelian group as well. Moreover, because it is a CW -complex it satisfies the N DR condition, and, because the multiplication Bx . ¢ is C~V is cellular, we can iterate the construction obtaining B BA = B~, B1, etc. Note that BA is a K(A, n). Thus we have constructed the K(A, n)'s for A any discrete abelian group. The discussion to this point allows us to make an observation which will be very useful later. The n-fold symmetric product spn(x) is the quotient of the n-fold Cartesian product, xn by the action of the symmetric group, Sn, by permuting coordinates. Thus the points of spn(x) can be thought of as unordered n-tuples ErXi of points in X. Given any point Xo E X there is an inclusion C xo : X '--+ spn(x), X 1-+ 'L?-l Xo + x and we have
Lemma 1.10 Let A be an Abelian group, then
is onto for X any CvV complex and n ;:.:: 1.
.')2
2. Eilenbcrg-MacLane Spaces and the Steenrod Algebra A(p)
Chapter Ii. Classifying Spaces alld Uroup Coholllology
Proof. We use the equivalence between Hn(x; A) and [X, K(A, n)] and choose BA as our explicit model for K(A, n). Let a: X -+BA represent a; then, since BA is path connected for n 2: 1, we can suppose that a(xo) = e, the unit of B A. Now, since BA has an abelian multiplication we can extend a to spn(x) by L:'~ Xi f-+ L: a(Xi), so we have factored a through spn(x).
o Let H c G be any subgroup. The H-orbit space of Ee is given as pt XH E e , and the projection Ee-+pt XH Ee is a principal H-fibration with contractible total space when H is closed. Consequently pt x H Ee is a model for B H. On the other hand the projection pt x H Ee -+ Be is a fibration with fiber G / H. We have shown Lemma 1.11 Up to homotopy there is a fibration Bi
G/ H ---+BH ---+ Be where i is the inclusion H
C
G for any closed subgroup H of G.
While we are on the topic of alternate constructions, here is one which is often very useful. Let G be given as a semi-direct product
G = H
Xa
53
2. Eilenberg-MacLane Spaces and the Steenrod Algebra A(p) The goal of this section is to situate the cohomology of finite groups within homotopy theory. The main connection comes from the Steenrod Algebra, which arose from considerations made by Steenrod regarding the symmetric groups, though the operations which generate the Steenrod algebra originally appear in the work of M. Richardson and P.A. Smith, [RS]. The main reference is [SEl; in Chapter IV §7 we describe the construction and its main properties. Some of the results here serve only as an indication of the importance of Steenrod operations in algebraic topology; we hope the interested reader will pursue them further. Definition 2.1 A cohomology operation a E O{i,j, A, B} for 0 ::; i,j and A, B discrete abelian groups, is a natural transformation
defined on the category of CW-complexes and continuous maps f: X -+ Y. Recall that natural transformation means that the following diagram commutes for all f as above,
K
so H is normal in G, K is a subgroup of G and the projection p: G-+G / H sends K isomorphically to G / H. Then K acts on H via the inner automorphism action in G. By naturality this induces an action of K on BH, and we have the associated bundle
Hj(X;B) . The set O{i,j,A,B} becomes an abelian group when we define (a+,6)(x) = a(x) + ,6(x), \Ix E Hi(X; A) and we have
Theorem 1.12 The bundle above B H
XK
EK is a model for Be when G is
a semi-direct product H x a K. Proof. There is a bundle EH x EK-+BH
EK, with fiber G defined by using the G action defined as follows. For each g E G write g = (h, k) (this is unique), and set g(XH, YK) = (h· Ek(XH), k· YK) where the map Ek is the XK
conjugation map discussed above. We easily check that this action is free, the quotient is the space B H X K E K above, and the projection is a fibering. 0 Since EH x EK is contractible the result follows.
Remark More details on these constructions can be found in [Mac], [M3], [M4] and [Ste2].
Lemma 2.2 The group O{i,j,A,B} ~ Hj(K(A,i);B).
Proof. First, given x E Hi(X, A) there is a unique homotopy class of maps x X -+ K(A, i) so that the class l- rv id E Hi(K(A, i); A) = HomA(A, A) maps back to x, x*(l-) = x. Thus x*(a(l-)) = a(x) and a is entirely determined by its value on l-. Conversely, given a E Hj (K(A, i); B) we can define a(x) = x*(a).
o
Remark. Here if j > i then the operations are identically zero, but the same definitions hold for operations in a generalized cohomology theory, and here there need be no such constraint on the operations. An operation a E O{ i, j, A, B} need not be a homomorphism. Indeed, we have the factorization of a(x + y) in terms of the composition of maps
54
2. Eilenberg-MacLane Spaces and the Steenrod Algebra A(]J)
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology .:1 xxy.. x X~XxX~B~ xB~ ~Bi .. A A A,
Axioms for the Steenrod Algebra A(2) There are elements 8qi, i 2: 0 in OS( i, Z/2, Z/2) which are uniquely specified by the following axioms. 1. SqO = id, 2 2. If dim(x) = n then Sqn(x) = x , 3. If i > dim(x) then Sqi(x) = 0, j 4. (Cartan formula) Sqi(x U y) = ~~ Sqj (x) U Sqi- (y). As a consequence of these axioms one can show that Sr/ is the Bockstein associated to the exact sequence Z/2-tZ/4-l-Z/2, and [Car] the Adem relations R( a, b)
since, for the fundmental class, we have I- I---' I-®1+1®I- I---' x+y. Consequently a(x + y) = L: A(X) U X(y) + Ext - terms if x *(a) = L: A ® X + Ext - terms. However, there is a circumstance when an operation must be a homomorphism. 2.3 A sequence of opera~ions as E O{s, i+s, A, B}, s = 0, 1, ... , called stable if as(O"(x)) = (-l)tO"(a s_dx)) where 0" is the suspension isomorphism ~efinition
IS
(J"
H*(X;A)-----+H*+1(EX;A) ,
~/~
and EX = 8 1 /\ X = 8 1 x X/(e x X U 8 1 x *). Such a sequence as is said to have degree i, and the set of such operations of degree i is denoted
S qa S qb
=
OS(i,A,B).
L
°
. .
(b - 1 -. a - 2)
J) S qa+b- j S q.i
for 0 < a < 2b. Moreover, A(2) is the graded algebra generated by the Sqi su b ject only to the relations SqO = 1 and the Adem relations R( a, b). The first few relations have the form Sql Sq2 = Sq3, Sql Sql = 0, Sq2 Sq2 = Sq3 Sql = Sq1 Sq2 Sql. One can prove that a minimal generating set for A(2) is {I, Sq1, Sq2, ... , Sq2i , ... }. Moreover, a basis for A(2) as a vector space over Z/2 is the set of monomials SqI = Sqil SqiZ ... Sqi,., I = (il' i 2, ... ,iT) with i j 2: 2i j +1 for all j = I, ... ,r - 1. These are called the admissible monomials. The first few are SqO, Sql, Sq2, Sq3, Sq2,1 = Sq 2Sql, Sq4, Sq3,l = Sq3S q l.
A stable operation is always a homomorphism since LJ: EX -l-EX x EX factors through the wedge EXv EX c EX x EX up to homotopy. Moreover the composition of stable operations is defined in an evident way provided only that the coefficients fit together. In particular the stable operations of type OS(*,A,A) form an algebra. Steenrod used methods from group cohomology [SE] to construct operations 8qi(j) E O{j, j + i, Z/2, Z/2}, i 2: 0 which together form, for each i, a stable operation, denoted 8qi, as well as
Axioms for the Steenrod algebra A(p)
(3(j) E O{~,j + 1,71(p,Z/p}, pi(j) E O{j,j +2i(p-1)/L/p,Z/p} for odd pnmes p. Agam the (3(J) give a stable operation denoted (3 and called operation~
There are elements pi E OS(2(p - l)i, Zip, Zip) for p an odd prime which are uniquely specified by the following axioms. 1. po = id, 2. If dim(x) = 2n then pn(x) = x P , 3. If 2i > dim (x) then pi(X) = 0, 4. (Cartan formula) pi(x U y) = ~~ pj(x) U pi-j(y). Again, as a consequence of these axioms one obtains Adem relations
the mod(p) Bockstein. It is the boundary map in the coefficient sequence associated to the exact sequence of coefficients Z/P-l-Z/p 2-l-Z/p ,
... -----+H*(X; 7l/p2)-----+H*(X; Zip) ~ H*+1(X; Z/p)-----+H*+1(X; Z/p2)-----+ .... Also, the Pi(j) give a stabl~ operation denoted pi. Composing these operations gives rise to an alge.bra of stable operations, the Steenrod algebra A(2) generated by the 8~~'s for p = 2, and the Steenrod algebra A(p) generated by (3 and the p~ when p is odd. The construction of these operations is intimately connected with the cohomology of (finite) groups, and we will give the details in Chapter IV, §7, but for now we record the axiomatic descriptions of the A(p) first given in the book by Steenrod and Epstein [SE].
55
pa pb
1 I I
= [~( _l)aH ((P - l)(b - t) -
°
1)
pa+b-t pt
a - pt
if a < pb. If a :::; pb then
pa{3pb =
[~(_l)aH((P-l)(b-t))j3pa+b-tpt
°
a - pt
[(a-1)/p]
-\-
I
~
°
(_l)aH-l ((P - l)(b - t) a - pt - 1
1)
p a+b- t j3pt.
56
Chapter
n.
Cla,ssifying Spaces and C;roup Cohomology
As above A(p) is the graded algebra generated by {3 and the pi, subject only to the relations po = id, (32 = 0 and the Adem relations above. Again there is a basis for A(p), consisting of admissible monomials. Let
I
=
(EO, iI, E1, i2, . , . , iT, ET )
57
3. Group Cohomology
,
with Ei = 0 or I, then I is admissible if i j 2:: pi j +1 +Ej+1 for each j 2:: 1. Corresponding to an admissible monomial is the element of A(p), /y. o pil ... pi (3f.r , and these monomials, together with pO = 1, form a basis for A(p) over Z/p. r
The Cohomology of Eilenberg-MacLane Spaces We need the following definition in order to give the structure of the cohomology rings of the Eilenberg-MacLane spaces. Definition 2.4 An exterior algebra is a graded algebra of the form
IF (e1, ... , eT , ••• ) subject only to the relations eiej = -ejei for all i, j, and when the characteristic of IF is 2, also the relation = O. Generally the generators are odd dimensional.
e;
The Steenrod operations described above generate O{ i, j, Zip, Z/p} when we add in cup products. Precisely, we have the following theorem ofH. Cartan and J.P. Serre, [Se1]. Theorem 2.5 1. Let p = 2, and suppose that I is an admissible monomial for A(2), then the excess of I, e(I), is i 1 - i2 - ... - iT' In these terms H*(B Zj2 ; 71./2) is the polynomial algebra on generators SqI (/"n) where I runs over all monomials of excess less than n. 2. Let p be an odd prime and suppose that I is an admissible monomial for A(p), then the excess, e(I), is i 1 - (p - 1)(i2 + ... + iT) - L:~ Ej. In these terms H*(B zjp ; Z/p) is the tensor product of a polynomial algebra Z/p[·· . ,pI (in),"'] when dim (pI (in)) is even, and and exterior algebra E(-··, pI (in),"') when dim(pI (/"n)) is odd, as I runs over all admissible monomials with e(I) < n. Examples. We have that H*(K(Z/2, 1);IF/2) is the polynomial algebra on a single one dimensional generator, IF 2 [/.,], while
The Hopf Algebra Structure on A(p) The Cartan formula defines a homomorphism of algebras c: A(p)->A(p) 0 A(p), pi I-t L:~ pj 09 pi- j, {3 I-t {3 09 1 + 1 0 (3. This gives A(p) the structure of a cocommutative, coassociative Hopf algebra. The basic facts in the theory of Hopf algebras are developed in section 2 of Chapter VI, VI.2, and the exposition is independent of the rest of the book. Among the most important elements in a Hopf algebra are the primitives, those B with c( B) = B 091 + 109 B. Such elements are characterized by the property that B( a U b) = B(a) U b ± a U B(b). They correspond to generators of the dual algebra A(p)*. Milnor analyzed the structure of A(p)*. His result [Mi] is Theorem 2.6 1. There are primitives Qi in dimension 2i -1 in A(2), Qi and A(2)* = 71./2[6, ... , ~i,."] where ~i is dual to Qi.
=
[Sq2
i
1
-
,
Qi-l],
2. Let p be an odd prime. There are primitives Qil Si, in dimensions 2pi-1 and 2(pi - 1) respectively. Moreover, A(p)* is the tensor product of a polynomial algebra on generators Xi dual to the Si and and exterior algebra on generators Ti dual to the Qi'
For A(2) the Qi are characterized by the fact that they are primitive 2i so Qi(a U b) = Qi(a) U b + a U Qi(b), and the fact that Qi(e) = e when dime e) = 1. Likewise, the Qi for p odd are characterized by the same formula for cup products and the fact that Qi(e) = (3(e)pi for dim(e) = 1.
3. Group Cohomology Let A be an Abelian group, then we define H*(G; A)
=
H*(Be; A)
and call these groups the cohomology groups of G with (untwisted) coefficients A. If H eGis a subgroup, the inclusion B H ' - t Be induces a map in cohomology (res~)*: H*(G; A)--tH*(H; A) called restriction. Lemma 3.1 Let Ne(H) be the normalizer of H in G, then there is an action of Ne(H)/H
H* (Hi A) Wa(H).
= We(H)
on H*(H;A) and im
[(res~r]
is contained in
58
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
3. Group Cohomology
Proof For 9 E Nc(H) define a map rg: BH-+BH by (*)
rg ((tl, ... ,tn ,h1, ... ,hn ))
Clearly
rg . rgl = rggl
80 :
M, 80
(2:= Bi 1mJ = ~ Bimi .
Next, let our new module be the kernel of 00 and apply the same construction above to construct a surjective map 0~:C1-+ker(00). Then, including ker(oo) c Co = Us Z(G)mi defines 01 as the composition of inclusion with o~. Now, we can repeat this construction to obtain a resolution. More generally, we can require the modules in definition 3.2 to be projective (i.e. direct summands in a free module); all the subsequent constructions will work equally well, as the reader can verify.
so these maps fit together to give an action map
and consequently an action on cohomology rings
r; = id if 9 E H
---+
s
= (tl, ... ,tn ,gh 1g-l, ... ,9hng- 1).
Since rg ~ id for 9 E H, (1.9), it follows that above factors through
Il Z( G)mi
59
and the action
We extend rg to Be for 9 E Ne(H), by the same formula (*), and for each 9 E Ne(H) we have a commutative diagram
Example 3.4 An explicit resolution of Z (with the trivial action) is obtained by taking the cellular chain complex of Ee, since Ee is contractible and G acts freely and cellularly. Explicitly, the cells of Ee have the form 9 x (In X (91, ... , 9n) which we write as 91911921·· ·19nl· Consequently, Cn can be given as UZ(G)1911" ·19nl where the (91, ... ,9n) run over all n-tuples of elements of G with no 9i = e. The boundary map 0 is given by
0(1911·· ·19nl)
= 911921·· '19nl+ n-1
r;
Consequently (res~)* . r; = (res~)*, but rg is obtained from an inner automorphism on Be, so is homotopic to the identity, and the equation above becomes for all
Q:
E
o
H*(G; A).
Definition. The group Ne(H)/H = We(H) is called the Weyl group of H in G. There is an algebraic reformulation of the definition of group cohomology which allows us to generalize to the case where G acts in some non-trivial way on the coefficients A.
with the understanding that when 9igi+1 = e that term in the summand 1 is set equal to O. Thus 0(1911921) = 911921-191921 + 1911, but 8(191191 1) = 1 1 91191 1+ 191 1. This resolution is commonly called the bar construction and is written B(71). It is not hard to extend it to a general resolution of a (left) 7l(G)module M provided M is a free 7l-module. Set B(M) = B(71) 0z M and define the boundary o( 1911 ... 19n 1m) as above, except the last term in the formula above is replaced by
Proposition 3.5 Let ¢: M
-+ N
80
80
81
82
8i
O+--M +--Co +--C 1 +--C 2 +--··· +--Ci +--···
82
81
82
O+--N +--1)0 +--1)1 +--1)2+-- ...
are two resolutions of Mover 7l(G). Then there are 7l(G)-maps ¢i: Ci -+1)i, the dia9ram
o ::; i < 00, so o +--
M
o
N
where each Ci is Z( G)-free. Remark 3.3 For any Z( G)-module M we can construct a resolution. Indeed, take any set S of Z(G)-generators for M, mI, ... , mi,'" and define a map
81
O+-- M +-- Co +-- C1 +-- C2+-- ... 80
Definition 3.2 Let M be a Z( G)-module, then a resolution of Mover G is a long exact sequence of Z(G)-modules and Z(G)-module maps Oi,
be a Z( G) -module map, and suppose
80
1· +--
+--
80 +--
1)0
60
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
commutes. 1I1oreover, given any other choices cPS, cP~, ... making (**) commute there are maps J-Li:Ci-+Vi+l, i = 0,1,··· so that 8i+lf-Li + f-Li-18i = cP~ - ¢i, 0 :::; i < 00. Remark. A map p,: C1 -+Vi+l with 8f-L+p,8
=
i -9 is called a chain homotopy.
PlOof· To begin the definition of cPo choose a basis e I, ... , er , ... for Co. Since 80 is onto, for each e'i we have ¢80 (ei) = Ai is in the image of 80 in the second resolution. Say Ai = 80 (f·i). Then define ¢O(ei) = fi and extend to a Z( G)-module map by freeness. Assume that ¢j defined so as to satisfy 8j ¢j = ¢j-18j for j < k. Choose a basis el, ... , er , ... for Ck and note that 8[cPk-1 (8e r )] = ¢k-2( 8 2er ) = 0 by assumption. Thus, by the exactness of the second resolution, cPk-l (8k (e r )) is contained in the image of 8k :V k -+V k- 1. Specifically, let 8k(fr) = ¢k-1 (8ker), define ¢k(e r) = ir and extend to a map (Pk by Z(G) freeness. To construct the maps f-Lk set f-L-l: M -+Vo to be the O-map, and assume f-Lj defined so that 8 f-Lj + J-Lj -1 8 = cPj - ¢j for all j < k. Then we proceed substantially as above. Let el, ... er , ... be a basis for Ck . We have
so.
3. Group Cohomology
Remark 3. 'l Even if Z(G) acts non-trivially on A we often write H*(G; A) or sometimes H;(G; A) when we want to be explicit about the twisting for Extz(o)(Z, A). These groups are called the cohomology groups of G with (twisted) coefficients A. Similarly we can define the homology groups of G with coefficients in A as H*(G, A) = Tor~o(Z, A) = H*(C*(EG) ®o A). However, it turns out that nothing new is obtained using homology instead of cohomology. In fact, later we will see that homology and cohomology can be glued together to form a Z-graded theory, known as Tate cohomology. Example 3.8 Let G = Z/n, and set I c Z(G) equal to the kernel of the augmentation map E: Z(G)-+Z defined by E(2:niTi) = 2:ni. A Z-basis for I is given by the n - 1 elements T - 1, T2 - 1, T3 - 1, ... , T n- 1 - 1. But Ti_l = (Ti-l+T i - 2+ . . '+I)(T-l), so, as a module over Z(G), I is gener~ted by T - 1. It follows that the map 8 1 : Z( G) -+ I defined by 81 (2: niTt) = 2:niTi(T - 1) is surjective. Note that 8 l (T r- 1 ) = (Tr - 1) - (Tr-l - 1) so that the images of 1, T, ... , T n - 2 are independent over Z. On the other hand 81 (1 +T +T2 + ... +Tn - 1) = O. It follows that the submodule of Z(G) generated by Eo = 2: EO g generates the kernel of 80 , and, moreover, this kernel is a single copy ~f Z. In particular, since gEe = Eo for all 9 E G it follows that the kernel is a copy of the trivial Z( G) module. But this is the situation we started with. Consequently, we can iterate and a resolution of Z over Z( G) is given as T-l
€
f-Lk- 18(er ) Consequently, set f-Lk(e r ) prooE
-
cP~(er)
= - fro
+ cPi(e r ) =
8k+1(fr) .
This completes the inductive step and the 0
Let A be any Z( G)-module. We define
Ext~(G) (!vi; A) as the
Eo
Z-- Z(G) +-Z(G) -- Z(G)
and
ith
61
T-l +- '"
Passing to Ext groups we have, for example Exti(Z/n)(Z, Z/n)
= H*(Z/n; Z/n) = Zjn
for all * ~ 0 since Hom(Z( G), Z/n) = Zjn and (T - 1)* becomes zero here while Eo becomes multiplication by n. On the other hand, if A = Z((n) with action T((}) = en(} where en is a primitive nth root of unity. Then we find i even i odd.
cohomology group of the cochain complex More generally, for any Z(Zjn) module A we have
for any resolution of M. From the proposition above, these groups are independent of the particular choice of resolution.
Remark 3. 6 Ext~(O) (Z, A) = Hi( G; A) if Z, A are both given as trivial Z( G)modules, since, as we have seen the cellular chain complex of Eo is a suitable resolution of 7l while Homz(c) (C*(E c ),A) = Homz(C*(Bc),A) if A is a trivial Z( G)-module. Consequently, these Ext groups are true generalizations of the cohomology of G. They are contravariant as functors of G and M, but covariant in A.
Hi(G; A) =
MO M O / Ez/n(M)' { ker(Ez/n)/(T - I)M
i = 0 i even i odd.
We now consider a method to derive resolutions from a free presentation of a group, i.e. an exact sequence
N
F(X)--+G--+l
62
3. Group Cohomology
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
where F(X) is the free group on a set of generators indexed by the set X. Passing to group rings we have the corresponding exact sequence
Now we describe the kernel R in the map above. Lemma 3.10 If N
O---tR---tZ(F(X))---tZ(G)---tO.
R
Our first object is to describe the two sided ideal R. First, we denote by I(G) c Z(G) the augmentation ideal. That is I(G) is the kernel in the augmentation map
63
F(X) is freely generated by {y =
E Y},
then
ker(7r: Z(F(X))--rZ(F(X)jN))
is a free left (right) Z(F(X)) module with generators {y - 1 lyE Y}. Proof. As before, define
t:: Z(G)---tZ
¢:
II Z(F(X)){y}--rR
defined by t:(~ nigi) = ~ ni. Note that t: is a ring homomorphism so Ker(t:) = I(G) is a 2-sided ideal in Z(G). As a Z module, I(G) has a basis consisting of exactly the elements (g - 1), as 9 runs over the elements of G. In the case of the free group F(X) it turns out that I(F(X)) is free as a left Z(F(X)) module on generators corresponding to the elements in the set X.
by ¢(~ (i{yd) L (i(Yi - 1). We need to construct an inverse. For each coset, E F(X)jN choose a, E ,. Then, given ( E R we can write
Lemma 3.9 Let {x} E I(F(X)) = x - 1. Then
with Ui
I(F(X)) ~
yEY
E
N, and this representation is unique. We can re\vrite this as
Il Z(F(X)){x} xEX
as a left Z(F(X)) module, where the isomorphism ¢:
so ~i mi,j = 0, and ( = ~aj aj ~ mi,j(ui,j - 1). Thus suppose there is a relation
II Z(F(X)){ x }---tI(F(X)
¢ is onto R.
Now,
xEX
Proof. ¢ is onto. Indeed, if ai = X~1 ... x~r then set 8(a·) ="~ j3·{x·.} t1 tr t L.,.. J = 1 J tJ ' = +1 and (3J' = _X~1 ... x~j 'If E· = -1 where j3j = X;11 ... X;.j-1 if E 3 -1 J '1.1 tj ) . We have directly (e.g. induction on length) ¢(6(ai)) = ai -1. For example 8(x 11 x2) = x 11 {x2} - xll{xd
in R, with (i E Z(F(X)). Then, as above
L a,j L mi,j,kUi,j,k(Yk - 1) with the Ui,j,k
E
L
(L mi,j,kUi,j,k) so
Z(F(X)){x}
xEX
and the result follows.
~a ~ I j ~m' ~ t,J,'kU"k t,),
o o
Lemma 3.11 If A and B are left ideals ofZ(F(X)), freely generated by sets
6·¢({x}) = 6(x-1) = {x}.
8 . ¢ is also the identity and the lemma follows.
= 0,
j
by ~etting 6(ai - 1) 8(ai), then 6(j3(ai - 1)) = 8(j3ai) - 8(13) so 8 is a Z(F(X)) module map, and ¢8 = id. Now, we check by direct calculation on the {Xi} that
Hence,
0
N. But by the first lemma this implies
and ¢8(xllx2) = xll(x2-1)-xll(xl -1) = x 11 x2-1. Note, in particular that 8 has the property 8(aiY) = ai(8y) + 8(ai)' Next, extend 8 to
8: IF(X)---t
=
i,k
o
{ai}, {j3j}, and A is two sided then AB is freely generated as a left ideal by the elements {aif3 j }. (Sim'iliarly for right ideals, provided that B is two sided.)
64
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
3. Group Cohomology
Proof. AB is generated by all elements DiA{3j, A E Z(F(X)). But DiA =L AkDk, by assumption, so the set {Di{3J'} does generate AB. Now, suppose we have
I: Ai,j Di{3j
=
Hence, the resolution has the form
0,
L::
t-l
then, by the independence of the {3j we must have
n
1
n
2
where Lt = t - + t - + ... we recover the usual resolution.
~A"D'=O L....; t,J t
+ 1,
Lemma 3.12 If A is a left ideal of Z(F(X)) freely generated by a set {Di}
then AI RA is freely generated as a Z( G) module by the cosets {Di
the obvious map. Using standard techniques we calculate that
with Xl = 8 , X2 t 2, X3 = 8- l t 2 s, X4 = t-lStS, X5 = s-lt-lst. Then, the associated resolution has the following table of degrees and ranks 2
degree rank
=
F(X)IN where F(X) is a free group and N is a normal subgroup, then if we set I = I(Z(F(X)) we obtain a free Z( G) resolution of Z as €
... R2 IR3- r RIIR2 I~RIR2~IIRI~Z(G) ~Z, all maps being induced by inclusions, and thinking of Z( G) as identified with Z(F(X))I R.
(Xl (Xl (X2 (X2 (X3 (X3 (X4
Zln, then
Rm Moreover,
=
=
:l[t, CI](t _1)(tn - 1)7Tl , Z[t, CI](tn _ l)m .
4 25
-
l)t = 1)8 = l}t = 1)8 = l)t = 1)8 = l)t =
1)
5 50
6 125
.... Xl -
1, X2 - 1, X3 - 1,
In
-In
is suitable. So R = Z[t, Cl](tn - 1), while I = Z[t, CI](t - 1), after identifying Z(Z) with the polynomial ring Z[t] with t- I adjoined. Then
IR7Tl
3 10
t{X4(X5 + (X4 8(XI - 1) t(X2 - 1) 8(X3 - 1) t{XSIX3(X5 - 1) + xSI(X3 - 1) I 8{x 1 X2(XI - 1) + xll(x2 - 1) t{x;-IXIX3(X5 - 1) + x;-IXl(X3 + X;-I(Xl - 1) - x;-1(X2 (X4 - 1)8 = 8{X5(XI - 1) + (X5 (X5 - l)t = t{XSlx3'1(X2 -1) - xslx3'1(X3 (X5 - 1)8 = 8{x 11 (X4 - 1) - Xll(Xl -
is just the projection
l~nZ~Z~G
=
2 5
and this determines all the differentials in the Gruenberg resolution after we add in the commutation relations
Freeness over Z( G) follows from the preceeding lemmas.)
R7TlI
1 2
The generators are e = s - 1, f = t - 1 for I, and X4 - 1, and X5 - 1 for R. The inclusion R e I gives Xl - 1---+(8 + l)e X2 - 1---+(t + l)f X3 - 1---+8- 1 ((t 2 - l)e + (t + 1)1) X4 - l---+t- 1 ((8t + l)e + (8 =- 1)1) X5 - I---+S- l t- I ((8 - l)f + (1 - t)e)
Z(F(X)) I R~Z(F(X)) I I .
=
{s, t}, and
N·-tF(X)---+G
We can now state a result due to Gruenberg [Grl]
Example 3.14 Let G
=
+ RA}.
Proof. A = U Z(F(X))Di so RA = U RDi, and AI RA ~ U(Z(F(X))I R)Di but Z(F(X))IR = Z(G) from the definitions. The proof is complete. 0
E
€
and G = :lIn with generator t. Hence
Example 3.15 Let G = Z/2 x Z/2, X for each j. But by the independence of the Di this implies that the Ai,j are 0 all O. The result follows.
(Exactness is clear since the map
t-l
... ~Z(G) ~Z(G) ~Z(G) ~Z(G)---+/l
i,j
Corollary 3.13 Let G be given, and suppose G
65
In
In.
XSI(X5 - 1) Xl1(XI 1)
In
1) - xSl(X5 -
In
These are used to write elements of Rn I in terms of elements in Rn, and by a direct iteration can be used to write elements of Rn in terms of basis elements in Rn-l I. As an exercise, the reader is advised to construct a and
a4 .
3
66
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
4. Cup Products
G7
€
Remark 3.16 An alternate resolution of 2(2/2 x 'l/2) -t2 is given by tensoring two copies of a resolution of
(This is a direct verification.) The dual map on co chain complexes now gives the desired structures on passing to cohomology. In particular, for H* (G; IF) the pairing becomes
7L(7L/2) --=----. 7L . In particular, if we tensor the Gruenberg resolutions constructed above we find that the resulting resolution has ranks as follows degree rank
0 1
1 234
5 6
2
6
3
4
5
7
...
n n+l
Hence, the Gruenberg resolution is far from minimal in general. However, it has the advantage that it is fairly easy to write down and differentials are easy to calculate for it.
and we claim this induces the same product pairing as that induced by the topologically induced U-product. This can be seen quite easily. We define a homotopy of the diagonal map
L1: Be-"Be x Be by
H t (tl, . .. , tn, gl, ... ,gn) (((t
If we use the "canonical" free resolution of G, the resulting Gruenberg resolution will turn out to be the Bar construction. In a later section we will discuss minimal resolutions for finite p-groups.
+ l)tl
- t, ... , (t + l)tn - t,gl,'" ,gn),
(t + l)t1,"" (t where
Q
= min(a, 1) and
Q
=
+ l)tn ,gl,'"
,gn))
= max(O, a). Then Ho = L1 and
4. Cup Products In cohomology there is a cup product induced from the diagonal map and the Kunneth formula. In particular, with (untwisted) field coefficients IF, this gives a pairing
H1((t1, ... ,tn,gl, ... ,gn)) = ((2tr+1 - 1, ... ,2tn - l,gr+l," .gn),(2t 1 , .. · ,2tr ,gl,'" ,gr))
Il Hi(G; IF) 01F Hj (G; IF)-"Hi+j (G; IF) i,j
Corollary 4.2 Let p be an odd prime, then H*(7L/p; IFp) = E(Vl) 0 IFp[b 2 J,
making H*(G; IF) into an associative (graded) commutative ring with unit. (Graded commutative means b U a = (_I)dim(a)dim(b)a U b.) The pairing is natural with respect to restriction,
the tensor product of a polynomial algebra on a two dimensional generator and an exterior algebra on a 1-dimensional generator.
(resiD* (aU b) = (res~)* (a) U (res~)* (b).
Proof. An embedding of our usual resolution for 7L over 7L(7L/p) into the bar construction can be constructed quite simply. The one dimensional generator goes to IT-II (note that BIT -11 = T -1). The two dimensional generator goes to lL'z/pIT-11. The three dimensional generator goes to IT-11L'z/pIT-11, and so on. This embeds the minimal resolution of 7Llp into the bar construction and, in particular, constructs chain representatives there for the generating homology classes. More precisely, the embedding gives rise to the following commutative diagram which shows that it must be a chain equivalence.
We now extend the notion slightly to define a pairing ( Ext he)(7L, IF) = Hi(G;IF)) 01F
Extk(e)(M,IF)-"Ext~1b)(M,IF)
which makes the Ext-groups into graded modules over the ring H*(G; IF). Lemma 4.1 There is a chain map in the bar construction for Be,
natural with respect to homomorphisms of groups.
68
5. Restriction and Transfer
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces itnd Croup Cohomology
Theorem 4.4 For p
=
69
2 we have
a polynomial algebra on n one dimensional generators.
5. Restriction and Transfer
In order to determine the cup product a U X in cohomology, we choose representative co chains a for a, c for X and evaluate (a 0 b, L1(w)) as w runs over chains representing all the homology classes in Hdim(o:)+dim(;:() (Bz/p; lF p). This determines the image of aUfJ E Hom(H*(Bz/p;lFp),lFp), and since H*(Bz/p; lF p) = Hom(H*(B z / p; lFp), lF p) this evaluation determines the entire cup product. . For example choose a representative, a, for the generator of H2t(Bz/p; lFp) and c for a generator of H2j(Bz/p;lFp). Then
(a, IT - llaz/pl·· ·IT - llaz/pl) = 1 ,
V"
..I
i-times
and similarly for c. Now we apply 4.1 to
which gives a map of co chain complexes that defines
on passing to cohomology. Clearly, if we have K c H c G, inclusions of subgroups, then (res~)* = (res~)*. (res~)* . In case H c G has finite index there is a map called the transfer, first introd uced by Eckmann [E], tr: Ext~(H) (M, A)---+Ext~(G) (M, A)
ri+j = IT - 1I a z/pl·· ·IT - 1l a z/pl
,
Given a subgroup H c G and a resolution of Mover Z(G), by simply for~ getting the Z( G) structure and noting that Z( G) is free as a Z( H) module we obtain a resolution of Mover Z(H). The inclusion of complexes clearly corresponds to the restriction map (resS})* described in the last section. Indeed, if A is a Z( G) module we have the induced map on Hom complexes
v-------"
which is defined as follows (on the level of cochains). For
i+j-times
and we see that (a 0 c, L1(ri+j)) = 1. Similar calculations in the remaining cases complete the proof. 0 Corollary 4.3 When p
I-
2
H*((Zjpt;lFp) = E(Vl, ... ,v n )0lFp[b 1 , ... ,b n ],
the tensor product of a polynomial algebra on n two dimensional generators and an exterior algebra on n one dimensional elements. The Steenrod operations in H* (( Z j p) n; IF p) are completely determined by pj(V'i) = 0, j > 0, fJ(Vi) = bi , and Pl(b i ) = bf, pj(b i ) = fJ(b i ) = 0, j > 1 using the Cartan formula. The situation when p = 2 is somewhat different as the sign -1 no longer affects things since 1 + T = 1 - T in this case. The previous calculation in the proof of 4.2 is unchanged but the result is now
a
set tr(a) E HomZ(G) (C i , A) A E Ci as
E
Ck = HomZ(H) (C i , A)
= Ch) to be the homomorphism given on elements
tr(a)(A)
[G:H]
=
L
gia(g;:l A)
i=l
where gl, ... ,g[G:H] run over a set of left coset representatives for H in G. In the above sum consider the term gia(g;:lgA). Write g;:lg = hgjl for some other coset representative gj, so gih = ggj, and, since a is H-linear, we have gia(g;:lgA) = giha(gjl A) = ggja(gjl A). Then summing over all the coset representatives it follows that tr(a)(gA) = gtr(a)(A) and tr(a) is, indeed, Z(G)-linear. Moreover, we have
tr(8a)(b) = (tr(8a), b) = Lgda(gi18b)] = (tr(a),8b) = tr(a) (8b)
70
Chapter II.
Classify~ng
5. Restriction and Transfer
Spaces and Group Cohomology
so tr is a map of cochain complexes and induces a map of Ext-groups. Similarly, if f: M ---+N is a Z(G)-module map and f#: C#(M)---+C#(N) any Z( G)-chain map of Z( G)-projective resolutions, then f#tr = trf# and similarly, if s is a Z( G)-chain homotopy between f # and fil then s*tr = trs* is a chain homotopy between the transfer maps. Consequently, the transfer is well defined, independent of choice of resolutions or coset representatives. Clearly, if K c H c G with [G: K] < 00 we have
tr~ . tr~ = tr~. Lemma 5.1 a. If [G: H] <
71
The following result is useful in making explicit calculations. Lemma 5.5 Let H c G have finite index} then H x G 1 C C X C 1 has finite index and, with field coefficients IF, H* (H x C 1; IF) = H* ~ H; ff') 0lF H* (G 1 ; IF), H* (G X G 1 ; IF) = H* (G; IF) 0lF H* (G 1 ; IF). }vIoreover, w~th respect . spz l'tt mg . t rHxG G x G 1 = t rH G 101 •d to t h zs '6!1 . 1
Proof. A resolution of Z over Z( C x Cd = Z( C) 0z Z( Cd can be give~ as C(G) 0z C(Cd where C(G) is a resolution of Z over Z.(C) and C(Cd IS a resolution of Z over Z( G 1)' If we select coset representatIVes for 91, ... , 9n ~o G X G 1 = UigiH x G 1 with each g'i E G, then on the cochain level tr = tr !Zlld and 5.5 follows. 0 Transfer and Restriction for Abelian Groups
then the composite
00
(res~ Extz(G) (M,
r .
tr~
A) - - - - + ExtZ(H) (M, A) - - - t Extz(G) (M, A)
is multiplication by [G: H]. b. If H <J G and [G: H] < 00 then the composite tr~ ExtZ(H) (M,
(res~
A) - - - t Extz(G) (M, A)
Let G = Zjpi+1 ,:nd H ~ G be the unique subgroup Zjpi ~ Zjpi+l. If C is generated by ~ then H has generator TP. Now) let A =_Z(f)' then,_A, ~1a Z(H)-module IS free on p generators, el = 1, e2 = T, e3 - T , ... , ep - T . An explicit resolution of Z over A is given as T-l
€
r
- - - - + ExtZ(H)
(M, A)
is a f-+ L:~G;H) g;(a) where the gi run over a set of left coset representatives for H in G.
where EG = L EG g for any group G. When we regard this as a resolution 9 of Z over H the map T - 1 is given as e1
f-+
e2 - e1,
e2
f-+
e3 - e2,
ep-1
f-+
ep - ep-l)
f-+
TPel - e1 .
(b. is immediate from the formulae above. If a is already G-linear, then tr(a) = [G: H]a already on the level of cochains, so a. also follows directly.) Corollary 5.2 Let pllGI but assume [G: H] is prime to p (so H contains a p-Sylow subgroup of G if IGI < (0), then (res~
H*(G; IFp)
r H*(H; IFp)
ep
Similarly EGei = EH(el + ... + ep ). We can map the usual resolution of Z over Z(H) into this resolution by
----+
is injective if IFp is the trivial Z( G) module.
.
Ii { Ii
(resgr
Remark 5.3 More generally H;(G; M) ----+H;(H; M) is injective when M x [G:H]
is any Z(G)-module where multiplication by [G: H], M -------+M is an isomorphism. From this we obtain the important Corollary 5.4 Write m = IGI. Then m(I;(G, M) = 0 so, if xm: M ---+M is (Gj M) = O. an isomorphism, it follows that
R;
T-J
Eo
Z +--- A +--- A +--- A +--- A+---, ..
f-+ f-+
e1 el
when i is even, when i is odd.
+ ... + ep
Proposition 5.6 Cocycles representing the generators in H*(H; IFp) are given for the chain complex of Z( G) abo~e as follows. In even di:ne~sions b2i E HOmZ(H)(Z(H),IF p) is defined by b2t (ej) = 1,1 ::; j ::; p, whzle zn odd degrees e 2t.+ 1 is defined by e 2'+1 t (ej ) = on IF p is trivial.
{I
1,
j. = 1 H ere, 0f course, th e ac t;zan
OJ>
.
72
5. Restriction and Transfer
Chapter II. Cla,ssifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
Proof. We must check two things, first that the cochains b2i and e 2 i+l are co cycles , and second that they evaluate non-trivially on chains representing the generators in homology in these dimensions. We have
8b2i (e.) = b2i (8e.) = {b2~(ej+l - eJ·) = 0 J J b2~(TPel - ep ) = 0
when j < p, for j = p.
Similarly
8e 2i +1 (ej) = e2i+l(8ej) = e 2i + 1 (E}f(el
+ ... + ep ) = e 2i+l(E}fel) =
IHlel ,
and this is 0 mod (p). Also, in odd dimensions el + ... + ep represents a generator in homology, while el represents a generator in even dimensions.
o
Corollary 5.7 Assume G = Z/pi with i > 1 so that H i= {I}. Then we have a. tr: Hj (H; IFp)-tHj (G;rlp) is the zero map for j even and the identity when j is odd. b. res*: Hj (G; IFp)-tHj (H; IFp) is zero when j is odd and the identity when j is even.
Proof. We have LTjb2i(T-jel) = p, j=O p-l
= LTje2i+l(T-jel) = 1.
. res·
.
tr
.
O---+Cc ---+C H---+Cc---+O as long as the action of G on the coefficients A is trivial. Consequently, there is a long exact sequence which turns out to be a special case of the Gysin sequence 5.10 15. res·. tr. 5. res· ... ---+ H~( G; A) ---+ H~(H; A) ---+ H~(G; A) ---+ H~+l(G; A) ---+ '" .
BTl' xid
Be ---+ Be x Be ----+ BZ/2 x Be .
To prove (b) note that the inclusions H C G induces the chain map of minimal complexes
+ T + ... + TP-l )el
in odd degrees, in even degrees.
0
Remark S.B The special case {I} C Z/p is not covered by (5.7). Here, since Hi({l}' Z) = {O ,
More generally, we can use (5.5) and (5.7) to give the transfer and restriction explicitly for G any finite abelian group and H any subgroup. As (5.9) is essentially the only case we need in the remainder of this work we leave this calculation to the reader as an (important) exercise. However, there is a further case where the transfer is very useful. This is when G has an index 2 subgroup H, so we have the extension H <J G-tZ/2. Then the transfer tr: Ck-tCb fits into a short exact sequence
L1
j=O
ec--+(l { ei---+ei
Proof. Since the composition of transfers is the transfer of the composition we can assume H = (Z/p)n-l has index pin G. Moreover, after a change of basis we can assume H = {I} x (Z/p)n-l C (Z/p)n. Then the result follows from (5.5). 0
When the coefficients A = IF 2 the map X turns out to be a 1--+ aUf for all a E Hi(G;IF2) where f E Hl(GiIF2) is B;(e), e E H1(Z/2iIF/2) is the non-zero class, and B7r is the map induced by the projection G-tZ/2. This is actually quite easy, just track back using the chain level definition of 8 and compare it with the cup product associated to the composition
p-l
tr(e 2i+l)(el)
73
Z
when when
~ > 0, ~ = 0,
we see that the transfer is simply multiplication by p in degree O. In particular, with IF p-coefficients it is identically zero.
As a special case note that the Gysin sequence gives a second proof that
H*(Z/2; IF 2 ) = IF2[e] which is the key step in 4.4. An Alternate Construction of the Transfer Geometrically we can view the transfer as follows. First, the map p: BH-tBe induced by the inclusion H "--+ G can be thought of as a covering with fiber the set of right cosets of H in G by simply regarding B H = * X H EG and letting p be the projection onto Be. Then the chain map C#(Be)-tC#(BH) associated to the transfer is given as
!gl!" ·!gn!1--+
L
Hgvlg 1 ! .. ·Ignl
Hgv
Corollary 5.9 Let G = (Z/p)n be an elementary p-group and suppose H S; G is a proper subgroup. Then tr: H* (H; IF p)-tH* (G; IF p) is zero in all degrees.
where the H gv run over the right cosets of H in G. That is to say, one takes the sum of all the cells in the inverse image of a cell of Be.
74
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
We can model this more formally be considering gl) ... ,gn as representatives for the right cosets of H in G so G = Ui= 1 H gi, and define a map
Tr: Ee--1- (Eet by B 1-+ (g1 B, ... ,gnB) as B runs over Ee. (This is the geometric analogue of summing over fibers.) Note that gB 1-+ (g1gB, . .. ,gngB), and writing gig
= h(J'g(i)g(J'g(i)
where a g is the permutation of cosets associated to g, we obtain a homomorphism of G to the wreath product G ~ Sn which is defined in (IV.I),
5. RestrictiOll and Transfer
75
is A-equivariant and (Ee)n x ESn is H2Sn-free and contractible. Consequently h passes to quotients and induces the map
ETr X
tr),: Be--1- (* XH Eet xSn ESn ':::::: Bmsn . tr,\ is, up to homotopy, the map of classifying spaces induced by the homomorphism A. On points this representation of it has the form
where Xl) ... , Xn are the points in the covering * XH Ee-+Be lying over x. In fact, on the level of homology the map tr), is independent of the choice of section gl, ... ,gn used in the definition of ).. since we have
A is called the Frobenius map associated to the section (gl,' .. ,gn)' Thus
Tr· 9 = A(g)Tr, i.e. for all x E Ee, 9 E G we have Tr(xg) = A(g)Tr(x). In particular H (Sn acts on (Ee)n and Tr is A-equivariant. On the other hand (Ee)n is not H 2Sn free though it is Hn-free. However, if we take the symmetric product spn( * X H Ee) then Tr induces a well defined and continuous map
Lemma 5.12 Let g~, ... ,g~ be a second set of right coset representatives of H in G and A' the associated Frobenius homomorphism, )..1: G -+ H (Sn' Then A' and A differ by an inner automorphism of H ( Sn. Proof. We have g~
= higi ,
1 :::; i :::; n, so
g ~g "
hI
I (J'g (i)g(J'!I (i)
higig -
--1
I
hih(J' 9 (i) h(J' 9 (i)g(J' 9 (i) Using tr we can give a geometric construction of the transfer for a E Hm(BH; A) where the A are untwisted coefficients. Let a be represented by a: BH--1-K(A, m)
= BA
.
and conjugation by (hI, ... , hn' 1) takes A to
5.11 and it is a good exercise with chain approximations to verify that (a . tr)*(l.,m) = tr(a) agrees with the previous definition of the transfer. We can actually carry things a bit further, taking advantage of the Frobenius homomorphism A. Let h: Ee---+Esn be any (CW) map which is equivariant with respect to the homomorphism p. A: G--1-H 2 Sn--1-Sn which gives the permutation action of G on the right cosets of H. Then
o
Finally, we note that our second description of the transfer, 5.11, actually factors through the map tr), since the map
From IL1.8 B"A is an abelian topological group, so there is a natural extension of a to spn(B H ), n
)..1.
n
P({Xl,'" ,xn,w})
= LXi
E spn(* XH Ee)
1
gives us a factorization of tr as P . tr),. This last construction of the transfer, using tr,\ is actually very important in applications since it can be generalized substantially. In fact, given any functorial method of associating cohomology classes B(a) E H*(H (Sn; A) to cohomology classes a E H*(H; A) we obtain associated cohomology classes in H*(G; A). It is this principle, first used by Steenrod, which enables us, in Chapter IV, to construct the Steenrod operations. The principle is also very important in homotopy theory where it provides the basis for both the Kahn-Priddy theorem, [KP], and the Snaith splitting theorem [Sn].
76
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
6. The Cartan-Eilenberg Double Coset Formula We now describe a useful method for computing the restriction map using double cosets which was first developed by Cartan and Eilenberg [eEl. Let G be a finite group and H, KeG subgroups. For a given Z(G)-module A, we will consider the composition tr~
6. The Cartan-Eilenberg Double Coset Formula a disjoint union of left cosets. Hence [G:K] (1 ).
77
= L:i[H:HnxiKxilj, proving
For (2), let F* be a free resolution of Z over Z(G), and <jJ E HomK(Fn , A):
res~ . tr~¢ = res~ ( L
g<jJg-l)
gEG/K
(res~)*
~ (2t Zj'X'q,x, Zji ,)
H*(K; A) ---+H*(G; A) ---+H*(H; A) .
1
First some notation: cx: H*(H; A)-tH*(xHx-\ A) (x E G) will denote the isomorphism induced by the homomorphism
in HomH (Fn, A)
o
HomH(C; A)---tHomxHx-1 (C; A) given by cx(J)(u) = xf(x-1u). Now take a decomposition of G into double cosets:
Corollary 6.3 If H<JG, thenforb E H*(H;A) we have res~.tr~(b)
for x
Remark 6.1 The double coset decomposition can be understood as follows. Given
c
G the left coset decomposition of Gover f{ defines a homothen the image breaks up int.o separate orbits, or, equivalently, ¢(H) C SkI X ... X Sk,. c S[C:I<] ~~ere r ~s the number of double cosets and ki = IH gJ{\/\K\ = [K : H n gJ{ gi ] where H giK is the ith double coset. f{
H
morphisl~ ¢ : G-tS[G:](]' If we restrict ¢ to H
E
G/H.
= L:xb,
We introduce the notion of stable elements: a E H*(H; A) will be called res~%~=~nH ·cx(a) = res:!Hx-1nH(a) for all x E G. Note that if H <JG, this reduces to cxa = a, i.e. a must be invariant. We have:
stable if
Proposition 6.4 If a E im(resk), then a is stable.
Proof. Let a = res~(b); note that cx(b) = band cx(a) res;Hx- 1 . cx(b) = res;Hx-1 (b) which implies that xHx-- 11 . C x () xHx- 1 . res G - 1 (b) res xHx a resxHxl-nH xHx
ex . res~(b)
res;Hx-1nH(b) = res:!Hx-1nH . res5J.(b) res:!Hx-1nH(a) . Proof. Let Wi = H n XiK xi 1 and take a left coset decomposition of H with respect to this subgroup: H = Il j Zji Wi' Then we have H Xi =
II
Zji WiXi
=
Il
Zji
(H Xi n xiK)
j
j
Proposition 6.5 If a E H*(H; A) is stable, then res~ . tr~(a)
o
= [G: H]a.
Proof. By theorem 1 we have
Multiplying by K on the right, we have
From (*) we obtain
G
U ·i ,j
ZjiX,J<,
[G:H]a.
o
78
6. The Cartan-Eilenberg Double Coset Formula
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
We now apply these results to the special situation where H C G contains Sylp(G), the p-Sylow subgroup of G.
-
Theorem 6.6 Let G ;2 H ;;;? Sylp(G), where Sylp(G) is the p-Sylow subgroup of G. Then, for any Z(G)-module A, trfI: H*(H; A)-+H*(G; A)(p) is surjective, resl}: H*(G; A)(p)-+H*(H; A)(p)
is injective, and its image consists of the stable elements in H* (H; A)(p). In particular, if H
The stability conditions depend on how H intersects with its conjugates, which in general can be quite involved. vVe conclude by describing a situation where things simplify. The following result is due to R. Swan, [SI].
Theorem 6.8 Let G be a finite group such that Sylp( G) is abelian; then if A is a trivial G -module
Proof. Define fx: xSylp(G)x- 1 n Sylp(G)-+Sylp(G) by fx(Y) = x- 1 yx; then it is not hard to see that * fx (0:)
Proof. Assume ISylp(G)1 = ps, [Gi H] = qi then we may choose l so that ql == 1 mod pS. We know from Proposition 3 that the elements 'of im (resfI) are stable. Conversely, assume a E H*(H; A)(p) is stable; then l . resl}trl} (a)
=
l[G: H]a
=
lq· a
=
we deduce our assertions by looking at the p-component of this composition. In the special case H
= H*(H;A)f~H .
= Sn U Sn(n, n + l)Sn
gives the double coset decomposition where Sn C Sn+l is the set of elements leaving n + 1 fixed. Moreover
Sn n (n, n where Sn-l leaves both n, n It follows that
+ l)Sn(n, n + 1) = Sn-l
+ 1 fixed, res
H*(Sn+liIFp) is an isomorphism for all p prime to n
and C(n,n+l) is the identity on Sn-l.
Sn
+
1
Sn
+ 1.
I
H*(Sn;IFp)
0: E
H*(Sylp(G); A) .
is stable if and only if
Let C be the centralizer of Sylp(G) n xSylp(G)x-\ then there exists t E C so that txSylp(G)x-1t- 1 = Sylp(G) (any two Sylow p-subgroups of Care conjugate). For any y E Sylp(G) n xSylp(G)x- 1 ,
= x-1yx = x- 1t- 1 ytx = ftx(Y)·
We can think of ftx ENG (Sylp (G)), and by the above we obtain a factorizaton
xSylp(G)x- 1 n Sylp(G) fx ~
Sylp(G)
o
Example 6. 7 For the symmetric groups we have Sn+l
0:
fx(Y)
= [G: H]b ;
H*(G;A)(p) ~ im (res~)
Hence
xSylp(G)x- 1
= resXSylp(G)x-lnsylp(G)· cx(o:),
a
(this follows from Proposition 4; note that pSa = 0 if a is positive dimensional) and this implies that a E im (resfI). Recall that we also have for b E H* (G; A) trl} . resfI(b)
79
0: E
H*(Sylp(G); A)Nc(Sylp(G)) ,
then, since ftx E NG(Sylp(G)), we have f;(o:) = res~~;l~~b)x-lnSYlp(G)(O:) and this implies that 0: is stable which gives the result using (6.6). 0
6.9 An Application: H*(J1 i lF 2 ) J 1 is the first Janko group, a sporadic simple group of order 8·3·5·7 ·11·19 = 175,560 with Sylow 2-subgroup J 1 (2) = (Z/2)3. J 1 is the unique simple group which satisfies 1. The Sylow 2-subgroups of G are abelian. 2. G contains an involution t such that C(t) = (t) x A 5 ·
7. Tate Cohomology and Applications
Chapter 11. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
00
N h (J1 (2) / J 1 (2) is the semi-direct product 7l/7 XT 7l/3 with generators 1 of order 3 and 9 of order 7. Their action can be given in terms of 3 x 3 matrices
as follows:
11-+
1 0 1) ( 0 0 1 011
,
In III.1.9 we will determine the resulting ring of invariants (or at least its generators, leaving the relations to the reader). This ring will come up again in Chapters VIII and IX. In IX the explicit form of the generators will be very important. The result is
81
. Here 2C2(lF3n) is built from the finite groups of Lie type C 2 (lF) described m (VII. 7). The Dynkin diagram for G 2 , ~ admits a symmetry reflection which is not realized as a symmetry of the group except for the fi~lds IF3n. I~ this case, though, there is a symmetry and 2G2(lF3n) is the subgroup of fixed elements. The su bgroup~ of PSL 2(IF q) occuring above are all isomorphic to 7l/2 x 7l/2. Moreover, smce the groups PSL 2(lF q) are simple, it follows that the normalizer of 7l/2 x 7l/2 in PSL2(lFq) above must be A 4 , and our calculation for A4 in II1.1.3 gives their mod 2 cohomology. The groups PSL 2(IF 2n) have Sylow 2-subgroups of the form
H*(J1;lF2) ~ H*((71/2)3;lF 2),N7X T 71/3 ~ lF 2 [x, y, z]b, J-L)/,2 J-L2
+ YJ-L + xz =
0
+ X4 + x 2J-L + y3 + ,Z =
0
where dim(x) = 3, dim(y) = 4, dim(z) = 7, dimb) = 5, and dim(p,) = 6. (This result is due to Chapman [Ch].) The Poincare series for H*(J1 ;lF2) is 6
(1 + t 5 )(1 + t ) (1 - t 3 )(1 - t 4 )(1 - e)' . Janko describes J 1 as the subgroup of GL 7 (lF 11) generated by the followmg two matrices Y of order 7 and Z of order 5:
Y=
0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Z=
2
-1
1 -1
1 -3
-1
(~o 0) (1 a) (~-1 0) (1 e ~-1
0
1
0
~
=
a ) 1 '
0
this action is easily specified, but hard to compute in general, and we have n
-1) .
J 1 was discussed above, and SYl2(2G2(lF3n» = (71/2)3 with normalizer isomorphic to that of J 1 hence
H*eG2(lF3n); lF2 ) -3 3 2
h is an example of a very sparse type of simple group, one with abelian 2-Sylow subgroup. A very nice result in group theory classifying such groups has been proved by vValter, with a simplified proof being given by H. Bender [B]. Theorem 6.10 If G is a simple group w'ith abelian Sylow 2-sv,bgroups, then C ~ PSL2(lFq), q == 3,5(mod 8), PSL 2 (lF 2,,), n ~ 2, J 1J or 2C 2(lF 3 n ) , n odd
n>l.
(~ ~~,). Since
H*(PSL2(lF2n);lF2) ~ lF 2[X1, ... ,xn ]71/(2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
-3 -1 3 1 3 -1 -3 -3 -1 2 -1 -1 -3 -1 -3 -3 -1 -1 2 -3 -3 -3 -1 3 1 1 3 -2 3 1 1 3 1 3 -2 3
-3 -2
with normalizer the semi-direct product of (71/2)n with the subgroup N = 7/.,/(2 n - 1) = lF e 2n embedded in PSL2(lF2n) as the diagonal matrices ~ 1-+
= lF 2 [X1, X2, X3]71/7X
T
71/3 .
In Chapter III we discuss the techniques for determining these invariant subrings. An important thing to note is that they are closed under the action of the Steenrod algebra A(2).
7. Tate Cohomology and Applications We now describe a version of cohomology obtained by using a complete resolution instead of an ordinary one, see (11.3.7) for further remarks. By definition, a complete resolution of 7/., (the trivial ZG-module) is an acyclic 7l-graded complex F* of projective 7/.,G-modules which agrees with an ordinary projective resolution of Z in non-negative dimensions. To construct such a complex we proceed as follows. Let F* be a free resolution of Z where Fo = 7/.,G. Now c?ilsider its 7l-dual, F*. This is now a backwards free resolution (a coresolutlOn) of 7/." as 7/.,G is isomorphic to its dual. We now glue the two resolutions where they end (begin) respectively.
82
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology t--
C1
t--
~
CO ~
Co
f--
C1
7. Tate Cohomology and Applications t--
/ Z
Let N = :L:: EG 9 be the trace (or norm) map from Fo to F , this clearly factors throu~h Z, as the augmentation followed by the inclusion of invariants. Now we define F* as the chain complex O
i, :F.i = { F F-i-l,
if i ~ 0 if i < 0
endowed with the inherited differentials plus the glueing (norm) map in dimension zero. As for ordinary resolutions, one can show that complete resolutions together with the augmentation map F* -+ Z are unique up to chain homotopy, and hence can be used for homological definitions unambiguously. We can now define Definition 7.1 For any ZG-module M, the Tate Cohomology of G with coefficients in M is defined for all i E Z as
jji(G, M) = Hi(HomG(F*, M)) . Denote by I the augmentation ideal in ZG and by N the norm map as above. Then we can identify Tate Cohomology as follows
jji(G M)~ , -
Hi(G,M), H-i-I(G,M), MG/NM, KerN/1M,
I
if i > 0; if i < -1; if i = 0; ifi=-l.
The above is clear except in dimensions less than -1. For that we use the natural isomorphism HomG (F* ,M) ~ F* 0G M (derived from the fact that F* is ZG-free) and the definition for homology (3.7). Note the following simple fact: if F is a free ZG-module, then jj* (G, F) == O. This follows from the fact that F has a trivial projective resolution (itself) and that FG = NF, KerN = IF. As a consequence the same must be true for any projective ZG-module. An additional advantage of Tate cohomology is that it allows us to consider homology and cohomology at the same time. It will enjoy the same general properties as ordinary cohomology with respect to short exact coefficient sequences, restriction and transfer, maps induced by group homomorphisms etc .. The following is also a very useful device, known as "dimension-shifting": LelTIlTIa 7.2
83
For any finitely generated ZG-module M and integer i, there
exists a finitely generated Z-torsion free ZG-module [2i(M) such that for all nEZ
Proof. Given any ZG-module M, we may map a free module :F onto it, with kernel K. It follows from the long exact sequence associated to this sequence, that jjn ( G, M) ~ jjn+ I ( G, K) for all n E Z. Now K embeds in a free mod ule as Hom(Z, K) <--t Hom(ZG, K) ,
and the cokernel will be a Z-torsion free module M' with the same cohomology as M, by the same argument. It is then clear that iterating the same type of procedure for this module (known as dimension-shifting) in either direction, we can construct a Z-torsion free .module [2i(M), for any i E Z with the desired property. 0 This allows for considerable flexibility in analyzing a particular cohomology group. Also note that the analogous construction can be done for a module defined over a field of characteristic p. Note that we have said nothing about the uniqueness of the dimension-shift of a module. To relate cohomology to representation-theoretic properties of a module over a finite p-group, we introduce the notion of a minimal projective resol ution. Definition 7.3 Let P be a finite p-group and M a finitely generated Ztorsion free ZP-module. A minimal resolution for Mover ZP is a projective resolution (Pi,Di) of M such that P n is a projective module of minimal Zrank mapping onto kerDn_1 for all n ~ 0 (for n = 0 this means Po is a projective of minimal rank mapping onto M). The above definition can be given for any finite group, but we choose to restrict ourselves to finite p-groups as in that situation there is a simple way of describing a minimal resolution using cohomology. Vie have Theorem 7.4 A ZP-projective resolution (Pi, Di) of a finitely generated Ztorsion free ZP-module lvI is minimal if and only if
where
* denotes
the usual dual.
Proof. We start by constructing a projective module Po of minimal rank which maps onto M. Denote Mp = NI0lFp; then observe that the coinvariants (Mp)p f. O. This is simply the dual statement to the fact that a finite p-group acting on a finite abelian p-group must have fixed-points. Now the module of coinvariants Mp = M / 1M maps onto this, hence it must be non-zero. Assume it is generated by classes Xl, ... ,x r in lvI, where as (Mp)p ~ lvIp0lFp and Mp has no pi-torsion, r = dim (lvfp)p, Then use these classes to define
84
Chapter 11. Clc'kssifying Spaces a.nd Group Cohomology
7. Tate Cohomology and Applications
a map (Zpr M, denoted by 71'. By construction, (cokenr)p = 0 hence by the argument above, coker 1f is pi torsion. Choose an integer q prime to p which annihilates it, and let Po = 1f-l(qM) c (Zpr. Then Po is projective because (Zpr jPo is p'-torsion, and it clearly maps onto qM ~ M. Denote K n + 1 = kerbn ; the coinvariants of any other projective module covering M would have to map onto those of M p , hence we have shown that the one of minimal rank has rank IPI dim (Mp)p = IPI dim (M;)P . Now by iterating this procedure, we can construct a minimal resolution P* for !vI, with rank(Pi ) = IPI dim [(Kd;]p. However, the modules (Kj); are j-fold dimension-shifts of Nf;, and by (7.2), Hi(P, M;) ~ HI (P, (Ki-d;). Now from the exact sequence -)0
o
-)0
(K i -
1 );
-)0
P';
-)0
(K i );
-)0
0
and the fact that the map on the left induces an isomorphism of invariants (dual to the statement about the coinvariants of the original modules, which is true by construction) we deduce from the long exact sequence in cohomology that HI(P, (Ki- 1 );) ~ [(Ki);]P. This completes the proof of this result, which is an extension of a theorem due to Swan [S2] which appears in [AI].
o Now let us consider the partial Euler characteristic of such a resolution. We have n
I) -1)jrkz(Pj) j=O n
L
IPI(-l)jdimHj(p, !vI;).
j=O
As M is Z-torsion free, we have a short exact sequence 0 M M !vIp O. Using the induced long exact sequence in cohomology and using !vI* instead of M, we deduce that dimHi(P,M;) = dimHi(P,M*) ®IFp + dim Hi+l (P, ]vI*) ® IFp. Substituting in the equation above yields: -)0
-)0
-)0
-)0
rkz(Kn ) = IPI [dim H n+ 1 (P, !vI*) ® IF p + (-I)nrkz(M*)P] + (-lr+lrkz(M*) . We observe that if !vI (or equivalently M*) is not projective, then both sides in this equation must be positive. In addition the dual of M can be used to prove such a formula for all of Tate Cohomology, and in particular we obtain
o<
IPldim fjn(p, !vI) ® IFp
+ (-l)n-l[IPlrkz(M P ) -
rkz(M)] .
Denote bYip(M) = IPlrkz(!vIP)-rkz(M). Clearly ifiP(M) = 0, jjn(p,M)_ 0 for all n E Z. If iP(!vI) < 0, then all the odd cohomology is non-zero, and finally if IP(M) > 0, then all the even cohomology must be non-zero. As by (7.2) every module is cohomologous to a torsion-free one, we have proved
i-
85
Proposition 7.5 Let P be a finite Jlroup and M a finitely generated nonprojective ZP-module. Then either Hi(P, M) i- 0 for all even values of i, or it is non-zero for all odd values of i. We remark that the invariant IP (M) depends only on the rational representation type of the module M. A simple corollary is that for a torsion module over a p-group either all its Tate cohomology groups are non-trivial or they are all trivial. Also note the case when M = Z; then IP(M) = IGI - I > 0, and we deduce that the even dimensional Tate cohomology of a finite p-group is non-trivial in every degree. This result was originally proved by Kuo [Ku]. A ZG-module is said to be cohomologically trivial if jji(H, M) = 0 for all subgroups H £: G. We can now state the main application of Tate cohomology in this context, an extension of a result due to Nakayama and Rim ([N], [R]) recently proved by A. Adem [AI]: Theorem 7.6 Let M be a finitely generated torsion-free ZG-module, where G is a finite group. Then the following three statements are equivalent:
1. M is cohomologically trivial. 2. !vi is ZG -projective. 3. jji (Sylp (G), M) = 0 for two values of i of different parity, V primes p dividing IGI. Proof. To prove the theorem note that by the preceding result, all three statements are equivalent to having M projective as a module restricted to all the Sylp( G). We will now show that this is equivalent to projectivity over the whole group. To do this we must show that under any of the three conditions on M, any exact sequence 0 K F M 0 with F free will split. Apply Hom( *, K) to it; this is the same.as requiring that in the sequence -)0
-)0
-)0
-)0
O----tHomc(M, K)----tHomc(F, K)----tHomc(K, K) ----tExtic(Z, Hom(M, K))----t . .. the identity map from K to itself should go to zero under the connecting homomorphism. However, from the fact that M is projective over every p-Sylow subgroup of G it follows that so is Hom(M, K), and hence Extip(Z, Hom(M, K)) = 0 for all P = Sylp(~)' Using restriction-transfer we conclude that Extic(Z, Hom(M, K)) = 0 and the proof of the theorem is 0 complete. Now, suppose G is a finite p-group and A is a G module with IAI for some n < 00. From the above result we have
=
pn
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
86
8. The First Cohomology Group and Out(G)
87
Corollary 7.7 If G, A satisfy the assumptions above and HI (G; A) = 0 then Hl(N; A) = 0 for any subgroup NeG.
8. The First Cohomology Group and Out (G)
Proof. Choose M cohomologous to A but torsion-free. Then clearly IG (M) = o, hence either all the cohomology is non-zero or M is cohomologically trivial.0
In this section we study the relation between the first cohomology group of G and the group Out( G) of outer automorphisms of G. The connection is particularly striking in the case where G is a p-group, where we will be able to prove a theorem of Gaschiitz which shows that Out( G) is non-trivial and IOut( G) I is divisible by p.
Similarly, we obtain a result due to Gaschiitz [GJ.
Definition 8.1 Let A
Corollary 7.8 lfG, A satisfy the assumptions above and HI(G; A) = 0 then Hi(G; A) = 0 for all i 2: 1.
f: GjA~GjA
Example 7.9 Let G = Zjpn, A = 7ljpV and suppose the action of G on A is . given by the rule n t(a) = a l +ptJ - , and more generally (a
+ (3)(a)
= a A (a)+A(j3) with -l(a)
(t - l)(a) = a
ptJ
is also the identity.
Remark 8.2 If T, rl E Aut(G, A, GjA) and A is abelian, then TTl = TIT since we can write ),(g)g, ),(g) E A ,
= a-I. Then
n
-
and
and
while
T(a) = T'(a) = a, so ),(a) = ),'(a) = 1, all a EA.
consequently, in order to compute H* (G; A) we use the exact sequence p,.,,-n pn ptJ-n O~A----+A~A~A~··
But this implies T(T'(g)) = T(A'(g)g) = ),I(g),(g)g mark follows.
.
The connection between HI (G j A; A)) and Out( G) is made explicit in the next result.
This is essentially the only thing that can happen for 7ljpn actions on cyclic p-groups when p is odd. However, when p = 2 there are two exotic actions of Zj2 on Zj2v. First there is the action t(a) = a-I closely related to the construction of the dihedral group, and second, there is the action
t(a) = a 2tJ -
1 -
Theorem 8.3 Suppose A
Hl(GjA;A) = Aut(G,A,GjA)j(AnInn(G)).
I
which is used in the construction of the semi-dihedral group as a semi-direct product. The dihedral action does not have trivial HI(71j2; 7lj2V), but the corresponding group for the semi-dihedral action is trivial. In the next section these results will be used to study the group of outer automorphisms of a p-group.
= TI(T(g)), and the re-
I1
(Note that if a E A and e E GjA then (aea-I)e- 1 = a(ea-1e- 1) E A so a induces the identity on G j A and A, hence A n Inn( G) is contained in Aut(G, A, GjA), so the group above makes sense.)
Proof. We verify this using the bar resolution. Let rjJ: Bl(GjA)-----+A be a given G invariant cochain, so
We have
88
8. The First Cohomology Group and Out (G)
Chapter II. ClassifyiIlg Spaces and Group Cohomology
{a}
5¢(!ei!ej!) = ¢(ei!ej! -!eiej! + lei!) ei(¢(!ej!) . ¢(!ei!) . ¢(!eiej!)-I . Hence ¢ is a cocycle if and only if
o Proposition 8.4 Let.A: GjA--,A be a map with A(l) = I, then the map
TG---+G
E
89
Ker(7: GjA---+Aut(A)) ,
(here 7 is the homomorphism induced by the conjugation action of GIA on A). But this implies that the subgroup (A, a) is abelian and normal in G, so A is not maximal unless a E A. 0
Remark 8.6 The above proof is equivalent to the observation that if A is normal and abelian, then it is maximal only if r: C(GjA)--,Aut(A) is an injection. From now on we will assume that G is a finite p-group for a fixed prime p. To begin our study of Out( G) we consider two special cases.
defined by
7(g) = (A7r(g))·g
is an automorphism ofG if and only if>-: BI(GjA)--,A defined by the formula
Proposition 8.7 Let G be a finite p-group, and suppose that every normal
abelian subgroup A eGis cyclic. Suppose, moreover, that there exists an A as above with HI (G j A; A) = 0, then p must be 2, and G must be a semi-dihedral group
is a cocycle. Proof. If 7(gg') = 7(g)7(g') we must have A(7r(gg'))gg'
Proof. HI(GjA; A) = 0 implies H2(GjA; A) = 0 so G = A
= A7r(g)· g. A7r(g') . g' = A7r(g)· g[A7r(g')]g· g'
for all g, 7r E G. But this is exactly the condition that >- be a cocycle. The converse is now clear as well. Thus we can identify the set of l-cocycles with Aut(G, A, GjA). Now, consider a coboundary. We have
Bo(GjA)
=
Z(GjA) ,
and hence Homz(GIA)(Bo(GjA), A) ~ A. Under this identification we find
5(a)(!e!)
= (a)(e -
1)
= e(a)· a-I,
and the associated automorphism is given by
g---+7r(g)(a)a- 1 g = gag-1a-lg = a-Iga since gag- 1 E A. Thus the coboundaries are precisely the inner automorphisms of G obtained from the elements of A. The result follows. 0 Corollary 8.5 If A is a maximal abelian normal subgroup of G then the
induced map
Xr
GIA, for some
homomorphism r:
GjA---+Aut(A) .
But A = Zjpm by assumption so Aut(A) = {Zj(P - 1) x Zjpm-I
Zj2 x Zj2 m- 2
p odd p= 2
Suppose V = Ker(r), and V =I- {I}, then A x C(V)
G = Zjpm
X
I+pm-v ZjpV ,
or in case p = 2, there is also the possibility that G is a dihedral or semidihedral group, or finally that
with v > O. In the first or last case, if b generates the Zjpm, and a generates the ZjpV, then the subgroup
HI (G j Ai A)---+Out( G)
is an injection. Proof. If a E G, aaa- 1 = a for all a E A, and {a}b{a- 1 } = b for all bE GjA, then {o:} E C(GjA) and additionally
is abelian and normal. So these cases can't occur. On the other hand, if G is a dihedral group, we can calculate easily that HI(GjA, A) i- 0 for any normal abelian subgroup A, but if G is semi-dihedral then we have
90
HI ('!l/2; '!l/2m) = 0,
o
and the proposition follows.
with generators 5, u respectively. We have 'l'5r- 1 = S, so we must have rur- 1 = us m , and since H2('!l/PiA) = 0 (from Gaschutz lemma in the previous section) we must have p-l
Proposition 8.8 Let G be a finite p-group and suppose A is a maximal normal abelian subgroup of G. Suppose A is not cyclic but Hl(GIA; A) = 0, so G ~ A x T G I A. Suppose, finally, that there is a maximal subgroup G I A c
NeG (IG: NI = p), and the center C(N) is not contained in C(G), then G must be the dihedral group DB and A = '!l/2 x '!l/2.
U
Proof. Note that since A is maximal, our previous argument shows that T: GIA---+Aut(A)
II riur-
i
=
sk
i=l
with g.c.d.(k,p) = 1. But k can be rewritten as
k Hence, p
=
=
m (1
+ 2 + ... + (p -
2. Additionally, since r 2ur2
1))
=
m· p . (p - 1) /2 .
=u
=
us 2m we have that
A
XT
2
=
1 and
o
The fact that G = D8 now follows easily.
With these special cases out of the way, here now is the proof of the nontriviality of Out(G) (due to Caschutz [C]) promised at the beginning of this section.
Theorem 8.9 Suppose G is a finite, non-abelian p-group with 10ut(G)1 = pq with q ~ 1.
so ~
8
A = '!l/2 x '!l12 .
is injective. Hence C( G) c A. Also, N n A = B has index p in A. Now pick r E C(N) so that r does not belong to B but r P E B. (Such an r exists by our assumptions.) Then r is certainly not contained in A so (A, r) is a degree p extension of A. On the other hand, since Hl(G; A) = 0, the results of the last section imply that
(A, r)
91
8. The First Cohomology Group alld OuL( G)
Chapter II. Classifying Spaces and Group Cohomology
IGI > p,
then
'!lIp. Proof. If A eGis maximal, normal, abelian and
But:r centralizes B, so in the exact sequence
1---+ B ---+ A ---+ '!l I p---+ 1 r acts trivially on both B and '!lIp. This induces a long exact sequence in cohomology
then we are done. With A as above, if there is an N and C(N) C C(G) then consider the homomorphism 7r
<J
G with GIN = '!lIp
P
¢: G---+GIN ---+C(N) c G By assumption, the terms with coefficient group A are 0 for v coboundary map is an isomorphism .. On the other hand
while, since '!lIp acts trivially on B,
HV('!llpi B) = ('!llpyank(B). Hence, rank(B) must be 1, and we have that
By assumption A is not cyclic so
A = B x '!lIp
> O. Thus, the
where p: '!llp--+C(N) is some injection. We have Ker(¢) = N and so ¢2 is trivial. Define
f..L: G---+G by f..L(g) = 9 . ¢(g). Clearly, f. L is a homomorphism, but since f..L2 = id, f. L is actually an automorphism. Suppose f. L were an inner automorphism. Then there is an h E G and f..L(g) = hgh- 1 for all g E G. Since f..L(n) = n, for all n E N it follows that h E Cc(N). If h does not belong to N then Cc(N) . N = G and (h, C(N)) = Cc(N) so h E C(G), and f. L is the identity. If hEN then h E C(N) c C(G) and once more f. L is the identity. Hence j.J must be an outer automorphism. But all remaining cases are classified by the previous two propositions, and it is easy to show the theorem is true for DB and the semi-dihedral groups. Indeed, for the semi-dihedral groups this is true because we have
n 1 D2 n = 7L/2 - X-I 7L/2 c 7L/2 n
X
-1+2n-1 7L/2 = SD 2n+1 ,
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
and C(D2n) = C(SD2n+l). Thus, the construction above gives an outer automorphism of SD 2 n+l. For
Ds = {x,y!x 2 =y2=(xy)4=1}, the map interchanging x and y is a suitable outer automorphism. The theorem follows. 0
Remark. 8.9 also holds if p is odd and G is abelian since in this case G either has a direct summand 7L/pi with i ~ 2 and hence !Out! is divisible by (p - l)pi-l, or is an elementary p-group with Out(G) = GLn(lFp). When p = 2 and G is abelian 8.9 continues to hold provided IGI > 4.
o.
Introduction
In this chapter we discuss the role of classical invariant theory in determining and analyzing the cohomology of finite groups. Typically, one has a subgroup of the form H = (7L/p)n C G and we note that im(res*: H*( Gj TFp)-+H*(Hj lF p)) is contained in the ring of invariants under the action of N G (H) / H on H*(H;TFp), (II.3.1). In some cases, see e.g. (11.6.8), it is possible to describe the entire cohomology ring of G in this way, but more often they contribute important but incomplete portions which are assembled using restriction maps to give the most important pieces of H*(G; lFp), see (IV.5). In the first section we give some of the basic techniques for determining rings of modular invariants. In §2 we study the Dickson algebras, the rings TFp[X1' ... ,xnJGLn(lFp ). These algebras playa basic role in describing the cohomology rings of the symmetric groups in VI. In §3 we apply some of the results of §2 to prove a very important theorem of Serre. Then in §4 we determine the groups H*((7L/p)n; TFp)Sn which are very useful in understanding the cohomology of the groups of Lie type, VII. Finally, in §5 we prove the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem, one of the most important and effective tools in the theory, and one which underlies most of the calculational results in the remainder of the book. This is by no means an exhaustive exposition of invariant theory, which is a vast subject with many ramifications into algebra and combinatorics. A good reference for further discussions is [StJ.
1. General Invariants We begin by considering the group A 4 , the alternating group on 4 letters. -It can be written as a normal extension
94
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
1. General Invariallts
where K ~ 2/2 x 2/2 is the Klein group with generators x, y and the ~enerator T of 7l/3 acts by T(x) = y, T(y) = x + y. Passing to cohomology
It follows from (II.3.1) and (II.4) that
im(H*(A4;lF2))
'--t
H*(K;lF2) = lF 2[a,b]
(where a is dual to x and b is dual to y) is contained in the subring of invariants
lF 2 [a, bJZ/3 . The action is given by T(a) = b, T(b) = a + b on the generators and it extends multiplicatively to the entire polynomial algebra. Thus a2b) = (T(a))2T(b) = b2 (a + b) = b2 a + b3.
T(
How can we obtain the ring of invariants lF 2 [a b]Z/3? The simplest method d t' fr h th . , , a mg om t e 19 century, is as follows. If we consider the effect of field extension lF 2 [a, bJ ::::;:. lF4 @1F 2 lF 2 [a, bJ
=
lF 4 [a, b] ,
95
2: ni Vi where the Vi run over the irreducible representations and n'i is the dimension of Vi. Consequently, the trivial representation can only appear once, and the result follows. 0 In particular, applied to the situation above, we see that IF 4 is a splitting field for 2/3 and IF 4 @JF 2 I = IF 4 EB IF 4 where the first representation is T I---t (3, a primitive third root of unity, while the second representation is T I---t The claim, (*), follows immediately from this. More generally the argument above shows
(5.
Theorem 1.2 Let G be a finite group, and suppose the order oj G is prime to the characteristic oj a field IF = IF pr, then, given an action of G on the n dimensional vector space IF \Xl, ... , Xn I with 'basis Xl, ... , x n , it extends to an action on the polynomial ring IF[Xl' ... ,xn ] and, for any extension field JK/lF
we have
with the same action of 2/3, we claim first
Indeed, the action of 2/3 extends to a (graded) module structure over the gr?up ring lF2(2/3) by setting (2: AiTi)w = 2: Ai(Ti(W)). But, since 2 is pnme to the order of 7l/3, the group ring is semi-simple by Maschke's Theorem and thus ,splits as a direct sum
On the other hand, after tensoring up, we can split the vector space into the irreducible representations afforded in IK(Xl,' , . ,:rnl, and that usually makes the calculation of the invariants in degree i much easier. In counting the number of invariants we often find the Poincare series convenient. Here the Poincare series of an invariant subalgebra (R*)C ~ R* of a graded IF -algebra is defined as 00
lF2(71/3)
= lF2 EB I where
I ~ lF4 .
Here the action of 7l/3 on the IF 2 summand is trivial, and the action on I is multipli:ation by the units 7l/3 ~ lF4. (Explicitly, the idempotents which gIve the splItting are (1 + T + T2) for the lF2 summand and (T + T2) for the IF4 summand.) Consequently, in each dimension we have a splitting
b~
lF2[a, b]i
= IlF 2 [a, bJi EB lF 2[a, b]~/3 .
pc(R*)(t)
Proof. Und~r these circumstances the regular representation, i.e. the representatIOn VIa left multiplication on the group ring, has the decomposition
L dim
Jl<'(Ri)C{i .
i=O
Returning to our example, we have IF 4 (a, b) = lF4 EEl lF4, where the action on the first summand is multiplication by (3, while the action on the second is multiplication by (j. Indeed, a specific choice for the generator fl for the first . a + (3b, whIle . h = a + ':>3' ;-2b C onsequen tl y, TJiJJ ;-t+2J fiJ) summand IS I 2 = ':>3 1 2' and the invariants now have a basis of the form
f1f~· with i
This splitting is preserved on tensoring up, i.e. tensoring over IF 2 with a larger field.
Le~ma 1.1 Let IF be any field oj characteristic prime to the order oj the fimte group. G, and let IK/lF be a splitting field Jor G, i.e. a field over which the g~ou~ nng decomposes as a direct sum 2: Mi (IK) where kIi (IK) is the i x i matrtX nng over IK. Then, there is one and only one IK summand in the sum above for which the action map G x JK-+JK is trivial.
=
+ 2j == 0 mod
3.
This equation implies j == i mod 3, so the general solution is hhfrl Jim, Jf Ji Jfl Jim, or ffl Jim. It follows that as a ring lF 4 [a,bjz/3 ~ lF 4 [J{,Ji](hh) with the single (cubic) relation (hh)3 = Ur)(Ji). In particular this ring has 2 Poincare series 1 + x ~3 , and so must t.he ring of invariants IF 2 [a, bl z / 3 . (1 - x ) However, we cannot assert that the relation is that holding above. In fact, calculating, we have
i
96
Chapter Ill. Modular Invariant Theory
1. General Invariants
(a + (3b)(a + (ib) = a2 + ab + b2 3 a + (2a2b + aab 2 + b3 3 2 a + (ia b + (3 ab2 + b3.
Sometimes it is possible to filter V via invariant submodules VI C V2 C '" C Vk = V where we already know the invariants on the quotients Vi/Vi-I and piece together the structure of the invariants on V from that of the quotients. The key technique here involves the consideration of a single extension
Thus, generators in degree three over lF2 are A = ff + f? = a 2b + ab 2, and B = (3ff + (If? = a 3 + a 2b + b3. Reversing the calculation ff = (lA + B, f? = (3 A + B. It follows that for these generators the invariant algebra becomes
j
lFda, b]Z 3 since A2
+ B2 + AB
=
lF2[A, B](C)/(C 3 + A2
is the expansion of
ff f?
+ B2 + AB)
Applying 11.6.8 we obtain
Using II.5.1 we can in fact prove f{
This gives rise to the long exact sequence in cohomology
,
Theorem 1.3 H*(A 4;lF 2) ~ lF 2[a,bl Zj3 ~ lF 2[A,B](C)/(C3+A 2 +B 2 +AB) with deg(A) = deg(B) = 3, and deg(C) = 2.
Theorem 1.4 Let
97
be normal in G and suppose [G: K] is prime to p, then
im (res* (H* (G; lFp)-+H*(K; lFp ))
which is useful because HO (G; A) = A G. From this point of view the most important step in the determination of V G is determining the connecting homomorphism 6. Remember that this is determined by lifting the element in CO(V/VI ) which represents the cohomology class to CO(V), taking the coboundary there, and then lifting this coboundary back to CI(Vl)' Here are some examples of how this process works.
Lemma 1.6 a. Let 7l/2 act on IF 2 [Xl, X2] by interchanging the generators then IF 2 [Xl, X2]Z/2
is exactly
= IF2[XI + X2, XIX2]
.
b. Let 7l/2 act on IF 2 [XI,' " , X4] by interchanging the first and second generators and the third and fourth generators. Then j
IF 2[Xl,X2,X3,X4]Z 2
We now discuss some techniques which enable us to do expicit calculations in special cases. Here is an extension of (1.4) which is very useful in building up invariant subrings for G from the knowledge of the invariants for certain subgroups.
where M2 = XIX3
+ X2X4
=
IFdxI +X2,X3 +X4,XIX2,X3 X4](1,M2)
satisfies the relation
Lemma 1.5 Let p be a prime, G a finite gro'up, and G = UgiH be a coset decomposition with respect to H where Sylp( G) c H. Let V be any IF p( G)mod~lle and VI-! the lFp(H)-invariants. Then ~ gi maps VH to itself and has image exactly VG.
Proof. Let A = IF 2 [XI + X2, XIX2] C IF 2 [XI, X2]' Then we can write IF2[XI, X2] as the direct sum AEBAxl. In particular there is an exact sequence ofIF 2(71/2) modules A - + IF 2 [Xl, X2]-+ AXI,
Proof. Let 9 be an element of G. Then 9 ~ gi = ~ g<.pg(i)hi(g) using the
and lF21xI, X2] can be written as an extension of trivial lF2(Z/2) modules. Passing to cohomology
notation preceeding (II.5.l0). In particular, for v E VH, g~gi(V) = ~gi(V), G H so ~ gi(V) E V c V . Moreover ~ gi(~ gi(V)) = IG: HI ~ gi(V), and since IG: HI is prime to p it follows that ~ gi restricted to VG is just multiplication by a unit. 0 This process in many cases can be used with computers to obtain explicit rings of invariants. However, it does require techniques for handling the invariants of p-groups in order to be effective. This is usually more difficult.
H*(71/2; A) ~ H*(71/2; IF2) 0 A
= Il e i A,
where ei is the non-zero element in Hi(71/2; IF 2 ) = IF 2. This decomposition is natural with respect to 6 in the sense that 6(e i 0 a) = ei U 6(1)a and 6(1) = e 1 0 (Xl + X2) since 6(XI) = (1 + T)XI = (Xl + X2) E HI (71j2; IF 2 ) 0 A. Thus 6 is an injection and (a..) follows.
98
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
1. General Invariants
To prove (b.) let B c JF 2 [Xl, ... ,X4] be given as A0A = JF 2 [XI + X2, XlX2, X3 -+ X4, X3X4J. Consequently the polynomial ring decomposes as B EEl Bx} EEl BX3 EEl BXIX3. Let VI = B, V2 = VI EEl BXI EB BX3. Then in the exact sequence the quotient V2 /VI is just two copies of B. <5 is determined by 8(XI) = e l 0 (Xl -+ X2), 8(X3) = e l 0 (X3 -+ X4)' Consequently, 8 has kernel B{(XI -+ X2)X3 -+ (X3 -+ x4)xd which lifts back to BM2. It remains to determine the extension by BXlX3' Using the determination of <5 we can equally deter~ine HI (71/2; V2), as e l 0 (BM2 EB (B EB B)/im<5) and <5(XIX3) = e l 0 M 2. This completes the proof. 0
Example 1,9 The cohomology of J l . In II.6.9 we noted that H*(J I ;JF 2) = IF dXI, X2, x3F':/7X TZ/3 where the group 7l/7 x T 7l/3 has the matrix generators j,9 described in II.6.9, Using the techniques here we determine this ring of invariants in two steps as follows, first determining IF 2 [x 1, X2, X3] Z/7, and then using the projection operator 1 -+ j -+ j2 on the resulting invariants to obtain the answer. To obtain the 7l/7 invariants tensor with lFs and change bases so lFs 0]!<'2 lFd x l,X2,X3] = lF S [Yl,Y2,Y3] with g(Yl) = (7Yl, g(Y2) = (iY2, g(Y3) = (iY3 since the eigenvalues of 9
Corollary 1.7 Let the dihedral group Ds = Syl2 (S4) act on IF 2 [Xl, ... ,X4] by permuting coordinates. (It has generators (1,2), (1,3,2,4) and contains the subgroup ((1,2), (3,4))') Then, setting 0"1 = Xl -+X2-+X3-+X4, 0"4 = XIX2X3X4 we have IFdxl,." X4]Ds
where M3
= IF 2 [0"1, (Xl -+ X2)(X3 -+ X4), xIX2 -+ X3x4, 0"4](1, M 3)
= (Xl -+ X2)X3 X4 -+ (X3 -+ X4)XlX2.
Proof. The invariants under (71/2)2 = ((1,2), (3,4)) are clearly A 0 A = IF 2 [XI -+ X2, XlX2, X3 -+ X4, X3X4], and the remaining generator for Ds can be taken as (1,3)(2,4). But this acts on the previous invariant subring by ex0 changing the generators in pairs. Thus the result follows from (1.6).
Corollary 1.8 Let K
c
Ds be the Klein group ((1,2)(3,4), (1,3)(2,4)), then
IF 2[XI"",X4]K = IF 2 [0"1, (Xl -+ X2)(X3
-+ X4), XlX2 -+ x3 x 4, 0"4](1, M2, M 3, NhM3) .
Proof. Use the subgroup ((1,2)(3,4)) and (1.6) to determine the invariants under this subgroup. Now apply (1,3)(2,4). Note that it leaves M2 invariant, and exchanges the polynomial generators in pairs. The proof is now direct.
o Remark. These last two calculations, although treated here primarily as examples, are actually very important in numerous calculations of H*(G; IF 2 ) for explicit G which occur in the study of the sporadic groups of rank three and four some of which are discussed in Chapter VIII. Example. Using the results above one can prove that IF 2[Xl, ... ,X4]A4
= IF 2[aI, a2, a3, a 4] (1, b6)
where (72 = XlX2 + XlX3 + XIX4 + X2X3 + X2X + 4 + X3X4, (73 = XIX2X3 + XIX2 X4 -+ XIX3 X4 + X2X3X4 and b6 can be given as the sum L XiX~X~ where (i, j, k) runs over the images of 9(1, 2, 3) for 9 E A 4 . J
99
=
.
( o~
00 011)
are (7,
(?
and
(i·
Note that
1
A ='IFs[Y~,Y~,Y~] C lFS [Yl,Y2,Y3]Z/7 and the set of co sets of A in the full
polynomial ring can be identified with the set IFS{YIY~Y~ I 0 ::; 'i,j, k ::; 7}, and a monomial is invariant if and only if i -+ 2.1 -+ 4k == 0 mod (7). Thus the invariants are identified with a hyperplane in lF~ and, including 1 there are exactly 49 monomial generators. Note that with respect to this new basis the action of ! is !(yd = Y2, !(Y2) = Y3, !(Y3) = YI so most of these 9 invariant monomial generators are free under the action of !. Explicitly there are 42 free monomials in the basis of the form v, ! (v), and f2 (v), where 3 2 3 5 2 4 2 6 4, 2 4 5 6 2 the v run over the set YIY2, YIY3, YIY3, YdhY3, YIY2, YIY2Y3, YIY2, YIY2Y3, YiY~, YiY~Y~, YiY~Y~, YIY~Y~' YrY~Y~, and YrY~Y~ together with the six fixed generators (Yl'!J2'!J3)i, 1 ::; i ::; 6. Thus, for each of the free generators the projection operator gives a copy of A, while each fixed generator gives a term A Z / 3(YIY2'!J3)i. To find A Z / 3 tensor with IF 4 obtaining IF 64 [YI, Y;, y~] which has a new basis Zl, Z2, Z3 with !(Zl) = Zl, !(Z2) = (3Z2, !(Z3) = (i Z3, and the invariant subring is IF 64 [Zl, Z2Z3, z~](l, z~). Thus we have determined the Poincare series for H* (h; lF 2 ) as
(1 - x21)(1 -+x21) (1 - x3)(1 - x 7 )(1 - x14)(1 - X21) x4 -+ X5 -+ x6 + X7 -+ 2x 8 -+ 2x 9 -+ 2Xl0 -+ (1 - x 7 )3
-+ xlI -+ X12 -+ x I3 -+ X14
x4(1 -+ x 4) (1 - x 3)(1 - x 7 )(1 - x 14 ) (1 - x)(l - x 7 )2 21 1 + x4(1 -+ X -+ x2)(1 -+ x4)(1 -+ x 7) + X (1 -x 3)(1 - x 7 )(1 - x 14 ) 1 -+ x 21
----~~--~~--~~ -+----~--~--
but the numerator in this last expression can be written
(1 -+xS)(1 -+x 6)(1 - X14 ) (1 -+ x2)(1 - x 2) so the entire Poincare series simplifies to
100
2. The Dickson Algebra
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
(1 + xS)(l + x 5 )(1 + X6) (1 - x4)(1 -x 6 )(1 -x7 ) as asserted in II.6.9. The rest of the determination of the invariant subring in the original' polynomial algebra JF 2 [Xl, X2, xs] is direct and depends only on getting explicit generators. In the next section we will determine the ring of invariants under the entire GL S (JF 2) as the Dickson algebra JF 2[d 4, d6 , d7] where the di are given explicitly in Example 2.3. Here, note that the eigenvectors of g, Yl, Y2, and Ys, discussed above are explicitly given as ((7Xl + X2 + (ix3), ((ixl + X2 + (ixs), ((ixl + X2 + (7X3) respectively so that the invariant element in dimension 3, X = YlY2Y3 can be written
Examples 2.1 For n = 2, p = 2, D 2(Xl, X2) = XIX2(X2 + Xl). For n = 2, = 3, D 2(Xl, X2) = XlX~ - XrX2 = XIX2(X2 - Xl)(X2 - 2Xl). More generally, for n = 2 and arbitrary p we have
p
p-l
XIX2
Xl
=
X2 :
det
X2
xPn
Api-l Xn
( Xn
i-I
xP 1 xP 2
~p
Xl
Xl p" pn X2
~pi-l
)
... Xnpn
In particular
since the ring of invariants must be closed under the action of .4(2). Finally, we can check that x2 =I d6 so we have all the generators in II.6.9 now given explicitly where y = d4 , fJ, = d6 , and z = d7·
Dn(XI l • •• , Xn) Dn(xf., ... , X~) (Dn(XI, ... ,xn))P. Clearly Dn,i(h, ... ,in) = det(G)Dn,i(Xl, ... ,Xn ) for iI, ... ,fn and G as above. Expanding Dn+l (Xl, . .. , Xn, X) with respect to the bottom row we have
2. The Dickson Algebra In this section we study the ring of invaria.nts IF p [Xl, ... ,x n ]GL (JFl'). These results will be remarkably useful in the sequel. We need the matrices n
( Xl
Vn(Xl, ... ,Xn)
eXI) .
Now consider the (n x n) minors of Vn+I(Xl, ... ,xn+d with respect to the last row, and let
Dn,i(Xl,' " , Xn)
xr
II (X2 -
8=1
(1.10) after expanding out. From the axioms for the Steenrod algebra in (II.2) we have I = Sq2(X) = + x~ + x~ + xlxi + X{X3 + xix3
101
~2
Xn
PH)
... xP 1 P x 2 ...
Xl n-l xP 2
x nP
x nP
n-l
= det(Vn), so Dn(XI, ... , Xn) is a homogeneous polynomial of degree ( ~) p_ 1 . Note that Dn =I 0 since, for example, the term
Let Dn (Xl, ... , Xn)
xlx~xf ... Xf-l occurs once and once only in its expansion.
Let h, 12, ... , in be some other basis for the IF p-vector space spanned by Xl, .. ' ,Xn, so h = LaijXj, 1 :::; i :::; n. Let A be the n x n matrix with entries a'ij so we have AVn(Xl, ... , Xn) = V(h,···, in) and Dn(h,.··, in) = det(A)Dn (Xl, ... , Xn). Thus, Dn(Xl, ... , Xn) is an SLn(JF p) invariant but not a GLn(IFp) invariant. However the term Dn(Xl, ... ,xn)p-l is, in fact, a GLn(lFp) invariant.
Dn+l(Xl, ... ,Xn,X)
=
n
Dn,n+lXP -Dn,nxP
n-l
+ ... +(-)nDn,lX
or D n+l (Xl, .. . , Xn, X) is equal to
(*) Dn (Xl, ... , Xn)
[x
pn
-
dlx
pn
1
-
+ ... + (- t-Idn_Ix P + (- t(Dn)P-1x]
where d j = Dn,n+l-j/D n . Here, note that the element dj is contained in the quotient field Q(JFp[XI,"" xn]), and that it is a GLn(lFp) invariant. But more is true. Lemma 2.2 a. D n+l (Xl l • • . , xn+d = Dn(XI, ... , Xn) TI(;.z;n+1 - f) where f runs over all vectors in the n-dimensional vector space over JF p spanned by Xl, . ~ . Xn . b. d j E JFp[XI,'''' Xn], 1 :::; j :::; n - 1.
Proof. Regard (*) as an expansion of Dn+l (Xl, ... , Xn, X) over the polynomial ring in X with coefficients in the quotient field Q(JFp[XI,"" Xn]). Now consider the polynomial
102
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
pn
Pn(X) = Xpn - d1x Clearly, if we set x =
f
1
2. The Dickson Algebra
+ ... + (_ t+ l D~-IX.
E (Xl, ... ) x n ), then the last row of
Vn+I(XI, ... ,Xn , 1) is a linear combination of the first n rows so D n+l (Xl, X2, ... ,X n , 1) = O. Since Dn(XI, ... ,xn ) =I 0 it follows from (*) that Pn(j) = 0, and there is a factorization over the quotient field
Pn(X) =
II
(x - f).
Since the roots f all belong to lFp[XI, ... , xnl it follows that the coefficients 0 of Pn(x) also are contained in IFp[XI,'" ,xnl and the lemma follows.
Examples 2.3 When P = 2, n = 2, we have d l =:=
xi + XlX2 + X~
d2 = D2 = XiX2 When n
+ XIX~ .
= 3 we have
dl
xt + xi(x~ + X2 X3 + x~) + XI(X~X3 + X2X~) + xi + x~x~ + x~
d2
xi(x~ + X2 X3 + x~) 4 XIX2 X3
d3
+ xi(xi X + X2 3 + X22 X34
+ x~x~ + x~) + xlxi x3+
103
Proof 2.5 First Q(lFp[Xl,'" ,xn ]) is generated by Xl, ... ,X n over Q(An). But these and the elements Ji = I:~ aixi are precisely the roots of Pn(X) and are all contained in Q(lFp[XI," ., xn]). Thus Q(lFp[Xl,' .. Xn]) is the splitting field of Pn(x) over the field Q(An). Moreover, since Pn(x) has no repeated roots it is separable and it follows that the extension is Galois. We now determine the Galois group G. Since lFp C An it follows that for g E G we have g(I:nixi) = I:nig(Xi), ni E lFp. Moreover, since g acts to permute the roots of Pn(x), and, indeed is determined by its action on these roots, it follows that g(I:nixi) = I:ni(I:gijXj) so 9 E GLn(lFp). Conversely, given 9 E GLn(lFp) it fixes An and hence Q(An), meanwhile acting as an automorphism in Q(lF[XI, ... ,xnJ) by construction, so 9 E C. The lemma follows. 0 We return to the proof of Dickson's theorem. Consider again the integral extension IFp[XI"" ,xnl over An· Since Q(lFp[XI"'" xn]) is a finitely generated extension of Q(An), it follows that IF p [Xl, ... ,xnl is a finitely generated extension of the integral closure of An in Q(An). In particular the integral closures of An and IF p [Xl, ... ,xnl both have the same transcendence degree n. But An is generated by precisely n elements over IF p' It follows that these elements are polynomially independent, and so An = IF p [dl, ... ,dn = Df:,-ll. On the other hand a polynomial ring in n variables over a field IF is integrally closed in its quotient field (see e.g. [La]). It follows, also that IF p [x I, ... ,xnl is integrally closed in its quotient field. Moreover
4 2
D3 = XiX~X3
+ XiX2X~ + xixix3 + XiX2X~ + xlxix~ + XIX~X~ .
The following theorem of L.E. Dickson is basic. Theorem 2.4 The ring of invariants IFp[XI,' .. , xn]GLnClF p ) is a polynomial algebra, and is generated by the elements d l , d2, ... , dn = Df:,-l constructed
above, i.e.
Proof (Following C. Wilkerson [W)): First note that IFp[XI,'" xn] is integral over the ring spanned by db ... , dn - 1 , D~-l which we will temporarily denote An. This is so since the integral elements are closed under sum and product, and from (**) contain Xl, X2, ... , Xn . Consider next the quotient fields Q(An) and Q(lFp[xl, ... ,xnD. Lemma 2.5 Q(IFp[Xl, ... , xn]) is Galois over Q(An) with Galois group GLn(IFp).
is the ring of GLn(lFp) invariants in lFp[Xll " ., xn]. But lFp[XI, ... , xnl is integral over An, so the intersection above is integral over An in its quotient field, and, since An is integrally closed, therefore equals An. The proof is complete. 0
Remark 2.6 The degree of dj(Xl,'" ,x n ) as a (homogeneous) polynomial in Xl, ... , Xn is pn _pn- j = pn- j (~ -1). In particular, in the range of dimensions < pn the p-adic expansion of any product d~l d~2 ... d~n~; D~-l)j has the form Slp n - l + S2p n - 2 + ... Sn-IP + 8 n with P - 1 2: 81 2: 82 2: 83'" .2: Sn 2: 0, and for any such p-adic expansion there is a unique product as above having this degree. Thus, in degrees less than pn the invariants only occur when the p-adic expansion has the form above, and in each such dimension the space of invariants is one dimensional. Example 2. '7 Consider the regular embedding
which takes 9 E (Zjp)n to the permutation of the pn points of (71/p)n induced by h 1-+ 9 + h. The normalizer of (reg)(71jp)n is the semi-direct product
ItH
3. A Theorem of Serre
Chapter Ill. Mod ular InvariallL Theory
(71jp)n xa Aut ((71jp)n). (See (VI.l) for details.) Indeed, let (3 E Aut((Zjp)n). Then (3(h + g) = f3(h) + f3(g) so the permutation which we again call f3, h f-t f3(h) satisfies f3 . pg(h) = f3(g + h) = f3(g) + f3(h) = P(3(g)(f3(h)) and f3. pgf3-1(h) = P(3(g) (h). Similarly for the converse. But Aut((Zjp)n) = GLn(Zjp)! Consequently, when we pass to cohomology we have (regr
H*(Spn; lF p ) - - + H*((Zjpt;lF p)G L n(lFp =
(E(Vl,"" v n ) ® lF p [b 1 , ... , bn ])G
L
(lFp[Xl"'" xn]®E(el, ... , en))GLnClFp)
Definition 2.8 a. In Z[Xl,' .. , xn] ® EZ(el,' .. , en), let D n,8l, ... ,8k be defined as
1
e2
X2
x2
~pBk
Sl
<
Xlp"-' n-l x P2
Xl ~p8k
X2
:
.. en
en
where 0 ::;
iI
~pSl
e2
k!Det
Xl
S2
< ... <
~p81
Xn Sk ::;
Xn
rv
lFp[d 1 , ... , dn ] EB EBlFp[d l , ... , dn ]M n ,81, ... ,8k
Previously we proved that a complete set of invariants for the action of G Ln (IF p) on IF p[x 1 , ... ,x n ] can be obtained using determinants (Dickson's Theorem). We will now outline the generalization of this result (due to Mui [MuD to the calculation of the invariants of the GLn(lFp) action on A = lFp[Xl" .. ,x n ] ® E(el, ... ,en), an algebra isomorphic to the mod p cohomology of (Zjp)n, p an odd prime. We will therefore assume that the Xi are in degree 2 and the ei in degree l. We begin by constructing some invariants for this action.
el
for 0 ::; 81 < 82 < . " < 8k ::; n - 1 will be GLn(IFp) invariants. We can now state Mui's generalization of Theorem 2.4:
n(lFp)
by (II.4.3). Clearly, the polynomial elements in this image are contained in the Dickson algebra lFp[b l , ... , bn ]GLn(lFp) which we have just analyzed. In the next section we will show that im(reg)* n 1Fp [b 1 , ••. , bn ] is precisely equal to IF p [b 1,"" bn ] GLn(lFp) .
( e1
Using our previous notation, we see that the elements
Theorem 2.9
)
PSl
105
~psk
1
n-l
x Pn
Xn
n - 1 and the matrix for the preceeding
determinant is filled out with k columns of the form (:':
1
to have n
where a double summation is taken over k = 1, ... , nand 0 ::; n - 1. Furthermore the generators satisfy the relations
Sl
< ... <
Sk ::;
M~ ,8 = 0,
Mn) 81 • • . Mn Sk '
= (_1)k Ck-l)/2 Mn , 8 1,""
S
k
d kn -
l .
This extension of Dickson's result is proved by inductively showing that any invariant decomposes as above, using the fact that the ring of invariants is finitely generated over the (polynomial) Dickson algebra. The case n = 2 was originally proved by H. Cardenas, [Card]. We refer the reader to [Mu] for full details for the general case.
3. A Theorem of Serre The following theorem of Serre, [Se2], is a key result in the study of the general structure of the cohomology ring of a finite p-group. It shows that for any non-elementary p-group G, the subring of the cohomology ring H*(G; IFp) generated by the Bocksteins of the elements in Hl (G; IF p) ~ Hom( G; IF p) has transcendence degree strictly less than the dimension of HI (G; IF p) as a vector space over the field IF p' It should be compared with the corresponding situation for an elementary p-group (p odd) (Zjp)r with cohomology ring
H*((71jpy; fp) ~ E[el,"" er ] ® fp[b l )··· br ] where bi is the mod (p) Bockstein of ei i = 1,2, ... r.
rows and columns. b. Let D n ,81, ... ,8k E A be the mod p reduction of
Dn,Sl , ... ,8k
•
Note in particular that
Theorem 3.1 Let G be a p-group, not elementary abelian (i.e. G '1- (Zjp)k). Then there is an n ~ 1 and elements VI,"" Vn E Hl(G; fp) such that f3(Vl)U ... U f3( v n ) = 0 where f3 is the mod p Bockstein.
Proof We first want to construct a central extension. Since Also, if A E GLn(IF'p), then (AD)n,81, ... ,Sk = Det(A) Dn ,81, ... ,Sk·
106
3. A Theorem of Serre
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
107
G
Hl(G; Z) = [G, G] There are now two cases: it follows that 11": G-+H1(G; 7Llp) = H1(G; 7L) @717Llp is an epimorphism. Let G' = ker(11"), and now do this once more, that is to say we let Gil be the kernel of 11"':G'-+H1(G';7Llp). Notice that GIG' = H 1(G;7Llp) ~ (7LlpY and similarly G' IG" ~ (7Llp)s. Both G' and G" are characteristic subgroups of G. That is, they are taken to themselves by every automorphism of the p-group G, since every automorphism of G induces one of H*(G; 7Llp) , and consequently, takes ker(11") to itself. In particular G" is normal in G. Hence we have the extension sequence
G'IG" o~
II
~GIG"~
II
(3.2)
o
~
--t
G
I
GIG"
+ ~ Tij(eiej)P
LAibf
(I: Aibi)P since f3(ei) = bi . Thus, the theorem is true in this case by setting Vi = 11"*(L Aiei).
GIG' ~Aut(G' IG") = Aut((7Llp)S) .
--t
LAibf
~o.
(7LlpY
Since G' I Gil is abelian its group of inner automorphisms is trivial and consequently 0' is a homomorphism. Note also that Aut((7Llp)S) = GLs(JFp), the general linear group over the finite field IF p' In particular, since GIG' is a p-group, the image of 0' is contained in a p-Sylow subgroup of GLs(1Fp). The order of GLs(1Fp) is (pS _l)(pS _ p)(pS _ p2) ... (pS _ pS-1) = P 8(8;-1) w with w prime to p. (This is well known, and easily checked by simply looking at the possible images of the basis vectors e1, e2, ... , es .) Moreover, a p-Sylow subgroup can be given as the upper triangular matrices with 1's along the diagonal. Moreover, we can assume im(O') is contained in this subgroup. Let V c (7Llp)S = G'IG" be the vector subspace spanned by e2, . .. ,e s . G'jG" ~nd form the quotIent v = 7Llp. In particular we can write the quotient G = GI(G"(e2,'" ,e s )) as a central extension 7Llp-+G-+GIG' and we have the commutative diagram ~
aP
[f3(L Aiei)]P
Let the data for this extension be given by
o
above are non-zero. In this
0:
case we have
GIG'
(7Llp)S
0':
1. One or more of the Ai in the expression for
--t
2. a = LTijeiej' We may assume /12 =f. O. Now form Ti-:/a U e3 e4'" en = e1 e2e3 ••• en. Let A(p) be the mod p Steenrod algebra and Qi E A(p) be the ith odd dimensional Milnor primitive element which acts by Qi(e) = bPi. We have
11"*(Qn-1Qn-2" ·Q2Qlf3(ele2··· en)) = 7f* (Qn-l ... Q2Q1f3( TI/a U
Since (*) is a totally non-trivial extension we have that (3.2) is a non-trivial c~ntral extension. Let a E H2(GIG') be the class of the extension (3.2). Smce the extension is non-trivial a =f. O. Thus a = L Aibi + L/ijeiej where at least one of the coefficients in not O. Consequently we have that 7("*: HI (G/G'; Fp)--::+HI(G; Fp) is an isomorphism as is thus the projection induced map HI(G; Fp)-+H1(G; IFp). Note also that a E H2 (GIG' ; IF p) is in the kernel of
=
o.
Qn-1'" Q2Q1f3(e1'" en) = S(b1b~ ... b~n-1) where, in this case S denotes the symmetric polynomial given by summing over all permutations of 1, ... ,n, and then multiplying by the sign of the permutation. In particular we have
l
0
o.
en))
But calculating explicitly we have
(3.3) ~
e3 ...
Qn-I ... Q2QdJ(el ." en) = det
(
L
bbP
bP1
b2 bP2 bP2
~-1
n b )
~~-,
liHlH1II1:
~
This is the polynomial Dn (b 1 , ... , bn ) considered in our discussion of the Dickson algebra, and is (up to sign) the product of all the linear summands (b il + ail +lbil +1 + ... anbn ), where the leading coefficient is always 1. But each of these linear terms is the mod p Bockstein of the corresponding term in the e/s. Thus this case, too, is finished and the proof is complete.
D
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
108
4. The Invariants in Jf*((Zjpt;Wp) Under the Action of Sn
4. The Invariants in H*((zjp)n; Wp ) Under the Action
of Sn In this section we calculate some invariants which will be used in an essential way to calculate the cohomology of the general linear groups away from their characteristic in Chapter VII. Let W be an arbitrary field having any characteristic except 2. In the polynomial ring in n variables over W, W[Xl' ... ,xnl, recall that the ith symmetric monomial is the sum
These a i are invariant under the action of the symmetric group Sn on W[Xl,'" ,xnl by permuting the Xj, and in fact, one of the fundamental theorems of the theory of equations states that
= W[al,""
anl .
Now we consider the discriminant Dn = TIl:Si<j:Sn(Xj - Xi)' Clearly,
D~
E
W[al,"" an]
so Dn is algebraic and even integral over W[al," . ,anl. Moreover, the rational function field W(Xl,' .. ,x n ) is Galois over W(al,'" ,an) with Galois group
Dn is invariant under the alternating group An and since the index of An in Sn is 2 it follows that W(al' ... ,an)(Dn) = W(Xl' ... ,Xn)An provided that the characteristic of Wis not 2 which is one of our current assumptions. Proposition 4.1 The integral closure of W[al" .. , anl in the quotient field W(al,"" an)(Dn) is exactly
W[al,'"
1
anl
+ W[al,""
anlDn .
That is to say, an element a E W(al 1 • • • , an)(Dn) is integral over W[al,"" an] if and only if we can write a = A + BDn with A and B contained in
W[al,"" an]. Proof. Consider the field extension W(al,' .. 1 an)(Dn) over W(al,' .. , an). The
Galois group of this extension is Z/2 and if T is a generator, then T(Dn) = -Dnl so for a = A + BDn we have that a is a root of
x2 - 2Ax
+ (A2
and, for B i= 0 this is the minimal polynomial for a. Consequently, a is integral if and only if (1) 2A E W[al"" ,an] and (2), A2 - B2 D~ E W[al,"" anl. Hence we need to show that if B
= O/A,
then A must divide 0 and B is already contained in JF[al," ., an]. To do this we look at
(~) Dn E W(Xl""
,xn ) .
Since the integral closure of W[al' ... ,anl in JF(Xl) ... ) xn) is W[Xl' ... ,xnl it follows that
h
W[Xl,"" xnl Sn
109
- B2 D~)
and we have
CDn
=
Af
for some non-zero f E W[Xl)' .. , xnl. It is standard that W[Xl)' .. ) xnl is a unique factorization domain, see e.g. [Hu], pg.164. Thus we have unique decompositions into irreducibles (up to multiplication by a non-zero constant coming from W), Dn = TIl:Si<j:Sn(XjXi), 0 = TICi, f = TIfj, A = 11Ab and
II
Ci
II(Xj - Xi) =
II Ak IIfj
so it follows by the uniqueness of decomposition into irreducibles in a UFD that each Ak is either equal to a Ci or an (Xj - Xi). If all the Ak are c/s then we are done. So assume Ak = (Xj - Xi). Since A is invariant under the action of Sn it follows that (x r - X 8) is also a divisor of A for any r > s and thus Dn divides A. In this case let A' = A/ Dn. Clearly A' = 11 A~ with A~ irreducible, and each A~ is a factor of 0 so A' divides O. Also
CDn/A = CIA' = C' , and clearly for 9 E Sn we have g(C') = (-l)gC'. Now, let us assume by induction that the result is true for n -1. (Its truth for n = 2 is clear.) Then expand C' = Arx~ + Ar_lX~-1 + ... + Ao with each Aj E W[XI' ... ,xn-ll. We have for each 9 E Sn-l C Sn, (g(xn) = x n ), that g(A j ) = (-l)gAi' so, by our inductive assumption, since each Aj is integral over W[a-l," ., a-nl where a-i denotes the ith symmetric polynomial in Xl, ... , Xn-1 1 we have
110
4. The Invariants in H*((7Ljp)7l; fp) Under the Action of S7l
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
. Next, we claim that there is an identity
and D n - 1 divides G'. From this, using the Galois action it follows that D divides C' and G' = Gil Dn with Gil invariant under the action of S . Als; G If " n . IS m~egra1 over F [0'1, ... ,an] so, since F[al"" ,an] is integrally closed in, If Its quotient field IF(al,''' ,an) it follows that G E F[al"" ,an]' The proof of the proposition is complete. D
n
LTr(n) = (1
+ x)(l + x 3 ) ... (1 + X 2n -
1
) .
r=O
We verify this for n Theorem.4.2 Let A = F[Xl,"" xn] 0 E(el,"" en) be a tensor product of a polynorr:zal al?ebra on even dimensional generators and an exterior algebra on odd d2menswnal generators where IF is a field of characteristic not equal to two. Let Sn act by permutation on the Xj 's and the ei's, then
ASn
111
= 2 where the sum is
+ x 3 + x4 3 (1 + x)(l + x ) .
1+x
IF[al,' .. , an] ® E(h, 13,· .. , hn-l)
where
Now, the proof of the claim proceeds by induction. To obtain the inductive step note that
Example. h = Lei while
13 =
Li(Lj#i Xj)ei'
Proof of 4.2 Let a E ASn. Then
a =
L AIei
1 •••
A
Th' lid - , 1, ... ,r) (i~, ... ,ir)' us a IS comp ete y etermined by Ao, AI) A(1,2), and so on untIl A(1,2, ... ,n)' Also, each A(l, ... ,r) satisfies g(A(1, ... ,r») = (-l)g A(1, ... ,r) for any 9 E ~r C Sn,where Sr fi~es the last n-r coordinates, while g(A(1, ... ,r») = A(1, ... ,r) If 9 E Sn-r where St fixes the first n - t coordinates. It follows from (4.1) that B(1, ... ,r)Dr
where B(1, ... ,r) is invariant under Sr x S~_r and hence belongs to
IF[al,'''' ar]0lF[a~, ... , a~-rl w here a~l =. a'l (x r+l,···, x n' ) A n, d 0 f course, I.f A (1, ... ,r) has the form above then there IS a unique invariant under Sn of the form A( e· .. e + ... The Poincare series for such invariants has the form l, ... ,r) 1 r . x 2r (r-l)/2 x r (1 - x 2 ) '" (1 - x2r)(1 -x 2) ... (1 _x 2n - 2r ) 1 [r2 (1 - x 2) ... (1 - x2n) X 1
The claim follows, and the Poincare series for the ring of invariants is
•
(1 + x)(l + x 3 ) ... (1 + X 2n - l ) (1 - x 2 )(1 - x 4 ) ... (1 _x2n)
ei r
wh~re 1= (il"'" ir) with 1 ::; il < ... < ir < _ n and AI E IF[x 1, .. ·) x n]' Moreover, sin~e a is invaria~t under Sn it follows that, given (i 1, ... , ir) as above, there IS agE Sn WIth g(t) = it for 1 < t < rand g(A( ) =
=
I :1
I
A(1, ... ,r)
:1
(1 - x2r+2) ... (1 - X2n )] (1 - x 2) ... (1 _ x2n-2r)
1 J
1
I 1 i
I
which is the Poincare series of the asserted ring in the Theorem. Of course, this is not yet a complete proof. Certainly, the elements in the ring of the theorem are invariants, but it is not yet clear that this ring actually injects into the invariants - there might be some relations. However, to prove that the ring actually injects it suffices to show that hh ... hn-l f. O. This in turn can be done by induction. Write
I t
J
where the superscript on the f's denotes that it involves only the first n - 1 of the variables or all of them depending on whether it is n - 1 or n. Using the formula above and multiplying out we find f 1 f 3'" f 2n-l
fn-l )(n-l) = (f 1n-ljn-l 3 ... 2n-3 an-l + a n-2 x n + ... + xn en
which is non-zero by our inductive assumption. Now the proof is complete. D
112
5. The Cardenas-Kuhn Theorem
ClwpLer 111. Modular Invariant Theory
113
For closed systems we have
5. The Cardenas-Kuhn Theorem
~ K ~ G is a closed system with L an elementary p-group. Then there is a commutative diagram
Lemma 5.3 Suppose L
As we have seen, when LeG there is an action of Nc(L) on H*(LiIFp) where the action of L
IS
T
---+
'G,
Wc(L)
Nc(L)/L,
=
and we can write im(res*: H*(G;IFp)--+H*(L;JF p )
s: H*(L;IFp)wc(L)
Let]{ be a third subgroup so that L C ]{
c G.
.
Since WK(L)
s: Wc(L)
we have an inclusion of rings *. H*(L.JF H*(L·JF )WK(L) res. , p )Wc(L) C ,p and corresponding to the transfer in group cohomology we have a map going
Proof Consider the double coset decomposition G = UiLgiK. If g-l Lg c K then g-l Lg is already conjugate to L in K, say g-lLg = k- 1 Lk for an appropriate k E K. Consequently we can assume g-lLg = L. In the remaining cases g-lLg n K is a proper subgroup of g-l Lg as 9 runs over the gi above in the double coset decomposition. Sublemma 5.4 Suppose LgiK and LgjK both satisfy g-1 Lg = L, then
the double cosets are equal if and only if the left cosets ¢(gi) W K (L) and ¢(gj)WK(L) are equal in Wc(L), where ¢: NG(L)-+Wc(L) is the projection.
in the opposite direction, T:
H* (L; IFp) WJ{(L) --+H* (L; IF p) Wc(L)
' d by taking a left coset decomposition of W c(L) with respect to obt ame . () _ '"' ,(a) We have ev. WK(L), vVc(L) = UigiWK(L) , and settmg T a - uig t idently that
im(T)
s: H*(L;IFp)Wc(L)
d . res* is multiplication by the index of WK(L) in Wc(L), that i~ to an T W L)\ Al . an H*(L'IF )Wc(LLmodule map, smce b \vV (L ) . K ( . so, T IS , P . ' say, y c· }~* (L'IF )Wc(L) though T is not a nng map m (va) - vT(a) for any v E ~ ,P' vv: (L) th ~enera~ In the case when VVK (L) contains a p-Sylow subgroup of c e map T is surjective and the discussion above shows 't' 5 1 Suppose L C KeG is a sequence of subgroups and W)K(L) . -,.'H* (L IF )WK (C as a i p tains a p-Sylow subgroup of W c(L), then T spltts ~~;ect sum H*(LiJFp)Wc(L) EBKer(T) of H*(L;IFp)Wc(L)-modules.
P ropOSl Ion
->"-
We now return to the proof of the lemma. The double coset formula gives that res* . tr*: H* (K; IF p)-+H* (G; IF p)-+H* (L; IFp) can be written as the sum of the compositions
•
There are certain important cases in which we can be more precise about im(res*: H*(G;IFp)--+H*(L;IFp)) . 't' 5 2 LCKCG is a closed system, also called a weakly closed sys-r->"• • 1 d . t D e fi III IOn. tern, if every subgroup of K which is conjugate to L m G IS a rea y conJuga e
to L in K.
Proof of 5.4 We can regard the double cosets LgK as corresponding to the orbits of the left co sets of K in G under the action of L. From this point of view the coset gK is fixed if and only if g-l Lg C K, and hence, under our closure assumption and choices of the gi, if and only if gi E Nc(L). Moreover the total variation of gi is LgiNK(L) = giNK(L). 0
Since L is p-elementary and tr* == 0 for any V the gi E Nc(L), and the theorem follows.
s: L we need only sum over 0
From this we obtain the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem,
s:
Theorem 5.5 Let L K ~ G be a closed system with Lap-elementary subgroup of G. Suppose also that IWc(L): WK(L)/ is prime to p, i.e. WK(L)
contains a p-Sylow subgroup of Wa(L), then the image of res*: H*( G; IFp)-+H* (L; JF p)
114
6. Discussion of Rela.ted Topics and Further Results
Chapter III. Modular Invariant Theory
6. Discussion of Related Topics and Further Results
is exactly equal to the intersection
H*(L; IFp) Wc(L) n im (res*: H*(Kj IFp)---'lH*(Lj lF p)) Example 5.6 The 2-Sylow subgroup of the sporadic simple group M12 is given as the semi-direct product (71/4 x 7l/4) XT (71/2 x 7l/2), where if a, b are the generat?r~ of the ~wo. copies of 7l/4 and c, d generate the two copies of 7l/2 then catbJ c = a-tb-], dad = a, dbd = ab- 1 . The subgroup V = (71/2)3 = (a 2 , b2 , c) is normal in this group with WSy12(M12) (V) = D s , and we will see in res·
.
Chapter VIII that the image of restriction H*(SyI2(M12)'lF2)---+H*(V'IF ) . exactIy H* (V; IF2 )D 8. Moreover, it is true that V c SyI2(M12) " IS C M12 is 2a closed system. Thus the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem gives us the image in this group of H*(M12; IF'2)' This group SyI2(M12) ~ccurs in several other contexts as well. It turns out that there is a unique non-split ~xtension
(71/2)3
~ E---'lGL 3(IF 2 )
which has SyI2(M12) as .its 2-Sylow subgroup. (Here the action of GL 3 (IF 2) on (71/2)3 = IF'~ is the usual one.) Consequently, WE(V) = GL 3 (lF'2) contains W Sy12 (M12) (V) as a 2-Sylow subgroup and im (res*: H*(E; IF'2)-----+H*(V; IF2)) is exactly IF'2[el, e2, e3]GL3(JF ) = IF'2[d 4, d6 , d7 ]. This group E is contained in the exceptional (continuous) Lie group G2 as a maximal (finite) subgroup, and the composition 2
res·
115
res·
There are some further special cases where calculations have been made or where there are unexpected connections between the topics in this chapter and other areas of mathematics. The Dickson Algebras and Topology
As we point out in (VIII.5) 1 the cohomology of the classifying space of the fourteen dimensional compact Lie group 02, H*(B02; lF2) = lF 2 [d4, d61 d7] is GL3 2 a copy of the Dickson algebra IFd x 1' X2, x31 (lF ) • It is known that the Dickson algebra lF 2 [X1,'" ,xn ]CLn(lF2) for n ~ 5 cannot be realized as the mod (2) cohomology ring of any topological space, and there were claims in the literature that neither could the Dickson algebra for n = 4, But recently W. Dwyer and C. Wilkerson, [DW] , have actually constructed such a space, V4. Its loop space DV4 has finite mod (2) cohomology, H*( DV4;IF 2) = IF'2[X7l/(X~) ® E(Xll,X13), but is not the mod(2) homotopy type of any Lie group. It is conjectured that there is a connection between the space V4 and the Conway sporadic group C03, in much the same way that BG2 is related to M12 in [M2] (as described in (IX.3)) but the exact connection, if any, awaits a cohomological analysis of the Conway sporadic group C03' There is also a connection between the J 1 and G2, due to F. Cohen, which we discuss in VIII.5, IX.3, which shows that in an appropriate sense, at the prime 2, BlI can be regarded as the total space of a fibration with fiber G2 and base Bc 2 •
H* (B C2 ; IF'2) -----+ H* (E; IF 2) -----+ H* (V)GL 3 (JF 2 ) is an isomorphism in cohomology.
The Ring of Invariants for SP2n (IF 2)
Remark. A brief comment on the history of the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem might be in order. The original idea for this decompostion occurs i~ H. Cardenas' thesis [Card], where it was exploited only for the groups S 2. The senior author of this book in 1965, and H. Mui in approximately 1974 both realiz,ed that this could be extended to give the critical step in studying the rmg structure of the groups H* (Sn; IF'p), but both formulations were restricted to the situation occurring in the symmetric groups so their work should properly be regarded as subsumed in Cardenas'. However, N, Kuhn gave the very useful general formulation of Cardenas' ~dea that we proved above in [Kl and since Kuhn's formulation is applicable m a very large number of cases including most of the groups of Lie type and some of the sporadic groups we felt that calling this basic calculational result the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem was appropriate.
Recently P. Kropholler, motivated by conversations with J.F. Adams, studied the invariants in IF2[X1,.'" X2n] for the groups of Lie type SP2n(lF 2), (see (VII.3) for a discussion of the finite Chevalley groups of symplectic type). He found the following structure for the ring of invariants IF 2 [x 1,,'"
X 2n
lSP2n(JF2)
IF dW3, "/5, ...
-
,"/2n-1 +1,
d2 2 n - l , ••• ,d 2 2 n _2 2n - 2 ] (1, "/2,,+d
where W3 = I':,ih XZXj, Sq2('1.V3) = "/5, and for i ~ 2 we have Sq2i ("(2 i+1) = "/2 i+ 1 +1' As an example there is a classic isomorphism Sp4(lF 2) = S6, and
IF'2[X1, X2, X3, X4]S6 where' Sq2(W3)
=
"/5
= IF 2[W3, "/5, ds, d12](l,"/9)
,
= I':,xtXj, Sq4("(5) = "/9 = I':,x~Xj, and Sq4(d s ) = d 12 ·
11 G
Chapter Ii 1. IVlod ular I IlVariallt Theory
The Invariants for Subgroups of GL 4 (lF 2 )
There are other special isomorphisms like that of 56 with Sp4(lF 2) between some of the smaller finite Chevalley groups in different families. For example (VIL3.8), SLdJF 4 ) = Sp2(JF 4 ) ~ A 5. This and many others are consequences of the classical isomorphism GL4(JF2) ~ As. (See (VI.6.6) for an explicit construction of the matrices which realize this isomorphism.) There is a second A5 in As. This A5 acts on JF 2 [Xl, ... ,X4] by tensoring over IF 2 from the action of 55 on (Z)4 where (Z)4 consists of those elements (nl,' .. ,n5) E (Z)5 with L ni = 0, and 55 acts by permuting coordinates. These two A5 's are both contained in A6 and, in fact, are the two non-conjugate copies of A5 there. These groups occur as parts of maximal subgroups in many of the sporadic groups. For example the semi-direct product (Z/2)4 XT A6 is maximal in the Mathieu group M 22 , while (Z/2)4 XT A7 is maximal in M 23 and is the normalizer of both maximal 2-elementary subgroups (Z/2)4 in the group Me L. Likewise, A5 is important in the Janko groups hand h where one has a maximal group of the form Z/2-tG-t(Z/2)4 XT A 5. Using the techniques sketched in (UI.l) we have been determining the rings of invariants for thE)se actions on IF 2 [Xl, ... ,X4]. In [AMI] the invariants for the first A5 were determined. They have Poincare series with denominator (1 - x 5 )2(1 - x12)2 and numerator 1 + 2x 3
+ 3x 6 +x 8 + 6x 9 + 2xll + 9X l2 + X14 + 10X 15 + X16 + 9X18 + 2x 19 + 6x 21 + x22 + 3x 24 + 2X27 + x 30 .
The second A5 has invariant sub ring of the form
The invariants under A6 are a degree two integral extension of the invariants for Sp4(lF 2),
and finally
lF 2 [Xl,
...
,X,d A7 = JF 2 [d s , d 12 , d 14 , d 15 ](1, blS, hl, b22 , b23 , h4' d27, b45 ) .
Further details can be found in [AM2].
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems
o. Introduction In this chapter we introduce the main computational techniques for determining the cohomology of finite groups. We start with the various forms of the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence, first from a geometric point of view in §1 and. then from a purely algebraic point of view, following work of A. Liulevicius and C.T.C. Wall, in §2. The work in §1 is particularly well adapted to wreath products, and we determine the cohomology ring of G 2Z / P in terms purely of H* (G; IF p). Then, in §2 we determine the rings H*(G; lF 2 ) where G is the dihedral group D2n or the generalized quaternion group Q2 n • Section 3 concentrates on chain level techniques. In particular we use these techniques to get some information on cup products and the ring structure in H*(G;JF p ) induced from the map BG x BG-tBG defined in (11.1.8). Section 4 considers detection theorems for the cohomology of wreath products and we prove some theorems of D. Quillen which are very important in understanding the cohomology of symmetric groups and finite groups of Lie type. Then §5 proves most of the general structure theorems for the ring H*(G; lFp), Evens' finite generation theorem, and many of Quillen's results on the role of the p-elementary subgroups of G in determining H*(G; lFp). In particular we describe Quillen's proof, [Ql], of the Atiyah-Evens-Swan conjecture on the Krull dimension of H*(G; lF p ). The groups of Krull dimension at most one at all primes are the periodic groups and they are studied and their cohomology rings determined in §6. We also review the results of Suzuki-Zassenhaus which completely classify such groups there. Finally, in §7 we use the ideas and techniques developed in this chapter to sketch a modification of Steenrod's construction of the Steenrod Squares and p-power operations. These results summarize most of the techniques available for calculations in group cohomology until the more recent work of Peter Webb which we discuss in Chapter V.
118
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems
1. The Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence:
Geometric Approach Let H
cG
be a normal subgroup, and consider the induced surjection Bp: Bo-+Bo/H.
Note that B;I (*) consists of those points of the form {tl' ... ,tr , 91, ... ,9r} with each 9i E H and this is just BH C Bo. Every continuous map f: X-.Y can be turned into a (Serre) fibration by replacing X by the space of paths in the mapping cylinder of f which start at X, E':,~~f). (Projecting a path to its initial point gives the equivalence to X and projecting to its endpoint gives the map to Y c:::: M (j).) The fiber over y E M (j) is the set of paths which end at y, E':.~f). Consequently there is a natural inclusion of BH into the homotopy fiber of the map B p , the space of paths E;~/:I, in the mapping cylinder of Bp by sending (b, t) to (b, t) in the mapping cylinder for b E BH. Lemma 1.1 The inclusion BH C E;~/: sending B E Bo to ,(t) = (t, B) in the mapping cylinder is a homotopy equivalence.
1. The Lyndon-Hochschild--Serre Spectral Sequcilce: (;collwtric Approach
liD
it can actually be analyzed using homotopy theory or geometric constructions. More often, in order to study the differentials we need an algebraic reformulation which will be given in the next section. Here, though, we will consider a special case where geometric methods prove the spectral sequence collapses and E2 = Eoo for a small, but very important class of groups. Wreath Products Let Zip act on
P x G xv· .. x ~ by cyclic shifting, i.e. p-times
T(911 92,· .. ,9p) =
(9p, 91, 92,· .. ,9p-l)
where T is a selected generator for '!lIp. Then, with respect to this twisting, define the wreath product G ('!lIp as the semi-direct product GP XT '!lIp· A classifying space for G ( Zip can be explicitly given as (Bo)P xZ/ p E z / p
where '!lIp also acts on (Bo)P by shifting coordinates cyclically. In this case, since (Ba)P = Bop, the homotopy fibering above becomes an actual fibering
Proof First, from the homotopy exact sequence of the fibration ... .'-+ 7ri+l (Bo/ H )-+7ri(E;~/: )-+7ri(Ba )-+7ri(B a / H )-+ ...
we see that E;~ /: has the homotopy type of B H, since, by a theorem of Milnor, the path space E;~/: has the homotopy type of a CW-complex. Next, from the factorization of the inclusion BH C Ba through E;~/: constructed above
l
EBe/H Be *
---t
Ba
we see that A induces an isomorphism in homotopy. Consequently, by Whitehead's theorem, it is a homotopy equivalence. 0 Corollary 1.2 There is a spectral sequence converging to H* (G; A) for untwisted coefficients A with E~,j term Hi (G I H; HI (H; A)). This is just the Serre spectral sequence for the fibering above. [eE], [Brown] and [Sp] provide good descriptions of spectral sequences for readers interested in more background material. The spectral sequence above is called the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence ([HSj, [L]). Sometimes
(1.3) where the normal subgroup H is (G)p. We now consid.er the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence in this case, with A = IF p. First we study the E 2 -term, so we study the action of Zip on H*(Ba; lF p) 0···0 H*(Ba; fp) = H*((Bo)P; fp) . \.
V'
."
./
p-times
Lemma 1.4 Let A be a 9raded IF p -vector space, A = It Ai. Then as a lFp(Zlp)-module the p-fold tensor product AP = A 0 ···0 A wher~ the. a.ction of Zip is by cyclic shifting, is a direct sum of free modules w~th tnvwl modules, the trivial ones generated by elements of the form (Ai 0 Ai 0· . ·0 Ai) as the Ai run over a lFp-basis for A. Proof. A IF P basis for A0· . ·0A is given by the elements A1:10· . ·0 Ai p as the Aij run over a ZIp-basis for A. Moreover, the action of Zip preserves (possibly up to sign) this basis. Suppose, then, that Ti(Ai1 0· . ·0 Ai p) = Ai! 0· . ·0Aip. Since p is prime, Ti generates Zip unless i == 0 mod (p), and we can assume T fixes this element as well. But this implies Ai! = Ai2 = ... = Ai p. Consequently, except in this case, the Ti on a basis element give a total of p distinct basis 0 elements, and consequently a copy of the free module fpClllp).
,-;llap1.(,J" 1V. ::11)('('11':11
SCqlIClll"CS
and
U('\.CCt.lOll
Theorems
1. The Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence: Geometric Approach
T'his lemma makes the calculation of the E 2 -term routine for G ~ Zip. However it remains to study the differentials. In order to do this we enlarge the dom~in of discussion. The fibration (1.3) above is a special case of a fibering associated to an arbitrary space X,
XP xZ/ p E z / p
(>,)pxid ----+
B z/ p
id --+
where, as above, the action on XP is by cyclically shifting coordinates. In this context the lemma above gives directly
The next result is of basic importance in topology as well as in studying the cohomology of groups. Theorem 1.7 Let X be a CW -complex. Then the Serre s.p~ctral.s.equence for the fibering (1.5) above collapses, i. e. for that fibering E~,J = E:fl for all i,j.
Proof We start by observing that any element in Eg,j corresponding to an invariant for a free IFp(Zlp) module is an infinite cycle. The map Xli ':::::' XP
X
Ez/p--+XP xZ/ p E z / p
is a ZIp-covering. Consequently we have the transfer map tr: H* (XP; IFp)--+H*(XP xZ/ p E z / p; IFp) and (res· tr)* = (1 + T + ... + TP-l):H*(XP;IFp)~H*(XP;IFp). But the image of ET is exactly the subset of H* (XP; IFp)z/p associated to the free IFp(Z/p)-modules. Thus, these classes must survive toEoo. It remains to consider the classes A 0 ... 0 A, "----v----"'
Since X is a C1V-complex there is a map (A): X ~K(Z/p, n) so that (A)*(bn) = A where K(Z/p, n) is an Eilenberg-MacLane space and bn E Hn(K(Z/p, n); IFp) is the fundamental class. Consequently we have maps of fibrations
1 1
K(Z/p, n)P xZ/ p E z / p
Bz/p
and passing pto Serre spectral sequences, at E 2, the class (bn)P maps back to (A)P in Eg,n . Consequently, if (bn)P is an infinite cycle, then (A)P must be also. We now turn our attention to the right hand fibering in (1.8). Note that K(Z/p, n) is (n - I)-connected, so, below dimension np all the terms on the fiber (the vertical line Eg,*) come from invariants of IFp(Z/p)-free modules, and we have E;,j ;: : : 0 for 0 < j < np if i ~ 1. Consequently, if (bn)P has any non-trivial differential it must be dnp +1 , the transgression, taking EO,np to Enp+l,O. The terms on the line E~o are identified with the image of H*(Bz/p; IFp) in the cohomology of the total space of the fibration, and the fibration (1.8) has a section, y f-7 (x, x, ... ,x) xz/ p y where y projects to y in B z/ p and (x, x, . .. ,x) is some point on the p-fold diagonal in XP. Consequently, the cohomology of the base injects into that of the total space, and it is not possible that any term along the base line (E*'O) can be in the image of any differential.
It follows that (bn)P is, indeed, an infinite cycle, and the proof is complete. D Remark 1.9 The argument above using (1.8) shows more generally that the class A 0"·0 A survives to Eoo for H*(Z/p (Sn; IFp), n < 00. '---v---' n
Thus we have a complete calculation of H* (Z/p (Z/p; IFp) and more generally,
H*(Z/p2Z/p2'" 2Zlp; IFp) '-
A E H n (X; IF p) .
p
(K(Z/p, n))P
---+
1 1
(1.5)
Corollary 1.6 Let Aij be a IFp-basis for H*(X; IFp), then, for the fib~rfng (1.5) above, the E2-term of the Serre spectral sequence has the form E.2,J = Hj (XP; IFp)z/p, while, for i > 0, E~,j equals 0 unless j = pr, an~ then E~'P7' ~ H7'(X; IFp) with explicit generators (Aij 0·· ·0AiJUBi where Bi 'lS a generator for H'i(Bz/p;IFp) = E~'o.
CA)!'
XP (1.8)
121
V
I
i times
for any i. Later we will study these groups much more carefully, since, for example, Z/p2' .. 2Z/p is the p-Sylow subgroup of the symmetric group Spi. ~ i times
We now provide an explicit calculation using this result.
Example. The dihedral group of order 8, denoted DB, can be identified with Z2 2Z2. First we note that
122
1. The Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence: GeollleLric Approach
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems
where the Z2 acts by exchanging generators, and the Ui are the usual symmetric classes. Observe that 0"1 = Xl + YI is a trace class and hence will multiply trivially with elements from the cohomology of the base, generated by a I-dimensional polynomial class e. T~erefore we obtain
H*(D8)
~
IF 2[e,u1,u2]j eu1 .
The action of the Steenrod Algebra is determined by Sql(U2) a fact which will be verified in (2.7).
= (U1 + e)u2,
Remark 1.10 This construction and 1.7 provide the basis for the construction of the Steenrod operations. We will give details in IV. 7. Also, a different proof of 1. 7, working at the chain level, is implicit in [SE]. In some ways that proof is more general than the one given here, but this one provides us with better control of cup products.
123
Ig11g211--+ Ill(g2)-1[(g2)-1l(g1g2)11 E B(Bz/p) lifts to give a map of principal fibrations BZjp-+{B;;1(BG,2)-+BG,2 to the fibration over the two skeleton of B(B z / p ). After this one extends the map by using the principal action and 0 extending over lifts of the individual cells of B G . This next result is very useful theoretically, and provides a nice application of our result on the cohomology of wreath products and the Frobenius map discussed in (II.5). Lemma 1.13 Let '!ljp-+E-+G be a central extension, then there 'is a finite n so that En = Eoo in the spectral sequence of the fibration (l.ll).
Proof. The Frobenius map associated to the inclusion ?ljp '------+ E gives a homomorphism rp: E-+'!ljp (SIGI, and, from (1.9), rp*(b 0··· 0 b) is non-zero '---v---"
IGI and restricts to blGI in H* ('!ljp; IF p) since ?ljp is central in E. Thus the class G I· ' EO,2I . fi 111'te cyc le 'm t 118 spectra1 sequence. Now write biGI m 2 IS an m
Central Extensions
7r
Consider a central extension Zjp-+E-+G and the associated fibration of classifying spaces
E2
= IFp[b IGI ]0 (E;'O
GI-l) .
EB··· EB E;,2 I
An easy induction shows that E21GI = Eoo.
(1.11) Lemma 1.12 The fibration (1.11) is a principal fibration with classifying map Bk: BG-+B(Bz/p) = K(Zjp,2). In particular, there is a unique cohomology class k E H2(G; IFp) which generates the kernel of
B;: H2(BG; IFp)---+H2(BE; IFp) . Moreover, k can be identified with the class of the extension described in 1. 6. 8. Proof. Since Zjp is central in E the multiplication map Zjp x E-+E is a homomorphism of groups. Consequently, it induces a map of classifying spaces BZjp x BE-+BE which defines the fiber preserving action of BZjp on BE and gives B7r the structure of a principal fibration. Then the Steenrod classification theorem, 11.1, constructs the classifying map. Since B(Bzjp) is a K(Zjp, 2) we have that the set of homotopy classes of maps f: X -+K(Zjp, 2) is identified with H2 (X; IF p) for X a OW complex, and the identification is explicit f ~ f*(L) for the specific element L E H2(K('!ljp,2);IFp) corresponding to the identity homomorphism, id: '!ljp-+'!ljp. Finally, the identification of k with the element corresponding to the class of 1.6.8 follows by an explicit chain level calculation. We omit the details of this step but in summary one proceeds as follows. First a choice of splitting E = G x Zjp is made so that Zjp acts from the right. This gives an explicit choice for the two dimensional co cycle representing the extension. Then one checks that the map on the two skeleton, BG,2, of BG to B(Bz/p) defined by
o
There is actually quite a bit more that can be said about the structure of the differentials in (1.11) using the fact that (1.11) is an induced fibration. The Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence for (1.11) has E 2 -tcrm H*(GjIFp)0H*(Zjp;IFp) and there is a map from the Serre spectral sequence of the fibration BZjp---+E(Bz/p)---+B(Bz/p) with E 2 -term H*(K(Zjp, 2); IFp) 0 H* ('!ljp; IFp) to the spectral sequence of the extension due to the naturality of the Serre spectral sequence and the commutativity of the diagram of fibrations
k
BG
---+
B(B z / p).
In particular the map is the identity on H*('!ljp; IFp) and is the map
L.
\jtmnge 01 ltings and the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence
Lemma 1.14
The map also commutes with differentials as well as cup products due to naturality, and consequently the differentials in the spectral sequence for K(Z/p,2) imply differentials in the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence of the central extension. In the spectral sequence for K(Zjp,2) the differentials are completely determined by the Kudo and Serre transgression theorems. We describe these results now. First the classes on the fiber have differentials as follows: d2 (ed = "2, then d3 (b) = (3("2). After that the differentials are given by i 1 d2P'i+1 (bPi) :::::; pp - ppi-2 ... pI (3("2). These give all the differentials when p = 2, but when p is odd there are also the differentials coming from the Kudo transgression theorem. They are given as follows: d2p - I CbP- I (3("2) = pi 1 (3pl(3("2), and generally, d2pi(P_l)+1(bPi(P-l)d2pi+lbpt) = (3d pi+l+l(b + ).
It w
is contained in the
125
kernel of the restriction map
res*: H*(E; Yip)--+H*(G; Yip)
2
then w is contained in the ideal (u) C H*(E; lFp ). Proof· The Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence of the extension has E 2-term H*(Zjp; H*(G; Yip)), and viewing the spectral sequen~e as in the illustrations above we can prove by induction that ub: Ei,j --+ Ei+2,j is surjective. for i 2: 0 and injective for i ?-.r - 1. (The failure of injectivity in the ran~e '/, < r - 1 com~s s~nce t.he E~,J terms are identically 0 for i < 0.) In pa~tIcular, writing E~n-t = Ft(Hn(E;Yip))jFi+l(Hn(E;Yip)), and using the fimt:ness of the filtration we see that F2(Hn(E; Yip)) can be identified with the Ideal (u). On the other hand, since w is in the kernel of res*, it lies in 2 pl(H*(E; Yip)), so w is contained in F2(H*(E; Yip)) and (1.14) follows. 0
2. Change of ~ings and the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence <J
The form of the first differential.
Let H --+ G--+G / H and let
... ---l>Cn ---l> ... ---l>C 1 ---l>Co---l>Z bP -
1
Iblbp -
1
be a resolution of Z over Z(H). Then we have •
bJJ - 2
~.
&2
0
b
Iblbp -
Lemma 2.1 1. Z( G) 0ZeH) Z = Z( G j H) as a left Z( G) -module 2. '" Z( G) 0Z(H) Cn --+ ... --+Z( G) 0Z(H) Co --+Z( G/ H) is a Z( G) resolution ofZ(GjH) .
2
~ ~
&
IblbP-11
Ibl
Proof. Let H U g2 H U g3H U ... U gmH U '" be a coset decomposition of G. Then Z(G) ~Z(H)Z as a (free) 'll-module has a basis (1), (g2), (g3), "', (gm), and the actlOn of G on these basis elements is given by g(gi) = grh(gi) = (grhgi) = (grgi) when we write g = grh in the decomposition above. This gives the first claim. Now the second is clear. 0
The form of the higher differentials and the Kudo differential. ?orol.lary 2.2 Let A be a Z(G)-module regarded as a Z(H)-module via the mcluswn Z(H) C Z(G), then there is an isomorphism
Ext~(G)(Z(GjH),A) ~ Ext~eH)(Z,A).
A Lemma of Quillen-Venkov <J
7r
Consider an extension of the form G--+E--+Z/p. Let u E H2(E;Yi p ) be 7r*(b) where b E H2(Z/p; lF p ) is the Bockstein of the fundamental class. Then we have the following useful result of [QV].
Proof. Homz(G) (Z(G), A) = HOmZ(H) (Z(H), A) = A. Thus the map Z(G)0ZeH): C---l>Z(G) @Z(H) C on passing to co chain complexes yields an isomorphism
126
2. Change of Rings and the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence!
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems
127
HOmZ(H)(C, A)--+HomZ(G) (Z(G) 0Z(H) C, A)
1
o
and the result follows.
8
Example 2.3 Let D 2n be the dihedral group D2n Let H
= (T)
COl
= {T, T I Tn = T2 = 1, TTT = T- 1} .
8
1
= Z / n. There is then an isomorphism
Ext~(D2n) (Z(T), A) ~ Ext~(z/n) (Z, A)
= Hf(Z/n; A)
coo
.
1 '0
The equation above is a typical example of the change of rings principle, i.e. the specification of Ext terms for a module over A as Ext terms for a simpler module over B where B c A is a subring. This change of rings principle allows us to give an algebraic construction of the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence. The idea is to first resolve Z over Z( G / H), then resolve each term of the resolution over Z( G), lift the boundary map in the resolution of Z and then make a guess that the boundary in the resulting doubly graded complex is of the form 8 + (-l)€d l where d l is the lifted boundary and 8 is the boundary in the resolutions of the terms in the original resolution of Z, and then start adding correction terms to make the resulting guess into an actual differential. Thus, to begin we obtain a diagram
t
Z
f---
Bo
If G = H X G / H is a Cartesian product the diagram above could be achieved by tensoring a resolution of Z over H with one of Z over G / H so we would have explicitly Cij = R j 0 Bi where R j is the jth term in a resolution of Z
over H, and
d
=
3N 01
+ (-1)j10 3E
would be the total differential. This motivates attempting to use the same formula with the diagram above. The difficulty is that, in general
d2
(3 82
+ (-l)j dlj) 2 + (-l)j 3d 1j + (-1)j- 1 dl ,j_ 1 3 + (-1)d 1 ,j- I d 1j
(-1 )d 1 ,j- 1 d1j
1a
1a
1a
COl
Cl1
C2l
1
1 '0
Z
+---
do
Bo
8
ClO
coo
€
1
8
1a
+---
1"
B1
is not necessarily zero. However, Ed1,j-ldl,j = d j -1 djE = 0, so the chain map dl,j-ld j is homotopic to zero, and we can construct a family of maps d 2{ Cji ----+C j -2,i+ 1 so that 3d 2j + d 2j 3 = dl,j-.ld lj . We add these in, maki~g a new (prospective) differential d = 3 + (-1 )J d Ij + d2j . Next we square thIS operator to find the deviation from being a differential, correct that deviation and iterate the procedure. We obtain a result due to A. Liulevicius, [Li], and C.T.C. Wall, tWa],
C20
dl
+---
1" B2
d2
+---
where the vertical sequences consist of Z( G) free resolutions of the B· 'so Next, as indicated, we lift the di's to obtain chain maps between the verti~al columns, so the diagram above now takes the form
Theorem 2.4 In the situation above there exist a series of Z( G) -linear maps drs:Csj----+Cs-r,j+r-1, so that if we setDm = U~=mCt,m-t' d = 3+(-l)sd 1s + 2:;:2 dz*, then d2 = 0 and the resulting complex is a resolution of Z over Z( G). Specifically, each dr* can be chosen so that (1) do = 3 is the vertical differential, (2) diEi = Ei-ldli, (3) 2:~=o di,*dk-i,* = 0 for each k; conversely, any map with properties (1), (2), (3) is a differential which makes the complex above acyclic.
2. Change of Rings and the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence
Chapen IV. Speclral Seqnences and Detection Theorems
Proof. We show first that any d with properties (1), (2), and (3) above makes the total complex acyclic. Filter Cij by FPC = L,i:;p Cij . The differential d preserves filtration, and the associated spectral sequence converges to H* (C). The differential in EO is precisely do = O. Hence E1 = 5, the resolution of Z by Z( G / H) free modules with which we started. Moreover, (2) implies that d 1 is exactly the differential d*, the differential in B. Since 5 is a resolution of Z it is acyclic, and E2 = Eoo = EGO = Z, hence C is acyclic. To complete the proof we must construct the maps dr * for r 2: 3. To begin we set drs = 0 if S < T. Now, suppose that drs has been defined on all Cij with i + j < v. Let f = - L,~=1 did r - i · We claim there is a map d r so that dod r = f. To prove this, it suffices to show that dof = 0 and E*f = 0, but this is direct
i=1
i=1 r
B3
j=1
1
r-j
I:: dj L di-jdrj=l
1
L ~ djdi-jdr-i
- ~dodidr-i
i
= O.
B2
i=j
1 1 1
0
which completes the proof.
We now illustrate the explicit resolution techniques above, by constructing resolutions for the dihedral groups D 2n and the quaternion group Q s ·
B1
The Dihedral Group D 2n
Bo
We will apply the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence to the situation obtained by using the index two subgroup Z/n <J D2n with quotient Z/2. The associated resolution of Z over Z(Z/2) has differentials which are alternately T - 1 and T + 1. Consequently, to begin we need to lift these maps to chain maps of resolutions of Z over Z(Z/n). Proposition 2.5 Let D2n = {T, To I T2 = Tn = 1, TTT = T-1}. Let E7 = 1 + T + T2 + ... + Tn-I, and C = Z(D 2n ), then the following is a comm1dative diagram of chain maps C
1 C
7-1 +--
T-1 r-1 +--
C
1 C
ET +--
-(rT+1)
ET +--
C
1 C
7-1 +--
-(T+1) 7-1 +--
ET
C
+--
1
rT-1
C
+--
Er
Proof. Note that TTT = TT-1T = T so 1. - (TT + 1) (T - 1) = - T - T + TT + 1, (T - 1) (T - 1)
•
o
Remark 2.6 The first non-trivial dihedral group Ds = Z/2 ( Z/2. Hence, 1.6 gives the structure of H*(Ds;JF 2 ). In particular, the Lyndon-HochschildSerre spectral sequence collapses in this case. But for the general case we still need to make an explicit calculation. We turn to this now. From the proposition we obtain the following diagram for D 2n which we have turned on its side for convenience.
i
r
r
dof
+ 1) = -E7(T + 1) = -(T + l)ET 3. (TT - 1) (T - 1) = T - T - TT + 1 -(T - l)(T + 1)= -TT - T + T + l. 4. (T - 1)E7 = Er(T - 1) = Er(TT - 1).
2. -Er(TT
129
€3
+--
T-l €2
+-T+1 t1
+--
T-1 to
+--
1 1 1 1 C
C
C
C
r-1 +-T-1 T-1 +-T+l r-1 f--
T-1 r-1 +--
1 C
1 C
1 1 C
C
Er f--
-(rT+1)
Er +--
-(rT-l)
Er +--(7'1'+1)
Er f--
1 1 1 1
T-1
C
f--
-(T+1) T-1
C
f--
-(T-1) r-1
C
f--
-(T+1)
C
T-1 +--
1 1 1 1 C
C
C
C
Er f--
rT-1
Er +-TT+1
Er f--
7T-1
Er f--
'0
Z
Note that (TT -l)(TT+ 1) = (TT)2 -1 = 0 = (TT+ 1)(TT-1) so d2 ::::: 0 and the construction of the higher differentials stops. It follows that alternating the signs on the columns above defines the total differential for the complex above as OT + (-l)j d 1 . For example, if n is even and we take our coefficients as JF 2 all the differentials are zero and Hi(D4m; lF 2 ) = (Z/2)i+1. It follows, in particular, that this resolution is minimal in the sense that, in each dimension, the number of free summands cannot be reduced.
C
We now apply the above result using induction and the central extensions
IT-l C
7r
Z/2 - - t D 2n --+ D 2n-1 to determine the rings H* (D2n; JF 2 ) for all n 2: 3. Here, to be explicit we use the presentations for D2Tl. given as +--.
= TT - T -
T +1.
D 2n = {x,ylx 2 =y2=(xy)2
D2n/[D 2n,D 2n) = Z/2xZ/2 and Hl(D2n;JF 2 )
=
1
n -
=1}.
Hom(D 2n/[D2n,D 2n],JF2 ) =
(2/2)2. We can choose explicit generators here as
x dual to x,
and fj dual to
130
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems
13l
2. Change of Rings and the Lyndon--Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence
y.
In what follows there will be no possibility of confusion so we will drop the bars and write these generators as x and y, respectively. The k-invariant for DB is xy. To see this note that it is natural with respect to restriction. So we have the diagram
desired. Of course, w is not uniquely determined yet, but it is when we make use of the additional requirement that the restrictions of w to the groups H 2 ((x);IF 2 ) and H 2 ((y);IF 2 ) are both zero. (This argument also shows that the k-invariant for the group Ds must be xy.) It remains to show that Sq1(w) = (x + y)w. This is again checked by using the restrictions to the two subgroups Gi(n). For example, restricting 2,,-2 to GJ(n) we see that w I---t xa + a 2 or xa where a is dual to (xy) . In either case Sql(w) I---t x 2a+xa 2 which is not zero. However, H3(D 2 n;IF2) = (x 3 , y3, xw, yw) so Sql(w) = Ax 3 +7xres*(w) an~ the o.nly way this is p~ssi.ble is if res* (w) = xa + a 2 and the image of Sq1 (w) IS the lmage of xw. A slmllar argument holds for the restriction to H3(G n (n)jIF2) and Sq1(w) = (x+y)w as asserted. 0
with a similar diagram over the inclusion of (y). Thus the restrictions of k to H2( (x); IF2 ) and to H2( (y), IF 2 ) are both zero. Consequently, since the k-invariant is non-trivial it can only be xy. It follows that xy = 0 in H*(D8; IF2)' More generally we have
The Quaternion Group Qa
Theorem 2.1 For the dihedral group D 2" we have
. )2} Proposition 2.8 Let Q8 be the quatermon gmup {T, T I r ? = T 2 = (TT, let C = Z( Q8), then the following diagram commutes
where x and y are one dimensional and w is two dimensional. Moreover, x and yare in the image from H* (D8; IF 2) under the projection D 2n -+ D8, and w is uniquely specified by the condition that res* (w) = 0 in H2 ( (x); IF 2) and H 2((y);IF 2). Finally, SqI(w) = (x + y)w. Proof. We use induction and the central extension D 2n -+D 2n-1. The key step is to determine the k-invariant. . n 2 There are two subgroups (Z/2)2 contained in D 2n: G J(n) = (x, (xy)2 - ), and GIJ(n) = (y, (xy)2n-2). It is clear that 1l'-1(Gi (n-1)) = D8(i) in D 2n for i = I or II. Thus the restriction of the k invariant to H2(G i (n - 1); IF 2 ) is a k-invariant for D 8 , but on restricting all the way to (x) or (y), the k-invariant must go to zero since, if not then the resulting extension over (x) would be Z / 4, and similarly for (y). This shows that k cannot be x 2, y2 or x 2 + y2. Hence w must be a term in the k-invariant and, since w restricts to 0 in both H2( (x); lF 2 ) and H2( (y); IF2 ) it follows that w is the k-invariant. We now apply the spectral sequence of the central extension
Z/2~D2n ~D2n-l . We have d2(e) = w, so d2(e 2j +1B) = e2j wB, and E3 = lF 2[x, y]/(xy = 0) (9 lF 2 [e 2 1. But for this E 3-term there are exactly n+1 elements in each dimension n, so, from the chain level determination of H*(D 2n ; lF 2 ) in (2.6), we see that E3 = Eoo· This shows that H*(D2n; IF 2 ) = IF2[X, yl/(xy = 0) (9 IF2[W] as
Now we consider the quaternion group Qs. As in the case of the dihedral groups we first need to lift the boundary maps in the B sequence to chain maps. We have
T-1
Er +--
+--
l- CTT'+,J
IT-, C
T-1 +--
In, C
l-CT+1J Er +--
T-1 +--
C
Er +--
T-1
C
+--
C
+--
l-CT+,J
l-CTT'+,J +--
C
l-CT-,J
l-Th'
IT-, C
C
+--
Er +--
C
+--.
Proof. Note that T(7 -1) = (7- 1 -l)T = T(7 3 -1) = T(7 2 + 7 + l)(T -1). Thus (7 - l)(T - 1) = (T(7 2 + 7 + 1) - l)(T - 1). But, since E T(7 - 1) = 0 we are free to modify the map by subtracting T E T , and we obtain (7 - l)(T - 1) = -(T73 + 1)(7 - 1) . Next, note that ET7 = E T, ET1' = l' E T. Consequently, -ET(1'7 3 -(1' + l)ET • The arguments for the next column are similar.
+ 1) 0
132
Chapter IV. S pcctra.l Scqucnces and Detection Theorems
Now, the situation changes, since di = T2 -1 = 7 -1 at all points. Thus, d 2 is non-trivial. In fact, taking account of the fact that d 1 is given by the vertical arrows in the propsition above, except we change the signs on every odd column, we calculate directly that 2
d2 = { -(7
o
+ 1)
Ci,2j-t~i-2,2j+l' i 2: 2 otherwIse.
2. Change of Rings and the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre Spectral Sequence
d2(e) = x 2+xy+y2 determines the d 2 -differential and E3 ~ lF2[X, y]/(x 2+y2+ xy)0lFde2]. Th.en th~ next differential d3(e 2 ) = Sql(x 2 +y2+xy) = x 2 y+xy2, and by comparmg WIth (2.9), there are no further differentials. The generalization to Q2n is similar, but the ring structure changes.
= 0, 1, 2,
j
=
4s, 4s
the k-invariant is x +y2 +w E H2(D2n-l; lF2). Consequently, H*( Q2n; lF 2) = lF 2 [x, y, e4J/(xy = 0, x 3 = y3) for n 2: 4. .<-....t D 2 n-l be the inclusion T ~ xV. Then we have the commutative diagram of extensions
Proof. Let j: Z/2 n -
2
Z/2
1
Z/2 n -
Z/2 n -
otherwise.
HO(Qs; F2)
H 3 ( Qs; F2)
Hl(Qs; F 2 )
H2( Qs; F2)
(That the differentials are as stated is clear. Then, note that the E4-term only has classes in the bidegrees stated, and, since the higher differentials go from (i, j) to at least (i + 4, j - 3) there can be no further differentials.) We now determine the rings H* (Q2Tl ; F 2) for all n 2: 3. We will use the K
~
central extension 7l/2 -) Q2n
--7
. .
D 2 n-l, and we start with Qs (see also V.1.9).
Lemma 2.10 In the central extension Z/2 ~ Qs ~ (Z/2)2
the k-'invariant in H2( (71/2)2; F 2 ) is x 2 + y2 + xV. In particular H* (Qs; F 2 ) = F2[e4](1,:x:,y,x2,y2,X2y = xy2), and x 3 = y3 = O. Proof. The three classes x 2, y2 and x 2 + y2 all give copies of (Z/4) x 7l/2 as 2 the resulting extensions while the three classes xv, x + xv, and xy + y2 all 2 give Ds. The only remaining non-trivial class is x + y2 + xV, which must, therefore be the k-invariant for Qs· Now we consider the spectral sequence associated to the central extension with E 2-tcrm H*((71/2)2; F 2 ) 0 H*(71/2; F 2 ) = F2 [x, y, e]. We know that
1
1
+1
In particular H* (Qs; F 2) is periodic with pe'liod 4, and
n 2: 4
2
Consequently, i
K
Z/2-tQ2 n -tD 2 n - l ,
Theorem 2.9 In the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectra:Z sequ~nce for Qs where H = (7), and with F2-coejJicients, we have E;'] = E;'] = F2 for i 2: 0, j 2: O. However, d3 i= o. Indeed, d3: E~,j+2-tE~+3,j is an isomorphism
= 0,1.
0
Lemma 2.11 In the central extension
Next we need to check d3. Note that d 1 d2 + d2dl = -TEo when we are on an even row. Consequently, d3 : C i ,O-tCi -3,2 is multiplication by T if i 2: 3. To obtain d3 on the next row, we must also take account of the term d3do, so d3 : Ci,l -tCi-3,3 is multiplication by -T7 3 for i 2: 3. For the next row we see that d 3 becomes zero. Then the process above repeats. This analysis shows more or less. formally that we have
for j
133
2
'-+
Z/2
c.-r
Q2 n
1 j '-+
1 D 2n-l
so that j*(k) i= 0 in H 2 (Z/2 n - 2 ;lF 2 ), but since n 2: 4 both x 2 and y2 map to zero, so the coefficient of w in the k-invariant must be 1. A similar diagram holds for (x) C D 2 n - l and (y) which both give Z/4 as the .extension. Consequently the k invariant restricts non-trivially here as well, but since w restricts to zero in both, it follows that the k-invariant is as asserted. We now apply the spectral sequence of the central extension. The details 0 are virtually identical to those above so are omitted.
Remark 2.12 The Q2n all have periodic cohomology with period four. Indeed, periodic (and minimal) resolutions are given explicitly in [CE], page 253. Such groups have been extensively studied both by group theorists and by topologists. We will discuss them more completely in IV.6. Remark 2.13 The groups Qs and D8 are examples of extraspecial 2-groups. These groups are built up as central products of copies of Q8, D s , and possibly a copy of Z/4. More precisely, suppose that G and H are finite 2-groups having the property that there is a unique copy of Z/2 in the center of each then G * H is the quotient G x H/.1(Z/2). We have the evident associativ~ and commutative properties of *, (G * H) * K ~ G * (H * K), G * H ~ H * G. Then the extraspecial2-groups are inductively defined, starting with G = {I} as the * sums G * H where G is extraspecial and H is either D 8 , Q8 or Z/4 as long as the resulting G H has a unique Z/2 in its center. One can verify the relation D8 * D8 ~ Q8 * Q8 and also Z/4 * Z/4 = 'lL/4 X 'lL/2 which is not extraspecial. Hence it is easy to write down all of these groups.
*
Each extraspecial 2-group is given as a central extension of the form 71/2 <J G~(7l/2)n and the K-invariant in H2( (7l/2)n; IF 2 ) is a symmetric ~on singular form. In [Q4] Quillen shows that the associated Lyndon-HochschildSerre spectral sequence with IF 2 coefficients for any extraspecial 2-group has 2j the property that E;'s = E;'o ® E?'s for each i and E?'* = JP'2[e ] for an appropriate j. This is a property which actually seems to happen quite infrequently for central extensions of 2-groups. Normally, in the higher terms of the spectral sequence one expects indecomposables to appear "in the middle" , i.e. in E~'s with neither r nor s equal to O.
3. Chain Approximations in Acyclic Complexes
3. Let G = 7llp where p is an odd prime, then a resolution of 7l over 7l( G) is given by ET
T-l
€
7lt--71(71/p)[eo]..-71(71/p)[el] t--71(71/p)[e2]"-'" . A contracting homotopy for the resolution above is given by the formulae
.
STl e2H 1 =
.
STl e2i for all i 2::
{Oe
j=fp-l J' -- p - 1 ,
2i+2
{O
= (Tj-l + Tj-2 + ... + 1)e2i+l
j=O j -j. 0,
o.
In practice, we often have to work with a chain complex In general one prefers to not work on the chain level, but sometimes it is unavoidable. For this reason we now discuss a basic technique for constructing chain maps. The situation is this: we are given a free complex over R( G) where R = 7l or a field Q, JP'q, etc .. €
0t--Rt--COt--C 1 t--C2t--··· which is acyclic. This means there is an R-linear map ¢: R~Co, which is, first, a chain map, and second, a chain homotopy equivalence (over R). (This is just a fancy way of saying that H*(C*) = Ho(C*) = R.) In particular, the composite map E' ¢:R~n is the identity. Note that E is R(G)-linear, where n is given the trivial R(G) action. However, ¢ cannot be, in general, R( G)-linear. As a consequence of the chain equivalence ¢, there is an R-linear contracting homotopy s: Ci~CHl' i 2:: 0 so that
D
®n £* ,
where C* is free over R(G) while £ is free over R(H). Since the te.nsor product of two acyclic complexes, free over R, is free over R and acyclIc, the above complex becomes a free resolution of Rover R(G) ®n R(H) = R:(G x H). Then, given SG, a contracting homotopy for C*, and SH, a contractmg homotopy for £*' we have Lemma 3.2 In the situation above, a contracting homotopy for the complex C* ®n £* is given by the formula sO = SG ® 1 + qx. ® SJJ . Proof. This is a direct calculation. We have 80 sO
+ s 0 8 0 = (8 ® 1 + (_l)sgn
® 8)(sG ® 1 + ¢E ® SH)
+ (sG ® 1 + ¢E ® SH )(8 ® 1 + (_l)sgn ® 8) (8sG + SG8) ® 1 + ¢E ® (8SH + sH8) + (_l)sgn ® 8(sG ® 1) + SG ® 1(( _l)sgn ® 8),
8s + s8 = 1 - ¢E . Examples 3.1 1. Let G = Z with generator T, then a resolution of Z over Z(G) is given as
= C*
but these last two terms cancel out, and expanding out the first two we obtain (1 - ¢E) ® 1 + ¢E ® (1 - ¢E)
=
1 ® 1 - ¢E ® ¢E ,
D
which is the result.
_ Ti-l + Ti-2 + '" + l)el s(eo) = 0, but sTieo - { (_(T-i+T-Hl+ ... +T-1)el i>O i
Example 3.3 Let V* be a free resolution of 7l over the ring R(G). Then, given p and the usual resolution W* of 7l over 7l(7llp) , we can construct a free a~tion of the wreath product G l Zip on the chain complex V* ® ... ® V* ®W*
'----v-----'" p
times
l :l(i
3. Chain Approximations in Acyclic Complexes
( 'h;~1'1 <:1' 1\;, ,~;pvcLrid Sequellces and DcLccLioil Theorems
C(Z(Zj2))0 ®z C(Z(Zj2))0 = Z(Z/2) [eo] ®z Z(Zj2) [eo] = Z(Z/2 x Z/2)[eo 0 eo],
by setting
T( VI ® ... ®Vp ® 0) (-1 )dim(v p ) L~-l dim(v;) (vp ® VI ® ... ® Vp-1 ® TO), while (gl,'" ,gp) acts as (glVl ® ... gpvp ® 0). Then, given an R-linear contracting homotopy Sc for V*, and the contracting homotopy in (3) of the examples above, the formula above gives a contracting homotopy, s®, for chain complex above, and it can be used to study the wreath product.
(more generally the resolution above in degree i is free over Z(Z/2 x Z/2) on generators er ® ei-r), we can assume that that map i~ degree 0 takes eo to eo ® eo. Using the map extension process we now obtam .\(el)
Now suppose that
(3.4)
137
s.\(8(el)) s(T x T - l)(eo 0 eo) el ® Teo
Mo+--M1 +--M2+--'"
is a second R(G) free complex, but we do not assume it is acyclic. Next, suppose that A: (Ho(M*) = Mo/im8(M 1 )) ---tR is a given R(G)-linear map. Then we can construct an explicit chain map.\: M*---tC* so that E..\O: Ho(M*) ---tR is the original map /\ as follows. First, on Mo, choose a R(G)-basis, el, ... ,ei, ... , and define .\) (ei) = ¢ . A( ei). Then extend to Mo by R( G)freeness. Next, iteratively, define.\i on Mi by choosing a basis e1, ... , ej, .. " defining .\i(ej) S'\i-l(8(ej)), and, as before, extend to Mi by R(G)freeness. Since 8S~i-l (8( er ))
+ eo ® el .
Next,
s,\( 8( e2)) s(T x T + l)(el ® Teo e2 ® eo
+ eo ® el)
+ el ® Tel + eo ® e2'
Proceeding in this way, it is direct to see that the explicit chain map is given by
i
\(ei) = ~ ej 0 Tj ei-j . j=O
(1 - s8).\(8(er ))
.\(8(e r )) it follows that this operation constructs a chain map extending '\0, Actually, there is no reason to assume that M* is free over R( G). It is sufficient to assume that it is free over a ring B, and there is a (unitary) ring homomorphism T: B---tR(G). Then we can use the same formula above to construct a map .\*: M*---tC* which satisfies the condition
Example 3.7 Multiplication for a commutative group. The multiplic~tion map (a, b) f-+ ab, is a homomorphism. It therefore mduces a
u: Z/2 x Z/2---tZ/2,
homomorphism
Z(Z/2 x Z/2)--tZ(Z/2)
and consequently a chain map
(3.5) provided, only that we start with a map A: Ho(M*)---tR which satisfies (3.5) above.
Example 3.6 Chain approximation to the diagonal. A map .::1: Z(G)---tZ(G) ® Z(G) = Z(G x G) is given by .::1(g) = g x 9 for each g E G. Consequently, the identity map Ll.
Z---tZ extends to a map ofresolutions C(Z(G))* ---tC(Z(GxG))* which we can construct explicitly from the formula above. For example, suppose G = Z/2. Then a resolution of 7l over 7l(71/2) is given as above, and a resolution of 7l over Z(Z/2 x Z/2) can be given as C(Z(Z/2))* ®z C(Z(Z/2))! Since
An explicit J..L can be given as follows:
The chain map J..L constructed using the contract~ng homotopy Th eorem 3 . 8 . _ (_ )dim(a)dlm(b) (b®a)) above is associative, graded commutatwe (J..L(a®b) 1 J..L, and 1-'( eZi 0 e2;) e2( HjJ
C: j)
jJ( el ® e2i) = e2i+l J..L(el ® e2i+l)
O.
138
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences ana UetectlOIl
.l IleorcrIl::;
Perhaps the most important example for applications is the following.
Proof. The construction of the chain map starts as follows J-l(eo 0 eo)
eo
J.-l(el 0 eo)
s(T - l)eo
J.L(eo0 el) J.L(el 0 el)
s(T - l)eo = el, s{J.L((T - l)eo 0 el - el 0 (T - l)eo)} s(O) = O.
Example 3.10 Let G = Z x Zip, H = Z l Zip, and let h: G-tH be the homomorphism L1P x id: (g,>-.) ~ ((g,g,'" ,g),>-.) . '----v---" P times
Then we can construct an explicit chain approximation
J.L(h): C(Z(Z)) 0z C(Z(Z/p))----C(Z(Z))P 0 C(Z(Zlp))
Now, assume the formula of the theorem is true for ei 0 ej with i Then in dimension n + 1 we have 1. If n + 1 is even, then
+j
:::; n.
.by these techniques using s@ in the complex for the wreath product. . To begin we may assume C(Z(Z)) is the resolution discussed above
'"
T-l
Z+-Z(Z)[eoJ +-Z(Z)[el] ,
s[
(w: ~ ~ 1) + (w +~ - 1) 1Ten
(w: l)e + n
J.L(h)(el 0 eo) =
(2::: 1j
particular class which is of most interest in the sequel is the image J.L(h)(el 0 ep-l). When p = 2 we obtain, explicitly
1'
J.L(h)(el 0 er)
while
e2w+l 0 2. When n
e2l+1
+ 1 is odd,
~
1
S [ (w : l) - (w: l) Ten
0 el 0 TP-j-l) 0 eo, J.L(h)(l 0 ej) = 1P 0 ej. The
0.
then
e2w 0 e21+1 ~ SJ.-l( Te 2w-l 0 e21+1 + e2w 0 T e 21) s(w: l)Te 2 (w+l)
=
s@((T x T - 1 x l)eo 0 eo 0 el - (T - l)(el 0 T + 10 el) @ eo) (el 0 Teo + eo @ el) @ el - s@T @ el @ Teo (e 1 @ Teo + eo @ e 1) @ e 1 - e 1 @ e 1 0 Teo·
The most important class here turns out to be the last term, -(e10er)0Teo. More generally, for odd p, we have Theorem 3.11 In the chain approximation constructed above fOT Z x Zip with p odd, we have that, afteT Teducing mod the action of Z l Zip,
(w: l) e2(w+I)+1 . Moreover, the assumed commutativity of the formula in degree n implies the same in degree n + 1. 0
Remark 3.9 Passing to homology, the map above gives a map
This is called the Pontrjagin product. For the case when P = 2 the result above shows that H*(7L/2; Ylz) = E(el' ez, e4, ... , ezi, .. .), is an exterior algebra. More generally, the same arguments can be extended to the case of P odd to show that H.(Z/Pi Yl p ) = E(el) 0 p [r2], where p [r2] is the divided power algebra on the two dimensional generator /2. (The divided power algebra has generators /2i in each even dimension 2i and multiplication given by the rule
r
/2i . /2j =
(t+.) / 12(i+j)')
r
Proof. The proof is a close study of the way in which the iterate operator S@(T -l)s@ Er acts. It turns out that the only term at any stage, which can reach the last class under these operations has the form of a tensor product of el's and T's in the first p positions - no ones - tensored with Tl eo in the rightmost position. Moreover, the effect of looking at s@ (T) s@ ET shows that it produces classes with two adjacent el's in the first two positions. After iterating this operator (p - 1) 12 times we achieve terms of the form
j >-'(l,j)ei 0 T 0
ei- 2j - 1 0
T1eo .
140
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems
For each j, the sum
'£l A(l, j)
is
Cp;
1) -
4. Groups With Cohomology Detected by Abelian Subgroups
I)! corresponding to the order in
S1
8°
.
l,J
A(l, j) e 1 0 ... 0 e 1 07 1+2'J eo .
X
sn)p
p times
(The signs are all positive since we are always .permuting an even number of el's.) But now, summing the A(l,j) over both l, j, gives (~)! as asserted.
o
\;Ve will see later that this formula is the essential step in defining and proving the basic properties for the Steenrod pth power operations. It is also the basic step in proving a key lemma which is crucial in our study of the cohomology of the symmetric groups and many of the groups of Lie type. We turn to some of this in the next section.
X
B z/ p
shuff·L).
---+
(Sl x B z / p )
XZ/ p
E z/p
(S1)p
XZ/ p
E z/p
We begin with a topological application of the last result in the previous section. The following result is due to N. Steenrod, and is found in [SEl· Theorem 4.1 Let X be a CW -complex, and consider the map
E
X
1
B z /p )
X
(sn)p
XZ/ p
E z/ p.
K(Zjp, n) x B z / p
1
"'xid
XZ/ p
E z/p
and (e n )*: Hn(K(Zjp, n); lFp)-+Hn(sn; Fp) is an isomorphism. Consequently, the truth of the result for en implies it for /'n- But since /'n is universal, the theorem follows. 0 This result has very strong consequences for the cohomology of finite groups. Definition 4.2 Let G be a finite group. We say that H*(G; lF p ) is detected by abelian subgroups if there is a family of abelian subgroups Hi C G so that
L1P x id: X x Bz/p---+XP xZ/ p E z/ p .
Then, for all 0:
(sn
From the naturality of the construction of IP (0:) we can assume p* (')'p (e 1 ) 0 'P(e n )) = Ip(e 1 0 en), and from this, the inductive assumption and the commutativity of the diagram above, the result holds for sn. Next, consider the map en: sn-+K(Zjp, n) where (en)*(/'n) = en. The following diagram commutes
K(Zjp, n)P
4. Groups With Cohomology Detected by Abelian Subgroups
X
("'Xid)'
"'xid
(S1
'----v-"
sn
1
which the pairs of adjacent e1 0 el's appear, except for the leftmost, which we know just appeared. Then applying the final ET we obtain a sum "L.t
X
141
H* (X; IF p), we have is an injection.
where b is a generator for H2(Zjp; lFp), and dim(O:j)
=
dim(o:)
+j
.
Proof. For X = S1 this is a restatement of the last result in the previous section. Suppose the result is true for a generator, en, of Hn(sn; Fp) = Fp. We wish to show it for a generator of Hn+ 1 (sn+ \ IF p). To do this consider S1 X sn and the projection S1 X sn-+sn+1 which induces an isomorphism of cohomology groups in dimension n + 1. Consequently, if the result is true for S1 X sn it is true for sn+l. But the following diagram commutes
Note that if G l , G 2 both have mod p cohomology detected by abelian subgroups then the subgroups H i (G 1) x H j (G 2) detect H*(G 1 x G 2; Fp), so the family of such groups is closed under products. Moreover, if G is such that a subgroup H contains a Sylow p-subgroup of G and H has mod p cohomology detected by abelian subgroups, then the same is true for G, . since (res5})*: H*(G; lFp ) L-+ H*(H; lFp ) must be an injection. The following result, due to D. Quillen, [Q6], but anticipated in large measure by M. Nakaoka, [Na], will show that the set of such groups is really rather large. Theorem 4.3 Let H*(G; lFp ) be detected by abelian subgroups, then the same property holds for H*(G ~ Zjp; lF p).
Proof. Let {Hi} detect H*(G;Fp). Then, our previous calculation of H*(G ( Zlp;Fp) shows that the collection of subgroups {Hi l Zip} detect H*(G (
5. Structure Theorems for the Ring
Zip; lFp ). Thus, we are reduced to proving the result for an abelian group C.
There are a number of general things which can be said about the structure of the ring H* (G; F p) when G is a finite group. Among them is the result of L. Evens [Evl] that it is Noetherian, in particular finitely generated, with only a finite number of relations. Also, Quillen, in his landmark paper [Ql]' proved a series of beautiful theorems relating the structure of H* (G; F p) to the set of conjugacy classes of elementary p-groups in G. He showed l. that the Krull dimension, (the number of generators of the largest polynomial subring contained in H*(G;Fp), an alternate definition is given in 5.4), of H*(G;Tf!p) is equal to the largest rank of any elementary psubgroup of q, 2. that the intersection of the kernels of the restriction maps
The theorem will, thus, follow directly from the following result. Lemma 4.4 Let G be abelian, then GP and G x Zip embedded as a subgroup of G (Zip via the inclusion L1P x id, detect H* (G l Zip; F p). Proof 4.4 We have already seen that
where
ei
comes from Hi (Zip; Zip), and ,(7) restricts to 70···07 in '----v----' p times
H* (GP; F p). Consequently, it is only necessary to check the result on the elements ,(7) U ()i. In the group L1P x id(G x Zip) this element has image (L1P x id)*(f(7)) U (10e i ). Thus, the lemma follows from Steenrod's theorem
above since it implies that under the assumptions above (L1P
X
id)*(f(7))
= ±,0 bdim (')')9 + :LDj(f) 0 Aj j>O
where dim(Dj(f)) = dim(f) + j for p an odd prime, and it is equal to , 0 (ed dimb ) + I:j>o Dj(f) 0 e~im(')')-j for p = 2. 0
o
This finishes the proof of the theorem.
In Chapter VI one of the crucial facts which makes the determination of the cohomology of the symmetric groups possible will be proved: that Sylp(Sn) is a product of wreath products of the form !-lp2Zlpl' .. lZ/~ with v j times
pi < n. Thus the cohomology of Sn is detected by its elementary abelian p-subgroups for every n. But even more is true. Let G = GLn(Fq) for some finite field F q. We will see in chapter VII that for p odd the Sylow p-subgroup of G is a product of wreath products having the form Zlpl l Zlpl'" (l.lp for appropriate l, j, '--v---' j times
depending on q and n as long as p does not divide q. Moreover, a similar result is true for many other groups of Lie type. Consequently, (4.3) is a very powerful tool in analyzing the cohomology of many of the most important finite groups.
H*(G;Fp)
as A runs over the set of p-elementary subgroups of G is contained in the Radical of H*(G; lFp), and 3. that the set of minimal prime ideals of H* (G; Tf! p) is in one to one correspondence with the set of conjugacy classes of maximal p-elementary subgroups of G. In this section we prove Evens' theorem and the first two of Quillen's results. (Note: Venkov [V] obtained an independent proof of the finite generation of group cohomology; this is described in [Ql]' pp. 554-555.) Evens-Venkov Finite Generation Theorem Recall the definition of Noetherian ring: a ring is (left or right ) Noetherian if and only if, for each ascending sequence of (left or right) ideals h C h c ... , there is an n so that I j = I j + 1 if j 2: n. We use the same definition for the graded rings which occur in cohomology, and a similar definition for Noetherian modules. In particular quotients and ideals are Noetherian for a Noetherian ring. Also, a finitely generated exterior algebra over a Noetherian ring is Noetherian, as is a polynomial ring on a finite number of generators over a (graded) commutative Noetherian ring. (This last is just Hilbert's theorem.) Lernma 5.1 Let E be a finite p-group, then H*(E; lF p ) is Noetherian. Proof. It is clear that H*(Zlp; Fp) is Noetherian. Now we proceed by induc
7r
tion. We can give E as a central extension Zip -r E -r G. Let us assume that H* (G; Tf! p) is Noetherian. Then the E 2 -term in the Lyndon-Hochschild-Serre spectral sequence of the extension is Noetherian as is B,. for any finite r 2: 2. By (1.13) the spectral sequence collapses at level IGI, and an easy induction over the filtration gives the result for E. 0
144
5. Structure Theorems for the Ring H"(GjIFp)
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences a.nd Detection Theorems
Using (5.1) we can prove the Evens-Venkov result. For further details and generalizations see for example the discussions in the books [Ev2] and [Be]. Theorem 5.2 Let G be a finite gmup, then H*(G; IFp) is Noetherian for any p dividing the order of G.
Pmof. Consider the inclusion Sylp( G) "-* G. Suppose that h c he· .. c Ir ... is any infinite sequence of increasing ideals in H* (G; IF p). Associated to this is the sequence of ideals in H*(Sylp(G); IFp): res*(h)
U
H* (Sylp(G); IFp)
c res*(I2) U H*(Sylp(G);IFp)
C .. ,
which are all equal from some n on by (5.1). However, we have tr*(res*(a) U b) = aU tr*(b), so tr* (res*(Ir) U H*(Sylp(G);IFp)) = I r , and (5.2) follows.
o
The Quillen-Venkov Theorem
As we mentioned in the introduction to this section Quillen [Ql] proved that the intersections of the kernels of restriction to H* (A; IF p) is contained in the Radical of H*(G; IFp) for any finite group G. His original proof involved an analysis along lines similar to, but harder than, the considerations in the next chapter. However, a much more elementary proof was given in [QV] and we present that now. Theorem 5.3 Let G be a finite group. If w E H* (G; IF p) restricts to zero on every elementary abdian p-subgmup of G, then w is nilpotent.
Proof. We argue by induction on the order of G. So assume the theorem is true for all groups of order less than IGI. Consequently, a power of w restricts to zero on every subgmup of G. In particular, if G is not a p-group then this power of w restricts to zero in H* (Sylp (G); IF p) and is thus zero. Consequently it suffices to prove (5.3) for finite p-groups. For any index p-subgroup H C G we know that H is normal and we have an extension
We now sharpen (5.3) somewhat to determine the asymptotic growth rate of group cohomology. Atiyah, Evens, and Swan conjectured that it is exactly the p-rank of G, and Quillen proved this in [Q1]' see for example [Ev2, pg. 103].
Definition 5.4 Let {Vn}nEN be a graded vector space with dim(Vn ) for all n E N. We define the growth rate of V* as
,(V*)
=
min
145
<
00
n {s E N I lim dim(V ) = o} n8 n-+oo
We want to calculate ,(H*(G; IFp) which coincides with the Krull dimension of the associated graded commutative ring. From (5.3) the largest polynomial algebra contained in H*(G;IFp) has degree at most the p-rank of G. On the other hand, Evens' finite generation theorem shows that as a mod ule over the polynomial parts of H* (G; IF p) it is finitely generated: This shows that the Krull dimension is at most the p-rank of G. To establish the reverse inequality it suffices to show that H* (G; IF p) contains a polynomial sub algebra of degree p-rank G. To this end, consider the regular representation G C SIGI' Restricting to a maximal p-elementary subgroup A C G it is easy to see that the image is [G: A] copies of the regular representation of A. We have constructed the Dickson algebra H*(A; IFp)G£(A) in (III.2), and (Vr.l), more particularly (VI.1.2), (VI.1.3), (VI.1.7) show that the elements d~G:Al are present in the image of restriction from H*(G; IFp). But these classes are transcendentally independent and the result follows. In [Ql] Quillen left the following as a problem: given a finitely generated IFpG-module M, find a formula for the asymptotic growth rate of H*(G, M). His ideas can in fact be adapted to this situation, and this has led to the development of a whole series of cohomological techniques for representation theory, often referred to as complexity theory. We refer the reader to the recent book of L.Evens, [Ev2], where this subject is dealt with in full detail. We would like to finish this section by giving a more conceptual approach to the previous results, which was Quillen's original point of view (see [Ql]). A well-known result in the complex representation theory of finite groups is that characters are determined on hyperelementary subgroups by restriction (Brauer's Theorem). For mod p cohomology it is clear ~hat p-elementary groups should playa somewhat similar role. More precisely, let Ap( G) denote the family of all non-trivial p-Blementary abelian subgroups in G; clearly this is closed under conjugation and intersection. More formally speaking, we may think of Ap(G) as a category whose objects are the subgroups (71jp)n C G, with morphisms induced by inclusion and conjugation. Defini tion 5.5 Let A E Ap (G) and denote HA
= H* (A, IF p). Then we define
lim H* AEAp(G) A as the sequences (XA) E TIAEAp(G) HA such that res1, (XA) and C;(XA) = XA' if A' = g-l Ag.
= XA'
if A'
cA
The E -term is H* (G; H* (8 n ; Z)) and the assumption that the actioll preserves ~rientation implies that the action of G on H* (sn;~) is trivial. ConEt,O rv Et,n-l CY. Ht(G'Z) sequently this E 2 -term has the form 0 f two rows 2 = 2 . ' , while all the other rows are identically zero. It follows that there IS only
Using the restrictions, we can construct a map
We can now state Quillen's main theorem on this topic which strengthens (5.3) by also giving information about the image of restriction to the cohomology of the p-elementary subgroups of G.
Theorem 5.6 The map ¢ has nilpotent kernel and cokernel. A map satisfying the above is known as an F -isomorphism. This result is the analogue in cohomology of theorems such as that of Brauer in representation theory. The situation is evidently far more complicated in cohomology.
'ff t' I d . Ei,n-l ~ EHn,o On the other hand, the total space of 2'. . one d 1 eren la, n' 2 the fibering is (n - 1)-dimensional, so. HJ (sn IG; Z) = 0 f~r J. > n - 1 and E~m = 0 for l + m ~ n. ~om this .Eg,J ~ HJ (S~-l IG; Z) for J < n - 1, an~ otherwise dn must be an Isomorplusm for each ~.
Since 8 3 is a continuous group any subgroup acts freely, so the generalized quaternion groups, the binary tetrahedral group T, the bi~ary octahedr~l group 0, and the binary icosahedral group all act freely on 8 and hence ~le periodic. (We discuss them more precisely after 6.10.) But there also eXIst periodiC groups which do not act freely on any sphere.
Lemma 6.3 S3 is periodic with period four.
6. The Classification and Cohomology Rings of Periodic Groups i i i i
The results of (IV.5) on the Krull dimension imply that it is a good invariant for organizing groups. In this section we study the groups G which have Krull dimension one at all primes p which divide IGI.
Definition 6.1 A finite group G is periodic and of period n > 0 if and only . Hi(G; Z) ~ HHn(G; Z) for all i ~ 1 where the G action on Z is trivial. We have already seen that if G is cyclic then it is periodic and if G is the quaternion group Q2n, (IV.2.10- IV.2.12) show that it is periodic as well. Periodic groups come up naturally in topology when one considers finite groups acting on spheres.
Lemma 6.2 If G acts freely and orientation preserving on a sphere then G must be periodic of period n.
sn-l
Proof. If G is a finite group and acts freely on X there is a standard fibration which is used to study the quotient, cp
X ----tXjG ----t Ba where
0, 2 mod (4), 0 mod (4), odd.
= ~ ~
o
and the result follows .
Milnor, [Mi2] , proved that S3 cannot act freely on any sphere. In fact he proved that a necessary condition for a periodic group G to act freely on a sphere is that any element of order 2 in G must be central.
Remark. The proof of (6.3) illustrates the important fact that G i~ pe~iodic only if its IF p cohomology is periodic for ~ach ~ and then the p:rlod IS the least common multiple of its p-periods. ThIS basIC result follows dIrectly from (6.4) and (6.6) below which determine the possible p-Sylow subgroups of G. Lemma 6.4 G is periodic only 'if the only p-elementary subgroup~ of G are cyclic, which is true only if all the abelian subgroups of GaTe cychc. Proof. Indeed, if (Zjp)n c G for n ~ 2, then IF p[a, b] C H* (G.; IF p) .by the Krull dimension results of (IV.5), for appropriate a, b. But III thIS case dim(Hi(G; IFp)) is unbounded. On the other hand from the coefficient sequence
.p
O--+Z -+ Z-+IF p--+O
we get the long exact sequence of cohomology groups
Chapter 1V. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems {),
'p,
{)
--+ H~(Gi Z) --+ H~(Gi Z)--+Hi(Gi lFp) --+ Hi+l(G; Z)--+· .. ,
and it follows that dim(Hi(G; Z) 0lFp) is also unbounded, so G cannot be 0 periodic.
Remark. Using a spectral sequence argument with lFp coefficients in 6.2, we infer that Zip x Zip cannot act freely on a sphere, and hence if a finite group acts freely on a sphere (preserving orientation or not) it must be periodic (see V.0.7). Definition 6.5 A P-group G is any finite group G which satisfies the condition that every abelian subgroup of G is cyclic. The P-groups have been completely classified by Suzuki and Zassenhaus. It turns out, using the classification theorem that every P-group is periodic.
vVe will review the classification shortly. But for now we give further details on the structure of P-groups.
Corollary 6.6 If G is aP-group then Sylp(G) is cyclic for p odd and either cyclic or generalized quaternion faT p = 2.
Proof. We wish to show that if H is any finite p-group where the only abelian subgroups are cyclic, then H is Z/pT if P is odd. This is surely true if IHI = p, so assume the truth of the assertion for IHI < pT. Since H is a p-group it contains a normal subgroup, N, of index p, and by assumption N = Z/pT-l. Hence H is an extension of the form
Z/pn-l --+ H --+Z/p . If r = :2 the action of Zip on N is trivial and H is either Zip x Zip or Z/p2. The first case is impossible, so the second case holds. Otherwise r > 2. Then there are two possible actions of Zip on Z/pT-l, multiplication by 1 + pT-2, or the trivial action. In the first case H2(Z/p; Z/pT-l) = 0, so the extension is the semi-direct product, which 'contains (Z/p)2 as a subgroup, so there remains only the second case. Here H2(Z/Pi Z/pT) = Zip with representatives (p - 1) copies of Z/pT and Z/pT-l x Zip. Thus the case p odd is proved. When p = 2 we once more assume that the result is true for IHI < 2T, where we know the only possibility for IHI = 4 is Z/4. There are four actions of Z/2 on Z/2 T, multiplication by -I, 1 + 2T- 2, 1 - 2T- 2 and the trivial action. We have H2(Z/2j Z/2 T - 1 ) = Z/2 for the first and the fourth, but H2(Z/2; Z/2 T - 1 ) = 0 for the second and third. Thus we are reduced to the first and fourth cases. In the first case the extensions are the dihedral group and the generalized quaternion group. In the fourth case they are the cyclic group and Z/2 x Z/2 T - 1 .
6. The Classification and Cohomology Rings of Periodic Groups
149
When the subgroup of index two is Q2r-1 we are in the situation of H2(Z/2; 7l/2) = Z/2. Here the two extensions are the semi-direct product and the generalized quaternion group of order 2T. 0
Corollary 6.7 Let G be periodic of period n.
1. For each p dividing IGI there is a unique subgroup Zip Zip C Sy12(G) is weakly closed in G. Consequently
C
Sylp(G) and
im (res*: H* (G; lFp)-+H* (Z/p; lFp))
is exactly equal to H*(Z/p;'Wp)Wc(z/p) for p odd. = Z /2 T, the restriction image is IF 2 [e 2 ], the polynomial algebra on a two dimensional generator. 3. VVhen Sy12 (G) = Q2 n we have
2. For Sy12 (G)
im (res*: H* (G; lF2)--+H* (Z/2; lF 2 ))
is W2 [e 4 ], the polynomial algebra on one generator in dimension four. Proof. The f<,Lct of weak closure is clear. Moreover, we have seen in (IV.2.10), (IV.2.12), that the images of the restriction maps are respectively Wp[b2J for p odd or p = 2 and G = Z/2 r , while the image of restriction is lF2[e 4] for 0 G = Q2n. Of course, in these last two cases the Weyl group is trivial. Corollary 6.8 Let G be periodic, then H*(G;Wp) = lFp[bi ]0 E(e2i-l) for i odd, where i divides (p -1). Also, ifSyI2(G) = Z/2 T then H*(Syl2(G)jZ) = H*(G; Zh and H*(G; lF2) = E(e) 0lF2[b 2].
Proof. The integral cohomology of Z/pr is given as Zjpr in each even dimension and is zero in odd dimensions. Consequently, since H*(G; Z)p is a direct summand of H*(Sylp(G); Z) it follows that H*(G; Z)p = Z/pr in each dimension 2im and is zero otherwise. Now apply the coefficient exact sequence in the proof of (6.5). The argument for 2 is similar. 0 The situation which holds when Sy12 (G) = Q2 r is more complex. In order to understand it we review the classification of P-groups as determined by Suzuki and Zassenhaus.
The Classification of Periodic Groups To begin we need Aut(Qs)·
Lemma 6.9 Aut(Qs) ~ 54, the symmetric group on
4 letters.
l.i)U
with Z/3 i -+71.,/3 C Aut( Qs) giving the extension. Each Ti also admits an extension in the evident way by 71.,/2 generalizing the extension above,
Proof. Qs/[Qs, Qs] = 7l/2 x 7l/2. Hence, there is a homomorphism
I---t Tc--tO: ---t 7l /2 - - - t 1 .
Moreover, e is onto since {x t-t y}, {x I--t xy, Y I--t x} both induce automorphisms of Q8, and their images generate S3. The kernel of e is the set of automorphisms
f(x)=xyZa,
fey)
= y1+Zb
The Groups SLz(IFp)
and the inner automorphisms (~ Z/2 x 7l/2) give all such possibilities. Moreover, it is direct to check that the extension
7l/2 x 7l/2--tAut(QS)--tS3 identifies Aut(Qs) with the group of affine transformations Aff(IF z)
rv
S4.
o
0;
The Groups Ti and The action of 7l/3 on Qs gives rise to a semi-direct product, Qs x a 7l/3 = T. T is the binary tetrahedral group. It is also isomorphic to SLz(IF3)' I~deed, we construct an embedding by first embedding Qs C SL z (IF 3) by settmg
x
I--t
(=~ ~1),
Y
I--t
(~1 ~).
N~ extend to T, by sending the element t of order 3 to (~
These groups are clearly all P-groups.
Theorem 6.10 SL2(IF p) is a P-gmup for every prime p.
Proof. ISL 2(IF p )1 = p(p2 - 1) = pep - 1)(p + 1). A subgroup isomorphic to Zip = A subgroup isomorphic to Z/(p - 1) = {( The group IF' 2 embeds in GL2(lFp) when we think of the vector space (JF p)2 as the field' 2, so that JF p-linear isomorphisms are obtained by multiplying by the eleme~ts of lF~2' However, the determinant of {o:} (multiplication by 0: E IF' 2) is N(o:) = o:l+p. Hence, the subgroup KerN n SLz(lF p) which is contai~ed in SLz(IFp) is isomorphic to Ker(N) = 7l/(p + 1). Since p - 1, p, and p + 1 are coprime except for the factor 2 which is common to P - I, P + 1, we are done except for checking the structure of the 2-Sylow subgroup. There are two cases. First, assume that p == 1 mod (4), then the subgroup
{G n}
i ).
A presen-
tation of SL z (IF3) can be given as
where I = -to The subgroup S3 C Aut ( Qs) has two distinct extensions by Qs since H2(S3;Z/2) = Z/2. The first is the semi-direct product but the second 0* is the binary octahedral group. It is obtained from T by ~xtending T by 7l/2: Hence, we have the extension diagram
has order 2(p-l), and is clearly a quaternion group. Second, if p == 3 mod (4), then, if W C 71.,/(p + 1) is the 2-Sylow subgroup, the action of the Galois automorphism 9 is via inversion. However, det(g) = -1. To correct this use w E IF 2 for which w 1+p = -1. Then (gw)Z = -I, and det(gw) = -det(w) = 1. Th~s the subgroup generated by gw, Ker(N) is again a quaternion group and the result follows. 0 Remark. SLz( lF 5) is the binary icosahedral group. It has a presentation
1--tT--tO*--tZ/2--t1.
SL2(F5 )
Specifically, let the new generator be z, and set
z(x) Note that
~ a~')}
-1.
Hence, z(ZX)Z-l zxy-l = (zx)7 = (ZX)-l, and the subgroup generated by x, y, z is isomorphic to Q16. More generally we set
=
s3 = (rs)5} ,
see for example [Co, p. 2]. For the remaining odd primes H. Behr and J. Mennicke, [BM], give presentations as SL2(lF p)
(zx)Z = zxz-1ZZx = xyx = y.
= {r, s I r2
= {A,B IAP=I, (AB)3=B 2, B4=(A2BA~(p+l)B)3=1}.
Indeed, we can map this group to SL2(lFp) by
A
~
GD,
B
~ (~1 ~)
15:2
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequellces and Detection Theorems
6. The Classification and Cohomology Rings of Periodic Groups
The Groups TL2(lFp) With the demonstration that the SL2(lFp) are periodic and the introduction of the generalized binary tetrahedral and octahedral groups Tt and 0; we have almost completed the list of periodic groups. There remains one more family which we construct now. Out(SL 2(1F 2)) = 7l/2 with generator, ~y, acting as conjugation by the
matrix group
(~ ~)
where w is a non-square of
U2 ,p
=
SL2(lFp)
XQ
lF~.
is not a P-group. Moreover, since H2(71/2; 7l/2) = 7l/2, these are the only two extensions of SL2(lFp) by Out(SL2(lFp)). Lemma 6.14 T L2(IFp) is a P-group.
Proof. As usual there are two cases. a. p == 1 mod 4. Then a 2-Sylow subgroup of SL2(JFp) has the form
7l/(p - 1)
(~i ~
where a(xi) is the automorphism conjugation by the subgroup generated by
Consequently we have the
wOw0) .,2.
).
Now Let L C U2 ,p be
(~
-1
(
n(~1 ~) (W~' n (_~-1 ~) =
(~ w~') (~1 ~)
Lemma 6.11 L is central (in particular normal) in U2,p. E
Proof. If T
E
SL2(IFp) then ,2 acts on
( w-Ow0) 1
T
as does
W2 (
0
0) 1 . But
and
(w 0) (w2 0) Ow 01'
=
hence the two actions cancel out. Also, , commutes with
(~1 ~) 'I (~
SL2(lFph,
-;;1)
1
= '1- .
Hence, the 2-Sylow subgroup of T L2 (IF p) is a quaternion group. -1 (
w0
~), so the
action is trivial on 7l/(p - 1) as well, and the lemma follows.
o .
b. p'" 3 mod (4). Here
(-;;1
~) gives the Galois action on 1F~,
Definition 6.12 We write TL2(IFp) for the quotient group U2,p/L. T L2 (IF p) is given as an extension
((~1 ~). v ,v,-l -1 0) (-1 0) v), - -( v)v ( ((-~ 0) v,.) (, 2(-1 ~) ( (-10))2 v (-1 0) vv (- (-1 ~)
I---+SL2(IFp) ---+ T L 2 (lF p)---+71/2-tl
by
,2
=
(~ w~l)"
0
,
acting on SL2(IFp) via conjugation
Remark 6.13 There is a second subgroup L'
0
1
1
-1
_
=
0
,
-
(~ ~).
GL2(lFp),
2
)
generates a 2-Sylow subgroup of SL2(lFp). We have so (f
C
and we can assume that, acts in this way. Let v E lF~2 satisfy v p +1 = -1, then. V,
with extension data
153
-2
1
0
1
0
1
,and
-1
0
-2
v,-2),2
v)v 2
0
=
_v 2.
Also -1
c U2 ,p defined as "
(
0
0) v, 1
-1
=
,(~1 ~){_v-1} -(f
When p == 1 mod (4) the two quotients are isomorphic, but for p == 3 mod (4) we could choose w = -1, in which case L' = (,2), and the resulting quotient
(-1 0) v)v 0
1
-2
=
b
(-1 0) v] 0
1
-1
.
It follows that this group is again a quaternion group and the result follows. 0
The Suzuki-Zassenhaus Classification Theorem In summary we have the Suzuki-Zassenhaus theorem (See tWo], [DM])
Theorem 6.15 A complete table of P -groups is given by Definition
Family
Conditions
I
?l/a
II III
Z/a x{3 (?l/b x Q 2i) Z/a x, (?l/b x T i )
IV
Z/a
V
(?l/a
?l/b) x SL2(lFp)
(a,b)=(ab,p(p2 -1))=1
VI
Z/a xJ1- (?l/b x TL2(lFp))
(a,b)=(ab,p(p2 -1))=1
Xa
X
T
(a,b)=l
?l/b
(a,b)=(ab,2)=1 (a,b)=(ab,6)=1 (a,b)=(ab,6)=1
(?l/b x 0;)
Xa
Thus there is only one non-commutative representation, up to conjugation, of Qs c GL2(lFp). Hence, if we set P(x) =
Remark 6.16 All the groups G in the list except those in family I for which a is injective on the 2-Sylow subgroup of Z/b satisfy the Milnor condition that there is at most one element of order 2 in G, and it is central.
Corollary 6.18 H*(SL2(lFp); lF 2) = lF 2[e4] @ E(b 3 ), a polynomial algebra on a four dimensional generator tensored with an exter'ioT algebra on a thTee dimensional generator.
Proof If Syl2(SL2(lFp)) = Qs we have H*(SL2(lFp);lF2) c H*(Qs;lF 2)T, but this invariant ring is IF 2[e4] @ E (b 3 ). On the other hand by (6.7.3), the cohomology ring cannot be smaller than this. Let Sy12(SL 2(lF p)) = Q2Tt with n > 3. Then, if x and y generate this copy 2 of Q2Tt and x 2n - = y2, y4 = 1 there are two copies of Qs, QS,l =
The Mod(2) Cohomology of the Periodic Groups
(X
2n
3
-
,YI,
and QS,2 = (xy, YI
.
It is direct that the two restriction maps
res';: EB res;: H* (Q2Tt; IF 2) ---tH* (QS,I; IF 2) EB H* (QS,2; lF2) From the classification result above the only cases which need to be considered now are the cases IV, V, VI. We will first determine the situation in case V and then an easy spectral sequence argument will give the remaining two cases. To begin we need a lemma. Lemma 6.11 Let Qs C SL2(lFp) where p is an odd prime. Then the normalizer of Qs in SL2(lFp) contains an elmen(;nt T with T3 = 1 which acts as the non-trivial outer automorphism of Qs of order 3.
together are injective, so QS,l and QS,2 detect mod (2) cohomology. Now the remainder of the argument is clear. 0 It remains to discuss the groups H*(Oi; lF 2) and H*(TL2(lFp); lF2)' In both cases, corresponding to the extension data
---t
Proof Since p is odd it follows that the group ring IF p( Qs) is semi-simple. On the other hand Qs has four distinct I-dimensional representations, (x f--+ ±1,y f--+ ±1). It also has a non-commutative representation
fx
f--+
(~ ~a)
1~ (~1 y
a+ b 2
2
= -1 in lFp,
~)
for some choice of the pair (a, b). This representation must be irreducible and it follows that '
---t
0;
---t
71../2
TL2(lFp)
---t
71../2
we have a spectral sequence with E 2-term H*(Z/2; lF2) @ E(b3) @ lF 2 [e4]. In each case there must be a differential on b3 since we know that e4 E H 4 (Oi; lF 2) or e4 E H4(SL2(lFp); lF 2) must be in the image of restriction, and we know that the Krull dimension is one for the extension group. But the only 2 3 possible differential on b3 is 84 (b 3 ) = e 4 . Then E3 = lF2[e4](1, e, e , e ), and there can be no further differentials. Thus we have determined the mod(2) cohomology of all the periodic groups.
156
Chapter IV. Spectral Sequences and Detection Theorems
7. The Definition and Properties of Steenrod Squares
157
7. The Definition and Properties of Steenrod Squares
which is in the kernel of L* and restricts to t, 0·· . 0 t on the fiber. Then, by
We use the notation rp (X) for the space XP x z/ p Ez/ p studied in §1. Recall that rp(X) is given as the total space of a fibering
naturality, r(a) is given as the pullback under the composition
'---v--' p
j
7r
xp-rrp(X)-rBz/p. The space was originally introduced by Steenrod and used in [SE] to explicitly construct the Steenrod P power operations. We review that construction here. There is the map of (4.1),
times
rea) 7r r(X) - r r(K(Z/p, n)) - r Fp(K(Z/p, n)) xZ/ p E z/ p of .t (t). This gives the first two statements. To see the third consider the universal construction for the cup-product of an n dimensional class a and and m dimensional class (3,
K(Z/p, n)
~n0~m
1\
K(Z/p, m) -----+ K(7l.,/p, n + m) .
il P x id: X x Bz/p-rrp(X)
We now pass to the rp-constructions and build the obvious diagram. Define
and these constructions are natural with respect to maps f: X -+ Y as is illustrated, for example in (1.8), so we have the commutative diagram
e: rp(K(7l.,/p, n) x K(7l.,/p, m))-rrp(K(7l/p, n)) x rp(K(7l.,/p, m)) by e{(xl' yd, . .. , (xp, yp), v} diagram i
rp(X)
l
ru
Y x B z/p
-----+
= ({(Xl, ... , Xp), v}, {(Yl,' ", Yp), v}). Then the r(~)
K(Z/p,p(n+m))
)
I
rp(Y) .
Theorem 7.1 Let X be a CW complex and a E Hn(x, Fp), with n
r(,@,)
~
I, then
there is a unique class r(a) E Hnp(rp(X), Fp) so that 1. (j*)* r(a) = a 0 a· .. 0 a in H*(XP; Fp) '-----v----" p times
2. if f: X -+Y is a continuous map r(f)*(r(a)) 3. r(a U (3) = r(a) U r((3).
= r(f*(a))
Proof The existence of r(a) is the argument in the proof of (1.7). Diagram (1.8) shows how to reduce the construction of r(a) to the construction of r(t,) where t E H n (K(7l.,/p, n); Fp). is the fundamental class. But uniqueness is not demonstrated there. 10 see uniqueness, note that K(7l.,/p, n) is connected for n ~ 1. Hence the choice of basepoint in K(7l.,/p, n) is immaterial and we can consider the reduced construction with fiber the smash product Fp(K(7l.,/p, n) ~(7l.,/p, n) 1\ .. . 1\ K(7l.,/p, n).; Here, the fiber is (np - I)-connected with
r p (K(Z/p,n)I\K(Z/p,m))
K(Z/p,np)I\K(Z/p,mp)
/
e
rp(K(Z/p,n))xrpK«Z/p,m)) commutes up to homotopy. From this the third statement follows.
0
The Squaring Operations We now show how to construct the Steenrod squaring operations using the spaces r2(X), Definition 7.2 Let X be a CW-complex and suppose a E Hn(x, F2)' Then
p times
H np(Fp(K(7l.,/p, n); Fp) = F:P ~ Fp .
*
E Fp(K(Z~p,
n)) gives a lifting, L, of B z / p to Fp(K(Z/p, n)) xZ/ p E z / p so we define r(t) as the unique class in
Moreover, the basepoint
Hnp (Fp (K(7l.,/p, n) xZ/ p E z / p; Fp)
defines the Steenmd squares of a. Of course we must show that the classes defined in this way satisfy the axioms of (II.2). In particular Sqn(a) = a 2 follows from the commutative diagram
x
Corollary 7.6 The Sqi maps are homomorphisms, that is to say
1
idxpt
x
X
BZ/2
since (id x pt)* L: f)n+i 0 en - i = f)2n but .1*j*(r(a)) = .1*(a 0 a) = a 2. Since K(Z/2, n) is (n -1)-connected it follows that 5qi(Ln) = for i < 0, so, by naturality, 5qi(a) = 0 for i < 0 as well. Next we verify the Cartan formula,
°
Theorem 1.3
The P-power Operations for p Odd
There are essential differences here from the case of the squares. One starts, as before, with formal operations Di(a) given by Definition. Let X be a CW complex anda
i
5qi(a U (3) =
Proof. r(a + (3) = r(a) + r((3) + E where E is in the image of the transfer (1 + T). But .1 x id(1 + T) ~ 0 so additivity follows. 0
L 5qi(a) U 5qi-r((3).
E
Hn(XjlFp) then we set
r=o
where 8 n - i = b(n(p-1)-i)/2 if i is even and is eb(n(p-1)-i-1)/2 when i is odd.
Proof Since r(a) U r((3) = r(a U (3) 7.2 gives
(L 5qi(a) 0 en-i) U (L 5qr((3) 0 e r ) = L 5qt(a U (3) 0 en+m - t m-
(7.4)
r
q
and since e U e
= ep +q , 7.3 follows on expanding the left-hand side of (7.4).
o Lemma 1.5 Let
phism, then
0-:
j{n(x, lF 2)-tHn+1(EX, lF 2 ) be the suspension isomor-
1. 5qi(o-(x)) = o-(5qi(x)) 2. 5 qO(x) = (x).
Proof. By (3.11) and naturality .1*(r(e 1 )) = e1 0 e 1 + 10 (e 1)2 for e 1 E HI (RpOOj lF2)' Thus, since Rpoo = K(7l../2, 1), 5 qO(L1) = 1,1 as desired. Now take the suspension 0-: EK(7l../2, n)-tK(7l../2, n + 1) so o-*(Ln+1) = o-(Ln). Notice that 0-* is an isomorphism in dimension n + 1. Hence if we knew the first statement then the second assertion would follow for the universal model and hence for all X. To show (1) note EX = 51 1\ X is a factor space of 51 x X. Hence r(o-(a)) = r(e) U r(a) and .1* r(o-(a)) = e 1 0 e U E5qi(a) 0 en - i = Eo-Sqi(a) 0 en+1- i .
o
Then one shows that these Di operations commute with suspension up to a non-zero coefficient determined in (3.11) as above and that they satisfy the Cartan formula, and are linear. However, to show that most of them vanish, and to relate them to the P-power operations and mod (p) Bocksteins requires the extension of the construction from XP x Zip E z/ p to XP x sp Esp. It was the necessity of this extension which was one of the main reasons for Steenrod's interest in the cohomology of the symmetric groups. Finally, the remaining D/s are still not quite the operations pi(a) or f3p i (a), but have the form /-Li,npi(a) and vi,nf3pi(a) where /-Li,n and Vi,n are non-zero constants made necessary again by the coefficient in (3.11). We omit the details here as they are readily available in [SE] and our major interest in the remainder of the book is with the situation at the prime 2.
Chapter V. G-Complexes and Equivariant Cohomology
o.
Introduction to Cohomological Methods
Let G be a finite group and X a space on which G acts. In this chapter we will descri be a cohomological analysis of X which involves H* (G; IF p) in a fundamental way. First developed by Borel and then by Quillen, this approach is the natural generalization of classical Smith Theory. After reviewing the basic constructions and a few examples, we will apply these techniques to certain complexes defined from subgroups of a group G, first introduced by K. Brown and D. Quillen. Using results due to Brown and P. Webb we will show how these complexes provide a systematic method for approaching the cohomology of simple groups which will be discussed later on. One of the aims of this chapter is to expose the reader to the important part played by group cohomology in the theory of finite transformation groups. By no means is this a complete account; in addition it requires a different background than the previous chapters have. We recommend the texts [AP], [BreI] as excellent sources for those wanting to learn more about group actions. For technical reasons we assume that the G-spaces which appear are CWcomplexes with a compatible cellular G-action (G-CW complexes). Note that any compact manifold with a G-action can be given the structure of a finite G-CW complex. We denote the cellular complex of X by C*(X; R) (R the coefficient ring). We have an elementary lemma to begin
Lemma 0.1 Each chain group C*(X; R) is isomorphic to a direct sum of permutation modules, i. e. Ci(X; R) ~
EB
R eTi
@G ui
RG
eTiEX(il/G
where ReT is the sign representation on R defined by the orientation on the cell CJ. Proof. This follows immediately from the decomposition of X into cellular orbits, keeping track of whether elements 9 E G preserve or reverse the orientation of the cells. 0
Note the case in which the G-action is free (i.e. G x = {I} for all x E X); then G*(X; R) will be a chain complex of free RG-modules. Recall
that EG denotes a contractible, free G-CW complex which is always infinite dimensional for G finite. We define Definition 0.2 The Borel construction on a G-space X is the orbit space XXcEG
= *, X
xcEG
= BG; the natural projection X X
<--...t
P
-:f 0 and in fact X
P
has the mod
q -O =? Hp+q(X Xp EP' f ) .
x EG--+EG induces
X XcEG
1
0.3
Theorem. Under the conditions above, X p cohomology of a point.
Choose '!L/p ~ G ~ P central; then x P = (XC)P/c, and so by induction on IPI it suffices to prove the result for P ~ '!L/p. In this case (0.4) becomes
= (XxEG)/G
where G acts diagonally on X x EG. For X a map
Example 0.6 Let X be a finite complex with the mod p homology of a point, and assume that a finite p-group P acts on X. We will prove the following celebrated result due to P. Smith
BG.
Because the action on EG is free, the vertical map is a fibration with fiber X. Hence, associated to {0.3) there is a spectral sequence with E 2 -term
q> 0
'
p
Hence it collapses and so Hp+q(X
Xp
EP;fp) ~ Hp+q(P;f p) .
On the other hand, the inclusion X P
jp: H*(X
Xp
"-----t
X induces a map
EP; fp)----+H*(XP x BP) ~ H*(XP) 18> H*(BP) .
Here 1-£* (X; JR.) is a twisted coefficient system as G = 7f1 (BG) may act nontrivially on it. The term E~,q may be identified with the group cohomology with coefficients, HP(G; Hq(X; R)).
In sufficiently high dimensions jp will be an isomorphism because Pacts freely off X p . X is finite and so H*(X Xp EP,X P x BP) = 0 for *» o. So P p *. for large * we have H*(X P ) 18> H*(BP) ~ H*(BP), which implies x This theorem also admits a very interesting extension due to T. Chang and T. Skjelbred, [CS] which is not needed in the sequel but is well worth pointing out.
Remark. This spectral sequence is originally due to J. Leray, H. Cartan, and R. Lyndon in various forms provided that G is discrete and the action is sufficiently reasonable. Many of the applications before Borel's work are discussed in chapters XV and XVI of [CE].
Theorem. Let G = '!L/p and J{ = fp 01' G = S1 and J{ = Q. Suppose that G acts on the compact Poincare duality space X of formal dimension n. Then each connected component of the fixed set satisfies Poincare d1wlity over J{ and, if G i- '!L/2, has formal dimension congruent to n mod (2).
f"V
Definition 0.5 The G-equivaTiant cohomology of X is Ha(X;R)
=
H*(X Xc EG;R).
Note that if X is a free G-complex, the map X Xc EG--+X/G is also a fibration with contractible fiber, hence X Xc EG ~ X/G. Also note that the arguments given in Chapter V §5 can be adapted to show that if H*(X; R) is afinitely generated R-module, then Ha(X; R) is a finitely generated Ralgebra. ,The analysis of the spectral sequence (0.4) was first undertaken by A. Borel. It yields numerous restrictions on finite group actions on familiar spaces such as spheres, projective spaces, etc., (see (Bol]). We give two simple applications of these techniques to illustrate their utility.
Example 0.7 Now let us assume G is a finite group acting freely on X = STL (the n-sphere). In this framework we can also recall the classical result due to P. Smith proved in Chapter IV:
Theorem. If a finite group G acts freely on a sphere subgroups are cyclic.
sn,
then all its abelian
Remark. Recently this result has been extended to products of spheres of the same dimension, namely, if ('!L/pt (p odd, or if p = 2 then n i- 1,3,7) acts freely on (sn then r :s; k. (See the papers by G. Carlsson [Cal and Adem-Browder, [AB].)
l,
164
Chapter V. G-Complexes and Equivariant Cohomology
At this point it is worthwhile to point out that all of the preceding constructions can be derived algebraically from C*(X). Let F* be a ZG-free resolution of the trivial G-module Z. Consider the double co-complex
Then it is not hard to show that
Hc(X; R)
~
H*(HomG(F*, C*(X; R))) .
1. Restrictions on Group Actions
165
where rCG is the sheaf on X/G associated to the presheaf V ....... Hc(-rr- 1 V), 1f: X XG EG-+X/G. In the case of a finite G-CW complex (assuming constant isotropy on the cells) the d1-differential is just the map induced by the coboundary operator on C*(X) and Ei,q = Hq(G, CP(X)). Recall that in Chapter II we defined Tate cohomology of ZG-modules; instead of an ordinary projective resolution we used a complete resolution i.e. an acyclic Z-graded complex of projective ZG-modules which in non-negative degrees coincides with an ordinary projective resolution of Z. Taking such a complete resolution F*, we can define Tate hypercohomology groups
Note that we endow the double complex with the usual mixed differential:
H*(G; C*) ~ H*(Hom(F*; C*)) . In case C* = C* (X), we obtain the equivariant Tate cohomology of X, first introduced by R.C. Swan [S3],
which is given by
(0.9) For completeness we recall the Cartan-Eilenberg terminology Definition 0.8 The G-hypercohomology of a G-cochain complex C* is defined as
H*(G; C*(X; Z))
Hc(X).
The main technical advantage is the disappearance of the orbit space for free actions: Theorem 0.10 If X is a finite dimensional free G-CW complex then
H*(G; C*) = H*(HomG(F*, C*)) where F* is a free (projective) resolution of the trivial ZG-module Z.
=
Hc(X) ==
o.
Hence we may say that the equivariant cohomology of a G-CW complex is isomorphic to the hypercohomology of its cellular co chain complex. This has certain technical advantages, above all if a specific cellular decomposition is available. In addition we may filter the double complex in (0.8) using either of two filtrations associated to the "vertical" and "horizontal" directions respectively. This yields two spectral sequence which applied to C* (X; R) become (I) E~,q = HP(G; Hq(X; R))} p+q. (II) Ei,q = Hq(G; CP(X, R)) =* HG (X, R) .
Note how the analogous spectral sequence (1) will not involve the orbit space, hence strengthening cohomological arguments.
The spectral sequence (I) is canonically isomorphic to (0.4). As for (II), this can be identified with the E1-term of the Leray spectral sequence associated to
1. Restrictions on Group Actions
Proof. There is a spectral sequence analogous to (II), say
This converges because X is finite dimensional. Now each CP(X) is G-free, hence G-acyclic, so E~,q == 0 and the result follows. 0
X xGEG
1
X/G.
In the general situation the E1-term is not so easy to handle, but the E 2 -term can be identified with E~,q = HP(X/Gj
nb)
=* H[/q(X)
In this section we will outline some instances of how the machinery described in §O can be applied to transformation groups. As this is not our main topic of interest, we urge the reader to consult the original sources for the foundational results [Bol], [QI]. The first result to take note cf is the localization theorem. This result shows that for certain groups the equivariant cohomology contains substan-
tial information about the fixed point set after inverting certain cohomology classes, and hence this makes the entire spectral sequence approach
quite powerful. More precisely we have the localization theorem of Borel and Quillen
Theorem 1.1 Let G = (Z/PY (p prime) act on a finite complex X. Then the inclusion of the fixed point set XC ~ X induces an isomorphism
H*(X Xc EG; lFp)[e A l ] ~ H*(XG
X
BG; lFp)[e Al ]
where eA E H2pr -2 (G; IF p) is the product of the Bocksteins of the non-zero elements in Hl(G,lFp) ~ Hom(G,lFp), and [eAl] denotes localization by the multiplicative system of powers of eA. Note that here we are considering equivariant cohomology as a graded H* (G; IFp)-module.) The next theorem, again due to D. Quillen, is an important structural result for equivariant cohomology, which can be proved using finite generation arguments as in IV.5 (see [Ql]).
ii. Given x
E
A we define
exp(x)
exp((x)).
Using restriction and transfer it is elementary to see that JGJ· fIe (X) == a for any finite dimensional G-complex X; hence Tate cohomology provides an interesting sequence of Z-graded torsion modules. For free actions we have a theorem of W. Browder, [Brow],
Theorem 1.4 Let X be a free, connected G-CW complex. Then
'G'Ill
i 1 exp(iI- - (G; Hi(X; 2))) .
Proof. The proof,we give is from [A2]. Consider the spectral sequence E~,q
Theorem 1.2 Let X be a finite dimensional G-complex and denote
=
= fIp(G; Hq(X; Z))
=}
fI~/q(X) ==
a.
Look at the E~,O-terms; we have exact sequences
00
PG(X)(t) =
L dim(Hi(X
XG
EG; lFp))t
i
-r-l,r EO,o EO,o 0 E r+l - - r+l - - r+2--
.
i=O
Then PG(X)(t) is a rational function of the form p(t)/ I17=l (1- t 2n ) and the order of the pole at t = 1 is equal to max{nJ(Z/p)n
~
G fixes a point x E X} .
= 1,2, ... ,dim(X).
:From this we obtain r
+1 exp (00)1 exp(Er00)/ Er+2 exp (E-r+lMultiplying all these out we obtain
This is the version of the result for G-spaces which we discussed previously for the case X = pt. This result was the starting point for the idea of introducing varieties associated to cohomology rings. As we have seen, this may be considered as a special case of H* (G; M) where M is the cellular complex associated to a G-space. This theorem however, has its natural extension to any coefficient module M. In other words, the asymptotic growth rate of H* (G; M) (known as the complexity of M) is determined on the pelementary abelian subgroups of G. The proof of this (due to Alperin and Evens [AE]) is an algebraic formulation of Quillen's result, and has important applications in modular representation theory. The above results are not too interesting in the case of free actions. For this situation Tate cohomology comes in handy because we obtain a spectral sequence which abuts to a zero term. First a
Definition 1.3 i. Let A be a finite abelian group. We define its exponent, exp(A) N/n·A = a}
for r
= min{n E
exp(iIo(
G; 2)) = 'G'lrr exp(E;;j"C)
III
1r
' )
C 1 exp(iI- - (G; W(X; 2))) D
completing the proof.
Remark. Tensoring C* (X; Z) with a torsion-free ZG-module M and applying the same proof yields exp(ftJ(G; M))
III
exp(iI- c - 1 (G; W(X) 0 M)) .
This result has a few interesting consequences which we now briefly describe.
Corollary 1.5 If (Z/Py acts freely on a connected complex X '}!Jith homologically trivial action, then at least r of the cohomology groups H*(X; Z(p)) must be non-zero.
168
1. Restrictions on Group Actions
Chapter V. G-Complexes and Equivariant Cohomology
169
n2
Proof. Under the above hypotheses, if G = (7L/pt then
II exp(iI- r- k- 1(G; M))
exp(iI-k(G; M))
p. iI*(G; H*(X; 7L(p))) = 0 .
for all k E 7L .
r=l
o
(K unneth formula.)
In particular this shows that (7L/pt+ 1 cannot act freely, homologically trivially on (sn) r.
Dimension shifting yields n2
exp(iIk+n2+2(G; M))
II exp(iIk+r(G; M)) r=l
= min{nlG acts fee ely, homologically trivially on an n-dimensional connected complex}. Then n(G) :2: maxpIIGI{p-rank(G)} + 1.
~s before we get iI* (Gj M) = 0 for H*(G; M) == O.
Corollary 1.7 Let M be a finitely generated torsion free 7LG-module, G a finite group. Then there exists an integer N (depending only on G) such that
Remark A different proof of this result appeared in [BCR] using purely algebraic methods. Notice that the restrictions on M are not important as any finitely generated 7LG-module is co homologous to a torsion free one.
Corollary 1.6 For a finite group G, let n(G)
* :2: k + n 2 + 1 and
we conclude that 0
N
EBiI*+i(G;M) ~ 0
Recall (see [MS]) that
i=l
for all
*E
H*(BU(n), 7L) ~ 7L[Xl' X2,"" x n ]
7L, or else iI* (G; M) == O.
where each Xi is 2i-dimensional. Now given a representation ¢: G '-+ U(n) as before, the polynomial generators Xi E H2i(BU(n);7L) can be pulled back under ¢ to define
Proof. Take a faithful unitary representation ¢: G
'-+
U(n) .
i
Then G will act freely and cohomologically trivially on U(n), which has the homology type of Sl x S3 X ... X s2n-l. From the remark after (1.4) we see that
exp(iIO(G; M))
II exp(iI- r- 1(G; M))
the ith Chern class of ¢. Under this map, the cohomology of G is a finitely generated H* (B U (n); 7L)-module. These classes naturally carry some torsion; the following quantifies this.
.
r=l
Using 1\11* instead of M and identifying iIi(G; M) ~ iI-i(G; M*) (Tate duality) yields
exp(iIO(G; M))
= 1, ... ,n
Theorem 1.8 Let G be a finite group and ¢: G '-+ U(n) a faithful unitary representation of G with Chern clases Cl (¢), ... , en (¢); then
IGII!!
II exp(iIr+1(G; M))
exp(ci(¢)) .
r=l
Proof. Consider the Borel construction on U(n) and its associated spectral sequence
By dimension shifting this can be generalized to n
exp(iI k (G; M))
E~,q =
2
II exp(iIr+k+1(G; M))
for all k E 7L .
r=l
Suppose now that for some k E 7L, iIr+k+1(G; M) = 0 for r = 0,1, ... , n 2. Then iIk(G; M) = 0 and consequently iI*(G; M) = 0 for * ::; k + n 2 + 1. On the other hand, using the dual again yields
HP(Gj Hq(U(n))) => Hp+q(U(n)/G) .
Now H*(U(n); 7L) ~ AZ(Xl,"" x2n-d and by construction these classes transgress down to Ci (¢) E H2i (Gj 7L) for i = 1, ... , n. This implies that [exp(ci(¢))] . X2i-l E Eg,2i-l is a permanent co cycle for i = 1, ... ,n, which implies that [TI exp(ci(¢))]' J-LU(n) E im(i*) where J-LU(n) is the top cohomology class on the fiber and i: U(n)-+U(n)jG is the projection. However, i is a
covering map of oriented manifolds, hence it has degree IGI on the top class 0 from which the result follows.
Example 1.9 We now compute the cohomology of Qs using the action on S3 as a subgroup. The spectral sequence (I) with integral coefficients for this action degenerates into the long exact sequence (for i ~ 0) ... --t
H i - 4(QS)
-t
Hi(QS)
-t
Hi(S3/QS)
-t
were first introduced by K. Brown, [Brown], and D. Quillen, [Q5]. The objective was to construct a natural complex which distilled the p-Iocal structure of the group G as well as to provide analogues of Tits buildings for general finite groups. Given a map f: X -+Y of posets and y E Y we define
fly = {x ylf = {x
H i - 3(QS) ...........
From this we deduce that H2(S3 /Qs) ~ H2(QS) ~ Z/2 x Z/2, and as the action is free, H4(QS) ~ Z/8. Hence we have that
E
E
Xlf(x) :S; y} Xlf(x) 2: y} .
The following result is important for determining the homotopy type of posets. Let f: X -+ Y as above:
Iflyl is con:tractible for all y E Y (respectively Y). Then If I is ahomotopy equivalence.
PrQposition 2.1 Assume
where
n is the set of relations 2a, 2(3,8"
a(3, a 2 , (32.
is contractible for all y
E
Iylfl
Proof. We sketch the proof in the simply connected case; fundamental groups must be dealt with using twisted coefficients. For more on this, see [Q]. Con-
A similar analysis yields
f
sider the Leray spectral sequence associated to and the relations in this case are x 2 + xy + y2, x 2y + xy2. These are obtained easily using the additive structure (computed in Ch.IV) and symmetry considerations.
2. General Properties of Posets Associated to Finite Groups For the remainder of this chapter we will specialize to certain G-complexes which are defined from the lattice of subgroups in G. The point of this is that their equivariant structure is an important device for tackling the plocal structure of G and its mod p cohomology. As before let G be a finite group and consider the collection Sp(G) which is the set of all finite p-subgroups of G which are non-trivial. Under inclusion this becomes a partially ordered set (poset for short) endowed with a natural G-action induced by conjugation. In the usual way we can associate a Gsimplicial complex to it denoted by ISp(G)I. We recall how this is constructed: its vertices are the elements of Sp(G) and its simplices are the non-empty -finite chains in Sp (G). Note that the isotropy subgroups of the vertices are the normalizers of the corresponding p-subgroups of G. Similarly we denote by Ap( G) the poset of p-elementary abelian subgroups of G which are not trivial, and its associated space by IAp( G). . These two· functors {Finite groups}
IApOl.lSpOI ) {G-simplicial sets}
E2p,q = Hp(IYI; Hq)
=}
IXI-+ IYI
:
Hp+q(IXI; Z)
where Hq is the sheaf which comes from the pre-sheaf associating to any open subset U c IYI the group
As f is a map of posets If I is a map of simplicial complexes and ~he s~eaf can be computed combinatorially. In fact we have that Hq can be identified with the local coefficient system y J---+ Hq(lfyl). By hypothesis we have that fly is contractible for all y E Y and hence the E 2 -term becomes
q=O otherwise and it follows that f induces a homology isomorphism of simply connected CW-complexes. By Whitehead's theorem this implies that If I is a homotopy equivalence. In the case y If contractible the above result is proved using xap, yap instead. 0 A subset K of a poset X is said to be closed if x' ::; x E K implies K. Let Z be a closed subset of a product of posets X x Y; and PI: Z -+X, P2: Z-+Y the projections. We can identify the fiber of Plover x E X with the subposet
x'
E
Zx
= {y
E YI(x,
y)
E
Z};
similarly for P2 we have
Zy = {x E XI(x,y) E Z}.
172
Chapter V.
<,nd Equivariant Cohomology (;_(~omplcxes ~
Then we have 2 2 If Lemma.
Z
is contractible for each x E
. h 0 X then PI: Z-,X '/,s a om-
x
topy equivalence. Proof. x\PI
=
a normal p-torus in G. In this case 2.6 can be reformulated as the statement that if IAp(G)IG =f. 0 then IAp(G)1 is contractible. We note that the converse of this is still an open problem due to D. Quillen:
. \
, > x}' define
{(x',y) E Z\x -
Conjecture. If Ap(G) is contractible then G has a non-trivial normal psubgroup.
- ' Zx by
W:n::'l
9
then it is easy to venfy tha If I W d \{O < I}\ is a I-SImplex). 11 < l} X WI-' 2 an . t tible for a o { h topy inverses and so x IpI IS con rac 0 determine a map Hence v and
\Y\
are homotopy equ'/,valent.
Proof. By 2.2 \X\ c:::
o
\Z\ c::: \Y\.
" "'naiyze the homotopy theoretic properties of the poset spaces We can nOVY '-'" G). To begin we have S (G) an d A P ( 'bl P . . then A (P) is contract'/, e.
Lemma 2 .4 If
P is a non-trwwl p-group
p
'd t't t 0 f P consisting of the 1 en 1 y Let B C P be the subgroup ~f the c.enh~n B > 1 since P > 1. Hence, the of order E Ap(P), so \idAp(p)\ c::: ct in Ap(G) we have G ~ AB Ap(P) c::: *.
:~~o~ll
ei~ments
>p~c~~~lYalf':
an~
We use this to prove .' 2 5 The inclusion i: A p ( PropOsItIOn . lenee.
G)
'-t
8
p
( G)
is a homotopy equiva-
'bi
t and hence 0
= Ap (P), a contractl e pose ,
Proof. Let P E Sp(G), then i\p
\Ap(G)\ c::: \8 p(G)\.
L1
A (G) is . . l normal p-subgroup then p .' 2 6 If G has a non-tnvw PropOSltIon . contractible. P E 8 (G) 'bl 1£ 1 < K
5 (G) is contractl e. P K' S (G) hence \8 p ( G)\ c::: *. we have P ~ P K '2: m p , f . sub roUp of G then the subgroup E ~ Now if K is a non-trivlal normatl P- f is characteristic in K, hence E 18 er 1 or P in the ten er 0 elements 0 f or d j
i
1---7
stabilizer of Ll
estabishes a contravariant isomorphism between the poset of simplices in II and parabolic subgroups in G. Ap( G) is closely related to this complex.
Theorem 2.7 The poset Ap( G) is homotopy equivalent to the building II. Hence Ap(G) has the homotopy type of a bouquet of (m - I)-dimensional spheres. Proof. We provide the proof for the simple case G = SLn (11(). Let X be the poset of simplices in II and define Z C X x Ap(G) as
Z = {(x,A)lxEXA} = {(x,A)'A~Gx}. For G = SLn(JK), if can be identified with the simplicial complex IT(lKn)1 where T(OC n ) denotes the poset of proper subspaces of lKn. Note that m = n - 1, differs from rkp(G). Now it is clear that an element of G x leaves each point of x fixed, hence x' :::; x implies G x ' :> G x and so Z is closed. Hence we need only show that Zx = Ap(Gx ) and ZA = XA are contractible. Consider a simplex x; it is a flag
o < VI
N ext we have
Proof. We show
The cases rkp(G) = 1,2 have been settled affirmatively since then Ap(G) is a finite set of points and a graph (respectively) in which case contractibility always implies a G-fixed point. Now suppose that G is the finite group of rational points of a semisimple algebraic group defined over a finite field lK of characteristic p. Then one may associate a "building" II to G in the sense of Tits [T]. It is a simplicial complex of dimension m -1 with a G-action where m is the rank of the underlying algebraic group over lK. Let L1 c II be a simplex; the correspondence
< ... < Vr < lKn ,
r 2: 1
with stablizer G x . The elements of G x which induce the identity on each quotient of the flag form a non-trivial normal p-subgroup of G x , hence IAp( Gx)1 c::: *. Now let JIH be the simplicial complex associated to the poset T(lKn)H of proper H-invariant subspaces of lKn. If H is a p-subgroup of G, WH > 0 for W E T(1I(n) H, hence this poset is contractible; W ~ W H ~ (JFn) H. Thus the X A are contractible and we conclude jAp(G)1 ~ II. 0
174
Chapter V. \..:i-Complexes ana r-qUlvanam IJonomOlogy
We now introduce the following notation for a G-complex X: the singular set of the action is, by definition, the sUbcomplex .
Examples 2.11
G
Sc(X) = {xEXIGx#{l}}. We have a key lemma,
= 54,
the Symmetric Group on 4-Letters,
A 2 (G)/G:
Lemma 2.8 Let H ~ G be a non-trivial p-subgroup. Then IAp(G)IH is contractible.
7l/2 x 7l/
D8
Proof. Let A be a non-trivial p-torus in G normalized by a p-group H ~ G; then A H =I {I}. Denote by E the p-torus of central elements of order dividing p in H. We have
7l 2
D8
7l/
7l/2 x 7l/2
o
whence the result follows.
We can now prove the following proposition which will be vital for our later study of the cohomology of simple groups. Theorem 2.9 Let P
7l/2 x 7l/2
D
In this case IT(1F~)1 ~ IA2(G)1 c:::: v~ Sl is a trivalent graph. The parabolics are
= Sylp(G); then Sp(IAp(G)I) is contractible.
Proof. Replace IAp(G)1 by its barycentric subdivision lXI, where X is the poset of simplices in IAp(G)I. Then Sp(IXI) is the sub complex
U IXI H HSP
=
UIXHI
and the Borel subgroup is
= ISp(Ap(G))I·
H
As before, let Z C Ap(P) x Sp(Ap(G)) be the closed subset consisting of pairs (H, x) where x E X H or equivalently H ~ Px ' By definition of the singular set Px # {I} for all XES p (Ap (G) ); hence Zy = Ap(Px) is contractible by 2.4. Also, if A E Ap(P) then ZA = X A, the poset of simplices in IAp(G)AI. However, we have seen in 2.8 that this is contractible. Hence we have shown
o Corollary 2.10 X(IAp(G)I) == 1 mod ISylp(G)I. Proof. For any finite G-complex we have
x(X) == X(Sc(X)) mod IGI . The result follows from applying this to X = IAp(G)I, G = Sylp(G). To conclude this section we provide some examples of posets Ap(G).
0
G acts edge transitively on
n with quotient B
It is known that H1 (T; 7l/2) ~ St the Steinberg module, which is projective of rank 8 as an 1F 2 G-module.
G=Ml1 ,p=2,
176
3. Applications to Cohomology
Chapter V. G-Complexes and Equivariant Cohomology
177
However, using restriction-transfer we have
G=J1 , p=2,
Ha(6(x); lFp) '-+ Hp(6(X); lFp)
A 2 (J1 )/ J 1 :
res
Z/2
X
A5
A4
(Z/2)3
71,/2~-----'--'---...:.-----"'(71,/2)2
X
Z/2
([G: P] prime to p). Hence H*(G; 6*) == 0 and so
tc is an isomorphism.
0
What this illustrates is that the equivariant structure of Ap( G) determines the cohomology of G for p-torsion coefficients. The next result, a theorem of P. Webb" [We], makes this more precise.
(71,/2)3
Nh ((Z/2)3)
Theorem 3.2 In the Leray spectral sequence associated to IAp(G)1 Xc EG-+IAp(G)I/G with lFp coefficients we have
We point out here that from the above one can verify that this poset has negative Euler characteristic, hence its I-dimensional homology is non-trivial. It is an example of a non-spherical poset space.
3. Applications to Cohomology We have seen in §2 that we can associate a finite G-CW-complex X = IAp(G)1 to any finite group which satisfies the condition that the fixed point set IAp( G) IH is contractible for any p-subgroup H ~ G. In this section we will show how this very strong condition allows one to extract important and useful cohomological information about G as long as we concentrate only on the prime p. To begin we have a result of K. Brown" [Brown, pg. 293, Theorem X.7.3], Theorem 3.1 The map H*(G;lFp)-+Hc(IAp(G)I) induced by IAp(G)I-+pt is an isomorphism for all * E Z. Proof. We have a short exact sequence of G-cochain complexes
EP,q 2
C::'.
-
{OHq(G; lF
p)
0,
P> p = 0.
Proof. Our proof of this result requires standard techniques in equivariant topology; a good general reference for this material is [Bre2]. Recall that IAp(G)1 is a finite G-CW complex with constant isotropy on each cell. Under these conditions the E1-term of the above spectral sequence can easily be identified with
E9 and d 1 is the differential induced by the coboundary map on C*. Define for any H ~ G This is a finite co chain complex and (3.2) is equivalent to proving that for all q 2
°
Hi(D* (q)) = {Hq(G; lFp )
°
C
i = 0, . otherwIse.
Now we have (for all q > 0) a split monomorphism of co chain complexes
Dc(q)
This induces a long exact sequence .,... .
f.~
"'.
........-
'"
~
Dp(q)
and so Dp (q) :::: Dc (q) EEl D'. However, if we define
... -+H1(G; lF p ) -+ Hc(X; lFp)-+Hc( C*)-+Hi+l (G; lF p )-+ ... , where X = IAp(G)I. Now, if P = Sylp(G) recall that Sp(X) :::: * and furthermore, as Tate cohomology is identically zero on free complexes we have
Hp(X;lF p) ~ Hp(Sp(X);lF p) ~ H*(P;lFp).
we see that Ep(q) ~ Dp(q), hence Dc(q) is a direct summand in Ep(q). It is now clear that it suffices to prove the claim for the cochain complex Ep (q). For this note that
As this isomorphism is clearly induced by the augmentation we ded uce that
ilp(C(X); lF p ) == 0
for all
*E Z .
induces homotopy equivalences
The Sporadic Group Mll
for all H ~ P. Hence this complex is equivariantly contractible and so we have an isomorphism of spectral sequences at the E 2 -level
E 2P,q
-
-
HP(SP(IAPFI)/ P; 1-{q)
For G = Mll we get
H*(lVIll) EEl H*(Ds) ~ H*(GL2( lF 3)) EEl H*(S4) . The Sporadic Group J 1
E 2P,q
-
-
Hq(*;1t q)
For G = h we get
which completes the proof for q > O. However one observes that the argument above holds if we use Tate Cohomology and the corresponding spectral sequence, for all q 2: O. Using the fact that for any finite group G with order divisible by p we have HO(G,JF p) ~ jjO(G,JF p) completes the proof of (3.2).
o
Corollary 3.3
H*(G;JFp) EB (
Using the fact that H* (A4) ~ H* (A5) at p = 2 we recover the result of II.6.9,
H*(Jd ~ H*(Nh ((Z/2)3)) ) where NJ 1 ((Z/2)3) is a group of order 168.
E9
H*(Gai;JFp))
~
UiEAp(G)/G i odd
for all
H*(h) EB H*((Z/2)3) EB H*(Z/2 x A4) EB H*(Z/2 x A4) ~ H* ((Z/2)3) EB H* (Z/2 x A5) EB H* (A4 x Z/2) EEl H* (Nh ((Z/2)3)).
E9
H*(Ga;;JFp)
u;EAp(G)/G i
even
* 2: O.
Remark. This extends easily to arbitrary twisted coefficients M and all using Tate cohomology instead in the proof. We may apply this to the examples in §2.
Examples 3.4 (all for p=2)
For S4 we obtain nothing new
H*(S4) EB H*(Ds) EB H*(Ds) EB H*((Z/2)2) ~ H*(S4) EBH*(Ds) EB H*(Ds) EB H*((Z/2)2).
For G = SL 3 (JF 2 ) we get
*E Z
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
o. Introduction There are intimate connections between the homology and cohomology of the symmetric groups and algebraic topology. The first of these is their connection with the structure of cohomology operations. This arises through Steenrod's defini~ion of the pth power operations in terms of properties of certain elements in the groups H * (Sp; IF p). Indeed, the original calculation of H*(Sn; IFp) by Nakaoka was motivated by this connection. These connections were exploited and developed from about 1952 - 1964 in work of J. Adem, N. Steenrod, A. Dold, M. Nakaoka and others. In particular, Adem used properties of the groups H* (Sp2; IF p) to determine the relations in the Steenrod algebras. The complete cohomology rings, H*(Sp2; IFp), were then determined by H. Cardenas, [Card], and it is here that the CardenasKuhn theorem first appears. Then, in the period from 1959 - 1961 E. Dyer and R. Lashof discovered a second connection of the symmetric groups with topology: a fundamental relationshi p between H * (Sn; IF p) and the structure of the homology of infinite loop spaces. The particular relation that expresses the spirit of their results best is a remarkable map of spaces f: Z x Bs ~ lim ,nnsn = QSo 00
n-+oo
which induces isomorphism in homology, but it is not a homotopy equivalence. In the late 1960's and early 1970's this isomorphism formed the starting point for much of Quillen's work relating the classifying spaces of finite groups of Lie type to stable homotopy theory.· We discuss some aspects of this in Chapter VII. The original calculations of the groups H*(Sn; IFp) was based on an important connection between these groups and the cohomology of symmetric products of spheres spn(S2m), .
H2mk-s(spn(s2m); IFp)
~
Hs(Sn; IFp)
for s < 2m (recall from Chapter II that spn(x) = xn /Sn where Sn acts on xn by permuting coordinates). In turn, the spaces 8 pn (8 2m ) were identified
with subspaces of Eilenberg-MacLane spaces by the fundamental theorem of Dold and Thom, [DT] ,
H*(Sn; lF 2 ) c H*(Soo; lF 2 ) is generated by a.ll the monomial products of the generators with bidegree :S n. Precisely, these monomials have the form
00
SPoo(X) ~
IT K(Hi(X; Z), i)
for all connected OW complexes X. From this, Steenrod, in unpublished work, Milgram, [M3l, and Dold, [Do], determined the homology groups of the spn(x). This work has led to recent connections between the homology of symmetric groups, certain moduli spaces of holomorphic maps from the Riemann sphere to symmetric spaces, the geometry of spaces of instantons and monopoles, and even results on linear control theory. Some of this work is described in the papers [C 2M2l, [MM1], [MM2J, [BHMMl, [Segal]. In this chapter we give a fairly complete and self-contained exposition of the structure of the homology and cohomology of the symmetric groups, Sn, for all n. The connection with infinite loop space theory is summarized in Theorem (3.5), but we dQ not discuss the other applications. . We now d~scribe the form of the answer. The homology of Sn injects WIth any untwIsted coefficients, A, onto a direct summand in the homology of Soo for each n via the homology map induced from the usual inclusion of groups. In ~articular th~s implies that H*(Soo;A) ~ Ll~ H*(B sn ,BSn _ 1 ; A) . for all untwIsted coeffiCIents A. On the other hand, if A is a ring there is a ring structure induced on H*(Soo; A) from fitting together the maps Sn x Sm -+Sn+m' This induces pairings
which makes H*(Soo; A) into a bigraded ring. Then the main structure theorems have the form
Theorem. H*(SooiIFp) is a tensor product of exterior algebras on odd dimensional generators and polynomial algebras on even generators where each generator has a known bidegree when p is any odd prime. When p = 2 it has the form of a polynomial algebra on generators of known bidegrees. As an example, here is the answer for p = 2. An admissible sequence, of length n, I = (iI, i 2 , . .. , in), is any non-decreasing sequence of positive ~ntege:s 1 ~ i1 ::; i2 ::; '" ::; in. The dimension of the sequence, d(I) = 1,1 + 21,2 + 41,3 + ... + 2n - l i n , and the bidegree of I, b(I) = 2n. Then
H*(Soo; IF2) ~ IF 2[XI, X2,
..• ,XI, ... J
as I runs over all admissible sequences. These admissible sequences are give~ by certain constructions called (iterated) Dyer-Lashof operations, [DL], applIed to H*(Z/2;1F 2 ). (We will discuss this further in §3.) In any case
Such a monomial has bidegree I:::~ ijb(Ij) and dimension I:::~ ijd(Ij ). In particular H*(S2; IF 2 ) has generators Xi, 1 :S i < 00, where Xi has dimension i and bidegree 2. Similarly H*(S4;lF 2 ) has these generators, their products XiXj, i ::; j, and further generators corresponding to the admissible sequences (iI, i2) of dimension i 1 + 2i 2. The Xi'S are used by Steenrod to construct the basic Steenrod squaring operations, Sqj, while the XI with I = (i 1,i2) are used by J. Adem to construct the iterates Sqi Sqj and determine the relations between them, such as the basic relations Sq2n- 1 qn = O. The first section of this chapter is primarily algebraic. We determine the groups Sylp(Sn) and show that H*(Sn; lF p) is detected by restriction to elementary abelian p-groups. Then we determine the conjugacy classes of these groups in Sn and show that certain key conjugacy classes satisfy weak closure conditions in Sprn. This allows us to determine the image of the restriction homomorphism for these groups and at this point we are able to write down the groups H*(Sn;Fp) for n::; p2. The hard work in §1 is the determination of the image of restriction
s
where Vn(p) ~ (Z/p)n and the inclusion is the regular representation. It turns out that the classes detected by these groups construct every cohomology class in H* (Sn; IF p) via certain composition pairings. Here, for the most part, we follow the exposition of [Mal, reporting on work done in the early 1970's. We extend his ideas in a few places to make things more self-contained. To understand these groups and the composition pairing which builds them for all n we must introduce a more global point of view. This is accomplished in the second section where we introduce the techniques of Hopf , algebras. We first introduce the notions of Hopf algebras, then prove the basic theorems of Borel and Hopf on the structure of commutative and cocommutative Hopf algebras. In §3 we apply the Borel-Hopf theorems to the work of §1 to quickly obtain the Hopf algebras H* (Soo; lF p) for all primes p. In §4 we discuss the structure of some rings of invariants. This is in preparation for §5 where we give complete calculations of H*(Sn; lF2) for n = 6,8,10,12. Finally, in §6 we discuss the cohomology groups H*(An; F 2). The work in §4 is largely incomplete and the complete answers should be of considerable interest when they are finally understood.
184
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
1. Detection Theorems for H* (Sn; JFp) and Construction of Generators
1. Detection Theorems for H*(Sn; JF p ) and Construction of Generators
so, if n
= L~ arpr then [~] = L~ arpr-t and the sum above is
'L., " ar (r-l p In this section we concentrate on the structure of the groups Spn. In particular, we construct a great many cohomology classes which are non-trivial in these groups using the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem and restriction to some of the more important maximal elementary p-subgroups of Spn. These subgroups are classified in (1.3). Then, after we have discussed Hopf algebras in §2 we will show that the elements constructed here generate H* (Sn; JF p) for all n.
185
+ pr-2 + ... + 1) =
-1) =
'L., " ar (pr p_ 1
P _1 1 (n -
Q p (n)).
0
It follows that J embeds the wreath product as the 2-Sylow subgroup of
S2 n
•
Now let m be an arbitrary integer. Write it out in terms of its dyadic expansion Then
The Sylow p-Subgroups of Sn
with odd index. hence Recall that for any G ~ Sn and any other group H, the wreath product H l G is defined as the product H n x G with multiplication
(17,1, ... , hn, 9 )(h~, ... , h~, g') = (hlh~_l (1)' ... ,hnhg-l(n)' gg') . In particular, 8 m I Sn may be thought of as the set of permutations of pairs (i,j), 1 ::; i ::; m and 1 ::; j ::; n by defining
Syl2 (Sn)
Note that, in particular, we have
X .•. X
Syl2 (S2ir) ,
from which we conclude that the Sylow 2-subgroup of any finite symmetric group is a product of iterated wreath products of 2j2. A similar analysis applies for p odd. One checks, as before that
(Zjp) 2 (Zjp) \.
( hI, . . . , hn, g) (i, j) = (h j ( i ) , 9 - 1 (j)) . Then, using lexicographic ordering, this provides an embedding
= Sy12 (S2 il)
2 '" l
(Zjp)
'V
Spr
C
J
r-times
is Sylp(Spr) and a product, depending on the p-adic expansion of n, of these wreath products is Sylp(Sn) for general n. From (IV.4.3) we obtain an important detection theorem for symmetric groups. Theorem 1.2 The mod p cohomology of Sn is detected by its elementary abelian p-subgroups.
and, iterating this, we obtain J: Z2 l ... l 2;2
'->
S2
The Conjugacy Classes of Elementary p-Subgroups in Sn Tt
•
~ n times
Lemma 1.1 1. The power of 2 which divides n! is n - a( n) where a( n) is the number of 1 's in the dyadic expansion of n. I ' n-ap(n) 2, Let p be an odd prime, then t he power 0 f p w17"'lC h d"d 'tV'l es n. 'lS p-l where ap(n) is the sum of the coefficients in the p-adic expansion of n.
Proof. The power of p which divides n! is
Let Vn(p) = (Zjp)n '-> Spn be the regular representation, (the permutation representation on the cosets of the identity). Theorem 1.3 Write n = a + i1P + i2p2 + ... + irpr with 0 < a < pi, >0 , J for 1 ::; j ::; r. (Note that the i j can be greater than p in this decomposition.) Then there is a maximal p-elementary subgroup of Sn corresponding to this decomposition
V1 (p) x ... x V1 (p) x ... x Vr(p) x ... ....
v
ii
I
\"
yo
ir
X
Vr(p) ./
'J.1l.CltP\.rCl.
Y..L •
'-'Vl..lV.l.lL'-..,fJ..'-..I'bJ
.l... J.l.'-'
..........
-'J ............................. ". .... '-'
_
.... ...., ....... t-' .......
and as we run over distinct decompositions (iI, ... , ir) these give the distinct conjugacy classes of maximal elementary p-subgroups of Sn. Proof Let H = (Zjp)i C Sn be any p-elementary subgroup. The action of H on (1, ... ,n) breaks this set into orbits, each of length a power of p. Now restrict H to its action on a single orbit. This gives a homomorphism H -+Spt with image conjugate to vt (p). It follows that H is contained in one of the groups of the theorem. 0
H* (~pn-l
X ... X
Spn-l) IF p) .
p
¢
Proof Every elementary p-subgroup of Spn is conjugate to one contained in either Spn-l X ... X Spn-l or in Vn(p) and H*(Sylp(Sn); IFp) is detected by . ,
v
'
p
p-elementary
~mbgroups.
group itself. Thus there is h E Vn(p) so that Ihl- 1 = e and there is an element .\ E Aut(Vn(p)) ~ NSpn (Vn(P)) so that f· Ae(f . A)-l = e and, of course, f . )..Vn(p)(f· )..)-1 = fVn(p)f-l. But this implies that f· A E C(e) and the claim is verified. Now we are ready to prove the theorem. The proof is by induction, so we assume it is true for n-l. Suppose that we have V' = gVn (p)g-l C Sylp(Spn). We wish to show that there is an h E Sylp(Spn) so that hVn (p)h- 1 = gVn (p)g-l. To begin we assume that 9 E Zjp (Spn-l by the remarks above. Then we project onto Spn-l. Note that, if 7r denotes the projection, then 7r(Vn (p)) = Vn-1(p). Thus 7r(g)Vn _ 1(p)7r(g)-1 C Sylp(Spn-l) and, by the inductive assumption, there is some A E Sylp( Spn-l) so A7r(g) Vn - 1 (p) (A7r(g)) -1_ = Vn- 1(p) and A7r(g) is an automorphism of Vn- 1(p). Hence, there is some
o
Weak Closure Properties for Vn(p) C Sylp(Spn) and pi (Vn-i (p)) C Spn-l 2 Zjp
E
Spn-l C Zjp 2 Spn-l n NS pn (Vn(P))
so that A7r(g¢) commutes with Vn - 1 (p). But then, since Vn-1(p) is its own centralizer in Spn-l, it follows that A7r(g¢) E Sylp(Spn-l), so 7r(g¢) E Sylp(Spn-l) as well, and g¢ E 7r-l(Sylp(Spn-l) = SYlp(Spn) and the induction is complete. 0 Using this result we have a precise determination of the image of the restriction homomorphism from H* (Spn ; IF p) to H* (Vn (p); IF p). Corollary 1.6 The image of the restriction homomorphism
Recall that N C H eGis said to be weakly closed in H if every subgroup of H which is conjugate to N in G is already conjugate to N in H. Theorem 1.5 For all n > 0 and each prime p the subgroup Vn(p) C Spn obtained via the regular representation of (Zjp)n is weakly closed in Sylp(Spn).
Proof The regular representation G '-+ SIGI is defined by regarding the poi~ts of G as the elements being permuted and the embedding as permutations is 9 ({ h }) = {g h }. Then the centralizer of G '-+ SI GI is a second copy of G acting from the right, c(g)( {h}) = {hg-1}. (This is well known, but the proof is easy: if xg = gx for all 9 E G, we have xg{h} = gx{h} = g{h'\} for some .\, and xg{h} = x( {gh}) = {gh'\}.) In particular, in the case where G is abelian, it follows that G is its own centralizer in SIGI when G is embedded via the regular representation. Next, choose e E Vn(p), e =1= 0, and let C(e) ~ Zjp2Spn-1 be the centralizer of e in Spn. In particular, Vn(p) C C(e). Then we also have C(Zjp 2Spn-l) = (e) ~ Zjp, and we suppose! E Spn given so that !Vn (p)!-l C C(e). We claim that there is agE C(e) so that fVn(p)f- 1 = gVn (p)g-l so that Vn(p) is weakly closed in C(e). To see this note that e E C(jVn(p)f-l) = fVn(p)!-l since, as we have seen, the centralizer of the regular representation of an abelian group is the
is precisely equal to
n-times
Proof. First, the normalizer of the regular representation of H C SIHI is always Aut(H) so the Weyl group is Out(H). In the case of (71jp)n this is GLn{lF p). Now (1.5) implies that we can apply the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem to Vn(p) C Sylp(Spn) and (1.6) follows. 0 We also have further weak closure properties which are very useful in understanding the groups H* (Spn; IF p). Theorem 1.7 For allprimesp and 1 ~ i ~ n-l, the subgroup (Vn_i(p))pi C Spn-l 2 Zjp is weakly closed in Spn..
188
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
1. Detection Theorems for H" (Sn; IF p) and Construction of Generators
Proof. Let T = (1,1, ... , 1, T) E H 2Zip where T acts by
189
then
v0I0···0I+I0v0·"0I+···+I0"·010v '-----v----' "---.r---' pi times pi times pi times
T(h 1, ... ,hp,1)T- 1 = (h 2 ,h3 , ... ,hp,h 1,1),
'-----v----'
and suppose that T E H 2Zip and T have the same image under the projection 7r: H 2?llp-+?llp. Then, we can write T = (Tl, ... )Tp, T), and a direct calculation shows that
is in H*(Vn(p)pi;IFp)N. Also, when dim(v) is even
v 0 v 0··· Q9 v pi times
E
H*(Vn(p)pi; IFp)N .
'-----v----'
so TP = 1 if and only if T1 ... Tp
Consequently we have
= 1.
Proposition. Suppose that T and T have the same image 1mder then, if TP = 1 it follows that T and T are conjugate in H 2 Zip.
7r
in Zip,
(Write e = (T1, T2T1, ... , Tp-1 ... T1, 1, 1) E H2?l I p. Then directly eTe- 1 = T and the proposition follows.) Now we turn to the proof .of the theorem. We introduce the following notation. Let M = g(Vn _ i (p))p'g-1 C Spn-i 2?lIp for some g E Spn. Suppose that the projection 7r on M is not {I}. Then the proposition shows that we may assume T E M. The centralizer of (T) in Spn-l 2Zip is L1P(Spn-l) x (T) and consequently, M = (MnL1P(Spn-l)) x (T). Thus, the intersection with L1(Spn-1), now regarded as the permutation group on pn-1 points, must have pi orbits, each of length pn-i-1 to give pi orbits each of length pn-i under under the action of the entire subgroup in Spn-l 2 ?lIp. It follows that
and the order of the resulting group (M n S;n_l, T) is at most p(n-i-1)pi+ 1 <
p(n-i)pi so it follows that 7r(M) = {I}. Consequently, M result now follows by checking orbits. Corollary 1.8 The image of the restriction map
is
C
S;"_1 and the 0
Corollary 1.9 1. For all integers n, i
°
> we have that the composite restriction map res:
res·
n
H*(Spn+i; lF p ) ~H*(Spn; IFp) --r H*(Vn(P); IFp) is onto the image of res* . 2. Let v E im(res*; H2*(Spn; lF p)-+H2*(Vn (p); IFp)), then for all i
> 0,
VQ9VQ9"'Q9V "---.r---' pi times
is in the image of the restriction res*: H*(Spn+i;lFp)--rH*(Vn(p)Pi;lFp). (1.9) is a key tool in our final description of the homology structure of the symmetric groups which will be completed in the next 2 sections using the methods of Hopf algebras. We now determine the image of the restriction map in H* (Vn (p); IFp). The Image of res*: H*(Spn;lFp)--rH*(Vn(p);IFp).
We apply the results of (IV.I) on the homology of wreath products, to further understand how the mod (p) homology and cohomology of Sn occurs. Clearly, the critical case is when n = pm. We have a factorization of the inclusion Sylp(Snp) '---+ Snp as follows Sylp(Snp)
'---+
Sylp(Sn) 2Zip
'---+
Sn 2Zip
'---+
Sn 2Sp
'---+
Snp .
In (IV.I) we determined H*(H 2Zip; IFp). It is generated by elements of two types. First there are the (1 + T + ... TP-l )(A1 Q9 ... Ap) E H*(HP; IF p) where the Aj are not all equal and T acts to shift the elements T(AI Q9 ... Q9 Ap) = There are two special cases for the result above. Let
(Ap 0 Al 0 ... 0 Ap_r). These are all in the image of the composite res· tr. Then there are the elements of the form
l::1U
\..;IU:1p\,er Y 1.
1. ne \..;onOIIlOIUl:.Y Ul 0YHlllltLrIC '-..Truup::;
(1.10)
,(A
2. the construction is natural in the sense that if f: X -----+Y is a continuous map and f*(T) = a then UP x id)*(T(T)) = T(a),
0 A 0···0 A), U7r*('Y·) J v p times
where (I'j) E Hj(Zjp; IFp) is a generator and 7r: H2Zlp-----+Zlp is the projection. Precisely, 'Yj is given as follows. Let e E Hl (B'l..lp; Wp) be the fundamental class which corresponds to the identity homomorphism
3. r(a U (3) = ±r(ex) U r((3), 4. r(a + (3) = r(ex) + r((3) + tr(w) for some w E Ht(XP; lF p ). From the appendix to (IV) we have the formulae for the restriction map (,dP
x 1)*: T(a)-----+H*(X x Blip; IFp) :
id E Hom(Hl(B'l..lp; Z); Wp) = HI (B'l..lp; Wp) and suppose b = j3( e) is the Bockstein. Then set 'Y2j = bi, 'Y2j+l = bi e for p odd, and 'Yj = ej when p = 2. For notational convenience we will sometimes write 7r*bj) = ej , 7r*b2j+€) = bief. as well in what follows. There are further restrictions that we can put on the possible classes in (1.10) which are in the image from H*(Snp; Wp) when p is odd. The normalizer of Zip C Sp is Zip XT Z/(p -1). The action of B E Z/(p -1) on (A 0· ··0 A) is trivial if dim(A) is even, but is given by the sign representation if dim(A) is odd. Likewise, we can make Aut(Z/p) ~ Z/(p - 1) correspond to the units p, E Zip and under this correspondence p,bj) = p,[J+ 1/2l 'Yj. Thus, the invariants under this action in H*(Sn ~ Zip; Wp) among the elements of the form (1.10) are the elements (A 0 ... 0 A) U 'Yk with k = 2j(p - 1) or k :;::; 2j(p - 1) - 1 when dim(A) is even and (A 0 ... 0 A) U b(2j+I)(p-l)/2 or (A 0· .. 0 A) U b(2j+I)(p-l)/2-1 e when dim(A) is odd. Lemma 1.11 Let p be a prime. The composite
(1.12) t
L
(,d2x1)*(T(a))
tr· res: H*(S;n_l; Wp)--tH*(Vn(p) n Spn-l; lFp)--tH*(Vn(p); lFp ) and since the index of this intersection in Vn (p) is p the result follows.
0
In view of (1.11), to understand the restriction map
H*(Spn-l 2 Zip; lFp)-----+H*(Vn(p); lFp ) it suffices to study it on elements of the form T( ex) where T (ex) is described in the proof of (IV.1.5). From this proof we see that, in fact, T(ex) is defined and non-zero in HPt(X P xr E'l..lp; lF p ) for any cohomology class ex E Ht(X; lF p ) where X is an arbitrary CW complex. T(ex) satisfies the following four properties, all of which follow directly from its construction in (IV.1.5): 1. res(T(ex)) = ~ in H*(S;n_l;lFp), p
times
j
when p = 2,
(,dPxl)*(T(a))
L
[t/2(p-l)]
At
. .
(_l)i[pi(a) 0 bm (t-2i)
+ (_I)t j3p t (a)
0 bm (t-2t)-le]
o where m
= (p - 1)/2 and ( _l)mt(t-l)/2
At =
(m!)t
Note that since (m!)2 = (_1)(P+l)/2, it follows that At is ±1 f~r ~ even. This can be applied inductively to understand the restnctlOn map to H* (Vn (p)) from H* (Spn) since the inclusion Vn (p) <-+ Spn factors as follows
When p
Proof. We use the double coset formula for S;n-l and Vn(p). There is only one double coset in the wreath product. Hence the composite factors as
et -
o
Vn(p) is identically zero.
Sqj (a) 0
= Vn-I(p)
.,:1Pxl
X
Z/p----+Spn-l (Z/p--+Spn .
= 2 and n = 2 this gives res*(T(e))
= e2 01 +
e 0 e E H*(V2(2)).
This element is not invariant under GL2(2) but res*(T(e))+10 e2 = d 2 is invariant, and since res* (e) = 10e, it is also in the image of res. Consequentl~, d is in the image of H* (S4; IF 2)' and since d3 = S ql (d 2 ) it follows that d3 IS afso in the image. We thus have a proof that lF 2[Xl,X2]L2(2) is in the image of restriction from H*(S4; IF2)'
Example 1.13 H*(S4;lF2) 2 In this case we need only 2 detecting subgroups, VI (2) and V2(2). Then we have
= S2
x S2 C 54,
192
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
where ¢ = (res1' res2), and cp = res~~ g\~nv2 + res~~ (2)2nv2' Note that im ¢ ~ kercp; now Vl(2)2 = ((12), (34)), V2(2) = ((12)(34), (14)(23)), hence VI (2)2 n V2(2) = ((12) (34)) = .d(V2 (1)). The invariant subrings are given as follows:
1. Detection Theorems for H* (Sn; IF p) and Construction of Generators
II
193
(x-v)
vEVn(p)
H* (VI (2)2)Z2 ~ IF 2[CTI' CT2], H*(V2 (2))GL 2(lF 2) ~ lF 2 [d2 , d3 ], H* (VI (2)2 n V2 ) ~ lF 2[e], and
From the above we deduce the existence of classes CTI, CT2, c3 E H*(S4), with
and so n
L AjXPj ((dpn-Lpi-1)P + BjeP- I ). This approach can be iterated. First, we need an inductive formula for constructing d(p_l)pn-l E H*(Vn(p))GLn(P). We fix the generators dpn_ pj for the Dickson algebra discussed in (III.2) as follows. Write Vn(p) = (Zlp)n-1 x Zip where the elements in the summand Zip are written Ae, 0 :::; A ~ p - 1. Then the restriction of dpn_ pi to the subalgebra for (Zlp)n-1 is (dpn-l_pj-l)P for j > 1, and when j = 1 we have dpn_1 = dpn_l_lepn-l(p-l) where dpn-l_* is the Dickson invariant for (Zlp)n-l.
Lemma 1.14 The following expansion is valid for all primes p. .-r
pn
n-I
-
L AjX
j=O for each integer n, 1 ~ n <
pj
dpn_pj
=
II
j=O In particular, by restricting to IF P (Vn - I (p) 1 we see that when j f. 0 the restriction of the coefficient of Xpi is -d~n-l_pi-l' Thus, since there is only a one dimensional set of invariants in IFp (Vn (p) 1 with degree pn - pi we obtain the result for all the lower coefficients. But the top coefficient is ± TI v where v E Vn(p) and v =f=. O. The inductive step follows. 0 Corollary 1.15 Write Vn(p) = Vn-I(p) X Zip, then. the lowest dimensional ., ' d pn_pn-l = 'l\"n-I GLn(P) 'mvanant can b e wntten 0j=0 ep1 dpn-l_pi + dPpn-L pn-2' (Just expand out the coefficient of x
pn
1
- in the expression above.)
(x - v) ,
vEVn(p) 00.
Proof. To begin consider the case n = 1. We have TIf:Ol(X -ie) = xP -xeP-1 ~o the result is true here. Assume the result true for n, we show this implies It for n + 1. Write Vn(p) = Vn-I(p) X Zip, so
Corollary 1.16 dpn_pn-l is contained in the image of the restriction map, im(res*), from H*(SYlp(Spn)). n n-l 2n-1 Proof. Indeed, d pn_pn-l = res*(T(d p n-Lpn-2) ± 1 0 bP -P ,(or 1 0 e when p = 2) but if 7r: SYlp(Spn-l) 2 Zlp-+Zlp is the projection onto the new Zip and e = 7r* (e) then res* (e) = e in the expression above for p = 2 and similarly for b when p is odd. 0
This shows, since the dpn_pi are all Steenrod pth powers of dpn_pn-l, that when p = 2 the entire invariant sub algebra is in the image of the restriction map and when p is odd, the entire invariant polynomial sub algebra is also in the image of restriction, but it leaves open the question of the part which involves the exterior terms. Here we follow the discussion in [Maj. Define
- ._ .....
bf. (1.17)
Li=
.....
....,
_- .... _----
i-I
b1!t
i-I
Example 1.19 H*(Sp2;'iFp). The following calculation is due to H. Cardenas. We have
pr
lJ( 1
bi
h
bi
i.e. the k, j entry of Li Ie
is b~ , (::; r ::; i-I).
Similarly, set i-I
bP1
Mj,i =
b1!t
---
bpi 1
ll]j
h
bi ei
t
el "
i-I
We have pr? (br?) =
i.e. the bPi row is omitted (1 :::; j ::; i-I).
'+1'
If
.
but prY (b T ) = 0 for r < pJ. From this we find
while
---
ll]i
and we see that the GL2(p)~invariant class Nh,2Mo,2L~-3 is in the image of restriction from H*(SYlp(Spz);lFp). Thus, applying j3 we have that MI,2L'{-2 is in the restriction image, and applying pI j3 we have Nfo,2L"{-2 is also in this image. The polynomial algebra 'iFp[d p2_p,d p2_I = L~-I] is also in the restriction image, and, from (III.2.9), we see that this is the entire GL2(p) invariant subalgebra of H*(V2(P); 'iF p). The groups H*(Sp2;lFp) are detected by restriction to H*(V2(p);lFp), H*(Vl(p)P; lFp ). From (III.4.2) and (1.8) above it follows that the image of this restriction for VI (p)P is
t
lFp[Sl,"" sp]
Note that dim(Mi,i+l) q = (p - 3)/2 = m - 1, (1.18) res*(T(Mi_1,i))
= ±
p(dim(Mi-1,i)) - p
+3
so we have, setting
(~(-l)j Mj,ib~iq - Libf+le) = M ,i+l br+l i
@
E(h, ... , jp)
where dim(si) = 2i(p -1) and dim(fi) = 2i(p - 1) - 1. Also, the only gener~ ating class which restricts to H*(V2(P); lF p ) non-trivially and also restricts to H*(Vl(p)P; lFp) gives the pair (O'p, dp 2_ p). The remarks preceeding (1.19) show that more generally
T(Mi-l,iNfi-2,iLf-3) = ±Mi,i+lMi--l,i+ILf;{
)=0
up to a sign. Here the restriction is from Spi l Zip to Vi+ 1 (p) = L\P (Vi (p)) x Zip and the classes bi+l' e are associated to the rightmost Zip. Moreover, PP'Mi,i+lbr+l = Mi-1,i+lbr+l' A similar calculation shows that res*(T(Li))U bi+l = Li+l. Also we should note that each of the matrices above is invariant under SLn(P) but that gJ = det(g)J for 9 E GLn(p), so any product of p-l of them is invariant under G Ln (p). .
and so this element is in the image from the restriction' of H* (Spi; IF p) for each i. Applying Steenrod p-power operations and Bocksteins we obtain the following table of further elements:
196
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
2. Hopf Algebras
197
where Li,T is the (j, r) minor of L given as (-ly+jDet(Vj,T) where vj,r is the matrix obtained from the matrix, £, with determinant L by deleting the (i - j) th row and the rth column. But then it is easy to verify that P1'
Mi -
i-2
~
Mi_2 M i_3 Lp - 3
1 ...
ele2'"
eiDet (Lr,j) .
On the other hand
1
p"-'
, C·
pp i - 2
~
Mo =
W")
Mi_2Mi_4Lp-3
=
(
L
o
0
L
~
o
o
so taking determinants of both sides (1.20) follows.
Ip,,'-'
Finally, to complete the demonstration that the elements above generate the entire image of res* we proceed by induction using the factorization pp2
--7
NI 2 M ILp-3
Ip, PP
i-3
~
111,£_1 L1'-2
LlPxid -----* Vi-l(P)
(res}/id
lZ/p----+Spi-l lZ/p
'-+
Spi
for the restriction map. The details are direct. Remark 1.21 The entire ring of invariants has been discussed in (III.2.9), and for p > 3 and n > 3 also, [Mal shows that the classes above generate a proper subalgebra of this ring.
2. Hopf Algebras
Further, one can verify that MJ = 0,0 ::; j ::; i-I but M i - 1 M i - 2 ··· Mo -# O. Thus, there are further products that we can write down and Mann shows using a counting argument depending on the homology of symmetric product~ of spheres, that the image of the restriction map is exactly the free module over the Dickson algebra of GLn(p)-polynomial invariants generated by 1 and the elements together with their distinct products above. It is possible to give an algebraic proof of these results thus avoiding any reference to topology. Here are details for these last two steps. Lemma 1.20 For each i
Vi(p)
> 0 and every odd prime p we have
An augmented, graded, algebra over a field JF is an associative, graded, unitary JF-module together with a ring homomorphism €: A-+JF, where JF is thought of as concentrated in degree O. Here, to be precise the multiplication /-L: A 0lF A -~ A is given and the unit corresponds to a graded homo€01
A
10€
0lF JF ---+ A 0lF
~
A - - - t A are both the identity maps, as is the composition
d: JF -+ A -+ JF. The associative condition can be written diagramatically as saying that the diagram
Proof. One has an expansion for each j,
A
i
lvIj
=
±
L 7'=0
eTLj,T
~'
morphism 1: JF -+ A so that the compositions JF 0lF A ---+ A 0lF A ---+ A and
commutes.
198
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of ~ymmetric Groups
A graded coassociative, counitary, coaugmented, coalgebra over a field IF is a graded IF-module, B, together with a coproduct map
¢ :B
----+ B 0lF
B,
counit, Le. a graded IF-module morphism 1* : B----+lF
so that (id 01 *)¢
= (1* 0
id)¢
= id,
Example 2.3 Let G be a group and IF( G) its group ring, then
and coaugmentation map
¢: IF(G)-tlF(G) 0lF(G)
which is also graded and satisfies the condition that the composition (€* 0lF €*)id : IF -----t IF 0lF IF -----t B 0lF B is just ¢€*. As before the coaugmentation and counit are related by 1*€* = id: IF -----tlF. The coassociative condition is that the diagram below commutes B
}-
(xi)' . (xk)' =
e; k)
(:d H
)'
It follows that if IF has characteristic 0 then A * is also isomorphic to the polynomial algebra on one variable x* in dimension 2i, but if char(lF) = p then a direct exercise with binomial coefficients mod (p) shows that Ip i
, •••
l/(x*P
z=
In the sequel all the Hopf algebras we consider will be connected, commutative, and even co commutative of finite type. So we assume these conditions in the remainder .of the section. Hopf algebras arise for us as follows. vVe are given a sequence of groups and injective homomorphisms
:s: n < 00,
Go
= {1},
for which the f-L(n, m) are associative up to congugation, i.e. for any triple (n, m, l) we have that there is an element g(n, m, l) E G n + m+ l so that
Example 2.2 Let A be the polynomial algebra on an single variable x of dimension 2i over the field IF. Then the coproduct structure is determined by ¢(x) = x01 + 10x so ¢(xi) = L:~i=O G)x j 0x i - j • Thus, in the dual algebra the product is given by the rule
= JF[x*, IP"'"
z=
is defined by ¢(g) = (g 0 g) for all 9 E G, so ¢ figi = fi(gi 0 gi)' This is also a unitary, co connected Hopf algebra, but it is not connected unless G=l.
Gn , 0
Definition 2.1 A Hop] algebra (A, f-L, ¢, €, 1) over a field IF is a graded, associative, unitary, augmented algebra, together with a counitary, coaugmented, coassociative, coalgebra map ¢ so that ¢ is a homomorphism of graded algebras for which the counit is € and the coaugmentation is 1.
A*
co augmented , counitary coalgebra. In particular, (A *, ¢*, IL*, 1 *, E*) is also a Hopf algebra and (A **, f-L**, ¢**, E**, 1 **) = (A, f-L, ¢, E, 1). , The Hopf algebra (A, f-L, ¢, E, 1) is said to be connected if A ~ = 0 for i < 0 and 1: IF -----t Ao is an isomorphism. A is said to be commutative in case f-L:A0A-----tA satisfies f-L(a0b) = (-1)lallblf-L(b0a) for all a E Alai, bE Albl'
= '" = I;i = ... = 0),
dimhp-i)
=
2ipi .
g(n, m, l)-l(f-L(n + m, l)(f-L(n, m)(a, b), c)g(n, m, l)
= f-L(n, m + l)(a, f-L(m, l)(b, c)) for all (a, b, c) E G n x G m x G l . We also assume the f-L(n, m) are commutative up to conjugation. This means that for each pair (n, m) there is g(n, m) E G n +m so that
g(n, m)-l f-L(n, m)(a, b)g(n, m) = f-L(m, n)(b, a)
V(a, b)
E
Gn x G m
.
For example if G n = Sn, the symmetric group and the pairing f-L(n, m) is the usual inclusion of Sn x Sm C Sn+m, with Sn acting on the first n elements and Sm acting on the last m, then these conditions are satisfied. Here the g(n, m, l) = id but the g(n, m) are non-trivial. Of course U~ H* (G n ; IFp) is only an associative, commutative, graded algebra, but not a Hopf algebra since the diagonal map .d: Be-----tB e x Be which, on passing to cohomology, is supposed to give the coproduct, ¢, has the form n n .d*(an) = an 0 t + t 0 an + a~ 0 a~'
L i
In case A is of finite type, Le. Ai is finite dimensional over IF for all i these notions are self dual, At = HomF (Ai, IF), (A *, ¢* , €* , 1*) becomes an associative, unitary, augmented algebra and (A*, f-L*, €*,l *) becomes a coassociative,'
where an E H*(G n ; lFp ) and t n E Ho(G n ; lF p ) is the element given as the image of a chosen generator t E Ho(G 1 ; lFp ) under the iterate of the multiplication map,
200
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
n times
Next, adjoin a unit 1 to the algebra and note that the quotient of this algebra by the ideal (1 - t) is a Hopf algebra. In dimension i we have, clearly, that this quotient is given as limn (Hi (G n ; JF p)).
Lemma 2.4 Let G =
then
lim G where the inclusion Gn C Gn+1 is p.,(n, 0)) n->oo n
(Any chain in the bar construction for G appears in the bar construction of G m for some sufficiently large m.) In particular, while the maps p.,(n, m) need not pass to limits to define a "reasonable" homomorphism G x G-tG, in homology the maps do pass to limits to define a pairing
which, together with the diagonal map
gives H*(G;71lp) the structure of a commutative, cocommutative, connected Hopf algebra. Of course, it is not always going to be true that the Hopf algebra is of finite type but this does turn out to be the case for the symmetric groups above and the other cases we consider, finite groups of Lie type which are studied in Chapter VII. Thus, associated to USn is the Hopf algebra H*(Soo; JFp). In §3 we will show that the restriction map res*: H*(Sn; IFp)-tH*(Soo; IFp) is injective for all n, and we will determine the Hopf algebra structure on H * (Soo; JF p) completely. As a result we will obtain the groups H*(Sn; JF p) by simply describing the image of the restriction map in the resulting Hopf algebra. Before we can do this we need to discuss some basic structure theorems for commutative and cocommutative Hopf algebras and for this we need to discuss sub-Hopf algebras and quotient Hopf algebras. The notion of sub-Hopf algebra is evident, as is the notion of quotient Hopf algebra and Hopf algebra map ,\: A - t B of Hopf algebras . Duality connects these notions together very nicely. Given a sub-Hopf algebra AI C A, note that AS = Ao = IF by our assumptions and let lA' = Ker(E\A'). (fA is called the augmentation ideal in A.) Then AI A' A is a two sided ideal in A and B = AI AI A' A is written AI I AI. B inherits a unit, augmentation, product and coproduct from A, and so becomes a Hopf algebra. It is the quotient of A by the Hopf subalgebra AI. Dually, B* C A* is a Hopf subalgebra of A* and A* I jB* = AI*.
2. Hopf Algebras
201
Proposition 2.5 Let B C A be a sub-Hopf algebra of the commutative Hopf algebra A, and 0 = AI j B be the quotient. Let e: A - t A 0JF 0 be the compo-
sition
4> 10p A-tA0A~A0JFO
where p: A - t o is the projection. Then e( (J)
= (J 0
1 if and only if (J E B.
(The kernel of p has the form I(B)A and can be written I: I(B)wj where the Wj map onto an JF-basis for 0 since A is commutative. But from this the result is direct.) An element a E Ai is said to be primitive if ¢(a) = a 0 1 + 1 0 a. The set of primitives, 1'(A) is a graded IF-submodule of A and is closed under the pth_power operation, ~: a f--+ a P , if char(JF) = p. It is always closed under the Lie bracket operation [a,,B] = a,B - (-l)la ll .Bl,Ba. Thus the set P(A) is a (restricted) Lie algebra where "restricted" means the existence of the operation ~. A very important property of P(A) is that P(A 0JF B) = P(A) EB 1'(B) where A and Bare Hopf algebras. A dual notion to being primitive is being indecomposable. The set of indecomposables Q(A) for A is the quotient IAj(fA)2 of IA by the square of its augmentation ideal. The lifts of a basis for Q(A) to A form a set of algebra generators for A.
Proposition 2.6 Let v: A-tB be a surjection of Hopf algebras with A connected. Let /l E Ker(v) have minimal dimension then /l is primitive.
(v 0 v(¢(/l)) = 0 since v is a map of Hopf algebras, but ¢(p.,) = /l0 1 + 1 0/l + I: /ll 0 p.," and the connectedness of A implies that dim(/l/), dim(/l") are both less than dim(/l), thus the sum term is identically zero.)
The Theorems of Borel and Hopf A Hopf algebra is said to be primitively generated if the lifts of its indecomposables can be chosen to be primitives. For example, this is the case with JFp[x] where ¢(x) = x 01 + 10 x. But note that it is not the case for lFp[x]* where only x*, among the indecomposables, can be taken to be primitive. We have
Proposition 2.7 Let A be a connected Hopf algebra of finite type which is commutative and primitively generated. Suppose also that IF is perfect if
char(JF) < 00. Then as an algebra, A = Q9i M(i) where each M(i) has the form IF[xJ/ (x T ) and r is constrained by the following conditions: 1. r = 2 if dim(x) is odd and char(IF) =1= 2, 2. when dim(x) is even r = 0 if char(lF) = 0 and has the form pI (or zero) if char(IF) = p.
202
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
iI, ... , in, ...
so that if i < j then dim(fi) ~ dim(fJJ We prove the result by induction. Set A( i) to be the subalgebra of A generated by iI, ... , fi. Since the fi are primitive A(i) is also a Hopf subalgebra of A. Clearly, the proposition holds for A(l). We assume it for A( i) and consider ~he surjection
Proof. Order the generators of A,
A(i) 0JF IF[IH1]-tA(i + 1) where IH1 1-+ fH1' The primitives in A(i) 0lF[h+1] are P(A(i)) EEl (le1 I j = 0, 1, ... ). Let 8 be an element of minimal degree in the kernel. Then 8 is primitive and so can be written as (Ir~l + Et
that
fit
i:~l
=
=
At
for each t. Replace iH1 by if+1 = ii+1 -
E pdf
s(t)-j
. Then
0, A(i+1) is the surjective image of A(i)0lFlF[h+l]j(lf~1) and there is no longer any primitive in the kernel so the surjection is an isomorphism. 0 This last result generalizes to the important theorem of Borel and Hopf. Theorem 2.8 Let A be a connected Hopf algebra of finite type over the perfect field IF. If the multiplication in A is commutative then, as an algebra A is a
tensor product A = 0iMi where each Mi is of the type above. Proof. Define A( i) C A to be the sub algebra of A generated by all the elements of dimension::; i in A. It is a sub-Hopf algebra. Since A(l) is primitively generated we can begin an induction. Assume the result proved for A(i). Set W C AHl to be a complementary IF-subspace to A(i) n A H1 , and choose a basis Xl, ... ,X r for W. We have the sequence of Hopf-subalgebras
c (A(i),Xl) c (A(i),X1,X2) c ... c A(i + 1)
A(i)
and we assume the result for (A(i), Xl,"" Xj). Thus we are reduced to considering the situation (A, b) where the indecomposables of A all have dimension ::; dim (b) and there is an exact sequence Q(A)-tQ( (A, b) )-t(b). We have that (A, b) I I A is primitively generated and thus has the form I IF[b]/(bP ) (or IF[b]/(b 2) when dim(b) is odd, but"since this case is easy we assume for the rest of the proof that dim(b) is even). Consider, as before the -
e
-
A 0 A we have that ¢(e (6)) = ~I (6) 01 + 1 0 ~I (6) in C. We need to show that this implies ~ 1(6) = 0 in C and this follows from
Proposition 2.9 If A is a connected Hopf algebra over a field of character-
istic p > 0 and the multiplication in A is commutative then if 1. Q(A)r = 0 for r > n, and 2. ~ I (I A) = 0 for some in.teger f, it follows that P(A)r = 0 for r > pi-ln. Proof of 2. g Suppose that the assertion is proved for Hopf algebras with q or less generators as an algebra and A has q + 1 generators. Choose a set of q + 1 generators for A and let X be one having highest degree. Let AI be the subHopf algebra generated by the remaining generators, and let A" = AI I AI, so A" is a Hopf algebra with 1 generator that satisfies (1) and (2). We have an exact sequence P(A/)-tP(A)-tP(A"). Now we can apply the inductive hypothesis. 0 Returning to the proof of the theorem, we have that ~ I (b) = bpI = 0 under J projection onto C. Thus (id 0 p)¢(b pJ ) = ~I (b) 0 1. Consequently bP E B pJ PJ l and there is an element v E A so b = v and if we set b = b - v we are in the previous case and the result follows. 0
The element in H* (Spi-l I Zip; IF p) which restricts to Li (defined in (1.17)), which we write as L when there is no possibility of confusion, has the form r(Li-d U 7r*(b). Consequently it restricts to 0 in H*(S;i_l;JF p). It follows that all the elements described in (1.14) - (1.20) which restrict to the ideal
(3.1)
Ii = lFp[dpi_pi-l, ... , dpi_l](dpi_l' M oLp-2,"" M j Lp-2, . .. , Mo'" M i _ 1 Lr)
all restrict to 0 in H*(Spi-l;IF p). Also, by (1.9(1)) they survive non-trivially to H * ( Soo ; IF p) as do the classes
r
surjection A0JFIF[b] -t (A, b) and let bP +w be the least dimensional element in the kernel. If w is zero we are finished since the composite map
A 0lF[b]j (bPI) --=---. (A, b) ~ (A, b) 0 (A, b) I I A is clearly injective so e is an isomorphism of algebras. In case w i=- 0 we proceed as follows. Let B C A be the sub-Hopf algebra of A consisti~g of pi -powers. (Thi~ is where we use the fact that IF is perfect.) Consider (A, b)1 IB = C. Since ¢(b) = b01+10b+ I::vi0v~ with I::vi0v~ E
(3.2)
8080"'08
'------v-----'
pi-times
for 8 E Ii and dim(8) even (by (l.9(2))). In particular, if 8* is the dual of any such even dimensional element in Ii it has image an indecomposable in the Hopf algebra H*(Soo;lF p), ~j((j*) i=- 0 for j 2: 1, and is independent of ~1(A*) for any other A E I k . Thus the dual groups Hi = It generate a polynomial algebra on even dimensional generators tensored with an exterior algebra on
204
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
205
odd dimensional elements which is a split summand of H*(S<X);lF p)' Letting A(M) denote this algebra we have from (1.8), the discussion after (1.19), and the Borel-Hopf theorem (2.8), that <X)
H*(S<X);lFp) ~ @A(M).
(3.3)
o Moreover, applying (l.8) again we see that the map
2. For each odd prime p H*(S<X); lFp ) is a tensor product of a polynomial algebra on classes indexed by r-tuples (iI, i 2,· .. , ir) with i l :S i2 :S ... ir and dimension 2(p-l)(il +pi2+" '+pr-li r ) together with an exterior algebra on odd generators dual to the odd generators for H.(Soo; IFp) .together with a divided power algebra on generators indexed by the remaining elements in the union of the Nj. Remark F or p = 2 the cohomology generator which corresponds to D 2r where D = d~Ll ... d~:_l E'Ii is actually the element which restricts to
res*: H*(Sn; lFp)-tH*(S<X); IFp) must be injective since the Weyl group of a group of the form appearing in (1.3) is a product of the Weyl groups for the Vr(p) x .. , \..
X
Vr(p)
v
2 r times
and a similar discription is given for the elements corresponding to of Dickson elements at odd primes.
I
ir separately and this Weyl group is GLr(P) I Sir' Thus the homology images of tensor products of elements in Mr surject onto H*(Sn;IF p) and, since these elements last to H *(S<X); IF p) subject only to the same symmetrizing conditions imposed in H* (Sn; IF p) - namely symmetry under Sir - the injectivity follows. We specify the image of H*(Sn; lFp) more precisely by giving a second degree to each monomial generator of N i , deg2 (8) = pi. Then to each monomial in (3.2), 81 0··· 08 l E H*(S<X); lFp), we assign the second degree
pth
powers
By divided power algebra on an even dimensional generator " we mean the tensor product
where dimbr)
= pr . dimb). Then classes of the form e.g., , = { dhpi_pi-l . " djipi_l M r M LP-3} 8
deg2(8 1 0 ... 0 81)
=
deg2(8 l )
+ ... + deg2(8l)
,
and it follows that H*(Sn;IF p) C H*(S<X);lFp) is the additive subgroup spanned by the tensor product monomials having second degree :S n. When p = 2 we have a very convenient method for indexing these classes. Let I = (i 1 :S i2 :S ... :S iT) be a sequence of non-negative integers, not all of them zero. Then there is a unique generator Q1 = Qil Qi'2 ... Qir E N r having dimension i 1 + 2i2 +. + 2r - 1 i r corresponding to it. It is the image of the class 11 1 0· .. 0 :,.. There are similar descriptions for the generators of M for odd primes, but the conditions on the sequence J = (i l :S i2 :S ... :S ir) are more complex. For notational convenience, when p = 2 we write the product in homology as a * (3. thus a typical monomial in H*(S<X);lF 2 ) will have the form
e:
e:
r
-
Q II
* Q 1'2 * ... * Q ir
.
It should also be pointed out that there are significant differences between the dual algebras. The following result is direct when we check the pth power operation on the su brings of the H* (Vi (p); IF p) given as the images of res* . Theorem 3.4 1. H* (S<X); IF 2) is a polynomial algebra on generators in one to one correspondence with the generators for H*(S<X); IFp).
together with the classes restricting to
generate the divided power algebras. The structure of H*(Sn; IFp) was first discussed by Nakaoka [Na]. Later H. Cardenas [Card] determined the cohomology rings H* (Sp2 ; IF p). N akaoka's idea was to determine H. (Sn; IF p) using the cohomology of symmetric products of spheres which he had determined previously, but which were also determined by Steenrod (unpublished) at about the same time using a key result of Dold and Thorn, [DT]. Cardenas' ideas were very much in the spirit of the development in §1. Perhaps the interest in these groups was prompted during the 1950's by J. Adem's thesis [Adem], where he used preliminary information about H* (Sp2 ; IF p) to obtain the Adem relations in the Steenrod algebra. From another point of view Bsoo occurs in an essential way in the study of infinite loop spaces. Recall that the n-fold loop space fln X is the space of based continuous maps f: (sn, oo)-t(X, *) with the compact open topology. If X is a space with basepoint, the natural inclusions fln sn(X)-tfln+l sn+l(x)
'2Uo
Ghapter v 1. Tne vonornolOE!,y
Vl uYllUlltLll<.- ' ..HVUY'"
on passing to the limit define the space Q(X) = limn -+ oo [2nsn(x). Q(X) depends functorially on X and 1fi ( Q (X)) = 1ft( X), the i-th stable homotopy group of X. Now Q(80) has a "loop sum product", which is given as the limit of the .an- 1 (*): .ansn x .ansn-+.ansn where *: [2sn x .asn -+[2sn is the loop sum. We have the following fundamental result of E. Dyer and R. Lashof Theorem 3.5 There is a map e: Z x Bsoo -+Q(8°) which induces isomorphisms in homology with all (untwisted) coefficients and which is additive in the sense that the diagram
i: (V2)k
'-t
(S4)k
'-t
Sn .
In cohomology, the image of i* lies in (0~~1 P[xo, x d) Sk, where Sk acts by permuting the polynomial generators. We will now analyze this ring of invariants, which is, as we have seen in §3, a homomorphic image of H*(Sn)' We start with the case k = 2: Theorem 4.1 The Poincare series of (P[xo, Xl]® P[xo, Xl])S2 is 1 + t5 t2)(1 _ t 3 )(1 - t 4 )(1 - t 6 )
= (1 _
P2(t)
.
Proof. As we are taking two-fold symmetric tensors, there are two types of X 0 Y + y 0 x and X 0 x. The latter are counted invariants, by the Poincare series (1-t 4 )\1-t 6)' Consequently, the former are counted by
the series homotopy commutes where the product on the left is addition in Z times the product discussed in §2 on Bsoo'
Although the language was different, this result first appeared in the original 1960 preprint of [D-L] which was widely circulated at the time but not published. It later was independently rediscovered by Barratt-Priddy, [BP], and Quillen, also unpublished, and has been of fundamental importance in algebraic topology since.
~
[(I_t 2 )1(1_t 3 )
(1-t 4
-
)(1-t 6)], and doing an easy manipulation we
obtain:
P2(t) =
~ [ Cl _t2)1(1 - t
=
~ ((1 - t )1(1 _ t
=
~ ((1 - t
3)
r
2
3 ))
2
)1(1 _ t 3 ) ) 1+t
+
(1 - t 4 :(1- t 6 )]
((1 - t 2 )\1 - t 3 ) + (1 + t 2 )1(1 + t 3 ))
((1 _2t~~t~ t
6 ))
5
o
4. More Invariant Theory As we saw in §3, the additive structure of H* (Sn) has been completely understood for over 20 years. In (1.13) the ring structure of H*(S4) was determined to be H*(S4) ~ P[0'1,0'2,C3]/(0'1C3 = 0). It was assumed that the same type of simple relation would hold for symmetric groups of higher degree. In this section we will use invariant theory to show otherwise. In fact we will exhibit numerical evidence that indicates the presence of very complicated relations, rich with symmetry, that build up successively. We will use these to give complete descriptions of the rings H*(Sn) for n = 6,8,10,12 in §5. As in §1, let j: Vn (2) = (Z/2t ~ Z/2 2 ... 2 Z/2 ~ S2 n denote the embedding where we consider S2n as the automorphism group of the set ffifZ/2 and Vn (2) as the set of translations. Its normalizer is the group of affine transformations, Affn(Z/2). Therefore N (Vn(2)) /Vn (2) = GL n (1F 2 ) and we have seen that in fact imj* = H*(Vn(2))GL n (F2), the ring of invariants. For n = 2, we obtain that imj* ~ P[Xo, Xl], deg Xo = 2, deg Xl = 3. For n = 4k, we have a natural inclusion
Examining this series, we deduce the existence of a five-dimensional class, which satisfies a quadratic relation. This is the first indication of the occurrence of relations which are not of the form seen before, the products of two generators being zero. Theorem 4.2
(P[xo, xl]0P[xo, Xl])S2 ~ P [dOl, d02 , d ll , d22 ] (X5)/ (x~ + X5 dOl dll + d22 d61 + d02 dil where
dOl d02
= Xo = Xo
0 1 + 1 0 Xo, d ll 0 Xo, d22
X5 = Xo 0
Xl
+ Xl
= Xl
0
0 Xo .
= Xl 0 1 + 1 0 Xl
Xl
= 0)
4. More Invariant Theory
Chapter VI. Thc Cohomology of Symmctric Groups
208
dOl
Proof. The elements dOl, d 02 , d ll , d22 are independent, generating a subpolynomial algebra. Verifying the relation, we conclude that together with X5 they generate a sub algebra with the same Poincare series as
o The relation in 4.2 will pull back to H* (58), as will be shown in §5. N ext we analyze the case k = 3, denote
d ll X5
+ t S + t lO + tIS
P3(t) = (1 _ t2)(1 _ t3)(1 - t 4 )(1 - t 6 )2(1 - t 9 )
= (1/ (1 - t ) (1 - t ) a b = (1/(1 - t 4 )(1 _t 6 ) a 3 = (1/(1 - t 6 )(1 - t 9 ) 2
abc 2
3
--
-
-
1)
X~
+ d02X~ + d02 dOl Xs + (d 03 d ll + d02doldll)X5 + d62 d il + d61 d22 do2 + d03dold22
(2)
X~
+ d22X~ + d22 d ll X7 + (d 33 dol + d22dlldol) X5 + d~2d61 + dil d02 d22 + d33dlldo2
(3)
XSX7
+ d01X~ + [d61 + d02 ]xs + d61 dllXs + d~l d22 + d03 dii + d03 d 22 + dOl do2 dii
(4)
XS X8
+ dllX~ + [dil + d22 ]X7 + dil dOIXs + drl d02 + d33 d61 + d33 do2 + dll d22d61
(5)
=
3
+-
cubes
el2 = a 2 b -
e3 +-
a
products of type a 2 b which are not cubes
elll = abc - 3el2 - e3
+-
X~ + dlld01X~
+ X7 XS + d ll d6l X S + dOl di l x7 d + (d61 22 +d02 dil) X5+ +d~l d 33
The letters denote the type of products they represent. Let e3
0 Xl 01),
(1)
1) 3
1) (1/(1 - t 2 )(1 - t 3 ) 1) .
0 1 01), d 22
.
Proof. Denote
= S(xo 0 Xo 0 1), d03 = Xo 0 Xo 0 Xo = S(XI 0 Xl 01), d33 = Xl 0 Xl 0 Xl X7 = S(xo 0 Xo 0 xI), Xs = S(xo 0 Xl 0 Xl)
0 1 0 1), d02
Relations:
Theorem 4.3 The Poincare series for P 3 is
1 + t S + t7
= S(xo = S(XI = S(xo
209
+ drl d03 + d03 d33 .
Proof. The elements d ij i = 0,1, j = 1,2,3 are algebraically independent, and generate a polynomial sub algebra. We examine the numerator of the Poincare series for P3:
products of type abc not of two other types.
As we are taking symmetric invariants, the formula for the desired Poincare series is 1 P'3(t) = '6ell1
3) . + el2 + e3 + ( 1/(12 - t )(1 - t)
The term on the extreme right records the 3-fold symmetrization of the generators of Plxo, xIl· Using macsyma, this simplifies to the asserted Poincare series. 0 As before, we use the numerator to deduce the relations. Let S( UI 0 U3) denote symmetrization.
Theorem 4.4
where
U2
0
The quintic term must come from Xs = S(xo 0 Xl 0 1) and similarly X7 = S(xo0xo0xt), Xs = S(X00XI0xI) account for t 7 , tS. Likewise xg explains the occurrence of t lO . (One checks that Xs does not satisfY a quadratic equation). There must be relations involving x~, x?, x§, XSX7 and X5XS. Finding the exact relation is a rather tedious task, which involves taking all possible products of the right dimension involving Xs, X7, Xs, xg and expressing their spill over in terms of the dij . Knowing the exact formulas, 'their verification is a lengthy but straight forward calculation, which we leave as a horrible exercise to the reader. Note that relation (2) is obtained from (1) by exchanging Xo and Xl; likewise we get (4) from (3) in this manner. Relation (5) is invariant under this exchange. To complete the proof we just compare Poincare series. 0
For the cases k = 4,5, 6 we do not have the algebra structure, only the Poincare series. These can be obtained in a combinatorial way extending the methods used in 4.3; we used macsyma to perform the simplifications. As the denominators of these series are clear, we only give the numerators: Theorem 4.5 The invariant algebras P4, P5 , P6 have the following polynomials as numerators of their Poincare series:
(1)
N 4(t)
= t 30 + t 25 + t 23 + t 22 + t 21 + 2t 20 + t 19 + + t 18 + t 17 + t 16 + 2t 15 + t 14 + t 13 + t 12 + t l l
+ 2tlO + t 9 + t 8 + t 7 + t 5 + 1 (2)
(3) N6(t)
N 5(t)
= t 50 + t 45 + t 43 + t 42 + t 41 + 2t 40 + 2t 39 + 2t 38 + 2t37 + 3t 36 + 3t 35 + 3t34 + 3t33 + 4t 32 + 4t 31 + 4t 30 + 5t 29 + 5t 28 + 5t 27 + 5t 26 + 6t 25 + 5t 24 + 5t 23 + 5t 22 + 5t 21 + 4t 20 + 4t 19 + 4t 18 + 3t 17 + 3t 16 + 3t 15 + 3t 14 + 2t 13 + 2t12 + 2t11 + 2t 10 + t 9 + i8 + t 7 + tS + 1
= es + eo'+ t 68 + t 67 + t 66 + 2t 6S + 2t 64 + 2t 63 + 3t 62 + 4t 61 + 4t 60 + 5t S9 + 5t 58 + 6t S7 + 7t 56 + 8t 5S + 10t 54 + 10tS3 + llt S2 + 13t51 + 14t 50 + 15t49 + 17t48 + 18t 47 + 19t46 + 20t 45 + 21t44 + 22t43 + 23t 42 + 23t41 + 24t40 + 23t 39 + 24t 38 + 24t 37 + 23t 36 + 24t35 + 23t 34 + 23t33 + 22t 32 + 2lt 31 + 20t30 + 19t 29 + 18t 28 + 17t27 + 15t 26 + 14t 25 + 13t24 + llt 23 + 10t 22 + 10t 21 + 8t 20 + 7t 19 + 6t 18 + 5t 17 + 5t 16 + 4t 15 + 4t14 + 3t 13 + 2t12 + 2tll + 2t 10 + t 9 + t 8 + e + t 5 + 1 .
Let P[X1,' .. , xnl be a polynomial algebra which has an Sn action defined by permuting the n generators. A fundamental result in Galois Theory is that the ring of invariants of this action is also a polynomial ring, on the symmetric generators 0"1, ... , CT n . We have shown that this result does not extend to invariants ?f the form (01 P[xo, xd) Sk. As more variables are introduced, the complexity of this ring of invariants increases and this will be reflected by interesting relations in the cohomology of the symmetric groups.
5. H* (Sn),
n
=
6,8,10,12
In this section we will combine the well-known additive structure of H*(5n) with the invariant theory of §4 to obtain precise descriptions of the cohomology rings H*(Sn) n = 6,8,10,12, as well as the action of the Steenrod algebra on them. We start by describing H*(S6): Theorem 5.1
deg O"i = i, deg C3 = 3 where
Sq 10"2 = CT1 CT2 + CT3 + C3, Sq1c3 = 0, Sq 2c3 = CT2C3 2 Sq 1CT3 ~ (C3 + CT3) CTl, Sq CT3 = CT3CT2 + c30"i .
Proof. From §1, we see that H* (56) has a basis given by elements
* Qj * Qk, Qr,s * Qd = 2s +r and Qo,s = Qs * Qs·
{Qi where 1 ::; r::; s, dimQr,s sequence of inclusions
Using a basis dual to the one above, we have that if k k* ((Q1
k* ((Ql k* ((Ql
We now consider the
=j
. i,
* 1 * 1)*) = 0"1
* Ql * 1)*) = CT2
* Q1 * Qd*) = 0"3
.
Using the symbol O"i to denote the cohomology classes identified to symmetric classes, the above implies that
* 1 * 1)*) = 0"1 0 1 + 1 00"1 j* ((Ql * Q1 * 1)*) = CTI ® CT1 + 0"2 ® 1 j* ((Ql * Q1 * Qd*) = 0"2 0 CTI . j* ((Ql
Note that the 3-dimensional generator C3 in H* (S4) restricts to zero. As j*(Q11 ® 1) = Q11 * 1, we conclude that j* ((Q11 * 1)*) = Q11 ~ 1 = C3 ® 1. The elements CT1 ® 1 + 1 ® 0"1, CTI ® CTI + CT2 01 and CT2 ® 0"1 are mdependent, as they map to the symmetric generators under i*. Recalling that in H* (S4) C30"1 = 0 is the only relation, we obtain a unique relation in the su balgebra generated by the above elements together with C3 ® 1:
(C3 ® 1) [(0"2 ® 0"1)
+ (0"1
® 1 + 1 ® CT1)(CTI ®
0"1
+ CT2 ® 1)] =
0.
212
5. H*(Sn), n=6,8,10,12
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
Hence observing that j* is a monomorphism and that this subalgebra has the same Poincare series as H* (S6) (which is 1 + x3 /(1- x)(l- x2)(1- x3) ) , we conclude
Ci2 Sq1
Ci1Ci2
Sq3 0"1
01
+ 1 00"1""---;'0"1,
0"1
00"1
+ 0"2 0
Sq1
1 i*(Sq 0"2 01
i* (Sq1 (C3 0 1)) = 0 i*(0"2 c301)) = 0"2 C3 i*(Sq 10"2 0 0"1 + 0"20 O"f) i*(C3 00"1 + 0"10"200"1 + 0"20 O"r) (C3 Ci3)Cil
+
2 Sq 0"3
+ 0"1 Ci 4
3
= 'i*(Sq 2Ci2 0 Ci1 + Sq 1Ci2 0 Sq 1Cir) = i*(u~ 00"1 + C3 0 O"i + 0"1 Ci 2 0 Cii)
d6
d7
0"1 Ci 4
O"lxS
d7
0
+ d 6 + XSO"l
0"2 X S
0"2 d 6
0
C3 d 6
0,
Ci4d6
Ci4d7
+
Ci2Ci 4
+ Xs
c2
X5
Xs
Sq2
= + 0"10 O"r) = + O"i 0 0"1 + 0"10 O"n = i*(C3 0 1 + 0"10"201 + O"f 0 0"1 + 0"10 O"i) = i* ((0"1 0 1 + 1 0 0"1) (0"1 0 0"1 + 0"2 0 1) + 0"2 00"1 + C3 0 1) = 0"10"2 + 0"3 + C3 Sqli*(C3 0 1) i*(Sq2(C3 (1)) Sqli*(0"2 0 O"r)
0 Ci2C3
Ci~
Ci4
For the action of the Steenrod Algebra, we apply the Sqi in H* (S4) 0
Sq 0"2
r+
0"2 Ci 3
1""---;'0"2, 0"200"1""---;'0"3,
H* (S2) and use the relations there: 1 Sq i*(0"2 01
' C3
0"1(C3+0"3) C3 Ci
0
c301....---;.c3·
1
+ 0"3 + C3 O"~
Sq2
Here we identify
Ci3
+ Ci3)X5
Sq3
m7
Sq4
Ci~
ng
SqS
0
x2
Sq6
0
0
(C3
S
213
x Sd6
+ Ci4d7 d~
0
d6 d7
Here m7 = d7 + C3Ci4 + Ci30"4 + Ci2XS, and ng = Ci4XS + c3(d6 + Ci1X5). From this a relatively direct calculation gives the cohomology of SlO. Indeed, going from S4i to S4i+2 only has the effect of freeing up products with Cil, and adding a new generator 0"2i+1' We omit the A(2) action as it can easily be obtained using the embedding H* (SlO)....---;.H* (Ss x S2). Theorem 5.3
= 'i*((0"1 0 0"1)(Ci2 0 1 + 0"10 Cir) + (C3 (1)(0"101 + 100"1)2) o = 0"30"2 + c30"i .
H*(SlO) ~ P[Ci1' Ci2, Ci3, Ci4, CiS, C3, X5, d6, d 7 ]/ (R) where R is the set of relations 0"2d7 = 0"3d7 = C3d7 = x S d 7 = 0 (CiS Ci10"4)d7 = 0 (Ci3 + Ci1Ci2)d6 = (Ci5 Ci1Ci4)d6 = 0 = 0"2C3XS + C~Ci 4 Ci~d6 . (Ci3 + CilCi2)X5 C3(CiS + 0'l Ci 4 + Ci2Ci3 (0"5 + 0"10"4)X5 = C3( Ci 3 + Cil0"2)Ci4 .
+
Next we consider S8: From this point forward we will omit details and just describe the results. Full details can be found in [AMMl]. Theorem 5.2
xg
+
=
+
2
+ CilCi2)
Theorem 5.4 where deg O"'i = i, deg C3 = 3, deg d i = i, deg Xs set of relations: d 6Cil = d 6 0"3 = 0 d 7 Cil = d 7 Ci2 = d 7Ci3 = d7C3 = d7Xs XSCi3 C3Ci4Cil = 0 C3(Ci3 + 0"10"2) + O"lXS = 0 x§ + XS0"2C3 + d6Ci~ + 0"4C§ = O.
= 5, =
and R is the following
0
+
The following tables describe the action of the Steenrod algebra
, H* (S12) ~ P[Ci1, Ci2, 0"3, C3, 0"4, CiS, Ci6, d 6 , d 7 , d g ] (X5, X7, XS) /(R) where deg Cii = i, deg C3 relations
X~ X~
= 3, deg
di
= i, deg
Xi 2
=i 2 C3
and
R
is the set of
2
+ Ci4X§ + 0"2Ci4XS + (Ci6C3 + Ci2Ci4C3) X5 + Ci4 + + 0'2 Ci4 d 6 + Ci6Ci2d61 + d 6 x§ + C3d6X7 + (d gCi2 + C3d6Ci2)X5 + d~Ci~ + C§0'4d6 + d9C30'2,
+ Ci2X§ + [Ci~ + Ci4] Xs + Ci~C3XS + Ci~d6 + 0'6 C§ + Ci6 d 6 + 0'2Ci4C~, X5XS + C3xg + [C§ + d 6 ] X7 + C§Ci2XS + C~0'4 + d gCi 5+ dgCi4 + C3 d 60'5, X~ + C3Ci2Xg + X7X8 + C30'5X8 + 0'2C§X7 + (0'5d6 + 0' 4C~) Xs +Ci~dg + C~Ci6 + 0"6d9, XSX7
vl1tl}J\"tl
V.i. .
..l...11~ VUl.l.Vl..1.1V.1V
d9(J'1, d 9(J'3, d9(J5 d7(J'3, d7X5, d7(J'I C3, d7(X7
d7 (X8
o
J
V.1
U'y.1J.J..11l.vll.L.l\,,;
'-....l.LVU'pQ
+ (J'4C3) , d7((J'5 + (J'4(J'1) , d7(0'6 + (J'40'2) ,
+ d6 (J2) ,d7 (dg + d6C3) ,
X7(J'1 + X5 (0"10"2 + 0"3) + C3 (0"20"3 + 0"50"1 + 0"10"4 + 0"5) , X70"3 + X5 (0"5 + (J'1(J'4) + C3 (0"10"6 + CT3(J'4 + CTI0'2(J'4) , X7(J'S + XS(J'1(J'6 + C3 ((J'3(J'6 + (J'10'20'6) , XS CT I + d 6 (CT3 + CTICT2) , XS(J'3 + d 6 ((J'5 + 0'1 CT4) , XSCT5 + d 6CTl (J'6 .
with the transfer. This can also be proved algebraically using the short exact sequence of G-modules
o
The action on the Steenrod Algebra on H* (S12) is determined by the following values: Sq1(J'2 = (J'1(J'2 + (J'3 + C3, Sq1c3 = 0, Sq2c3 = (J'2C3 + X5, Sq2(J'3 = C3(J'r + CT2CT3 + CT1(J'4 + CT5, Sq1(J'4 = X5 + 0'1(J'4 + (J'5, Sq2(J'4 = (J'2CT4 + CT6 + d6 + C3 (0'3 + 0'1(J'2) , S q2 (J'5 = d6(J'1 + X50'r + C3 (CTI CT3 + (J'r (J'2) + 0'2(J'5 + 0'1 CT6, Sq4(J'5 = C3(J'~ + (J'4(J'5 + CT1X50'3 + CT3CT6 + c3CT1(J'2(J'3 + C30'1(J'5 + d7(J'r, Sq2X5 = (J'2 X5, Sq 1CT6 = X7 + 0'1(J'6, Sq2(J'6 = Xs + X7(J'1 + (J'2(J'6, Sq4(J'6 = (J'4(J'6 + X7(J'3 + d60'~ + X~ + X50'2C3 + C~(J'4 + C3X7 + C3(J'10'6, Sq 1d6 = d7 , Sq 2d6 = X8 + (J'2 d6, Sq 4d6 = (J'4CT6 + X5(J'2C3 + d6(J'~ + CT4C~ + xg + X7C3 + X80'2, Sq 1d 7 = Sq 2d7 = 0, Sq 4d7 = (J'4d7, Sq 6 d7 = d6d7, Sq1X8 = dg + 0'2d7 + (J'3d6 + (J'1(J'2d6, Sq4X8 = X8 ((J'4 + C30'r) Sq 1 d g = d7C3, Sq 2d g = (J'2d9, Sq 8d g = d7X7C3 + X8 d 9 .
6. The Cohomology of the Alternating Groups An important class of simple groups whose cohomology rings have not been computed are the alternating groups An. The absence of proper normal subgroups makes the cohomology of simple groups particularly inaccessible, but in our situation we can make good use of H*(Sn). The Gysin sequence, as in 11.5, allows one to relate the cohomology of a group to that of an index 2 subgroup. For convenience we recall its statement and give an independent proof. Lemma 6.1 Let v E Hom(G, Z/2) non-trivial, with H a long exact sequence
= kerv.
Proof. (Compare [DM2J, Appendix 1). The fibration 7l/2 - ) BH - ) Be is the sphere fibration of a line bundle. Consequently MC(p) = Bel BH is the Thorn space of the line bundle with first Stiefel- vVhitney class v. Now apply the Gysin sequence. Transversality identifies
We apply this lemma to the situation An ~ Sn, with [Sn: An] = 2. We know Hl(Sn) ~ lF2' generated by the symmetric class 0'1; hence Theorem 6.2 T!;,ere is a short exact sequence of H*(Sn)-modules:
o -) H*(Sn)/(CTl)~H*(An)~Ann(CTd
-)
o.
From the considerations in §1, it is not hard to see that the ideal I n = Ann((J'I) is generated by "pure" Dickson cla.sses. These can be described as follows: let n = 2j1 + ... + 2j ,·, where 1 ~ j1 ~ ... ~ jr (the case jl = 0 can be reduced to this situation); the pure Dickson classes are those of the form (Qft * ... * Q1,.)*' where 2 ~ length(h) = jk for all k = 1, ... ,T and each Ik = (1, ... ,1). An immediate consequence of this is the following Corollary 6.3 If n is congruent to 2 or 3 mod H*(Sn) -+ H*(An) is onto, and
4,
then the restriction map
We remark that the results in §1 together with the preceding discussion can be used to completely determine the additive structure of H* (An), any n. The ring structure is of course much harder, but we can recover the rings H*(A6), H*(As), H*(AlO) and H*(A12) in what follows. From 5.1 and 6.3 we have:
Then there is Corollary 6.4 with Sql(J'2
H*(A6) ~ P[CT2,0'3,c3]/(c3CT3
= 0'3 + C3, Sq1c3
= 0)
= 0, Sq2c3 = CT2C3, Sql(J'3
= 0, Sq 20'3 = 0'30'2·
216
6. The Cohomology of the Alternating Groups
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
Proof. By 5.1, Ann(O"l)
=
0, hence
H*(A6)
~
o
H*(56)/(0"1)'
Applying 6.2 to As, we obtain the following
Corollary 6.5
H*(As) ~ P[0"2' C3, 0"3, 0"4, d6, e6, d7, e7](xs)/(R) where deg O"i = i, deg C3 = 3, deg di = i, deg ei = i deg Xi = 5, and R is the following set of relations: d60"3 = 0, d6d7 + d6e7 + e6e7 = 0, dg + d6e6 + eg = 0, d70"2 = d70"3 = d7C3 = d7Xs = 0, d6d7 + d7e6 + e6e7 = 0, d? + d7e7 + e~ = 0, e60"3 = e70"2 = e70"3 = e7 C3 = e7 x S = XS0"3 = 0,C30"3 = xg + XS0"2C3 + (d6 + e6)0"~ + 0"4 C§ = 0.
°
°
°
The action of the Steenrod algebra on the generators different from e6, e7 can be read from 5.2 using the restriction map; for e6, e7 the action is identical to that on d6 and d7 substituting e6, e7 for d6, d7 throughout.
217
The maps j* and I!* are onto: as noted before their images will be subpolyn
+ (ei + di)ei)
°and eidi
=
E im res
U sing the restriction to V3 and 9V3 g -1, it follows that
yielding the relation
e; + eidi + d; = °.
The same procedure yields the relations
e6e7 e6e7
+ d6e7 + d6d7 = + d7e6 + d6d7 =
0 0 .
The other relations, involving e6, e7 and the other generators, follow from the corresponding relations for d6 , d7 . The remaining relations follow from .0 applying res to relations in H* (Ss).
Proof. Using 5.2 and 6.2, we have a short exact sequence
°
-+
H*(SS)/(0"1)~H*(As)~(d6,d7)
-+
0.
Here (d 6, d7) is the ideal generated by d6 and d7 in H* (58), and res is an isomorphism until degree 6, where a new class e6 appears in H6(As); similarly there is a new class e7 E H7(As), and we have tr(e6) = d6, tr(e7) = d7. Note that tr(xy) = tr(x)· y for y E H*(5 s )/(0"1)' hence we need only adjoin e6, e7 and their products with elements in im res to obtain H*(As). It only remains to determine the multiplicative relations involving these two classes. Let N S8 (V3), N As (V3) be the normalizers of V3 in 5 s and As respectively. Then [58: N S8 (V3) 1= 2 [As: N As (V3) 1as there are twice as many conjugates of V3 obtained by using elements in 5 s as those obtained by using only elements in As. Hence there exists 1 =I=- 9 E 5 s /As such that V3 and gV3g-1 are not conjugate in As. The classes e6, e7 will be detected on gV g-l. For this note 1 that N As (V3) = NSs(V3) = Aff 3 (Z/2) ; similarly NAs(gV3g- ) = NSs(V3)' We have a diagram of restriction maps i'
H*(Ss)
---+
The explicit calculation of H*(As) is particularly interesting in light of the fact that As ~ GL4(lF2). This isomorphism, due to Jordan and found in Dickson [D], can be described by the following correspondence of generators:
(23)(12)
(45) (12)
(67)(12)
~ G~ ~ D
, (34)(12)
0 1 1 0~1)
~ (~ ~ ~
(56)(12)
~ G~ ~ D
, (78)(12)
~ (~ ~
D
~ ( ~1 ° ~ ~1
~~)
~ (~ ~ ~
J)
[
r
---+
A calculation for H*(GL4(IF2)) was first attempted in [T-Y]; there was an error which was corrected later. However, at best their approach led to a listing of elements without giving any insight as to their significance or explicit multiplicative relations.
218
Chapter VI. The Cohomology of Symmetric Groups
Corollary 6.6
The Poincare Series for
= (t+l)(t
P(t)
15
H*(GL4(lF2))
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
is
_t14+t13_t12+tll_t9+t8+t1 +2t 6+2t 4-t 3+2t 2-t+l) (t 7 -1)(t 6 -1)(t 3 -1)(t 4 -1)
Using an analogous approach, we obtain
Corollary 6.7 H*(AIO) ~ set of relations O"sd 7 0"3 d 7 0"3 d 6 xg
= =
O"sd6
O"SXS
C3d7
=
x Sd 7
O"s, C3,
xs,d 6 ,d7 l/(R) where
R
is the
=0 1. Preliminary Remarks
+ C~0"4 + 0"~d6
= 0"2C3XS
0"3 X S
= 0"3 d 7 = =0
P[0"2, 0"3, 0"4,
= C30"30" 4 = C3(O"S +
0"20"3) .
(As for A6 the A(2)-module structure follows directly from that of H*(51O).) Finally, we have
Corollary 6.8
H* (A 12 ) ~ where
deg
P[0"2' 0"3, C3, 0"4,
= i, deg C3
O"i
O"s, 0"6, d 6 , d 7 , d g , eg, elO] (XS, X7,
= 3, deg
di
= i, deg
X8) /
= i, deg ei = i
Xi
(R) and
R
is
the set of relations
x~ + 0"4X~ +
0"20"4X8 + (0"6C3 + 0"20"4C3) Xs + O"~ + c~ + 0"~0"4d6 + 0"60"2 d 6, + d 6 X s + C3 d 6 X 7 + ([eg + d 9 ]a2 + C3d60"2)XS + d~O"~ +c~0"4d6 + [eg + d 9 ]C30"2' XSX7 + 0"2 x g + [O"i + 0"4] X8 + 0"~C3XS + 0"~d6 + 0"6C~ + 0"6d6 + 0"20"4C~, XSX8 + C3 x g + [C~ + d 6] X7 + C~0"2XS + C~0"4 + [eg + dglO"~ +[eg + d 9j0"4 + c3d60"~, X~ + C30"2xg + X7XS +C30"~XS + 0"2C~X7 + (O"id 6 + 0"4C~) XS+ O"~[eg + dgJ + C~0"6 + 0"6[e9 + d g ], X8
d90"3,d gO"s,e90"3,egO"s elO0"4 + d 7 (X7 + 0"4 C3) , d 7 0"s, d 7 (0"6 + d 7 (eg + d g ) + d6(d7C3 + elO), d 70"3, d 7 X s,
XS0"3
+ C3
(0"20"3
d60"3, X80"3 d§
+
dgeg
d g d 7 C3
+
+
+
0"40"2), d 7
(Xs +
d 6 0"2) ,
+ O"S), X70"3 + XsO"s + C3 0"3 0"4 , X70"S + C3 0"3 0"6 , XsO"s,
d 6 0"s,
+ d7C3elO + eto, + egelO, dgd7C3 + d7C3e9 + egelO .
e§, (d7C3)2
dgelO
The action of the Steenrod Algebra on generators different from eg, elO can be obtained from 5.3 using the restriction map; for eg, elO the action is identical to that on dg and d7C3 doing the appropriate substitutions.
One of the most remarkable results of this century in mathematics has been the classification - completed in 1980 - of all the finite simple groups. This took over 20 years and occupies almost 5000 pages in the literature. It is conceivable that there are some errors there, so the details of classification are not really available to us, but the main results can be summarized. There are 17 families of simple groups, the alternating groups and 16 families of "Lie type". These in turn are broken up into subfamilies in several different ways. There are, first, the historical breakdowns, 6 families of "classical groups", the projective special linear groups over finite fields, the orthogonal groups, (three types), unitary groups, and the symplectic groups. Then there are the 5 families of groups of "exceptional types", the groups C 2 (q), F 4 (q), E6(q), E7(q), and Es(q), the q denoting the order of the finite field over which they are defined. Finally, there are five special families, the groups of "twisted type" , the Suzuki groups Sz[22n+l], the Ree groups 2C 2[3 2n +1 ] and 2F2 [2 2n +1 ], the twisted exceptional groups 2E6[22n+1], and the groups 3D 4 (q), the "triality twisted D 4 (q) 's". Of course, the most natural classification of these groups is via Lie theory and Dynkin diagrams. A complete discussion can be found in R.W. Carter's book [Carter]. In each family the first few groups are somewhat exceptional: they may not be simple, for example A4 or GL2(lF2) = 53, SP4(lF2) = 56, or they are not distinct, PSL 2 (lF 4 ) = PSL 2(lFs) = As, PSL 4 (lF 2 ) = A 8 . Additionally, the situation for some of these groups at the prime 2 seems to be much more involved than at other primes. For these reasons and probably others there arise 26 further simple groups, the sporadic groups. The first five of these, the Mathieu groups M n , M 12 , M 22 , M 23 , and M 24 , have been known and explored for about 100 years. The remaining ones have been known for less than thirty years. The first of them J 1 - the first Janko group - has already been discussed in Chapters II, III and V. A good discussion of these groups, their construction and history, can be found in Gorenstein's book [Gor]. In this chapter we describe the main features of the classical groups of Lie type and discuss some aspects of Quillen's calculation of the cohomology of these groups. The most striking of his results appears in his paper in the Proceedings of the International Congress of Mathematics, Nice, 1970 [Q2]'
220
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
where he indicates the existence of a spectral sequence for groups sufficiently closely related to the continuous Lie groups G with E 2 -term
2. The Classical Groups of Lie Type
221
B is equally well determined by the bilinear form { , ) B: VK x VK - t K,
( , )B(V, v') = {v, V')B = B(v)(v'). We have Lemma 2.1
where G(q) is the group defined by the same (integral) equations over the finite field IF q and q is prime to p. He also indicates there how to use this result to get information about the groups of twisted type. However, the indicated proof, using Etale techniques from algebraic geometry is far removed from our discussion. Rather, we give proofs of most of his results here but use the more elementary techniques discussed here. An alternate source for much of this discussion is [FP l. It should be emphasized that the groups we are actually studying are not the simple groups, generally quotients of the groups here by their centers, but the full groups, described as the groups of automorphisms of a finite dimensional vector space over a finite field, in the case of the general linear groups, or which preserve a bilinear form in the case of the orthogonal and symplectic groups, or which preserve a Hermitian form in the case of the unitary groups. In brilliant work of Quillen in the early 1970's these groups and their cohomology played an essential role in vital questions in homotopy theory some of which we will also outline in the introduction to Chapter Vln and in Chapter IX.
a. Bis symmetric if and only if (v, v') B = (v', v) B for all v, v' in V'K. b. B is skew symmetric if and only if if (V,V')B = -(V',V)B for all v, v' in V K· c. B is non-singular if and only if, given any v E V K there is a v' E V K so that (v, v') =I- O.
Proof. (a), (b) are direct. To see (c) note that B is a linear map of finite dimensional vector spaces over K having the same dimension. Consequently B is invertible if and only if Ker(B) = O. But v E Ker(B) if and only if (V,V')B = B(v)(v') = 0 for all v' E V K . D Two non-singular bilinear forms Band B' are said to be isomorphic if there is an isomorphism g: V K - t V1 so that the diagram
2. The Classical Groups of Lie Type Given a field K and a vector space Vj{ of dimension n over K we have the group GLn(K) of invertible linear transformations 0:: V K - t V 1{. GLn(K) has a center C(GLn(K)) = K· and there is a determinant homomorphism Det: GL n (I{) --r KO --rOo The kernel of Det is the special linear group SLn (K) and SLn(K)/SLn(I<) n C(GLn(I<)) = PSLn(I{) is called the special projective linear group of rank n over K. It is simple except for K = IF 2 ,IF 3 , and n = 2. As K runs over the finite fields IF'q (where q = pn, p a prime in Z+) we obtain in this way the finite simple groups Ln(q) = PSLnOFq). This is the first family of finite simple groups of Lie type. Next, suppose Vj{ is given together with a non-singular bilinear form b. A bilinear form can be thought of as a K-linear map B: VK - t (VK)* where (VK)* = Hom I< (Vj{, K). There are natural isomorphisms e: (Vj{ )** - t V K (for n =I=- 00, e(f) is given by w(e(f)) = f(w) for w E V1), and given B there is the induced map B*: (VK)** - t (VK)* defined by B*(f)(w) = f(B(w)). Consequently B induces a map Be-I: (VK)* - t V K which we again write as B* using a mild abuse of the language. B is symmetric or anti-symmetric according to whether B* = B or B* = -B respectively. B is said to be non-singular if B is an isomorphism.
commutes. Isomorphism is an equivalence relation. Moreover, to each nonsingular bilinear form B there is associated its group of isometries G B:
G B = {g: V K - t V11 9
E
GLn(K), (g(v),g(V'))B = (V,V')B}
forallv,v' E V K . (g,h E G B implies that (gh(v),gh(v'))B = (h(v),h(v'))B (v, v') B for all v, v' in V K so G B is closed under comp~sition. Also
=
so G B is closed under taking inverses and G B is a subgroup of GLn(K).)
Remark 2.2 If B is isomorphic to B' then G B ~ G B/, since if 9 takes B to B' in the sense of (*) then gGBIg- 1 c GB, and g-lGBg C GB,. Examples 2.3 Over K any bilinear form B is given by (k, k') B = kk'b for some b E K using the usual identification K* = K (b E K* is the map k I--t kb.) Then (*) says that two forms x b and x b' are equivalent if and only if there is a k E Ke so that b' = k 2 b and the equivalence classes of non-singular forms on J{ (they are all symmetric) are the elements of K e/(K e where (Ke)2 denotes the multiplicative subgroup of squares in K'. The group GB in each of these cases is K e .
?
222
Chapter VII. Finite Groups or
Lle
.type
In particular, if K = IF q , (q =I 2r) there are 2 equivalence classes of forms, the first represented by (k, k')I =. kk' and the second represented by (k, k')a = kk'a where a E K e is any non-square. Next, passing to based vector spaces, given Vf;: together with a basis
(el, ... ,en ), there is a dual basis for (IFf;:)*, (el, ... ,en ) where ei is defined as the homomorphism ei(ej)
=
{01
~ =I= J.cr ~With respect to these choices
for 9 E GLn(K). It follows that 9 E G B if and only if B = gBgt. In particular for B = (1) ~
Det(g)
(~ ~)
so 9 E G B if and only if ggt
= ±l. In general, for
=
I. Consequently
L- - (ac b)-l __ (d-c -b) a d
l
1 - Det(L)
2
(J E
SO~(K)
if and only if
(J =
(~b ~)
with Det(tI) =
+ b2 =
l. If B: Vf;: - t VI<, B': Vl{ - t (Vl{)* are given non-singular bilinear forms then B EB B': VK EB VI( - t (VK)* EB (Vl{)* = (VK EB Vl{)* is a non-singular bilinear form on VK+ m . It is symmetric or skew-symmetric according as B, B' are, and it has the property of orthogonality, (v, v') BffiB' == 0 if v E VI< while v' E Vl{' This direct sum form is usually written B ~ B'. If B is isomorphic to B then B ~ B' is isomorphic to 13 ~ B', and similarly for 13 isomorphic to B', B EB B' is isomorphic to B ~ B.
a
Theorem 2.4 Let K = V ql (q =l2r) then there are exactly two equivalence classes of non-singular symmetric bilinear forms on V K, the first equivalent to (1) ~ (1) ~ ... ~ (1) and the second equivalent to (1) ~ ... (1) ~ (a) with a any non-square in K. Proof. We need a splitting principle.
W if and only if (w, v) B
v) + (l,~)
B
= O.
v
and l - ¥v is contained in (v)..L. Consequently Vf;: = (v) b =I 0 it is clear that (v) n W = 0 so the sum is direct.
+ Wand,
since 0
(More generally, if L C Vf;: is a sub-vector space of VI< then the same proof shows that if the restriction of B t~ L is non-singular there is a splitting IFf;: = L EB L..L and E splits as (ElL) ~ E.) Lemma 2.6 Let V K be given with K = IF pr, p odd, and B symmetric and non-singular. Then there is a vector v E Vf;: so that (v, v) B =I o.
(v so L- l = Lt if and only if c = -b, a = d if Det(L) = 1, and c = b, a = -d if Det(L). = -1. Denote by SO~ ~K) those elements of G B with determinant +1 so, if Char(K) is not 2 S02 (K) is normal in G B with quotient 'lL/2. Summarizing,
= (l _ (l,~) B
W E
Proof of 2.6 Choose v =I 0, v E VI< and suppose that (v, v) B = O. Then, by the non-singularity of E, there is a v' E V1{ with (V,V')B =I O. If (v',v') -I- 0 we are done. If not, then
2 x 2 matrices L,
1 _
Proof of 2.5 Let W = (v)..L. That is to say, Let l E Vf;: be any non-zero vector. Then
~
for bases B is represented by a matrix (which we again denote B) where the entries Bi,j satisfy Bi,j = B)',i if B is symmetric or Bi,j = -Bj,i if B is skew symmetric. Also, if 9 E GL(Vf;:) is represented with respect to (el,"" en) by the matrix (gi,j) then g* is represented by the transpose of g with respect to the basis (e l , ... , en) for (VI<) *. It follows that in matrix notation our equivalence relation becomes
(1) the matrix is
Lemma 2.5 Let v E VK and let B be a non-singular symmetr-ic form on V[{. Suppose (v, v) B = b =I 0, then there is an n - 1 dimensional subspace W c VK so that V'K = (v) EB W~-l as K -vector spaces, and with respect to this splitting B = (b) 1. fJ.
+ v' , v + v') B
(v, v) B + 2(v, v') B + (v', v') B 2(V,V')B
=I 0 so the proof is complete.
o
At this point we have proved that B is isomorphic to (b 1 ) ~ ... 1. (b n ). It remains to show that all but one of the bi can be chosen equal to 1. To do this we study non-singular forms on V}. Lemma 2.7 Let E be a non-singular symmetric form on V 1{ where K = lFpr with p odd, then E is isomorphic to (1) 1. (1) or (1) 1. (a) where a is a nonsquare in KO. Proof of 2.7 After diagonalization E rv (1) 1. (1), (1) 1. (a) or (a) 1. (a). We now verify that (a) 1. (a) is isomorphic to (1) 1. (1). By the pigeon hole principle there are k, k' in K so that k2 + k,2 is a non-square in KO. Then (k 2 + k,2)a is a square in KO, and the two vectors (k, k'), (k', - k) are mutually orthogonal in (a) 1. (a) and provide an explicit equivalence with (1) 1. (1). 0
224
2. The Classical Groups of Lie Type
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
Iterating the lemma above shows that there are at most two isomorphism classes, (1) l- .,. l- (1), and (1) l- ... l- (1) l- (a). It remains to show that these two forms are not isomorphic. Suppose then that we have an isomorphism between them for some n 2:: 2, and suppose that 9 is a map which effects the equivalence. Then
o 0
100 010 001
o
o
0
0
00010 o 0 0 0 b and Det(ggt)
= b = Det(g )Det(gt) = (Det(g))2 which is impossible. The 0
theorem follows.
vk
In a similar way we can analyze skew-symmetric forms. On we see from our previous discussion that there are none. On V'k we have (v, v) B = 0 for every v E V'k, but by the non-singularity of B given v =I=- 0 in V'k there is a Vi so (v, Vi) B = 1. It follows that, with respect to the basis v, Vi the form
B is given by the matrix (
~1 ~). Iterating this argument we have
k 2+k,2. Moreover, since Norm is an onto homomorphism IFe 2 = 'll/(q2 -1) -+ IF~ = 'll/(q - 1), its kernel is 7l/(q + 1). Finally, for this ~ase, if N(B) = 1 where e = k + k'ye:r, then
k kl) k E sot (K) ( -k' and conversely, so SOt(K) = 'll/(q + 1). To prove (b) note first that now -1 = k 2 for some k E K so there are two lines (1, k) = h, (1, -k) = l2 and only two so that (l, l)A = 0 for l Eli. Also, since (1) J.- (1) = (a) l- (a) it follows that there is a one to one correspondence between those lines lj for which A restricts as (1) and those for which it restricts as (a). Consequently, since V'k contains exactly q + 1 lines there are (q - 1)/2 lines, l+,1,"" l+,(q-1)/2 where A restricts to (1). Each such line has exactly two vectors a and -a so that ((3,(3)A = 1, and each vector can be written with respect to the original basis as (k 1 , k2) with + k~ = ~. This gi:es that IS01(K)) = q - ~. It remams to verIfy that S02 (K) IS as clalmed. To see this consider
kr
9
We have .
Theorem 2.8 Let B be a non-singular skew-symmetric form on IFi<- where the characteristic of K is not 2, then n is even and
B
(V
(S) l- ... l- (S)
Remark 2.9 Note that when n = 2m + 1 is odd and K is a finite field of odd
~
n
times
so 9 gives an explicit isomorphism (1) J.- (1)
J{
(0 1)
109
2ab ( bc+ad
. '----v---'"
times
= 1Fq be a finite field of odd characteristic.
a. If q == 3 mod 4 then SO~(I() = 7l/(q + 1). b. If q == 1 mod 4 then SO~(I{) = 7l/(q - 1).
Proof. Suppose that q == 3 mod 4, then -1 E K is a non-square and IF q2 IFq(yCT). Write a E IFq2 as k + k'yCT. Then we have that the norm of a is
\
(~ ~)). Hence SOt(K) is
having determinant 1. However,
(~~)(~ ~)(~~)
t
(1) l- ... l- (1) l- (a) . n-1
(~ ~)
(V
here we have 9
But this implies that for such n, K, the groups for the two forms are isomorphic since, if A represents the form with all ones, while B represents the form with all a's, we have (v, Vi) B = a(v, Vi) A for all v, v' in Vi<- so g E G B if and only if g EGA· Lemma 2.10 Let
(kJ:.. 2k
characteristic we have that
(a) l- ... l- (a)
gg t =
(kA ~)
=
isomorphic to the subgroup of Aut
where S is the fomL on VJ< given above.
225
bc+ ad) 2cd
(~ ~) and this implies that 9 E Aut
a
E
K· or 9 =
(l~a ~)
=
(~ ~)
if and only if 9
=
for
(~ l~a) (~ ~). But the latter terms have
determinant -1 so they do not occur and the result follows. Corollary 2.11 Ot(K)
(~ l~a)
= {D 2(q+l) D 2(q-l)
q == 3 mod 4 q == 1 mod 4.
0
226
3. The Orders of the l<'inite UrtllOgonal and 2iympleCtIc Groups
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
Proof. For q == 1 mod 4 this follows from the calculation above with the
group Aut (
~1 ~)
(~ ~). For q '" 3 mod 4 the element (~ ~l)
and fixes
n
(~
(1o 0) -1
acts to invert
Thus
(k
+ k' F-l)
(1 0) 0
-1
= (k - k' yCl)
0
Next we consider the case B = (1) ..L (a).
=
{Z/(q+l) Z/(q-1)
k') ( ' " k -a",'
E
SO~(K) .
",' ) (k'" - k' ",' a '" -a(k"" + k' "')
{D 2 (q+1)
D 2(q-1)
0
which is
(~l ~)
if and only if Det( (:
~)) =
1
is the speciallineaT group
ad -0 be)
o
L
3. The Orders of the Finite Orthogonal and Symplectic
Definition 3.1 A quadratic form on Kn is hyperbolic if and only if n = 2l A -
k",' + k' '" ) k", - ak' ",' .
\(~ ~))1-"\(~ ~))
\,
v
I
when q == 1 mod 4, when q == 3 mod 4.
k ( ak'
-k') (k k -ak'
,/
times
In what follows we denote this form as (H21)'
(I) 1- (1) Remark 3.2 (H2) = (1) ..L (-1) = { (1)..L (a)
(-1o 0) (k k') (-1 0) k
(~ ~l)} = Sp2(K)
0 ( be - ad
and
for q == 1 mod 4 for q == 1 mod 4.
Assume that K is finite of odd characteristic. When n is odd we know there is only one orthogonal group so we may as well study it in the case of the form H 2n ..L (1) = (A).
(In the case q == 1 mod 4 we have
-ak'
Proposition 2.14 AutK {
Groups
Similar considerations show
1
~)}
(=~ :) (~ ~)
The first statement follows. The proof for q == 3 mod 4 follows the lines of proof of the previous lemma (for SO~ (K) in the case q == 1 mod 4. 0
Corollary 2.13 Of (K) =
{C
when q == 1 mod 4, when q == 3 mod 4.
Moreover, the correspondence above is a .homomorphism since k ( -ak'
Aut
Proof. We calculate
Proof. If q == 1 mod 4 then (1) ..L (a) has no isotropy vectors and on every line the restriction of the forin is either (1) or (a). But the interchange mapping (k, k') f--1o (k', k) has the effect of exchanging such lines so there are exactly (q+1)/2lines l with Bll = (1). Consequently BllJ.. = (a), and as before there are 2 transformations /3, -/3 taking (1,0) I---Jo Lo E l, (0,1) I---Jo L1 E lJ.. and preserving the form. It follows that ISO~ (K) I = q + 1 if q == 1 mod 4. On the other hand if J = K (Va) and k + k'Va nas norm 1, then
k k') k ( -ak'
=
SL2(K).
Lemma 2.12 Let K have odd characteristic. Then 2
of (K)
and now the calculation follows.) This completes the discussion for the orthogonal groups of rank::; 2. We now turn to the symplectic groups.
and this is just inversion on the elements of norm 1. The corollary follows.
SOB(K)
When q == 3 mod 4 we have that B = (1) 1- (-1) and
k')-l k
. .
Proposition 3.3 Let IKI = q < 00 be of odd characteristic. Then we have a. The set ofv E K 2n so (V,V)(H 2n ) = a has cardinality
228
when 0: = 0, otherwise. b.
The set of v E K2n+l so that (v, v) (A) when when when
= 0:
E
0:
E
0:
= 0.
We now turn to the calculation of these numbers for the other even dimensional form
has cardinality
where a E Ke is a non-square.
Proof. We begin with the case n = 1. Then (a, a) (a, -a) are the only vectors of length zero (called isotropy vectors). Hence there are 2q-1 isotropy vectors. Next, since
(0:)
~
(-0:)
rv
(1)
~
o
so the induction is complete.
K e is a non-square, K e is a square,
0:
229
3. The Orders of the Finite Orthogonal and Symplectic Groups
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
(-1)
Proposition 3.4 The form (B) satisfies the condition that the cardinality of 2n+ 1 n+ 1 + n h \ the set of v so that (v v) (B) = ), is q - q q w en /\ = , { qn(qn+l + 1) , when), i= 0.
°
Proof. Clearly \
the cardinality of the set of v so that (v, V)(H 2 ) = ), is the same as that for (v, v) (H2) = T provided )" T are both non-zero, it follows that this cardinality is q2 _ 2q + 1 -'-'-----=--- = q - 1 . q-1
(~ ~o:))
has only the O-vecto; as an isotropy vector.
Consequently, the remaining cases, all having the same cardinality, are q + l. Now consider the, general case. Here the number of isotropy vectors is q2n-l
+ qn _
qn-l
+ qn-l(qn _
l)(q
Thus (a) is verified in the first case. Now we proceed by induction. First we show (a) for H j with j ~ n implies (a) for Ihn+2. Since (H 2n +2) = (H2n) ~ (Ih) we can count isotropy vectors as
+ l)(q - 1) q2n-l + qn _ qn-l + qn-l(qn _1l)(q2 q2n-l
+ qn
1)
_ qn-l
+ qn-l(qn+2 _ qn _ + qn.
q2
+ 1)
q2n+l _ qn+l
which directly expands out to q2n+l + qn+l - qn. As before the .cardinality of the sets so (V,V)(H2,,+2) =), with), i= are all equal, so this cardinality is
°
qn) --=-__~__+~-.:.. = q2n+l
(q2n+2 _ q2n+l _ qn+l
..:..=.-_ _
From this the number when),
#-
°
is
q2n+2 _ (q2n+l _ qn+l
_ qn
=
and this case is complete. We now verify that (a) for (H2n ) implies (b) for (A) = (H2n) ~ (1). First we obtain the count of isotropy vectors as
+ q2n-l + qn
+ qn-l
2
°
o
and the result follows.
Now write sotn (K) for the group associated to the hyperbolic form (H2n ) and S02n (K) for the group associated to the form (H 2n - 2) 1.. \ Then we have
_ qn-l
Suppose next that 0: is a non-square, then 0: = (0: - k ) + k and 0: - k #- 0, so as k runs over K this gives q X qn-l (qn - 1) = qn (qn - 1) solutions. Finally, suppose that 0: is a square. Then 0: - k 2 = for two values of k so the count is 2
2
+ qn
q-1
q-1
q2n _ q2n-l _ qn
+ qn)
___. . .:. : . __--=-__-.:....!... = q2n+l
qn(qn+l -1) ,
Theorem 3.5 a. ISOtn(K)1 = qn(n-l)(q2 - 1)··· (q2n-2 - l)(qn - 1), b. IS02n(K)1 = qn(n-l)(q2 - 1).·. (q2n-2 -l)(qn + 1), 2 c. IS02n+l(K)1 = qn (q2 -1)(q4 -1)··· (q2n -1). Proof. We prove (a), (c), together. Clearly
(~
_00: ) ) .
Chapter V11. l<'lmte Groups 01 LIe .lype
.L .............. ___
since it suffices to map the generator i of (1) to any element v of length 1 in K2n+l = (H2n) J.- (1). Then (v)-.l ~ (H2n ).Nextnotethat(H2) = (1) J.- (-1) SO
~"""'J'-"''''''''''''.''''''''''''''''bJ
............................
---" '-'
-~I-~
---,t.
\~1/
Proof. Given 9 E SP2n(K), 9 can take the non-singular subspace (el, h) to a new non-singular subspace (in a form preserving manner) in exactly
(H2n ) = (-1) 1 ((1) 1 (H2n - 2 )) so
= qn-l(qn -1)IS02n-l(K)1 .
ISOtn(K)1
ways. Hence,since it also maps (el' h)-.l to the perpendicular complement of g((el' h)) we have
From these two formulae (a) and (c) follow. Finally we prove (b). Since
!SP2n(K)1 = q2n-l(q2n - 1)!SP2n_2(K)! . Also, as we have already seen, Sp2(K) = SL2(K) which has q(q2_1) elements. Now, note that
we have IS02n(K)! = qn(qn-l
+ 1)!S02n-l(K)!
and the theorem follows.
0 (2n - 1)
+ (2n -
3)
+ ... + 1
Let K be any finite field (here characteristic 2 is allowed). We consider
_2n_(_2_n_+_1_) _ 2 n( n + 1) . 2 2
K 2 n with the skew form
(~l ~).
where 8 = In particular, we have a basis el,···, en, 2 K n so (el,ej)B = (fi,fj)B = 0, (el,fj) = -(jj,ei) = Oij. Lemma 3.6 Let v E K2n with v =I- O. Then (v, v) B precisely q2n-l vectors w E K2n so that (v, w) B = 1.
(v, V)B (v, W)B
h,··., fn for
o and there are
2::)ViAi - AiVi) = 0 L v/J L i -
o
so the corollary follows.
B = (8) J.- ... J.- (8)
AiWi
and since v =I- 0 there is a Vi or Ai which is not O. Say Vi =I- 0, then (v, ~ fi) B = 1 so the set of w with (v, w) = 1 is non-empty. On the other hand if (v, w) B = (v, w') B = 1 then (v, w - w') = 0 and w - w' is contained in the hyperplane
Remark 3.8 Let K jJF be an extension of degree d, then
by forgetting the K-structure. As an example
and we note that the index of this inclusion is 12. But the normalizer of A5 in SP4 (JF 2 ) is generated by the Galois automorphism of IF 4 over JF 2, and this gives a copy of 55 c Sp4(JF 2) having index 6. In turn, this gives, via the action of 8p4(JFi) on cosets, a homomorphism Sp4(IF 2) --+ 56. Moreover, the kernel is contained in 55 and hence is either As or 1. But since the normalizer of 8p2(JF r ) in 8p4(JF 2) is 55 it follows that the kernel is a proper subgroup of As and is thus 1 (since it is normal). Finally 1Sp 4 (IF 2) 1 = !S61 so the coset representation constructs an isomorphism 8p4(IF 2) ~ 56'
4. The Cohomology of the Groups GLn(q) Conversely, if, is contained in this hyperplane, then (v, w any hyperplane has q2n-l elements the lemma follows.
+ ,) B = 1.
Since 0
The group GLn(q) is a model for our calculations, so we study this case in detail now.
Corollary 3.7 Let SP2n(K) be the group of B, those 9 E GL 2n (K) so that
(gv, gw) B = (v, w) B for all v, w, in K2n. Then
Theorem 4.1
a. Suppose that p divides q -1. Then 8ylp(GLn(q)) is the p-Sylow subgroup of 'Zjpr 25n C GLn(q) where q - 1 = pr() with ((),p)
=
1 and r 2: 1.
232
4. The Cohomology of the Groups GLn(q)
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
233
permutation matrices and Z/(q - 1) embeds as the diagonal matrices. Now the power of p which divides the order of this group is
b. If plq then Sylp(GLn(q)) = UTn(q)
is the subgroup of upper triangular matrices with ones along the diagonal in GLn(q). c. If (q, p) = 1 but p does not divide q - 1 then there is a unique non-negative integer s, s :s: p - 1 so that qS =:: 1 mod (p) and
pn1'+([n/pJ+[n/p2J ... J) but from the lemma this is the p-order of
qn(n-l)/2(qn _ l)qn-l - 1) ... (q - 1) .
o
(b) and (c) are similar.
Moreover, if qS - 1 = p1' () then Corollary 4.3 Let q - 1
Sylp(GLn(q)) C (Zlp1'
XT
= p1'w,
l'
~
1 if p is odd or l' ~ 2 if P = 2. Then
(Zls)) (S[:;]
where ZI s acts on Zlp1' by T(x) = x q for T a generator of ZI s. Proof. We need a lemma.
where ai is the coefficient of pi in the p-adic expansion of ni n = ao + alP +
Lemma 4.2 Let q - 1 = p1'wJ l' ~ 1 with (w,p) = 1 and suppose either p is odd or p = 2 and l' ~ 2. Then qj -1 = p1'+sw' where (w',p) = 1 and j = pSv
... + aipi + ....
with (v,p) = 1.
The cohomology of Zlp1' (Zip 2·· . Zip is detected by groups of the fOfm (Zlp1')S x (Zlp)1 as we see from the discussion in Chapter IV. On the other hand we have
Proof of 4.2 Write (qJl"v - 1) = (qP" - 1)(1 + qp8 + .. ' + qP"Cv-l»). Since q =:: 1 mod (p) the second term i~ congruent to v mod (p) and so is prime. to p. Thus we need only analyze (qP" - 1), and this, in turn, reduces to studymg qP - 1. Write q = 1 + p1' A
Theorem 4.4 Let E TIi(Z/~i) C GLn(q) with q - 1 = p1'() and each ji r. Then E is conjugate to a subgroup of the diagonal (ZI (q - l))n. In
:s:
particular, H* (G Ln (q); IF p) is detected by restriction to the diagonal subgroup (Z/p1')n.
with (A,p) = 1. Then 1 + p . p1' A
Proof. Since p1'lq - 1, a primitive p1'th root of unity is present in IFq so each element x E E is conjugate to a diagonal matrix. Next, since E is commutative, it follows that we can simultaneously diagonalize all the elements of E, and the result follows. 0
+ (~) p21' A 2 + ... + p1'P AP
1 + p1'+l A
+ p21'+l B 1 + p1'+l(A + p1' B) provided p is odd. If p = 2 then 1 + 21'+1 A
(i) =
+ 221' A2
1 + 21'+1(A
=
and if l' = 1 this is 1 + 21' +2 W while The lemma follows.
Corollary 4.5 Let q - 1 = p() with p an odd prime and () prime to p, then 1 and
l'
+ 21'-1 A2)
> 1 implies that (A + 21'-1 A2) is odd. 0
We now prove (a) of the theorem. Note that Z/p·r
c
Z/q - 1
= GLl(q)
so (ZlpTt c GLn(q) as a subgroup of the diagonal matrices. The normalizer of this group in GLn(q) is Z/(q - 1) I Sn where Sn is embedded as the
Proof Note first that the subgroup of the diagonal (Zlp)n C Syl2(GLn(q)) is normal in U Z/(q -1) 2Sn , and, indeed, it is the only elementary subgroup of this order in this wreath product. (This depends on the fact that p is odd.) Consequently (Z/p)n c (ZIp) 2 Sn C GLn(q) is a closed system. From our discussion of the cohomology of wreath products with Sn it follows that the restriction map from H*(Zj(q - 1) l 5 n ; IFp) to H*((Zjp)n; Fp) is surjective onto the ring of Sn invariants. The Cardenas-Kuhn theorem now gives the r~uli.
0
234
Chapter VII. Finite Croups of Lie Type
O~ (q)
for q Odd
Remark. The condition that p2 not divide q - 1 in (4.5) is, in fact, satisfied in the major application of this calculation in Quillen's original proof of the
5. The Cohomology of the Groups
Adams conjecture [Q6]. However, it is clearly desirable to have the general
Lemma 5.1 For the orthogonal groups O~n(q) and 02n+l(q) with q odd a copy of Syl2( G) is always contained in the normalizer of a maximal torus. These tori normalizers are given as follows. 1. For q == 1 mod (4) the maximal tori normalizers are
result. In fact we have the following theorem of Quillen,
Theorem 4.6 Let p be an odd prime and suppose q - 1
= pT() with r 2:: 1
ot (q) l Sm
and () prime to p. Then the restriction map
0;-
S; otm(q)
x (ot l Sm-I) S; O;-m(q)
Z/2x (OtlSm) S; 02m+l(q).
is an isomorphism onto the entire ring of invariants. (The proof of this result does not appear to be a formal consequence of the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem when r is greater than 1. Quillen's original method involved the use of the Adams operations in K-theory and is described in considerable detail in [FP]. However, it is also possible, using 4.4, III.4.3, and the results on Hopf algebras of Vl.2, to give another proof, starting with GL I (q), and using the Hopf algebra structure of the disjoint union of the H*(GLn(q); lFp ).)
2. For q == 3 mod (4) and m odd the maximal tori normalizers are ot(q) x (O;-(q) 2Sm-l) S; otm(q) 0;- l Sm S; O;-m(q)· 3. For q == 3 mod (4) and m even the maximal tori n07'malizers are
O;-(q)/Sm S; otm(q) ot(q) x (O;-(q) l Sm-l) S; O;-m(q)· 4. For q == 3 mod (4) the maximal tori normalizers are 0;- / Sm x 7l/2 S;
Remark 4.7 The situation where p does not divide q-l is not much different. Here the action of (71/ s) described in (4.1) gives that the invariants are in
02m+l(q). (This is a direct counting argument.) Corollary 5.2 The groups H*(0~m(q);lF2) and H*(02m+l(q);lF2) are de-
tected by restriction to elementary 2-subgroups for q odd. But
Proof. From 2.13 and 5.1 we see that so the rings are formally the same as those before and, except for the evident change in dimensions of generators the arguments go as before. Thus we have
Corollary 4.8 Suppose p does not divide q and qS -1 =pT() as in (4.1{c)).
Then H*(GLn(q);lFp) ~H*((Z/pT)[n/sl;lFp)(z/S)IS[n/sJ and this invariant algebra is the tensor product of a polynomial algebra on generators in dimensions 2si and an exterior algebra on generators in dimensions 2si - 1, 1 ~ i ~ [n/s]. (Of course, we have only given a proof in case p2 does not divide qS - 1, but (4.6) gives the proof in the general case.)
SyI2(0~m(q)) ~
II D 2 l ~/2l71/21 ... l71/~ j
I
l
where the I run over the powers of 2 appearing in the dyadic expansion of m or such a group times (Z/2)2. Similarly, Syl2(02m+l(q)) ~ 7l/2 X SyI2(0~m(q)). But we have already seen in Chapter IV that the cohomology of such groups is detected by restriction to elementary 2-subgroups. 0 Now we want to understand the conjugacy classes of elementary 2subgroups in O~m(q) and 02m+l(q). Consider an elementary 2-subgroup (71/2Y = (tl,"" t T) contained in one of these orthogonal groups. For ease of notation we assume for the moment that we are dealing with one of the groups O~m(q). Since q is odd we can choose an orthogonal basis el,"" e2m so that the ti become diagonal with only ±I's along the diagonal. Suppose t 1 (el) = -el' Then we can choose new basis elements for (71/2)n,
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
236
tl, t~, . ..
,t~, so that t~(el) = el, 2 :::; i :::; n. Then V = (e2,"" e2m) is taken to itself by (Z/2)n. Write V = V+ EB V- where x E V is contained in V± if and only if h(x) = ±x. Then (t;, ... , t~)(V±) = V± and if we define T by el if x = el, T(X) = X ifxEV+, { -x if x E V-, T E O~m(q) and T commutes with (Z/2)n. Consequently either T E (Z/2)n or we can adjoin it obtaining an extension (Z/2)n+l C O~n(q). By
then
repeating this construction we obtain Lemma 5.3 Let G = (Z/2)n C O~m(q) or 02m+l(q), then G is contained 'in a maximal subgro'U,p (Z/2)2m or (Z/2)2m+l. Such a group splits the form uniquely as a sum of 1-forms (I)S ~(,B)2m+E-s and s is a complete characterization of the conjugacy class of a maximal 2-elementary subgroup of O~m (q) or 02m+l(q).
Proof. The argument above shows that (Z/2)n is contained in a subgroup (Z/2)2m+c = (t 1 , ... , t2m+c) and there is an orthogonal basis el, ... ,e2m+c for the vector space so that ti(ej) = ej if j I- i, and ti(ei) = -ei' Since the ( -1) eigenspace for t'i is orthogonal to the (+ 1) eigenspace it follows that ei is not an isotropy vector for the form and so the ei give an orthogonal splitting of the form into a sum of I-forms. On the other hand it is direct to see that among the 22m +c elements of this group exactly 2m + t of them have I-dimensional (-1) eigenspaces. Hence, this splitting is intrinsic to the group and the result follows. 0
5. The Cohomology of the Groups O~(q) for q Odd
237
Example 5.5 Let ,B be a non-square in lFq and suppose q == 1 mod (4). Then the two subgroups (Z/2)2 C ot(q) described above are
For I I the eigenvector splitting is (el - e2, el + e2) which corresponds to the splitting of the quadratic form as (-2)~(2). For I the eigenvector splitting is (,Bel + e2, ,Bel - el) which gives the form (2,B)~( -2,B). Corollary 5.6 The normalizer of the maximal elementary 2-subgroup of O~m(q) or 02m+l(q) with. splitting space (1)8 ~(,8)2m+c-8 is
(Z/2 2 Ss) x (Z/2 2 S2m+c-s) so the Weyl group is S8
X
S2m+c-8'
Corollary 5.7 The restriction map taking H* (O~m (q); IF 2) to
H*(O~(q) x
(ot(q)):=>IF 2 ) H*(O~(q) x (O;-(q)) ;IF2) { H*(Of(q) x (O;-(q))m-l;IF2)
when q == 1 mod (4) q == 3 mod (4), m odd, q == 3 mod (4), m even,
orH*(02m+l(q);IF2) to H*(O~(q)m x Z/2; lF 2 ) { H*(O;-(q)m x Z/2;IF 2 )
for q == 1 mod (4), for q == 3 mod (4)
is injective in cohomology. In particular there are exactly two conjugacy classes of elementary 2groups (Z/2)2 C O~ (q). Indeed, we have
n 1 Lemma 5.4 The dihedral group D 2n = {x, y I x 2 = (xy)2 = y2 - = I} has precisely 2 conjugacy classes of maximal elementary 2-groups (Z/2)2, the n 2 n 2 first conjugate to (x, y2 - ) and th~ second conjugate to (xy, y2 - ). Proof. The elements of order 2 are precisely the classes xyi, a :::; i :::; 2n - 1 - 1 n 2 and y2n-2. y2 - is central and xxyix = xy-i, y-j xyiyj = xyi+2j. Thus there are precisely 2 conjugacy classes of non-central elements of order two, the first represented by x and the second by xv. Also, xyixyj = yj-i and we see that xyi, xyj commute if and only if j = i ± 2n-2. Hence there are two n 2 n 2 possibilties for conjugacy classes of (Z/2)2, (x, y2 - ) = {I, x, xy2n-2 ,y2 - } n 2 and (xy,y2 - ) {I,xy,xy2n-2+1,y2n-2} and these are clearly not conjugate. 0 As an example of how 5.3 works we have
We now wish to precisely determine these images. The result will be direct from the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem once we have proved Lemma 5.8 Let G = (Z/2)2m C D 2n 2Sm. Then G C (D2n)m C D2n 2Sm· In particular G c O~(q) 2 Sm c O~m(q) when q == 1 mod (4) and ± is + or q == 3 mod (4), ± = - and m is odd, or ± = + and m is even.
Proof. Consider the projection
and look at 7r(G). It is clear that any 2-elementary subgroup (Z/2) C Sm must have r :::; [~]. Thus K~r(7r) n G = (Z/2)V with v ~ m,: [~]. In particu~ar G n (D2n)m must contam a subgroup of the form (Z/2) = (tl,"" t m) WIth ti contained in the ith copy of D2n in (D2n)m and Jr(G) must centralize this group. But this is impossible unless 7r( G) = {I} and the first statement of (5.8) follows.
238
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
O.
To see the second statement we use (5.3), (5.4), (5.5) to assert that G has the form VI x ... X Vm C (D2n)m where each Vi is either conjugate in D 2n
to (x, y2
n
2
-
)
or (xy, y2
n
2
-
).
L.):)
a. H*(O(q);lF 2) = U~=l H*(On(q),On-l(q);lB'2) so the map taking H*(On(q); lB'2)--tH*(O(q); lF 2 )
conjugate to
for a unique s, and (5.3) shows these groups are not conjugate in O~(q) for distinct s. Thus the closure conditions are satisfied. 0
UUU
Theorem 5.10
Moreover, within (D2n) l Sm each such group is
m-s
Lne vonornulOgy Ul LIte uruups un\q) lUr (}
is an inclusion for all n. b. The inclusions On(q) X Om(q)--tOn+m(q) induced by orthogonal sums of vector spaces fit together on passing to limits to define a unitary, commutative and associative multiplication
Corollary 5.9 Under the conditions of (5.8)
and gives H*(O(q); lF 2 ) the structure of a biassociative, bicommutative Hopf algebra. c. As an algebra
H*(O~m(q);lF2) C H*(D2fi;JF 2)Sm
consists of exactly those elements () which satisfy res;(() E H*((VJ)S x (VII)m-s;lF 2)s2 8XS2(m-s),
O~s~m.
Example. The case q == 1 mod (4) We now assume that q == 1 mod (4) and (3 will represent the a non-square in JF q • The inclusions j: otm(q) i(1), i({3): 02m+1
--+
02m+l(q)
--+Otm+2(q)
induce injections in homology and surjections in cohomology. Here i(l) is the inclusion induced by regarding 02m+ 1 ( q) as the group of the form (1)-1 ... -1(1) and
----------
where the subscripts denote the dimensions of the generators and ei is the non-zero element of dimension i in H i (Ol(q); lB'2) = lF2 while hi E H i (02(q); lB'2) is the sum ei + i({3)(ei)' Proof. (a) has already been discussed in part. To see that the homology of the limit is the limit of homology groups is standard since homology is carried by chains with compact support. To see (b) note that the inclusion /-Ln,m: On(q) X Om(q)--tOn+m(q) has images all orthogonal matrices of the form m x m. But the element
2m+1
(1)~ (,(1)-1.~.-1(1)/) = ~ 2m+l
2m+2
while i({3) is the inclusion obtained by regarding 02m+I(1) as the group of the form ((3) -1 ... -1 ((3) and noting '-v-'
2m+l
((3)-1 ... -1((3) ' -v -'
2m+2
=
(~n
1'0)
E
(~ ~)
with A n x nand B
On+m(q) now acts to congugate /-Ln,m
and /-Lm,nT where
is the interchange. Consequently, this pairing is commutative. Also, a similar conjugation shows that the multiplication fits correctly with inclusion so that, on the level of homology groups it passes to the limit groups and defines the desired algebra structure on H*(O(q);lF2)' Finally we verify (c). Here, note that from our description of
(1)-1 ... -1(1) . __________
2m+l
i({3)j is conjugate to i(l)j but ji({3) need not be conjugate to ji(I)' Hence, to be definite we define O(q) = lim--t(On(q)) where On(q) = {o;t(q) n even On(q) n odd, and the inclusion On(q)--tO n+l(q) is j if n is odd and i(1) if n is even. We have
we have res*(w) is the same in both conjugacy classes of subgroups ('£/2)2 C D21. From this, if we set Ii = i({3) (ei), then ai is dual to ei, bi is dual to Ii and both e~ and fl are dual to Wi. Consequently we have h~ = O. On the other hand it is clear that the ei, hj generate H*(O(q);lF 2 ) and are independent. Hence by Hopf's theorem that commutative associative Hopf algebras over a field are tensor products of monogenic algebras it (c) follows. 0
240
241
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
Examples 5.11 H*(02(q);1F2) = H*(D21;1F2) = 1F2[a + b,w](b) where b2 = (a + b) b gives the extension data and the Poincare series is
u L W2j X2k-1
l+x P02 (q)(x) = (1 _ x)(l - x 2) .
u U
+ -(1---x)-:"2-(1---x2:-:-")
(1 - x)(l - x 2 )(1 - x 3 )' Finally, we consider 04(q). Here there are three conjugacy classes of subgroups (71/2)4 with contributions respectively IF2 [0"1 , 0"2, 0"3, 0"4], elements dual to fiJj ® ere s with 0 :::; i < j and duals to elements of the form fdjfkfl with o :::; i < j < k < l. Consequently the Poincare series is 1 + x6
(1 - x)(l - x2)(1 - x3 )(1 - x 4 ) (1 + x)(l + x 2)(1 + x 3)
(1 - x)2(1
_X
)2
The Cohomology Groups H*(Om(q);IF2) The restriction map
Il
H*(Om(q);lF2)--t
H*((71/2)2i)S2i ®H*((71/2)m-2i)Sm-2i
°Si<-,?
is onto those elements which evaluate equally on monomials of the form
and eil
® ... 0
ei 21 _2
®
L
W2p-l ® W2q'
p+q=k This notation is meant to indicate that the restriction of the element to each of the conjugacy classes of elementary 2-groups has the indicated form. These elements satisfy the constraint conditions and consequently are in the image of H*(Ois(q); 1F2) or H*(02s+1(q); IF2)' Indeed one has the following theorem.
(1 + x)(l + x 2 ) •.. (1 + xm - 1 ) (1-x)(1-x 2).··(1-xm ) . Further details, including the relations between the generators are explained in [FP]; pp. 264-277.
X
----------~--~~----~+----~~--~ 2
5.12
W2p 0 W2q-1,
Theorem 5.13 H*(02n+l(q); lF 2 ) is the subring of 6.8 generated by the elements Xk, Xk. Similar generation results hold in the remaining cases. In all cases the Poincare series of H*(0in(q);1F2) is
x
1
L
p+q=k
Now we describe H*(03(q); 1F2)' There are two conjugacy classes of (71/2)3 in o (3), the first associated to the form (1) 1- (1) 1- (1) and the second to the form (,8)1-(,8)1-(1). The first contributes a polynomial algebra H*((71/2)3;1F 2)S3 = IF 2 [0"1, 0"2, 0"3] and the second contributes IF 2[0"1, 0"2]0"1 0IF 2(0"1]. This can be seen since the terms in homology are all of the form fdj ® es with 0 :::; i < j. Consequently its Poincare series is
(1 - x)(l - x 2)(1 - x 3) (1 + x)(l + x 2)
0 W2(k-s),
ei 21 _ 1
®
ei21_1
® ....
Examples of such elements are easily constructed. Note that
H*((Z/2)m)Sr XS rn-r = lF 2 [W1, .. ·, wr ] ® lF 2 [W1,.··, w m- r ] where Wi is the ith symmetric monomial in the first r coordinates and Wj is the /h symmetric monomial in the last m - T coordinates. Then set
6. The Groups H*(SP2n(Q);IF2) The symplectic groups differ from the orthogonal groups we have been considering in one important respect. It turns out that H*(SP2n(q); 1F2 ) is not detected on elementary 2-subgroups. But there is an important similarity. Using the inclusion Hn c Hn 1-H we obtain inclusions SP2n(q) C SP2n+2 (q), and passing to limits as in the orthogonal case we obtain a group Sp(q) = lim __ (Sp2n(q)) together with a bicommutative, biassociative, Hopf algebra structure on H* (Sp(q); IF 2 ). The Hopf algebra structure here forces the structure of the groups H*(Sp(q); 1F 2), and by restriction, the groups H* (SP2n (q); IF 2) as well. We have already seen that Sp2(q) = SL 2 (q) and we have for all odd q the result H*(SL2(q); 1F2 ) = E(e3) ® lF 2 [b 4 ], [Q3]. SP2n(q) contains the subgroup Sp2(q) 2 Sn = SL 2 (q} 2 Sn and this subgroup always contains a Sylow 2subgroup for q odd. It follows that the detecting groups for H*(SP2'n(q); IF 2 ) have the form SL 2(qr x (71/2)S with r+s :::; n. Moreover, following the lines of argument in §5 we have that each of these groups is conjugate to a subgroup of SL2(q)n C SL 2(q) 2 Sn- In particular
Lemma 6.1 The two inclusions
'-""'''' ...... p''''-'..1.
,..L ........... . 1. ....................
and SP2n(1)
X
_ .........
'--.1._
Z/2~SP2n(q)2
We now turn to the proof of the main theorem C
SP2n(q) (Z/2 C SP4n(q)
are conjugate in SP4n(q). Here f.L(B, T€) = (B, B7€) where element in the center of SP2n (q).
7
is the non-trivial
Proof. The ±1 eigenspaces of T give a splitting of lF4n into lF 2n ~lF2n and the action of Ll(SP2n(q)) is diagonal on these two subspaces. On the other hand T acts as +1 on the first summand and -1 on the second. In view of the fact that SP2n(q) lZ/2 is exactly the stabilizer of such an orthogonal splitting, the result follows. 0 Lemma 6.2 The restriction map
with dim(ei)
=
3, dim(bi ) = 4, 1
~
i ~ n is injective in cohomology.
Dually, this gives
Theorem 6.5
H*(Sp(q)i lF 2 )
=
lF 2 [b 4,.·., b4n ,·· .]0 E(e3,"" e4n-l,"') ,
and H*( SP2 m(q);lF 2) injects into H*(Sp(q);lF 2) as the suspace spanned by all monomials b~l ... bile;l ... e~~_l with 2: i j + 2: Ej ~ m. Proof. The main step in the proof of (6.5) is the following preliminary result. Lemma 6.6 a. There is a unique conjugacy class of maximal elementary subgroups (Z/2)n C SP2n(q) for each n and any elementary 2-group (Zj2)S in SP2n (q) is contained in a subgroup (Zj2)n. b. (Z/2)n x (Z/2)n C SP2n(q) (71/2 C SP4n(q) is a closed syste~ for n > l. c. For n = 1 there are two conjugacy classes of subgroups (Z/2) C SP2(q) ( 7l/2. The first VI is the center of Sp2(q)2 and is normal in Sp2(q) 171/2 ,1xid
Corollary 6.3 In homology the product map n
H*(SL 2(q)i lF2)0 --+H*(SP2n(q); lF 2)
is surjective. In particular H*(SP2n(q); lF 2 ) is a quotient of the subset of elements in lF 2[b4, b8 , ... , J ® lF2[e3, e7,"" e4i-l, ... J consisting of products of n or less terms where the subscripts denote the dimensions of the generators. (The mapping H*(SL 2(q);lF 2)n-+H*(SP2n(q)jlF 2) factors through the 5 n invariants and they have the description given in (6.3).)
Lemma 6.4 The elements e~i-l are zero in H*(Sp4(q)jlF 2), so it follows that there is a surjection of the products of n or less terms in the algebra lF 2[b 4, b8 ,.·., b4i ,· .. J ® E(e3,"" e4i-l, ... ) onto H*(SP2n(q)j lF2)'
Proof. (6.1) shows that the two inclusions p,: SL 2(q) x Z/2-+SL 2(q) lZ/2 and Ll x id: SL 2(q) x Z/2-+SL 2 (q) l Z/2 are conjugate in Sp4(q). Consequently,
e E im(H*(Sp4(q); Z/2) C
H*(SL2(q) 2 Z/2; Z/2)
only if p,* (e) = (Ll x 1)* (e). In particular consider the elements r(e3bi). We have p,*(r(e3bi) J.L*(e3bi ® e3bi) = 0, but (Ll x id)*(r(e3bi)) = e3bi ® e4i+3 + higher terms which is certainly not zero. It follows that r(e3bi) is not in the image of H*(Sp4(q);lF2) so dually e4i+3 ® e4i+3 maps to zero in H*(Sp4(q);lF'2) and e~i+3 = 0 as asserted. 0
while the second VII C Sp2(q) x 7l/2--+Sp2(q) 171/2. Proof (aj Given (71j2)W C SP2n(q) we argue as in (5.3) using the ±1 eigenspaces for generators of (71/2)W to show that if w < n then there is a subspace V C lF~n with the restriction of the symplectic form non-singular on V and V is a -1 eignenspace for t 1, but a + 1 eigenspace for the other generators, and dim(V) 2: 4. This allows us to split V non-trivially as the orthogonal sum
V
= (S)~
.. · ~(S)
and extend (Z/2)W to a subgroup (71/2)w+l C SP2n(q). This process stops only when w = n. In particular, every (71j2)n C SP2n(q) is associated uniquely with a splitting of the symplectic form
and from this it is direct that any two such subgroups are conjugate in SP2n(q)· (b). Let W = (71/2)W C SP2n(Q) 171/2 and consider the projection 1f: SP2n(Q) I Z/2-+Z/2. If im(1fIW) -I {1} then there is atE W with t of the form (e, e' ,T). Since 1 = t2 =
(e, e' ,T) (e, e' ,T) = (ee', e' e, 1)
it follows that t = (e, e- 1 , T) for some e E SP2n(Q). Thus, when we conjugate W by (e- 1 , 1, 1), t is conjugated to (1,1, T), so we can assume (1,1, T) E W. On the other hand, the centralizer of (1,1, T) in SP2n(Q) 171/2 is
244
Chapter Vll. Finite Groups of Lie Type
245
which, by (a), has exactly one conjugacy class of elementary 2-groups (2/2)n+1. Since n ;:::: 2 it follows that n + 1 < 2n and we assumed w = 2n. Thus, W c ker(7T) = SP2n(q) X SP2n(q) and (b) follows from (a). (c). The proof of (b) actually shows that for all n, SP2n(q) 22/2 contains exactly 2 conjugacy classes of elementary 2-subgroups, the first of the form (2/2)2n C ker(7T) and the second of the form (2/2)n+1 which is not in the kernel of 7T and which is conjugate to a subgroup of il(SP2n(q)) X 2/2. (c) is a special case of this. 0 Note that we can regard Sp2(q) 22/2 as the normalizer of a 2/2 x 7l/2 C SP4(q) and the (2/2)2 is contained in Sp2(q) 2 7l/2 as the normal subgroup VI· Lemma 6.7 N SP4 (q) (VII) n N Sq4 (q) (VI) is a split extension of the centralizer oj VII, il(Sp2(q)) x 7l/2 in N SP4 (q) (VI) by a copy oj71/2, N SP4 (q) (VII)
n NSp'l(q) (VI) = (il(Sp4(q)) x 7l/2)
xT
((1,-1,1)) .
Proof. The Weyl group WS P4 (q) (VI ) = 7l/2 C GL 2(2) = 53. (1, -1,1) normalizes VI I and acts non-trivially on it so is contained in the intersection. Hence the intersection above is the extension of the centralizer of VI I in SP2 (q) 27l /2 by (1, - 1, 1) as asserted. 0 We now consider the double coset decomposition
Sp2(q) 22/2
Ii Sp2(Q) 22 /2 n 9;1S P2 (q) 271/29i
where Li
= 9iSp2(q) 22/29;1 n Sp2(Q) 22/2.
1'"
9'-'SPZ(f, I7l/29 i
¢i,j: H* (L~; JF 2 )
res
Sp2(q) 271/2
and the resulting image of VI I will be a copy of VI I, hence by modifying 9i it will be VII, except in the one case covered in (6.1) where it will be VI. Let 91 = 1 and 92 give the coset where this interchange happens. Consider the composite map
res ----t
res
H* (Sp2 (q) ( 7l/2; JF 2) ----t H* (VI; JF 2)'
tr
Cj
----t
H* (L~,j; JF 2) ----t H* (L~:j; JF 2 ) - - t H* (VI; lF 2 )
s:
and L~,j = 9;1 L~9j n VI. In particula,r ¢i,j == 0 if L~,j VI, so the only terms which can enter non-trivially into the sum above are ¢l,! = res and the terms ¢2J' . In the case of ¢2,j we can choose the 9j giving the double coset decomposition Sp2(q) 22/2 = UVI9jL~ = U9jL~ so that cj = id for each j since L~ is given by (6.7) and this group surjects onto im(NSq4(Q) (VII )~Aut(VII). It follows that the sum L:: j ¢2,j = \Sp2(q) 22/2, L~\res = 0 since the index of L~ in Sp2(q) 22/2 is even. Thus we have proved that E is just the restriction map
= res: H*(Sp2(Q) 22/2; lF2)--tH*(V[; lF 2)
and the image of H*(Sp4(q); lF2) in H*(1i]; lF2) is lF 2[b 4 , bar Now, to complete the proof of (6.5) we can proceed by induction, (6.4) and the result above providing the theorem for Sp4(Q). By Hopf's theorem on commutative Hopf algebras the only possible truncations on the polynomial parts would be relations of the form b~~ = 0 for some l. So it suffices to show that no such truncation can occur. Thus, assume there are no such truncations for H*(Sp21 (q); lF 2), l ;:::: 2. But (2/2)2
1'"
Again, each of the composites
can be rewritten using the double coset formula as a sum of composites
E
For certain 9i we have the composite
VII
By applying the double coset formula to the first two maps E can be rewritten as a sum of maps of the form
1
X
(2/2)21 C SP21 2Z/2 C SP21+1 (q)
is a closed system satisfying the hypothesis of the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem for l ;:::: 2 and the inductive step is direct. 0
7. The Exceptional Chevalley Groups
where v is 1 or 3 and n acts on each SL2 as conjugation by (
The exceptional Chevellay groups are of two types. First there are the groups G 2(q) C P4(q) C E6(q) C E7(q) C Es(q) which are analogues for finite field of the exceptional classical Lie groups. Then there are the groups corresponding to ~he "graph automorphisms" of the Dynkin diagrams. Classically, only the umtary groups have this type of description, but for finite fields (and other fields with similar automorphisms) there are further types. In particular the groups 02n are associated to graph automorphisms. There are two further families of this type which were discovered by Steinberg, the first associated to the rotation through 27r /3 of the Dynkin diagram D4,
written 3 D 4(q), and called the "triality twisted" D4(q). The second is associated to the flip of the Dynkin diagram for E6(q), f--
•
flip
----4-
•
•
"
r
•
Then there are three further exceptional families, associated to graph automorphisms which are only valid at certain primes, the Suzuki groups Su(22m+l), and the two Ree families, 2G 2(3 2m +1 ), 2P4(22m+l). The groups 2G 2(3 2m +1 ) have Syl2(ZG2(32m+l)) = (Z/2)3 with Weyl group the semidirect product (Z/7) XT Z/3. Consequently .
H*eG 2(3 2m +1 ); JF 2 ) = JF 2 [x, y, z]Z/7X T Z/3 . Aside from this and Quillen's general result mentioned in the introduction to this chapter not too much is known about most of these groups. However recently, the situation for the groups 3D4(q) and 2G 2(q) has begun to becom~ much clearer, and there is related work by T. Hewett which promises to also clarify the situation for F4(q). The groups 3D4(q) and G 2(q) are simple for odd q and are characterized by a result of P. Fong and W.J. Wong, [FW], ~heor~m
1.1 Let G be a finite simple group with one conjugacy class of mvolutwns. If the normalizer of an involution is the central product
J.L a non-square in
~J.L ~)
with
IF q, then G = G 2 (q) if v = 1 and 3 D4(q) if v = 3.
XT (n). From this Syl2(G) = (n), and this group, in turn, is isomorphic to
It follows that SyI2(G) C SL 2 (q) * SL2(q1J)
Q2 m
* Q2
m
XT
where y acts to invert the elements of (71,/2 m- 1 ) while v interchanges them. In particular, this representation shows that G has 2-rank 3, so the largest 2-elementary subgroups are of the form (Z/2)3.2 For example, 2m 2 2m if a, b generate the two copies of 71,/2 m- 1 then I = (a - , b - , y) and II = (a 2m - 2 , b2m - 2 , aby,) give two distinct copies of (Z/2)3 C Syl2(G). For simplicity; in the rest of this section we assume that q == 1 mod (4). The involution j which is centralized by SL 2(q)*SL 2(q1J) xT(n) is (ab)2=-2. With this notation results of [FW), [FM) , show that G has 2 conjugacy classes of (71,/2)2's, the first represented by (j, a 2=-2), and the second by (j, aby) and 2 conjugacy classes of (71,/2)3's, the first represented by I and t,he second by II. In particular, every (Z/2)2 is contained in a (Z/2)3. Further, in [FW) it is proved that the normalizer modulo the centralizer for each (Z/2)2 is G L2 (2) = 53' Then in [FM) it is proved that the normalizer of I is given as a non-split extension I
II
W ----54
where 54 C GL3(2) is the parabolic subgroup of all matrices in G L 3(2) of the
form
(~ ~) H2
with A E GL2(2). We write Hz for the group
(Z/4)2 XT Z/2 {a,b,y!a 4 =b 4 =y2=1, ab=ba, ay=ya-l, by=by-l}
and H for the extension H2
XT
71,/2
= Syl2(G 2 (5)).
Remark. It is also shown in [FM) that when we include G(q) C G(q2) then both the image of IC(q) and the image of IIc(q) are conjugate to IC(q2). Remark. W also occurs as the normalizer of a (71,/2)3 in the Mathieu group M 1 2. It is discussed in Chapter VIII.
248
7. The Exceptional Chevalley Groups
Chapter VII. Finite Groups of Lie Type
The data above gives a complete determination of the poset space for G in [FM]. The quotient of the poset space by the action of G is given below with the isotropy groups of the faces indicated.
249
Theorem 7.3 1. H*(Sy12(G)) is detected by restriction to its maximal 2-elementary sub-
groups (7L/2)3. . The Poincare series for 8yI2(G) is independent of G and given as (1!x)3' 3. H*(SyI2(G)) ~ IF2[Cl,T4,T2](1,h,,2,1-"3)EBIF2[cl,T4,el](e!,elI2) with the subscripts denoting the dimensions of the generators. The keymultiplicative relation is eT2 = O.
2.
Since E contains representatives of both conjugacy classes of (Z/2)3 res
in G it follows that H* (G) '----+ H* (E) is injective. Moreover, applying the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem to the closed system I
IF 2 [d 4, d6 , d7 ]. Here the labels in smaller type are the isotropy groups of the edges. Also, Nl = (7L/(q - 1) x 7L/(q - 1)) XT (7L/2) since q == 1 mod (4). There are two useful cancellation rules that can be used to simplify the diagram without changing the homology type of the associated classifying space. If a "free" edge, i.e. an edge incident on only one face, and the corresponding face have the same isotropy group then we can remove both edge and face. Likewise, if a free vertex, i.e. a vertex incident on only one edge, and the corresponding edge have the same isotropy group we can again remove both the edge and the vertex. By iterating these reductions the homotopy type of the resulting classifying space corresponds to the diagram
Thus we have the following theorem which reduces the determination of H* (G; IF 2) to a much simpler problem. Theorem 7.2 The intersection of E and 8L2(q) * 8L 2 (qV) isomorphic to W = N G (11). AIoreover the homomorphism
XT
(n) in G is
is surjective and induces isomorphisms in cohomology with (7L/2) coefficients. Here A *B C is the free product of A and C, amalgamated over the common subgroup B. These groups are studied as follows. First 8y12( G) S;;; D2 n ( Z/2 as an index(2) subgroup, and from the Gysin sequence for this pair together with the fact that H*(D2n ( Z/2) is detected on elementary 2-groups it follows that H* (8y12 (G)) is also detected on elementary 2-groups and its cohomology can be explicitly determined. In summary one has the results of Fong and Milgram, [FM] , (M2],
But the system I
(1 + x 3 )(1 + x 5 )(1 + x 6 ) (1 - x4)(1 - x 6 )(1 - x 7 )
•
250
Chapter V11. Finite Groups or LIe .type
2. H* (G) is free (and finitely generated) over a subpolynomial ring
C,hapter VIII. COhOlllOlogy of Sporadic
Simple Groups
IF 2 [d 4 , d6 , d7 ] and if q' = qW then G(q) C G(q') and the resulting restriction map takes the subpolynomial algebra for G(q') isomorphically to the subpolynomial algebra for G(q). 3. As a ring H*(G) is generated by d4, d6 = Sq2(d 4), d7 = Sq1(d 6 ), a generator f3 in dimension 3, and f = Sq2(f3) in dimension 5. The relations are f34 = d7 f + d6 f3 2, f2 = d4f32 + d7f3, both of which are implied by the formula Sq4(f) = d4 f + d 6 f3.
Remark. The Poincare series in 7.5.1 is exactly the same as the Poincare series of the sporadic group J 1 studied in II.6.9 and IIL1.9. We will try to explain the relation between J 1 and G 2 (q) in Chapter IX where we use the plus construction. The group E studied above will playa crucial role in this analysis as the next remark will help to explain. Remark 7.6 The group E also appears as a maximal finite subgroup of the topological Chevellay group G 2 of dimension 14 given as the automorphism group of the Cayley plane. G 2 is a subgroup of the orthogonal group 0(7). This embedding of E in was given by H.S.M. Coxeter, [Cox], and a particular representation is given in [CW], pg. 448, as the span of the permutation matrices (1,2,3,4,5,6,7), (1,2,4)(2,6,5), and the matrix 15(1,2,4,7)(1,2)(3,6) where b(a,b,c,d) is the diagonal matrix in 0(7). In fact, under this embedding I turns out to be a maximal torus in G 2 and E is its normalizer. Thus, by a general theorem of Borel, the inclusion induces an isomorphism H* (BG 2 i F2)---tH* (I; F2)GL 3(2) . An independent verification of this isomorphism is given in [M2] by using the explicit embedding to evaluate the composition
H* (B O (7); F2 )---tH* (BG 2 ; F2 )---tH* (I; F2)GL 3(2) on the Stiefel-Whitney classes (which generate H*(Bo(7);F2)' [MS]).
Remark. It is not hard to see that H*(G 2(F p oo); F 2 ) = lim (H*(G 2(pn); F 2 ) +---
and that 7.4, 7.5 show that this limit is exactly F 2 [d 4 , d6 , d7 ] which is, by 7.6 also equal to H*(G 2 ;JF 2 ). This result, due originally to Grothendieck is an aspect of his theory of Etale cohomology. A discussion of this remarkable theory lies outside the scope of this book however. We refer the reader to the work of Kleinerman [Kl] for more on this topic.
O. Introduction In this chapter we will describe recent progress towards understanding the cohomology of the sporadic simple groups. Briefly we recall that from the classification of finite simple groups, [Gor], it was shown that there exist 2'6 simple groups not belonging to infinite families (i.e. not of alternating or Lie type) and we study six of these groups here: four of the five Mathieu groups, the first Janko group, J 1 , and the O'Nan group 0' N. Here are some of the reasons, (aside from pure curiosity), for understanding the cohomology of these groups. As we will see in Chapter IX, we can add two and three dimensional cells to the classifying space of a perfect group to obtain a simply connected topological space, Ei], with the same homology as BG , and the homotopy groups of these spaces are of basic importance in homotopy theory. The symmetric groups build up Q(SO), a process discussed in the introduction to Chapter VI and proved in IX.3. The general linear groups over a finite field similarly build the classifying spaces Eo and Eu as well as certain fibers of "Adams operations", pk - I, known as Im(J)-spaces (IX.3 again). Indeed, in IX.3.2 we point out that these lead to a product splitting Q(SO) = Im(J) x Coker(J) with the Im(J) space completely understood. It is natural to expect that the sporadic groups should playa role in the structure of the C oker( J) space, though we are only beginning to understand some of the smaller sporadic groups in this framework. The group Mll which has 2-rank two has been studied by F. Cohen and the three 2-rank three sporadic groups M 12 , hand 0' N are currently being analyzed from this point of view. We only have partial information about 0' N, but both hand M12 are closely tied to the exceptional Lie group G 2 , facts which are still slightly mysterious, but which we will explain in Chapter IX. Among the rank four sporadic groups we have determined the cohomology of M22 and M 23 and the cohomology rings are discussed in §5. Neither one is Cohen-Macaulay so the rings are quite complex, but M 23 turns out to be the first example of a finite group for which Hi(G; Z) = 0 for i ~ 4. Indeed, it had been conjectured by C.Giffen [Gi] that the only finite group for which this is possible is the trivial group. Also, the Coker(J) space is 5-connected with H6(Coker(J); Z) = Z/2, and the natural inclusions M 23 C 5 23 C 5 00 induce an isomorphism of
252
2. The Cohomology of h
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
H 6(M23 ; Z) with the Z/2 which generates H6(Coker(J); Z) in this dimension. Again, we expand on these remarks in §5 and Chapter IX. Likewise, from the point of view of modular representations, the sporadic groups are key examples and it is apparent that cohomological invariants play a fundamental part in recent and ongoing research in this field. As was mentioned in our introduction to this book the ideas here are discussed in the books of Benson and Evens. What we shall concentrate on is furnishing detailed calculations of the cohomology of a few of these groups. We will apply all the different techniques described in the previous chapters, hoping perhaps that this will serve as an additional justification and description of our methods. In particular, our calculation of H*(Mll; W2 ) in §1 completely replaces the much more complex original calculation by Benson and Carlson. Also, our calculation of H*(M12' W2 ), where M12 is the Mathieu group of order 95,040, replaces the less natural and longer original calculation in [AMM2]. We use W2 coefficients throughout, so they are often suppressed.
and so the Poincare series for Mu is (as first computed in [We], compare [BC3])
(1 - t 3 )(1 - t 4 ) The group GL2(W3) contains a Sylow 2-subgroup of Mu and has its mod(2) ~ohomology detected on its elementa~y 2-subgroups. Consequently the same IS true for Mu. More restrictively it follows from VII.4.4 that
H*(Ml1; lF 2 ) ~ W2 [Xl, X2]GL 2 (F 2 ) = W2[d 2, d3] , ~the Dickson algebra described in II1.2.3) and since there is only one element m each 20f the dimensions 3, 4, and 5 in this ring we see that H*(Mu) ~ W2[d 3, d 2 ](1, d2 d3)' Hence we have
Theorem 1.2
H*(Mu) ~·lF2[V3, V4, vsl/v~v4 + vg = 0 with Poincare series p(t)
1. The Cohomology of
253
= U- t\tS-t4 )'
MIl
2 Let G = M ll , the first Mathieu group having order 7920 = 24 3 5 11. Mll has 2-rank two with one conjugacy class of groups (Z/2)2 and one conjugacy class of involutions. From the Atlas, [Co], N(2A) = 2.174 = GL2(W3), (that is to say, the ~ormalizer of an involution is the non-split extension of the form
Remark 1.3 From the action of the Steenrod Algebra on the Dickson algebra, we have the following table giving the action of the Steenrod algebra on H*(Mll)' gen.\Sq
Sql
Sq2
Sq3
V3
0
Vs
v 32
V4
0
V~
0
Vs
V5
0
0
Z/2 <J N(2A)-tS4 isomorphic to GL 3(W3)), and we can also check that N(('1.,/2)2) = 174. Thus the quotient IA 2 (NI ll l/ Mll has the form
174 •
•
GL 2 (W 3 )
Sq4
v 42 V~
+ V4VS
D8
and we can apply V.3.3 to obtain the formula
2. The Cohomology of J I We already know from IV.2.7 that H* (D8; lF 2) which has Poincare series 2 1 PDs(t) = (1 _ x)(l - x 2 ) - 1 - x 2
0) 1
(1-x)2'
. . ' . ,. . 1±t±t2 ±t 3 Simllarly, usmg VI.1.13, the Pomcare senes for 174 lS (1-t2)(1-t3)' From VII.4.5 and 111.4.2 the Poincare series for H*(GL2(lF3)) is
(1 + t) (1 + t 3 ) (1 - t 2 )(1 - t 4 )
1 +t
+ t2 + t 3 + t 4 + t 5
(1 - t 3 )(1 - t 4 )
J 1 is the first Janko group, of order 175,560. It has a 2-Sylow subgroup ~somorphic .to ('1.,/2)3. Using this, we have already calculated its cohomology
m II.6.9 usmg the invariant ring determined in III.1.9. For further remarks on H*(J 1 ) using a poset decomposition see V.2.11 and V.3. For convenience, we recall the result from 11.6.9, Theorem 2.1
,2 +
H*(J 1 ) ~ lF 2 [X3, Y4, z71bsl f.16)/ f.12
Yf.1
+ xz =
0
+ x4 + x 2J.L + y3 + ,Z =
O.
254
3. The CoholI1ology of .11112
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
with Poincare series
t = (1 +t )(1 +t ) p() (1- t 3 )(1- t 4 )(1 - t 7 ) 5
6
_
(1 +x )(1 +x )(1 +X
-
(1 - x 4 )(1 - x 6 )(1 - x 7 )
3
5
6
(1,2,3)( 4,5,6)(7,6,9)
a
(2,4,3,7) (5,6,9,8)
b
(2,5,3,9)(4,8,7,6)
x
(1,10)(4,5)(6,8)(7,9)
Y
(1,11)(4,6)(5,9)(7,8)
) .
The action of A(2) can be computed directly from the explicit form of the generators given in II.l.9, particularly x given in (II.l.I0). We make the following remarks anticipating our discussion of the relation between J 1 and the exceptional group G 2 which we will give in Chapter IX. First H* (J1 ; IF 2) is Cohen-Macaulay over the Dickson algebra lF2[d 4 , d6 , d7 ] and can be rewritten in the form
In particular the quotient algebra by the ideal generated by the Dickson elements is H*(J1 ;lF 2 )/(d4,d6 ,d7 ) ~ lF 2[x,Sq2(x)l/(X 4
u
= (Sq2(X))2 = 0,x 2 = Sq1(Sq2(X)))
and this is exactly H* (G 2 ; IF 2), a "coincidence" which we will try to explain in Chapter IX. (We are indebted to F. Cohen for this description of H*(J1 ; lF2) and the geometric explanation which we give in Chapter IX.)
255
z
(1,12)( 4,7)(5,6)(8,9). It is 5-fold transitive and has order 26 33 5 11 = 95,040. Note that (a,b) ~ Qs while (x,y,z) ~ 54. When we conjugate a,b by x,y,z we obtain xax = b, xbx = a, yay = ba, yby = b- 1 , zaz = a-I, and zbz = ba, so Qs is normal in the subgroup W = (a,b,x,y,z) which consequently has order 26 3 = 192 and contains a 2-Sylow subgroup of M 12. In particular
where
d
=
xyz = (1,10,11,12)(4,8,7,6)
k = xyxz = (1,12)(5,9)(6,8)(10,11). Note that bd = db so (b, d) = (Z/ 4)2, and k()k = ()-1 for each () E (b, d). 2 Likewise, ka = ak, ada- 1 = b- 1 d, so setting s = ad2 we have 8 = 1, (8, k) = (Z/2)2 and we can write H as a split extension (Z/4)2 XT (71/2)2 1 where the twisting by 8 is given by sds = b- 1 d, sbs = b- . There are seven conjugacy classes of elements of order two in H, the central element a 2 = (2,3)(4,7)(5,9)(6,8), one having two elements and representative d2 = (1,11)(4,7)(6,8)(10,12), four with four elements in each conjugacy class having representatives
3. The Cohomology of
M12
In this section we study the Mathieu group M 12 . It is considerably more complex than Mll and J 1 and we begin with a detailed analysis of the structure of its elementary 2-groups. We explicitly construct subgroups of M12 with respect to which each conjugacy class of maximal elementary 2-groups is weakly closed. Then we prove that H*(Syl2(M 12 ); lF 2) is detected by restriction to its elementary 2-subgroups and from that the determination of its cohomology is fairly direct. The discussion here is a modification, based on ideas in [FMJ, [M2], of the work of [AMM2] where H*(M12; lF 2) was first determined.
The Structure of the Mathieu Group M12 The Mathieu group M12 is the subgroup of S12 generated by the following 6 elements as given for example in [Ha, pp. 79-80]:
k
=
(1,10)(4,7)(5,9)(11,12), (1,12)(2,6)(3,8)(4,5)(7,9)(10,11), (1,10)(2,5)(3,9)(4,6)(7,8)(11,12), (1,11)(2,6)(3,8)(4,9)(5,7)(10,12),
and finally one class with eight elements and representative z. The centralizers of the elements in the last 5 classes are given as follows, four copies of Ds x Z/2 for the four classes with four elements and (Z/2)3 for the class with 8 elements. In 5 12 the involutions contained in M12 lie in two conjugacy classes, the class {4} consisting of elements which are products of 4 disjoint involutions and {6} consisting of those elements which are products of six disjoint involutions, so there are at least two distinct conjugacy classes of involutions in M 12 . In fact, it is well known, [Co], that there are exactly two. From the structure of the centralizers in H it is easy to see that every elementary 2-subgroup of H is contained in a (Z/2)3 and that there are exactly 8 distinct (Z/2)3'8, three of the form 47 (by which we mean that each
256
3. The Cohomology of
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
non-identity element is in the class {4}), three of the form 43 6 4 , and finally two of the form 4 1 6 6 . These last two are conjugate in H and consequently weakly closed in H C Nh2. In the other two classes two of the groups are conjugate and the third is normal in H.
Remark 3.1 These (7I.,/2)3'S are given as follows. The normal subgroup of type 47 is VI = (b 2 , d2 , k) and the two other subgroups of this type are V2 = (b 2 , d 2 , bd- 1k), (b 2 , d 2 , d- 1k). The normal subgroup of type 4 3 6 4 is V3 = (b 2 , d2 , bk), and the two non-normal subgroups of this type are V4 = (b 2 , k, s), (b 2 , d 2 k, bs), while the two subgroups of type 41 66 are Vs = (b 2 , bd 2 k, s) and (b 2 ,bk,ks).
Set H21 = (a, b, k, dkd- 1 ) = Qs XT K where K c 54 is the Klein group. Since k and dkd- 1 act on Qs by conjugation with a, ab respectively, it follows that (ak, abdkd- 1 ) ~ Qs commutes with (a, b) and H21 is the central product, Qs * Qs ~ Ds * D s , an extra special 2-group. H21 is also the subgroup of H which is spanned by the three groups of the form 4 3 6 4 , and the element of order three, xy
(3.2)
= (1,10,11)(4,9,8)(5,6,7)
which normalizes H21 permutes the three subgroups cyclically. Thus these groups form a single conjugacy class in M12 and are weakly closed in W C M 12 . H21 also contains the normal 47 subgroup, and xy normalizes this group as well. Hence, W can be rewritten (71.,/2)3 xT 54. Finally, H21 contains both of the 4 1 6 6 subgroups, and each is normal in (H21, xV).
M12
257
and VI is weakly closed in W' C M 12 . Summarizing the discussion above we have
Theorem 3.4 a. There are precisely three conjugacy classes of groups (Z/2)3 contained in M 12 . Under the inclusion M12 C 512 they remain non-conjugate. The first, I, has the form 4 7 , the second I I, has the form 4 3 64, and the third, III, has the form 4 1 6 6 • b. There are subgroups Wand W' of M12 described above so that W n W' = H and I C W', II c Wand III C H are all weakly closed in M 12 . c. The Weyl group of I in M12 and the Weyl group of II in M12 are copies of 54' d. The Weyl group of III in M12 is A4, the Weyl group of III in W. (There isn't much to add to the discussion above to complete the proof. In the Atlas, [Co], it is noted that the centralizer of the involution of type {4} is W, and the centralizer of an involution of type {6} is Z/2 x 55 and from this the result is direct.)
For later reference we give the explicit actions of xy and T on the eight (7I.,/2)3,s in H now. The notation is that the element in the nth position in the image group is the image of the nth element in the domain group. First the normalizing actions.
The action of d2 xy on a representative group V5 is
(3.6) The subgroup, H22 C H which is spanned by the three subgroups of the form 47 also haB order 32. It is (b, d, k) so H22 ~ (71.,/4)2 xT 71.,/2 with the element of order two acting to invert the elements in (7L / 4) 2 . Consequently there are exactly four subgroups of the form (7L/2)3 C H 22 , (b 2 , d2 , k), (b 2 , d2 , bk), (b 2 , d 2 , dk) and (b 2 , d 2 , bdk). The first, third, and fourth each have the form 4 7 and the second has the from 4 3 6 4 . Also, the element (3.3)
T
= (1,4,2)(3,11,7)(5,10,6)(8,9,12)
H22 xT 53
(3.7) and the acton of T on the three subgroups of type 4 7 ,
E M12
normalizes H22 and cyclically permutes the three 47 subgroups while normalizing the 4 36 4 . Finally, the element d 2 a = b2 S E H satisfies d 2 aTd 2 a = T- 1 , so
vV' = (H, T) =
Next we give the action of xy on the three subgroups of type 4 36 4
Using the results above, and, for example, the detailed subgroup results in [AMM2] or [BR] we have the following picture of the poset space of 2elementary abelian subgroups for M 12:
Ghapter V111. GohOmolOgy or "poramc ;:)lmple Groups
with generators x(x) = 1, x(y) = D, fj(x) = D, y(y) = 1. In H* (Ds x Ds; lF2) write Xl = x01, X2 = 10x, YI = y01,Y2 = 10y, WI = w01 and W2 = 10w. Then in the Gysin sequence for the inclusion H22 C Ds X Ds we have that the map UX:H*(Ds x D s ;IF 2)-+H*+I(Ds x DSi lF 2) is just U(XI +XI +YI +Y2)' We have
W
and this can be rewritten as lF 2[x, Xl
+ YI, Xl, X2, WI, W2)/(X X2 = X~ + X2(XI + YI), XI(XI + YI) = xD·
In particular, multiplication by X is injective, and from this the result is direct 0 where CI is the image of Xl + YI.
There are 9 vertices,'17 edges and 9 triangles in this orbit complex. We have only shown the isotropy information for the vertices and a few edges. The full details are given in [AMM2, p. 1D6]. In Webb's formula, V.3.3, most of the groups cancel out and we are left with only, (3.1D)
H*(MI2) EB H*(H)
~
H*(W) EB H*(W').
Additionally, a close analysis of the structure of the finite Chevellay groups G2(q) sho:,s that for q == 3,5 mod (8), Syl2(G2(q)) ~ SyI2(MI2), and the configuratIOn W UH W' is also contained in G2(q). See, e.g. [M2]. This completes our discussion of the subgroup structure of M 12 . We now turn to the cohomology ring. The Cohomology of
M12
Write DB = {x, y I x2 = y2 = (xy)4 = I}. Then H22 c Ds X Ds with embedding given by b f---* ((xy)-l,xy), d f---* (l,xy), and y f---* (x,x),' and this extends to a map 1r: H -+Ds 271/2 by 1r(s) = E, the element which exchanges the two copies of Ds. Theorem 3.11 H*(H22; IF 2 ) is detected by restriction to its four maximal
elementary (71/2)3 subgroups. In particular H*(H22; IF 2) = IF 2 [WI, W2, c](l, Xl, X2, XIX2) with relations xi = Xl C, X§ = X2C where the w's are two dimensional and the remaining generators are one dimensional. Proof. Recall from IV.2.7 or IV.1.1D that H*(Ds; IF2) = IF 2[x, fj, W2]/(XY = D), where HI(Ds; F 2 ) = Hom(D s , IFt)
In IV.7.3 a special class, T(x) E H 2i (G (71/2; IF2) is construct~d for each X E Hi(G; IF2)' Moreover, these classes, their cup products with e~ where e E H I(GI71/2; lF 2) is dual to E, and classes of the form tr(y), y E H*(G x G; lF 2) generate H* (G 2 7L/2; IF 2)' Also, in the Gysin sequence for the inclusion 7r: H
'---t
Ds ( 7L /2
the map H* (Ds27L/2; IF 2) ~ H*+l (Ds27L/2; lF 2) is multiplication by tr(xi +YI) which restricts to H*(Ds x Ds; IF 2) as Xl + X2 + Yl + Y2· We can now state Corollary 3.12 a. H*(Hi lF2) is detected by restriction to the cohomology of its 5 conjugacy
classes of maximal elementary two groups. b. Up to extensions, H* (H i IF 2) = IF 2[c, 7f*tr( WI) ,7f* T( w)] (1, 7f*tr(xI), 7f* T(x), 7f*tr( Xl W2)) EB e I IF 2 (el, c, 7f* T(w))(I,7f* T(x)) where el is one dimensional and dual to E. Proof. We begin by consdering the Gysin sequence for the inclusion (*). The kernel of Ux is (e) = eIF 2(T(x), T(Y), T(w), e)/(T(x)T(fj)), but note that the square of any element in (e) is again a non-zero element of (e). Now, the transfer, tr: H*(H; lF2)-+H*(Ds 2 7L/2; lF2)' while it does not commute with cup products, does commute with squares (since they are stable cohomology operations), so there are no possible nilpotents in the cokernel of the restriction map H* (Ds 2 7L/2; IF 2 ) -+H* (H; IF2)' Next we need H*(Ds 2 7L/2)/(UX)· We have an exact sequence D-----+(e)-----+H*(Dsl7L/2;lF2)-----+H*(Ds x Ds;IF 2 Yl/2-----+D.
260
3. The Cohomology of
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
When we cup this sequence with X we obtain an exact sequence
O-r(e)-rH* (Ds l71/2; F2)/(X) -rH*(Ds x DS)71/2/(XH*(Ds
X
DS)71/2)-rO,
and since the right hand quotient is easily seen to have no nilpotent elements
(3.14)
the first statement follows. 1r We now use the spectral sequence of the extension H22
But each of the generators above, except c is in the image of 1r* and hence is an infinite cycle, while c is also an infinite cycle, since HI (H ; F 2 ) = H om(H, lFt) = (71.,/2)3, and the spectral sequence collapses. This proves the
From 3.12 it follows that the restriction images of all the generators to the five conjugacy classes of (71/2)3's are explicit. They can be determined as follows. From IV.7.1 and IV.7.2 we obtain the restrictions of r(e) to the basic subgroups K x K, S x K, K x S, S x S, (J1(K),E) and (J1(S),E), and the image of tr is zero when restricted to these last two groups. But also, under 1r we obtain the following inclusions where A = (xy)2:
(3.13)
VI = (b 2 ,d2 ,k) V2 = (b 2, d2, bd- I k) V3 = (b 2 ,d2 ,bk) V4 = (b 2 , k, s) V5 = (b 2 , bd 2k, s)
(3.15)
0
.
f-+
f-+
.
(AI + A 2, A 2, Xl + X2) c K x K (AI + A 2, A 2, YI + X2; c S x K (AI + A 2, A 2, YI + Y2 + A 2) c S x S (AI + A 2, Xl + X2, E; = (J1(K), E) (AI +A 2,YI +Y2,E) = (J1(S),E).
2
For definiteness, assume that W is given so that res* (w) = a + ah in both H*(K) and H*(S) where a is dual to A and h is dual to X in K, Y in S. 2 In the each of the groupS Vi. write ,\ as the dual to b , 7 is 2dual to the second generator, and h is dual to the third. Also, write n = 7 + 7h, v = ,\4 + ,\2(72 + h2 + 7h) + '\(7 2h + 7h 2). Then we have the following table for the restrictions to the five (Z/2)3,s in 3.13.
gen.\group
VI
V2
V3
V4
V5
h h
h
7
T
0
0
0
C
h
1r*tr(XI)
0
e 1r*r(x)
0
0
0
h2
0
0
h 7 2 +7h
0
1r*tr(WI)
n
n
n
0
0
1r*tr(XI W2)
7 2h + Th 2
,\2h + '\h 2
0
0
0
1r*r(w)
V
V
V
V
V
h
From ~his the detailed structure of H* (H; IF 2 ) can be easily obtained. However, we now have a simple criterion for determining the cohomology of M l2 , W, a~d ~' directly from the table above by using the actions of T and (xy) detaIled,Ill 3.5-3.8, which lead to the following maps in cohomology:
E2 = F2[C,WI +W2,WIW2](1,XI +X2,XIX2,XIW2+ X2WI) EEl eF 2[e, c, WIW2](1, XIX2)'
second statement.
261
Nf12
Map
On Elements
(xy)*: H*(Vt)-tH*(Vt) T*: H* (V2)-tH* (VI) T*: H*(V3)-tH*(V3) (xy)*: H*(V4)-tH*(V3) v'5)-tH* (TT5) v' (d2xy)*: H* (TT
h f-+ h + 7, T f-+ h,'\ f-+ ,\ h f-+ h, T f-+ A + T, A f-+ T h f--+ h, T f--+ h + T + A, A f--+ T h f--+ h, T f--+ T + h, A f--+ A + h h f--+T,Tf--+h+T,AHA+T
Now the stability conditions for elements to be in H*(W) H*(W') and H*(MI2) are easily written down. ' Theorem 3.16 a. E H*(H; F 2 ) is contained in the 'image ofres*: H*(W' IF )-tH*(H' IF )
c:
if and only if:es*(a) E H*(Vl)71/3,and also in H*(VS)Z/3,2 while the 'm~p above from H (V4 ) to H*(V3) stabilizes res*(a). b. a E res*(H*(W'; lF 2 )) if and only if res*(a) E H*(V3)z/3 and the map from H* (V2) to H* (VI) stabilizes a. c. a E. res* (l!* (M12 )) if and only if the conditions in both (a.) and (b.) are satzsjied, z. e., if and only if a E H* (W) n H* (W') c H* (H).
Example 3.17 1r* r(w)
+ c4 + e 4 + (ce)2 + 1r*tr(wI)2
restricts to the Dickson element d4 at each of the Vi. From this and the fact that d = S 2(d ) d = Sql(d 6 ) it follows that H*(M12; lF 2 ) contains a copy of IF 6[d d qd 1 4r ' f 7 t't t h * 2 4, 6, 7' n ac I urn~ out t at H (MI2 ; IF 2 ) is actually Cohen-Macaulay, that is to say, free and fimtely generated, over this subalgebra.
Example 3.18 V5 is weakly closed in H C M12 and , from 3 .14, the'Image 0 f
res*: H* (H; 1F2)---+H* (Vs; 1F2 )
262
263
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
is lF 2 [h, r, V4] inH*(Vs). From 3.15 the action of (d 2xy)* fixes V4 and acts on lF 2[h,r] in the same way 'lL/3 acts in III.1.3. Consequently, H*(Vs)71/3 = 1F2[h2 h, ,2, h2, h,2, d4](1, h 3 h2, + ,3) is the image of restriction from H*(M12; 1F2)' Thus, besides the copy of the Dickson algebra there is one two dimensional generator a and there are two three dimensional generators, Sql(a) and l3 in H*(MI2; lF2)' They are constructed as follows: a = (rr*tr(xl)2 +71"* r(x) + e2 +c2 + ec which restricts to (0,0, h 2, h 2, h 2 +rh+ r2) and l3 = c3 + e3 + 7l'*tr(xl)3 + (c + e)7I"* r(x) + e2 c which restricts to (0,0, h 3, h 3, h 3 + h 2r + r 3).
+ +
+
+
Poincare series in 3.20. This was a critical step in [AMM2], but here, using the weak closure conditions, it only serves the role of assuring us that we have made no numerical errors.
Given a situation such as that of H, W, and WI, we can find a universal completion = W *H WI which makes the diagram below commute,
r
Example 3.19 The map T-*(xy)*T*: H*(V2)--+H*(V2) is given on elements 1-1- h+)", r 1-1- h+)..+r, ).. ~ h, so 7I"*tr(xlw2) is stable for T* and is also 'lL/3 invariant in both H*(V2)' H*(Vl)' Consequently, since it restricts to 0 in the remaining groups it is inthe image from H*(MI2)' This gives us a third independent generator m3 E H3(MI2), and a generator Sq2(m3) E HS(MI2 ). by h
J
W
The remaining details of the determination of H* (M12; IF 2) are direct and simplified considerably by the weak closure conditions of 3.4 as 3.18 shows. We leave them to the reader and content ourselves with quoting the result from [AMM2].
and such that any r l which satisfies this (generated by Wand WI) is a quotient of is called the amalgamated product of Wand W' over H. It is well known, (see [8e3]), that an amalgamated product as above will act on a tree with finite isotropy, and orbit space of the form
r. r
Theorem 3.20 H*(MI2;lF2) has the form lFda2,X3,Y3,Z3,d4"s,d6,d7l/R
where the d i are described above and R is the relation set a(x + y + z) = 0 x 3 = a 3x + ad4x xy = a 3 + x 2 + y2 x 2 y = a 3z + ad4z + yd6 + ad7 d7x = d4x 2 + a 2 x 2 d7y = a 2d6 + a 2y2 + d4x 2 + d4y2 d7z =,2 + a 2d6 + a 2x 2 + d4x 2 + d4z 2 Z4 = ,d7 + x4 + a 4d4 + z 2d6
+ xd6 XZ = a 3 + y2 yz = a 3 + x 2 = a 2y y, = ay2 X, = a 4 + az 2 d? =z3, + a 2d4d6 + aSd4+ zd4d7 + zd 6 b + az)
a,
+ d~(a3
+ xz + yz).
The Poincare series for H*(MI2; lF 2 ) is
1 + t 2 + 3t 3 + t 4 + 3t 5 + 4t 6 + 2t 7 + 4t 8 + 3t g + tID (1 - t 4)(1 - t 6 )(1 - t7)
r
W e _ _ _H_ _--4IG WI
In [Go], Goldschmidt analyzed the situation for actions on the cubic tree (the tree of valence 3) and obtained a classification of finite primitive amalgams of index (3, 3) (this refers to the indexes [W: HJ, [WI: H]). He shows that M12 is one of 15 such amalgams, necessarily a quotient of the universal one
r.
From this we deduce the existence of an extension (4.1)
l--+rl--+r--+M12--+1
where r l is a free group (it has cohomological dimension 1). Using the formula for Euler characteristics in [Brown], we have, on the one hand
+ 3tll + t 12 + t 14
and H*(MI2; lF2 ) is Cohen-Macaulay over lF 2[d4, d6 , d7]. (Note that all the generators have been constructed in 3.17-3.19 but x, y and z are linear combinations of S ql (a ), l, and m and not these generators themselves. ) As a test the reader should calculate the Poincare series for H*(W; lF2 ) and H* (W'; JF 2 ). Applying the result of Webb's formula, 3.10, then gives the
(amalgamated product), and also
x(r) Hence X(r l ) = 95, 040( - 1~2) group on 496 generators.
x(r')
IM12 1'
= -495 and it follows that r l ~ *i 96 'lL, the free
264
4. Discussion of H+ (1\!ft2; IF 2) .
Chapter VlIl. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
We can now state
265
The method they use is to construct a projective ZG-complex P* of dimenrkG
Theorem 4.2 The natural map T-tNh2 induces an isomorphism
sion
2:
(ni - 1) (where the {ni} are the dimensions of the generators of a
i=l
polynomial subalgebra over which the cohomology is free and finitely gener-
Proof. Consider the map
res~ EB res~': H*(W) EB H*(W')--+H*(H) . Its kernel is clearly im(resj¥') n im(resj¥") ~ H*(M12)' On the other hand, (3.10) gives that H*(vV)EBH*(vV') ~ H*(Nh2)EBH*(H). Hence resj¥' EBresj¥" is onto. On the other hand, from the structure of the orbit space of the tree described at the beginning of this section there is a classifying space for W *H W' of the form Bw U B /l B w ', and, applying the Mayer-Vietoris sequence we have a long exact sequence
ated), having the chain homotopy type of C*
III sni
rkG (
-1
)
.
This is done by
using cohomological varieties [BC1]. Then they consider the spectral sequence
Let Vi E Hni -1 (P*) be the cohomology generators; by construction they transgress to Pi E Hni (G) and we have E~O ~ H*((P*)G) ~ H*(G)/(Pi)
and so if q(t)
=
P.S. H*(P*G), then
j TI
rkG
PG(t) = q(t)
As it comes from a Mayer-Vietoris sequence the same map as before arises, hence the sequence splits and H*(vV) EB H*(W') ~ H*(T) EB H*(H).
Consequently, by rank considerations and the fact that the finite subgroups in T are mapped isomorphically into M12 under the projections the proof is complete. 0 Corollary 4.3 Hl(r'; IF 2 ) is an M 12 -acyclic IF 2(M12 )-module of rank 496
which is not projective. Proof. The proof follows from considering the spectral sequence over IF2 associated to (4.4) below and the observation that 64 does not divide 496. 0 This representation has radically different cohomological behavior at distinct primes dividing IM121. For ex?-mple, at P = 3 we have a sequence
and clearly the term on the left must be non-trivial. It appears, however, that this module restricted to Ml1 ~ M12 is the same one associated to the poset space for NI l1 . To complete our discussion on M 12 , we will explain the nature of its Poincare series. Recall from 4.1 that H*(M12; IF 2) is Cohen-Macaulay over the Dickson algebra IF 2 [d 4 , d6 , d7 ]. For any finite group G with Cohen-Macaulay cohomology Carlson and Benson, [BC2], have shown that the Poincare series must satisfy a functional equation which in our case is
(1 - t ni ) .
(p*)G is the algebraic orbit co chain complex, and hence will also satisfy Poincare Duality, from which pc(t) satisfies (*). The construction of a geometric complex X satisfying this is more delicate, and obstructions certainly exist in the general case. For M12 the existence of such a complex can be proved, [M2], by considering, besides the map T-tM12 of 4.2, also a map T-tG 2 (IF 3 oo) constructed in [M2] as a consequence of the remark following (3.10). Taking plus constructions as described in Chapter IX, we obtain a fibering B'j:. ----+B~2(F300) and the fiber is a (2-local) finite complex with the correct Poincare series. On the other hand the (2-local) homotopy equivalence B'j:. -tBt12 gives the desired map on the fiber complex. We do not know if this fiber is a manifold or not though it is a (2-1ocal) finite dimensional Poincare duality complex. On the other hand, there is a closely related complex which is a manifold. We now elaborate on this. Let Y be the graph associated to the Tits Building of L3(IF2) first described in Chapter V. We recall that one associates a vertex to each proper subgroup in (IF 2)3 and an edge to any proper flag. This is a trivalent graph with a transitive L3(IF2)-action, having as orbit space the edge
.'-------. B=Dg
PI = 174
174 = P2
The Tits Building has the equivariant homotopy type of A 2 (L 3 (IF 2 )), and we have (4.4)
266
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
5. The Cohomology of Other Sporadic Simple Groups
where P = HI (Y, Z(2») is an 8-dimensional projective module, the so-called
267
In [M2], PE(t) was determined to be
Steinberg representation.
r
The above also arises by considering the amalgamated product = 174 * 174 . The graph Y is a quotient of the cubic tree under a free normal
PE(t) =
l+t 2 +3t3+2t4+4t5+5t6+4t7 +5t 8 +4t 9 +2t 10 +3t 11 +t 12 +t 14 (l-t 4 )( I_t 6 ) (l-t 7)
.
Ds
subgroup r' ~ r, with quotient L3(IF2)' As for M 12 , H*(r) ~ H*(L3(IF2))' We consider the non-split extension E:
The numerator represents the Poincare series of the manifold G 2 / E, and it clearly dominates our answer for PM12 (t), explaining the leading terms. As a corollary we obtain that the Poincare series for (H*(Q) ® St)L 3 (IF 2 ) is
(4.5)
t 4 + t 5 + t 6 + 2t 7 + t S + t 9 + t IO z(t) = (1 _ t4)(1 _ t6)(1 _ t7)
E is a group of order 1344 and it contains the subgroups W, W' which appear in M I2 ,. realized as (4.6) and Syl2(E)
1
--+
(Z/2)3
--+
W
1
--+
(Z/2)3
--+
W'
PI
--+ --+
--+
P2
--+
1
Algebraically, the denominator is explained by the action of the Dickson algebra
1
= Syl2(MI2), realized as 1 --+ (Z/2)3
Denote Q
= (Z/2)3,
G
--+
H
--+
Ds
--+
1.
= L 3 (IF 2 ) as before. Then
H*(E) ~ H*(HomE(F*,IF 2)) ~ H*(HomQ(F*,IF 2)G) ~ H*(G, HomQ(F*, IF 2 ))
where F* is a free resolution of Z over ZE. From this and Shapiro's formula, we deduce
5. The Cohomology of Other Sporadic Simple Groups The O'Nan Group Q'N The O'Nan group 0' N has order 460,815,505,920 = 29 34 5 73 11 19 31, and in [AM3] we determine the poset space IA 2 (0' N)I/O' N, obtaining the following picture:
H*(E) E9 H*(H) ~ H*(W) E9 H*(W')
E9 H*(G, HomQ(F*, IF 2 ) ® St) . Rearranging, we obtain Theorem 4.7
From this picture some easy cancellations give
The group E is the normalizer of a (Z/2)3 in the compact Lie group G 2 , which is a 14-dimensional manifold, with 5.1 ([Bo2]) Now E acts freely on G 2 and one can in fact show Theorem 4.8
H*(O'N)E9H*((Z/4)3 . .04 )
~ H*((Z/4)3 . GL 3 (IF 2 )) EEl H*(Z/4· SL 3(lF 4 )
XT
Z/2).
Our calculations show that the cohomology will be Cohen-Macaulay. Indeed, in this case the cohomology of SyI2(O' N) is already Cohen-Macaulay, but is not detected by restriction to elementary 2-groups. We refer to [AM3] for complete details.
268
The Mathieu Group
M22
The third Mathieu group 1''1£22 of order 443,520 of 5 22 generated by the three elements X
5. The Cohomology of Other Sporadic Simple Groups
Chapter VIII. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
= 27 32 5 7 11 is the subgroup
A
(1,21,6,7,19)(3,22,11,12,4)(5,18,20,15,8)(9,13,16, 10, 14)
k
(1,19,14,5,16,18,15,3)(2,12,20,9,13,7,17,10)(4, 22)(6, 21,11,8).
There is a sporadic geometry described in [RSY] for M22 which also satisfies the hypotheses necessary for Webb's Theorem to apply. The associated complex has the following form, where Vi = (71/2)i and: denotes semi-direct product:
We apply V.3.3 to this picture and, after some cancellation and arguments of the type described from (4.5) on in §4, we have
H*(lVh2) EB H*(Syl2(M22)) ~ H*(V4: 174) EB H*(V4: 17s)EB (H*(V3) Q9 Stl)GL 3 (1F'2) EB (H*(V4)
Q9
St 2 )A6
where the Steinberg modules are those associated to GL 3 (lF 2) and A6 respectively, thought of as alternating sums of the mod 2 homology of the poset spaces at p = 2. However, it turns out that this is not the best way of determining H*(M22) because determining the cohomology of the components on the right hand side of 5.2 is comparable in difficulty to determining H* (M22) directly. Instead we first determine H*(Syl2(}.;f22)) and use detection on elementary subgroups, as in our analysis of Nh2, to obtain enough information to understand the cohomology. There is one added complication here, though. It turns out that H* (S'yl2 (Nh2); IF 2) is not entirely detected by restriction elementary abelian 2-subgroups. A sylow subgroup of M22 is generated by the three elements k, m
5.3
H
B
H
D
/3 1 C
1
a Finally, Sy12(M22) is a split extension L XT (71/2), where the new generator e can be chosen so that e(a) = /3, e(/3) = a, and
e(A) e(B) e(C) e(D)
BCD, ABD, ACD, ABC.
Then the group F = (e, a/3, AD, BC). Another group which is basic in Sy12(M22) is the subgroup
V3: GL 3(lF 2)
5.2
is a split extension L = E XT (71/2)2. Let a, /3 generate the (71/2)2 then they satisfy a(A) = B, a(B) = A, a(C) = D, a(D) = C, while ,8(A) = C, ,8(C) = A, ,8(B) = D, ,8(D) = B.
(1,19, 7,9,12,11,15)(2,5,8,22,4,14,18)(6,17,21,20,10,16,13)
Y
269
(1,18)(2,12)(3,17)(5,20)(7,13)(9,15)(10,14)(16,19)
n = (1,16)(2,13)(6,21)(7,18)(8,11)(12,19)(14,20)(15,17).
The group structure of SyI2(M22) has been studied in detail by Janko, [Ja]. He shows that there are exactly two subgroups isomorphic to (71/2)4 contained in Sy I2(M22 ), E and F, with intersection V2 ~ ('£/2)2, and each is normal in Syl2(lVf22)' A specific description of Syl2(M22) can be given as follows. Let (A, B, C, D) = E, then Sy12(Nf22) has an index 2 normal subgroup, L, which
LL
=
(a, /3, ABCD) .
The normalizer of E in M22 is the semi-direct product EXT A6 and the normalizer of F is F XTSS. Finally, the remaining conjugacy class of extremal elementary 2-groups in M22 has LL as a representative, and the normalizer of LL in M22 is the split extension LL XT GL3(lF2)' All three groups E, F, and LL are weakly closed in Sy12(M22) C M 22 • Also, in [AMI], the ring H*(SyI2(M22)) is determined and the image of restriction to these three subgroups can be easily read off from the results there. Thus the Cardenas-Kuhn theorem determines the image of the restriction map from H* (M22 ) in the cohomology of each of these three groups. The image in H*(E) is H*(E)A6, the image in H*(F) is H*(F)S5, and the image in H*(LL) is lF 2 [d 4 , d6 , d7 ] n lF 2[(8 4 )2, D 2 , D3]. Here, if e, h, k are the one dimensional generators of H* (LL), then D2 = h2 + hk + k 2, D3 = h2k + hk 2 and 84 = e 4 + e2 d 2 + ed 3 . This intersection is not the full Dickson algebra but lF2[d~, d6 , d7 ](1, d4 d6 , d4 d7 ).
The algebra H* ((71/2)4; lF2)A6 has been discussed at the end of Chapter III, and is the ring lF 2 [W3, IS, dg, d 12 ](1, Ig, b1S , blS)
,g
,s,
,9
where W3 = SX;Xj, IS = Sq2(W3)' = Sq4 but the 55 invariant subring is more complex. It is determined in [AMI], [AM4J, and has the form
where Sq2(n6) = ns, Sq4(n6) = nlO, n12 n6 n S· Moreover, in the invariant subring
= n~, X12 = Sq4(ns) and X14 =
Sql(n6)
0,
Sql(ns)
iD3n6,
Sql(nlO) Sql (XI2) Sql(X14)
+ ,Sn6, iD3nlO + ,sns
where M is the image in H*(E) EB H*(F) EB H*(LL) described above does not split as rings even though it does split as JF 2-vector spaces. For example ,s(1),s(2) = a2 ds is one of the many cup products which are non-zero in H*(M22) even though they are zero in M.
iD3nS -
2
W3 n 6'
Consequently, Sql (iD3X12 + ,SnlO) = ,gn6' The exact structure of the elements XIS, X16, XIS and X24 are not known to us currently. In any case, the image of H*(M22; JF 2 ) in the direct sum
JF 2[a, b, c, dJA6 EB JF 2[a, b, c, d]S5 EB JF 2[a, b, cJGL 3 (2)
:vill now be completely determined by specifying the "multiple image classes", I.e., those classes which must have non-trivial images in two or more of the summands. It turns out that they are generated by (iD3, iD3, 0), (0, n6, d6 ), (0, nlO, d4 d6 ) together with t~e polynomial ring JF 2 [ds , d 12 J, where d s I---? (d s , ds, d~), d12 I---? (d12 , d12 , d6 ). In fact the above completely describes the multiple image classes when we note that (iD~, 0, 0), (/s, 0, 0) and (0,0, d7 ) are also in the restriction image. It is important to notice also that the multiple image property changes the Sql operation on the elements which restrict respectively to ~O, n6'ld6) and (0, ~1O, d4d6), so in H*(M22) we have Sql(n6) = (0,0, d7) whIle Sq (nlO) = (0, w3nS + ,Sn6, d 4d7). . In summary, we can describe the non-nilpotent part of H* (M22 ) as the dIrect sum H*(V4)A6 EB H*(W4)S5 EB d7JF 2[d 4, d6 , d7] where the two copies of JF 2 [ds , d I2 ](1, iD3) in the first two rings are identified. The. key technical step in this determination is to show that (b IS , 0, 0) is in the Image of the restriction map from H*(M22)' Finally, the radical, i.e., the interesection of the kernels of the three restriction maps above, is determined in [AM4] and shown to have the form
JF2[ds , d I2 ](a2, a7, all, a14)
:v
here the m?d (4) Bockst~in ,64(a2) = iD3, while some higher Bockstein of a7 IS ~S' and a hIgher Bockstem of all is d12 . There are further higher Bocksteins whICh we do not completely understand at this time but aside from that [AM4) gives a complete determination of H*(M22)' '
Rema~k. The c?homology ring structure of H*(M22) is given by specifying extens~o~ data III the radical. It turns out that this extension data is highly non-tnvial so the exact sequence
Remark 5.4 The sporadic groups M 23 and MC L have the same Sylow 2subgroup as M22 and each contains M22 as a subgroup. Thus the analysis above for M22 should apply to determine H*(M23) and H*(MCL) as well and we discuss H*(M23; JF 2) next. At this time, however, the details for MC L have not yet been sorted out. The Mathieu Group M
23
For M 23 there is the double coset decomposition ]\1123 = M22 U M22gM22' Here 9 satisfies the condition, gM22 g- I n lvf22 = M2I = L3(4). Moreover there is an element 9 E M 23 -lv122 so g3 = 1 and 9 normalizes Syl2(L3(4)), [Co]. Consequently, we can assume the second double coset is M 22 gM22 and () E H*(M22) lies in H*(M23) if and only if res*(()) E H*(SYb(L3(4)))g. Thus, the determination of the stable elements becomes quite straightforward. Indeed, both E and F remain non-conjugate in M 23 but their Weyl groups become A7 and ('!l13 X As): '!l12 ~ GL 2 (JF 4 ) xT'!l12 respectively, while LL remains extremal. H*(E; JF2)A7 is Cohen-Macaulay over the Dickson algebra JF 2[ds , d I2 , d 14 , dIS], is given at the end of Chapter III, and has Poincare series 1 + XIS + x 20 + x2I + X24 + X25 + x27 + x 4S (1 - xS)(l - x 12 )(1 - x I4 )(1 _X I5 ) In particular, the multiple image classes (d s , ds, d~), (d I2 , d 12 , d~) remain, but the class (iD3, iD3, 0) is no longer invariant. However, since (0,0, d7) is still present in the restriction image, it follows that (0, n6, d6 ) must still be in the image, and this accounts for all the multiple image classes. In particular, it is shown in [M5] that the Poincare series for H*(F; JF 2)G2(1F 4 )X T Z j 2 is p(x)lq(x) where q(x) = (1- xlO)(l - x12)(1 - xIS)(l _ x 24 ) and p( x) is a polynomial of degree 57 with terms of the form 1 + x 6 + 2x s + x 9
+ xll + 2XI2 + x I3 + 3X I4 + ...
This describes the image under restriction. The kernel of the restriction map is JF 2[ds , d I2 ](a7, all), and this gives a complete description of H*(M23; JF 2). In particular note that Hi(M23; JF 2) = for i ::;; 5, and H6(M23 ; JF 2) = JF 2 with restriction image (0, n6, d6). Using the fact that H*(S23; JF 2 ) is entirely detected on its 2-elementaries, we can study the restriction map
°
272
Chapter Vlll. Cohomology of Sporadic Simple Groups
in dimension 6, and it is not hard to see that it is non-trivial.
Chapter IX. The Plus Construction and Applications
Remark 5.5 The remaining Sylow p-subgroups of M 23 and their normalizers are given as follows, Syl3(M23) = ('!l/3)2 with Weyl group equal to the 2Sylow subgroup of GL2(IF3). The 5-Sylow subgroup is '!l/5 with Weyl group '!l14. The 7-Sylow subgroup is '!l17 with Weyl group '!l13, the Weyl group for '!l/ll is '!l15 and finally the Weyl group for Z/23 is Z/ll. In each case it is direct to calculate the invariants, and only in the case of Z/7 is the invariant subring less than 6-connected,
O. Preliminaries
So putting this together we have
This is the first finite group known for which this happens. Indeed, it had long been conjectured that if G is a finite group with Hi(G; Z) = 0 for i = 1,2,3 then G = {I}.
Let G be a finite group. As we have seen, the classifying space BG has a very simple homotopy type as it isa K(G, 1). If G is perfect then HI (G; Z) = 0; suppose that we attach cells to BG to obtain a new, but simply-connected complex BG+ with the same homology as before. Or equivalently so that the homotopy fiber of BG-'tBG+ is acyclic, i.e. Hi(F; Z) = 0 for all i > O. The new complex will depend on G (as BG does) but the higher homotopy groups 7l'i(BG+) can be highly complicated invariants of G. In this chapter we will describe a construction as above, due to Quillen, and known as the plus construction. In general, given a group G with a perfect normal subgroup N we obtain a homotopy fibration X(N)-'tBG-'tBG+ with 7l'1 (X(N)) ~ N, X(N) acyclic. The main application of this is to afford a definition of the higher K-groups. For example, if G = GL(IF q ) and N = E, the subgroup generated by elementary matrices, then 7l'i(BG+) ~ Ki(IFq) i 2: 1 by definition.
1. Definitions We recall some notions from homotopy theory. Definition 1.1 a. A space X is acyclic provided fI* (X; Z) = O. b. A map j: Xl -'tX2 between path connected spaces is acyclic provided the homotopy fiber Ff of j is an acyclic space. We note the following: if j:X I -'tX2 is acyclic, then f*:7l'I(X I )-'t7l'I(X2 ) is an epimorphism with kernel a perfect normal subgroup. We now provide a criterion for the acyclicity of a map. We follow the exposition given by Hausmann and Husemoller in [HH].
Proposition 1.2 Let
f: X 1 -'tX2 be a map of connected spaces. Then f is
acyclic if and only if, for any coefficient system L on X 21 the induced map
!*: H*(X 1; j*(L))~H*(X2; L)
is an isomorphism, where j*(L) denotes the mduced local coefficient system on Xl.
2. Classification and Construction of Acyclic l\1aps We begin this section by proving a proposition which allows us to compare
Proof Recall that a local ~oefficient system L on X 2 is a module over 7f1 (X 2 ) and H*(X2; L)
= H*(C*(X2 ) o
for the homotopy fibration F
'l.7r 1 (X 2 )
i
~ Xl
L). Now consider the spectral sequence
f
---+ X 2 with
E;,q = Hp(X2; Hq(F; i* f* L))
=?
Hp+q(X I ; f* L) .
~ow
k*!* L is trivial on F, hence the spectral sequence only has one line if f IS acyclIc, and so the edge homomorphism Hp(XI; j* L)----+Hp(X2; L)
induced by f is an isomorphism. Conversely, assume f* induces a homology isomorphism with any coefficent syst~m L. In .particular consider the coefficients L = Z7fI(X2). In this case the Isomorphls~ can be interpreted geometrically as follows. Take the free 7fl(X2) bundle X 2---+X2 and pull it back to Xl using f, i.e.
acyclic maps. Proposition 2.1 Let h: X ---+XI' and 12: X ---+X2 be maps between CW complexes so that h is acyclic. Then there exists a map h: X I ---+X2 with hh ~ 12 if and only if ker( 7r 1(h)) ~ ker(7rI(h)) and h is unique up to homotopy. If 12 is acyclic then h is acyclic, and h is a homotopy equivalence if and only ifker(7rI(fd) = ker( 7r 1(h))·
Proof. Clearly, if h exists then 7r1(h) = 7r1(h) . 7r1(h) so ker(7r 1(h)) ~ ker( 7r1 (h))· For the converse assume that
h
is a cofibration and form the pushout
diagram
i
l
----+
X2
Xl Ux X2
Then 7r1«h):7r1(X2)---+7rI(Xl Ux X2) = 7r1(Xl)
----+
Hp(X1; f*Z7r1 (X 2)) ~ Hp(X2; Z7r1 (X 2))
and being filtration preserving, induces an isomorphism of the abutments
i.
*
7r l(X)
7r1(X2) and if
ker( 7r1 (h)) ~ ker( 7rl (h))
f
Then 7f, 7ft are fibrations with fiber 7r1(X2). Comparing their respective spectral sequences, we see that f induces an isomorphism at the E2-level by hypothesis
-
H*(X3 ) ----+H*(X2) . To pr~ve 'acyclicity for f it suffices to prove it for j. From above we have that Ho(F) = 0. Now assume inductively that Hj(F) = 0, j < n. Consider the _spectral sequence E;,q = Hp(X2; Hq(F)) where F is the homotopy fiber of j. ~ook at EO,n; then, because the map from the total space to the base space IS ~ homology isomorphism, EO,n = 0 for r > n + 1. However it can only be hIt by n +l n +1 dn+l·. E n+l,O----+ E O,n , b_ut H n +1 (X 2 ) consists of permanent cocycles, so this is zero. We deduce that Hn(F) = and so, inductively, we have proved that F is.acyclic so f is an acyclIc map. ' D
°
----+
it follows that 7r1 «(P2) is an isomorphism. As (P2 is also acyclic (which may be verified using (1.2)), we see that (P2 must be a homotopy equivalence by Whitehead's theorem. Now assume X is a homotopy inverse for cP2 and let h = X . cP1; then h . h = XcP1 . h = X . cP2h ~ h· Clearly h is uniquely determined up to homotopy. If 12 is acyclic one can check that h must be D acyclic. The rest is clear. We are now ready to construct acyclic maps. Proposition 2.2 Let X be a path-c(mnected space and N a perfect normal subgroup of7r1(X), Then there exists an acyclic map j:X---+X+ with ker(f) = N. If X has the homotopy type of a CW -complex then so does X+ .
Proof. We divide the argument into two steps. (I) First assume 7r1 (X) = N is perfect. Let T1 be a wedge of circles indexed by a set of generators for Nand p: Tl---+X a map so that 7r1(P) is surjective. Now form the cofiber T X ---+X* of p, i.e. attach a 2-ce11 for each circle. Clearly 7r1(X*) = 1 and the homology exact sequence yields exactness for
276
3. Examples and Applications
Chapter IX. The Plus Construction and Applications
Now using the Hurewicz theorem we have that 71"2(X*) ~ H2(X*), Hence we can take a wedge T2 of 2-spheres and a map fL: T 2-+X* so that the composition H 2(T2)---tH2(X*)---tH l (T1 ) is an isomorphism. Next, let T2-+X*-+X+ be a cofibration; as before we have exact sequences q t2
~
4, q = 1
Jl.
0
I
11,·
0
---t
H 2(T2)
---t
I"· H2(X*)
l'
X
1
fo
---+
Xo
1
f
---+
xUxXo =x+
Once again, using (1.2), the fact that fo is an acyclic cofibration implies that X o) = 71"1(X)/71"1(X) ~ 71"1(X)/N as Xois SImply connected. Hence 71"1 (f) is an epimorphism with kernel N and the proof is complete. ' 0
! is also acyclic. Also, 71"1 (X Ux
The previous two results can be combined to prove the following classification theorem. . Theorem 2.3 Let X be a path-connected space with the homotopy type ola CW complex. The correspondence which assigns to an acyclic map f: X-+Y the subgroup ker71"1 (f) ~ 7r1 (X) induces a bijection
HI (T1 ) /~
(II) Nc:w let N ~ 71"1 (X) be a proper, perfect, normal subgroup, and denoted by g: X -+X the_ covering corresponding to N. Using (I) we construct an acyclic map fo: X -+Xo with X o simply connected. We now change it up to homotopy into a cofibration and for the pushout diagram
X
O---tH3(X*)---tH 3(X+) - - - t H 2(T2) ---+ H2(X*)---tH2(X+)---+O . Let f be the composition X -+X*-+X+; we claim it is a homology isomor:phism. This is clear in dimensions q ~ 4, or q = 1. In dimension 2 we have that fL*: H2(T2)-+H2(X*) is monic by the construction. It follows that H3(X*)-+H3(X+) is an isomorphism and so is H3(X)-+H3(X+), Now we have the following diagram with exact rows and columns:
277
r
---+
H2(X+)
---+0
H2(f)/
H 2(X)
I
equiv~lence classes Of} { acycl'lc maps on X
+-t
{set of normal, perfect} subgroups of 7r1 (X) .
The space X+ corresponding to a perfect normal subgroup N
0
which is (vertically) split by
H2(f)(X) =
0
t::
HI (Tl)-+H2(X*), Assume
==> r· s(x) = 0 ==> s(x) = fL*(W) ==> 0 = h*s(x) = thfL*(W) = v(w).
As v is an equivalence we conclude that s (x) = W = 0 and, as s is injective, x = 0 so H2 (f) is injective. Now let z E H2(X+), z = r(y), h*(y) =I O. Then h*(Y) = v(w) = th . fL*(W), and r(y - fL*(W)) = r(y) = z with th(X - fL*(W)) = 0, i.e. Y _ f-L* (w) E im( s). Hence H2 (f) is onto and we have shown that it is, in fact, an isomorphism. As X+ is simply connected every local coefficient system on it is trivial. Hence H * (f) is an isomorphism for for all coefficients and therefore f is acyclic with ker7rl (f) = 7rl (X) = N.
3. Examples and Applications The Infinite Symmetric Group
From work of Dyer and Lashof [DL] , there is an identification Q(SO)o ~ (nBC(SO))o' where C(SO) denotes the monoid iln>o BEn, using the inclusion En X Em "-7 En+m to give the multiplication. There is a natural map
BEoo---+Q(So)o , which induces an isomorphism in homology. Now 7rl(Q(SO)) ~ Zj2 ~ 7r1 (BEoo) / Aoo· Hence, taking the plus construction with respect to the maximal, normal, perfect subgroup Aoo we deduce that
BE! ~ Q(80)0 , i.e. 7ri(BE;t) ~ 7[}(SO), the ith stable homotopy group of the spheres. Now, if G y Eoo is a perfect group, we have a natural map BG+ ~BE+. In {3:'
00
particular we have for 7ri(BAt) ~7ri(BE~J that [H] l.·,6i is an isomorphism for 2 :S i < (n - 1)/3 or for 2 :S i < (n + 1)/2 and n == 2 mod (3). 2. When we invert 3, ,6i is an isomorphism for 2 :S i < (n + 1)/2 except if i = 3 and n = 6. 3. ,6i is an epimorphism with kernel isomorphic to 7l/3 if n = 3i or n = 3i+ 1.
both 7 and 13 are adopted to 3, while 11 is only adopted to 5 and 23 is only adopted to 11. It is well known that given q there is some p which is adopted to q. We have
Theorem 3.2 Let Pl and P2 be adapted to q) then the BGL(W pJt) i = 1,2) are homotopy equivalent) and each is a factor of Q(50). That is to say
Q(SO) ~ Vq x BGL(lFpJt. (The idea of the proof is to consider the injections
The General Linear Group Over a Finite Field Let IF q denote the field with q elements and take G = G L (IF q), N commutator subgroup. Then by definition
= E, the
the higher K-groups of lF q. Using the homology calculations we described for the general linear groups Quillen proved that, in fact, there is a homotopy equivalence BGL(lF q)+ ~ F¢q where F¢q is described as the homotopy fiber· of a map BU~BU. Precisely, let ¢q denote the element in [BU, BU] which represents the corresponding Adams operation in K -theory. Then F ¢q is the homotopy fiber corresponding to the operation 1 - ¢q: B U ~ BU. From this Quillen [Q3] calculated the higher Ii-groups of lFq as
Kn(lF q) ~
{71/(qi o
1)
n = 2~ - 1, n = 22.
This leads to information about Q(SO) and the stabl~ homotopy groups of spJ:ieres as follows. Since the homotopy groups of BGL(lF p)+ are all finite a standard theorem in homotopy theory tells us that, up to homotopy type we have a product decomposition
BGL(lFp)+ ~
II
BGL(lFp)t
I prime
where 7ri(BGL(lFp)t) = Syll(7ri(BGL(lFp)+). It turns out that various of these BGL(lFp)t are factors of Q(SO). In order to describe which ones we need a definition.
Definition 3.1 Given an odd prime q we say that p is adopted to q if p == 1 mod (q) but p i= 1 mod (q2). Note that p is adopted to only a finite number of primes since p adopted to q implies that p > q.For example 19 is not adopted to any prime but
where p is the inclusion as permutations of coordinates. From the determination in (VIl.4) of H* (G Ln (W p); Wq) we see that the cohomology calculation for the composition (p. reg)* is determined by restricting to the maximal torus. A direct calculation then shows that the map surjects through a range which increases with n. Consequently it is an isomorphism through that range and thus a homotopy equivalence through that range when restricted to the the q piece. It follows on passing to limits that Q(SO)q splits in the desired way.) Remark. This process does not work to obtain a splitting at 2. The relevant space here is BSO(Wp)t, for p == 3 mod (8), and the proof of splitting is quite a bit more complex.
The Binary Icosahedral Group Let G denote the binary icosahedral group. It is a group of order 120 which can be thought of as a double cover of A 5 . Classically it has been known to act 3 freely on S3 since it is a finite subgroup of the group 8U(2) ~ 8 which can also be thought of as the unit quaternions 8p(l) or 8pin(3). Indeed 1 thinking of it as 8pin(3) it double covers 80(3) and the conjugacy classes of finite subgroups of 80(3) are well known. In particular A 5 , the symmetry group of the icosahedron is a subgroup. Then the binary icosahedral group in 8pin(3) is the inverse image of A5 under the double covering map. We have that H 1 (A 5; Z) = 0 since A5 is simple. Also, we have _that H2(A5; Z) = 7l/2 so it has a unique maximal central extension Z/2~A5 ~A5 which is non-split. On the other hand it is not hard to show that the Sylow 2-subgoup of the binary icosahedral group is the quaternion group Qs, so the extension above describes G. In particular it follows that H 2 ( G; Z) = Hl (G; 7l) = O. Now, by construction G acts freely on the unit sphere 8 3 , since it is a subgroup. Consequently the quotient manifold S3/G = M3 has HI (M 3;7l) = Hl (G; 7l), H2(M3; 7l) = H2(G; 7l) and H3(M3; 7l) = 7l since the action preserves orientation and the quotient is a compact oriented manifold. Thus M3 is an example of a homology 3-sphere. It was originally discovered by Poincare
280
3. Examples and Applications
Chapter lX. The Flus Construction and Applications
and is known as the Poincare sphere. Taking a cellular decomposition of M3 and lifting to the universal cover 8 3 we obtain a G-free cellular decomposition of 8 3 which gives us an exact sequence ~
281
that multiplication by the integer 120 on the 2, 3, and 5 torsion of 7r*(S3) is trivial. Thus the homotopy groups of BG+ split into two copies of 7r*(S3)120 with a dimension shift. (We thank one of the referees for pointing this out to us.)
f
Z--+ C3(83)--+C2(83)--+C1(83)--+Co(83) --+ Z , where the Ci (8 3 ) are finitely generated free Z(G) modules. When we paste copies of this exact sequence together using fh . E we obtain a long exact resolution of Z over Z(G). From this (since the map I-h(8 3)-+H3(M3) is just multiplication by deg(G) = 120), it follows that
Hj(G;Z)
=
lVI
j
-+
otherwise.
BG and the induced map on plus BG
--+
1
f2(BG+) ::: Fiber(j) ::: F120 , where F 120 is the homotopy fiber of the map of degree 120 from 8 3 to itself. Thus we have an exact sequence 3 x 120
which is now a 2-local homotopy equivalence. On the other hand, from [FM], [M2], there is also a homomorphism W *H W'-+G 2(q) - which is injective on H and an isomorphism to Syl2(G2(q)) if q s::! 3,5 mod (8) - for any q ';p o mod (2), and these homomorphisms fit together to give a homomorphism W *H W'-+G 2(pOO). For p s::! 3,5 mod (8) this gives a map
1
F As the maps between the plus constructions induce homology isomorphisms and G acts trivially on H*(8 3 ; Z), we can apply the comparison theorem to conclude that X is a homology isomorphism. Since Hi(G; Z) = 0, i = 1,2, we see that BG+ is 2-connected, hence F is simply connected and X is a homotopy equivalence. Clearly M+ ::: 8 3 and it follows that
8
We have the map from the amalgamated product W *H W', to M12 given in VIII.4.1, which, from VIII.4.2 induces isomorphisms in mod (2) homology. Taking plus constructions gives us a map
j
o
Now consider the classifying map M3 constructions 3
M12
= 0, j == 3 mod (4),
Z { Z/(120) f
The Mathieu Group
3
8
--+7ri(F120)--+7ri(8 ) --+7ri(8 ) --+ 7ri-l(F120 )--+ ... It follows that there is an exact sequence
VII.7.6 shows that H*(B~2(pOO);lF2) s::! lF 2[d 4 ,d6 ,d7 ] and that
e;: IF 2[d4 , d6 , d7 ]-+H* (M12 ;lF 2 ) is an injection onto the same subalgebra in H*(M12; lF 2 ), (the subalgebra which restricts to the Dickson algebra in each of the three conjugacy classes of (Z/2)3,s). Consequently, when we pass to the homotopy fibration, the fiber at the prime 2 is 14 dimensional with Poincare series the numerator in the Poincare series for H*(M12; lF 2 ), 1 + t2
+ 3t3 + t 4 + 3t5 + 4t6 + 2t1 + 4t S + 3t 9 + t lO + 3tll + t 12 + t 14 •
. It would be very interesting to have a good geometric :realization of this fiber. In particular, if it were the homotopy type of a closed parallelizable manifold of dimension 14, this would be very useful.
0--+7ri(8 3) / (120· 7ri(83))--+7ri(BG+)--+7ri-l (8 h20--+ 0 3
for each i 2. 2, while 7r1(BG+) = O. Here 7ri(83)r20 denotes the subgroup of 7ri(8 3) consisting of elements whose order divides 120. This analysis is due to J.C. Hausmann [H]. In fact Hausmann has proved that if H is a perfect group with H 2(H; Z) = 0 then 7rn (BG+) for n 2. 5 is in one to one correspondence with the set of topological homology spheres with fundamental group H up to an appropriate notion of cobordism.
Remark. From the work of P. Selick, [Sel], F.R. Cohen, J.C. Moore, and J.A. Neisendorfer, [CMN], I.M. James, [Jam], and F.R. Cohen, [Coh], it follows
The Group J 1 There is also a close connection between Bt and B G2 . Here, if
with the action induced by regarding (Z/2)3 as the additive subgroup of the field ]Fs, then LJ c E c G 2 where E is the non-split extension 23 . L3(2) discussed in VII.7 (see VII.7.6 in particular).
If we could pass to plus constructions (with would be a 2-equivalence lij:
7rl
]\1[22
(B) equal to '!L/3) , there
1 1
B~/2)3XT(Z/7XTZ/3) ---?Bt
induced from the inclusion of the left hand subgroup as the normalizer of Syl2(J1) in J 1. Of course, since ('!L/2)2 xT '!L/7 is not perfect there are difficulties with this step, but what we can do is to kill the fundamental group by adding a two dimensional cell to kill the element of order three. A direct check shows that the resulting space has H 2(B(,1,/2)3 XT(Z/7XTZ/3) U e2;'!L) = '!L and this is the second homotopy group, so we can kill this '!L by adding a single three cell and we have a space with homology unchanged at 2 and 7, but the '!L/3 in dimension 1 is gone. The inclusion of (7L/2)3 XT (7L/7 XT '!L/3) into O 2 induces a map of classifying spaces eJ: B(Z/2)3 xT(zi7XTZ/3) ---+B02
Jvh3
"-------+
S22
5 23
"-------+
where the embedding given by the left hand vertical arrow is given in VIII.5. Since H* (Sn; IF 2) is determined by restriction to 2-elementaries, we can gain a great deal of information about the map on classifying spaces by restricting to the 2-elementaries E and F. Using the particular Sylow subgroup given in VIII.5.3 we find that E has four generators: (1,17)(3,18) (1,18)(3,17)
(2,15)(9,12) (2,12)(9,15)
(5, 19) (16,20) (5,20) (16, 19)
(7,10)(13,14) (7,13)(10,14)
together with (1,2)(3,9)(15,17)(12,18)
(5,10(7,19)(13,16)(14,20)
(1,16)(17,20(3,5)(18,19)(2,13)(7,12)(9,10)(14,15).
which injects H* (B02; ill' 2) as the Dickson algebra in
H* (B(Z/2)3 xT(Z/7XTZ/3); IF2)' Since B02 is three connected eJ lifts uniquely to a map of the space above with a two and a three cell added. Similarly, since J 1 is simple and the multiplier is {I}, [Co], so H 2(J1 ;'!L) = 0 we can lift 7rJ to the space with cells attached and this lifted map is an equivalence at the prime 2. Consequently, at 2 we can identify the two spaces and we have a map
eJ 0 7rJ"1: (BjJ2---+(Bo2h, and the fiber in this composition, at 2, and in cohomology looks like the fiber of eJ which is just the fourteen dimensional closed compact manifold O 2/ ((7L/2)3 XT ('!L/7 XT '!L/3)). This manifold, from VIII.2, has cohomology ring H*(Jl;IF2)/(d4,d6,d7) which is isomorphic to H*(02;IF2) as a module of the Steenrod algebra A(2). The lift of 7r J restricted to this fiber induces a surjection in cohomology which explains the numerator in the Poincare series for H* (J1 ; IF 2) given in VIII.2.1. Also, John Harper has shown that any simply connected OW complex with the mod (2) cohomology of O2 as a module over A(2) must, in fact be homotopic (at 2) to O 2. Thus, Bjl' at 2, fibers over B02 with fiber having the homotopy type of O 2 . This fibering is exotic, and we thank F. Cohen for describing it to us. The Mathieu Group
M23
The embedding M 23 C 5 23 given by letting it act as permutations on the 23 cosets of M22 is quite explicit. In particular, we have the commutative diagram
These last two elements generate the intersection V2 of E and F, and E is clearly contained in (K 2 '!L/2) ( '!L/2 where K c 54 is the Klein group. The group F is generated by the last two elements together with two others, where the elements can now be written as follows. (1,13)(2,16) (1,16)(2,13) (1,2)(13,16) (1,16)(2,13)
(6,11)(8,21) 6,21)(8,11)
(3,5)(9,10) (3,9)(5,10) (3,5) (9, 10)
(14,20)(15,17) (14,20)(15,17) (14,20)(15,17) (14,15)(17,20)
(7,18)(12,19) (7,19)(12,18) (18,19)(7,12)
and we see that F c 1< x K x K x K x K. From the results of VI.l, VI.2, we see that the symmetric sum Sd 3 ® d3 ® 1 0 1 0 1 in H*( K 5;IF 2) is in the image of restriction from H* (522 ; IF2), and it is a direct calculation to check that the image of this class under the map H*(K 5 ; IF 2)-tH*(F; IF 2 ) described above is non-zero. Consequently, using the splitting of 3.2 and the following remark, we can project Bt23 to V2 = coker( J), which, from our knowledge of the stable homotopy of spheres, we know is 5-connected with 7r6(coker(J)) = '!L/2, and it must be the case that the induced map 7r6(Bt23)-+7r6(coker(J)) is an isomorphism.
4. The Kan-Thurston Theorem From the results outlined in the previous section we can deduce that there are certain interesting topological spaces which have the homology of a K ( 7r, 1). Among them are [200 2)00, FlJr q , and certain spaces of homeomorphisms we have not discussed. This very naturally leads to the question of whether or not this is true for a large class of spaces.
284
4. The Kan-Thurston Theorem
Chapter IX. The Plus Construction and Applications
This was settled in the affirmative by Kan and Thurston [KT]; in fact they proved that every path connected space has the homology of a K(7r, 1). In this section we will outline a proof of their result (due to Maunder [MauD, which can be stated more precisely as follows: Theorem 4.1 For every path-connected space X with basepoint there exists a space TX) and a map tX TX ----"7 X
which is natural with respect to X and has the following properties: 1. the map tX induces an isomorphism on (singular) homology and cohomology H*(X,A) ~ H*(TX,A) for every local coefficient system A on X) 7ri (T X) is trivial for i =I- 1 and 7r1 tX is onto) 3. the homotopy type of X is completely determined by the pair of groups G x = 7r1TX) and Px = ker7r l tX (note Px C Gx perfect). In fact) we have that X -::::= J( (G x, 1) +) where the plus construction is taken with respect to Px·
2.
To prove this result, we will need (given any group G) to construct an acyclic group CG into which the original group embeds. To do this we will use ideas due to Baumslag, Dyer and Heller [BDH]. First we need Definition 4.2 A supergroup !vI of a group B is called a mitosis of B if there exist elements s, d in M such that 1. Ai = (B, s, d) 2. bd = bb s for all b E B, and t 3. [b t , bS ] = 1 for all b, b E B. Definition 4.3 A group M is mitotic if it contains a mitosis of everyone of its finitely generated subgroups.' Our goal will be to show that every mitotic group is acyclic, and that every group embeds in a mitotic group. We introduce some notation. Let t K,: B x B --+ M be the homomorphism K,(b , b) = b'bS and )..: B --+ B x B defined by /\(b) = (b, 1). Then if J-L: B -+ M is the injection, clearly J-L = K,)... Lemma 4.4 Let ¢: A --+ B be a homomorphism) !vI a mitosis of B) and J-L: B -+ M the given injection. Let IF be any field such that, ¢*: Hi (A, IF) --+ Hi(B, IF) is 0 for i = 1,2, ... , n - 1. Then (jJ,¢)*: Hi(A, IF) -+ Hi(M, IF) is 0 for i = 1,2, ... ,n.
285
Proof. Clearly we only need to verify the claim for i = n. By the Kunneth formula, ' Hn(B x B, IF) ~ Hi(B,lF) 0 Hj(B,lF) .
L
i+j=n Now let N: A --+ A x A, N(a) = (a,l) and p': A -+ A x A, p'(a) Then we have that Wp = /'i,(¢ x ¢)N, hence if a E Hn(A, IF),
= (1, a). , (a)
We also have that CdJ-L¢ = /'i,(¢ x ¢)L1A, where Cd is conjugation by d. Using the fact that inner automorphisms are trivial in homology, we obtain
(J-L¢)*(a) Similarly, csf-L¢
= /'i,(¢ x
=
/'i,*(¢*a 01)
+ /'i,*(1 0
¢*a).
(b)
¢)p' and hence (f-L¢)*(a)
=
/'i,*(1 0 ¢*a).
Combining (a), (b) and (c) yields (f-L¢)*a = 0, proving the lemma.
(C)
o
We now prove Theorem 4.5 Mitotic groups are acyclic.
Proof. Assume that G is mitotic. If KeG is a finitely generated subgroup, then K = Ko C KI C K2 C ... c G, where each injection Ki C Ki+l is a mitosis. Now note that given any mitosis B --+ M, the induced map H 1 (B, Z) -+ HI(M, Z) is zero. Hence we obtain, using (4.4), that Hi(K,F)-+ Hi(Kn , F) is zero for any field F, and i = 1, ... , n - 1. From this we deduce that Hi(K,lF) --+ Hi(G,lF) is zero for all i > O. Now G is the directed coli mit of its finitely generated subgroups, and the colimit of their inclusion maps is the identity Ie. Homology commutes with directed co limits , from which we deduce that Hi(G,F) = 0 for any field, i > 0 and hence G is acyclic. 0 We introduce the notion of algebraically closed groups. Definition 4.6 A group G is said to be algebraically closed if every finite set of equations
in the variables Xl, ... ,X m and constants g1, ... ,gn E G which has a solution in some supergroup of G, already has a solution in G. Theorem 4.7 Algebraically closed groups are mitotic.
Proof. Suppose that G is algebraically closed and denote A = (g1,"" gn) a finitely generated subgroup of G. Let D = G x G and let G = G x I ,
H = Ll(G), K = 1 x G be the corresponding copies of G embedded in D. We construct the extensions 1
E = (D, t; t- (g, l)t = (g,g), g E G) m(G)
Then G embeds as
= (E,u;u-l(g, l)u = (l,g),
G in m( G),
9 E G) .
and the finitely many equations
g~i(gigf2)-1
=
1, [gi,gj2]
isomorphisms of homology and cohomology for any coefficient system. Now note that
f TL K(C1f' 1) · I' an d so t h e Inc uSlOns 0 , " of 1f'l-hence TK (the universal cover) universal covers of all three. Using a implies TK is acyclic, hence that T K
=1
with i,j = 1, ... , n have a solution Xl = t,X2 = u in m(G). Thus they have a solution Xl = d, X2 = s in G itself. As a consequence of this the group (A, d, s) is a mitosis of A in G, and so G is mitotic. D Using the fact that any infinite group embeds in an algebraically closed group of the same cardinality, we obtain Theorem 4.8 Every infinite group can be embedded in an acyclic group of the· same cardinality.
T(f)(J) in T J( induce monomorphisms . contains multip.le cOP.ies of the acycl~c lifted Mayer-Vlaetons sequence, thIS is aspherical. Also note that as
1f'l(K) = 1f'1(L)
*7\1(80-)
1f'I(o-) ,
the map t*: 1f'l(TK) -r 1f'1(J() is onto. ' . . Using induction on N, one can construct T J( for all fi~lt: (order ed) SImplicial complexes K. This can be extended to infinite simplICIal complexes by taking the direct limit over finite subcomplexes. 'f X is a path-connected space, let SX be its singular complex, N ISXI ~~ ~eometric realization. Denote by ISXI" the secon~1 deriv:d c?mplex (considered as a i1-set). Then we can take TX = T(ISXI ). T~lS WIll be a natural construction satisfying the desired properties, as a contmuous n~ap of X gives rise to a simplicial map of ISXI" that is strictly order-preservmg on each simplex. Then tX is the map
We have therefore proved that given any group G there exists a group CG containing G such that CG is acyclic. We will now give the proof of Theorem 4.1, following Maunder. Proof The first step is to prove the existence of T X satisfying (i) and (ii) when X = L, a connected simplicial complex with ordered vertices. We proceed inductively: suppose that for each such L with at most N -1 simplexes, t: T L -r L has been constructed satisfying (i) and (ii) and that this construction isnatural for simplicial maps of L that are strictly orderpreserving on each simplex. Assume also that, for each connected subcomplex MeL, TM = t- l M, ~nd that 1f'l(TM) -r 1f'l(TL) is 1-1. Note that because every connected 1-dimensional complex is a K(1f', 1), we may start the induction by taking t to be the identity. Let K be obtained from L by attaching an n-simplex (n ~ 2) 0- to 80- C L. Then T(8o-) C T(L) and if j: 0- -r Lln is the (unique) order-preserving simplicial homeomorphism to the standard n-simplex, the corresponding map Tj:T(8o-) -r T(8Lln) is a homeomorphism, and T(8Lln) is a K(1f', 1). Now let g: T(8Lln) -r K(C1f', l) be a map realizing the embedding 1f' ~ C1f', C1f' acyclic. We take the mapping cylinder of the composition gT(f): T(8o-) -r K(C1f'; 1), and attach it to T(L) along T(8o-) C TL; this will be TK. To extend t to T K -r K, .we do it as usual on mapping cylinder coordinates (x, t) and by mapping K(C1f', 1) to the barycenter fj of 0-. The construction can be verified to be natural for simplicial maps that are strictly order-preserving on each simplex. Using the Mayer-Vietoris sequences for K, T K and the 5-1emma, it follows that t: T K -r K induces
1f'l(TI<) ~ 1f'l(TL) *7\ C1f'
TX = T(ISXI")
-r
ISXI" ~ ISXI ~ X
Part (iii) follows from (i) and (ii) and the results in §l.
o
One can in fact prove that if K is a finite connected simplicial R emark . d' . J( (see complex, T K may be taken to be finite and of the same ImenSlon as [Mau]).
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
O. Introduction In this final chapter we apply the techniques of group cohomology to the representation theory of finite groups. Given G a finite group we know ,that IF( G) is semi-simple for any field of characteristic zero. Consequently, from the Wedderburn theorems there is a decomposition (0.1) where the Di run over central simple division algebras with center lKi a finite cyclotomic extension of IF. The question that we answer here is the determination of all the classes {Di} E B(lF) which arise in this way, that is to say, which division algebras occur in the simple components of the group ring of a finite group. When G is a finite group all the centers, Z(D i ), in the semi-simple expansion of IF(G) are cyclotomic extensions of IF, i.e., subfields of IF((m) , and m divides the order of G. Indeed, if lK = Q((/G/), then lK(G) is a direct sum of matrix algebras over lK. Conversely, if a sufficient number of roots of unity are not present, then JK( G) cannot split in this fashion, since it is already not going to be true for the cyclic subgroups of G. For this reason, when studying the division algebras which occur in (0.1), it is sufficient to assume that the field IF is cyclotomic. The division algebras which we discuss from here on are all assumed to be of finite dimension over their centers. The content of this chapter is unpublished work of Milgram in the mid 1970's. The question of identifying the possible division algebras which arise in (0.1) was first raised by Fields and discussed in his joint paper with 1. N. Herstein, [FH]. Later, M. Benard, [Br], Benard and M. Schacher, [BeS], and especially G. Janusz, [J], and T. Yamada, [YJ, did important work on the question. From our point of view the question becomes the determination of explicit maps of cohomology groups with twisted coefficients under restriction and change of coefficients. Hence we feel it is a suitable example with which to conclude this book.
............... .....-r ...........
~
-_.
--_ ..................... _--- - _ · · v
-
' ...
1. The Brauer Groups of Complete Local Fields
Valuations and Completions Definition 1.1 A non-archimedean valuation·· on a division algebra D is a map cp: JF ~lR+ where lR+ is the non-negative real numbers satisfying the following three conditions.
(1) cp(a) = 0 if and only if a = O. (2) cp(ab) = cp(a)cp(b). (3) cp(a + b) ~ Max(cp(a) , cp(b)).
The valuation ring Orp C D is the subset of D consisting of <111 those a E D with cp(a) ~ 1. That Orp is, in fact, a sub ring follows from conditions (2) and (3) in the definition, the first showing that it is closed u~der pro~ucts,. and the second showing that it is closed under sums. There IS a maXImal Ideal P C 0 defined as those a E D with cp(a) < 1. Thus, in the case of cpp, . 'm Q of t he form p a: w WI'th W as werp have rpthat Orp consists of those fractlOns above ,a> 0 and P rp consists of those fractions with a > O. In the case . where D is a field, IF, the quotient Orp/Prp = IFrp is a field, called the res~due class field oj the pair (IF,
valuation ring and Prp be the maximal ideal, then the quotient Orp/Prp is a division algebra.
A non-archimedean valuation trivially satisfies the triangle inequality. The valuation is discrete if the value group {cp( a) I a E JF, a i= O} is an infinite cyclic group. We also assume there is some a E JF with cp( a) i= to avoid trivial cases.
Proof. If a E Orp - Prp then
Example. The standard example is the p-adic valuation on the rationals. Let nlm = pO:w with a E Z and w = ;::, where both m' and n' are prime to p. Then cpp(nlm) = pO:. We will discuss examples of valuations on non-
Definition. Let
°
I
commutative division algebras later.
Example. Let V be a Dedekind domain (an integral domain in which every ideal is uniquely a product of prime ideals), and P c V a prime ideal. Let Q(V) be the quot~ent field, and suppose that min E Q(V). Then, if (m) = TI Pt, (n) = TI p~k we have
where B is a product of powers of primes distinct from P. Then the P-adic valuation on Q(V) is given by cpp(mln) = eO: for some 0 < e < 1. In the case where VIP. is a finite field, e is usually taken to be 1/IV/PI. The valuation cp gives rise to a topology on D by defining a basis for the open neighborhoods of 0 as the inverse images N€(O) = cp-I((O, E)), and a basic set of open neighborhoods of a are given as a+N€(O). Two valuations are equivalent if and only if they give rise to the same topology on D. Thus setting c/Jp,a(n/m) = aO: for 0 < a < 1 and a(n/m) as above, gives an equivalent valuation.
Recall that the completion adds equivalence classes of Cauchy sequences to D and a Cauchy sequence is a sequence of elements of D so that for every € > there is an N(t) E Nand
N(t). It is direct to check that Drp is again a division algebra and
0
valuation on
Drp.
Remark 1.4 If al,' .. ,ai,' .. are a complete set of representatives for the co sets of Prp cOrp, with al = 0 representing the O-coset, a2 = 1 representing the coset of 1, then every element in the completion can be represented by a unique power series where 1f E Prp is any element which satisfies the condition ~(1f) 2':
Example. The ring Zp- For the valuation
Remark 1.2 Two valuations cp and cp' are equivalent if and only if there is an e E ~+ so that cp'(d) = cp(d)e for all d E D. See e.g., [P]' p. 321.
a=
LUipi i=O
where 0
~
Ui < p.
292
1. The Brauer Groups of Complete Local Fields
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
Definitio? ~ discrete non-archimedean valuation on D is called finite if the quotient Op/Pp = Dcp is finite.
293
The Brauer Groups of Complete Fields with Finite Valuations If D C D' is an extension of D to a division algebra D' with D' finite
If l[ is a finite extension of Q and rp is any non-archimedean valuation on l[ induced from a prime ideal of the ring of integers OlK then the valuation is finite.
dimensional over the center of D, then rp extends uniquely to a function rp' on D' satisfying (1.1.1) and (1.1.2). Let JF be the center of D and l[ be the center of D'. Then JF c l[ is a finite extension. Define m = r s where r2 = dimlK(D') and s = dimJF{lK). Then the formula is
rp'(a) = rp(NlK/lF(rp(a)))l/m
Remark 1.5
z:
1. Let p be an odd prime. Then rQ; ~ Z x x (Z/(p - 1)), where the Z is !?ienerated by the elements pi, i E Z, the copy of the additive completion Z: is identified with the units with leading term ao = 1, and the (p _l)st roots of unity represent the units with leading terms =f=. 1.
zt
2. Let p = 2. Then rQ 2 ~ Z x x Z/2 where the Z and but Z/2 consists of the elements ±1.
zt are as above,
3. Let 0 be the ring of integers in a degree n extension, l[ of Q, and suppose P is a prime ideal of 0 lying over the prime (p) C Z, then
OCp = Z x
(ztY
L
x Z/pi x Z/(pT - 1) .
Here the copy of Z is generated by a uniformizing parameter, and the residue class field is IF pr. There are three key techniques used to verify (1.5.1)-(1.5.3). The first is Hensel's lemma, which allows us to lift the roots of unity in the residue class field to roots of unity in OC p by successive approximation. The second is the exponential map exp: 7ri6p~6.p defined by the power series 00
n
L .;, n.
exp( a) = 1 +
1
which maps a suitable power of the the maximal ideal in the (additive) valuation ring into the (multiplicative) units in the valuation ring. The third is the logarithm map which maps the units of the form 1 + 7r 16 p into the (additive) valuation ring,
bn
L -n . 00
log(1 - b) =
1
For details see for example [CF] or [La2].
where N lK / F is the norm map and rp: D' ~l[ is the reduced norm on IJ'. Clearly rp' satisfies rp'(ab) = rp'(a)rp'(b) and rp'(a) = 0 if and only if a = O. Moreover, for d E IF we have rp(d) = dr, NlK/JF(d) = d S Hence, rp'(d) = rp(d) by the uniqueness of mth roots in lR.+. The uniqueness of this extension is considerably more subtle. For details, see e.g., [P]' pp. 305 - 330, especially p.329. In general the extension above does not satisfy condition (1.1.3), and so, is not a valuation on D'. However, here is one case in which it does.
Theorem 1.6 Let D be a central simple divison algebra with center a field IF, complete with respect to a valuation rp. Suppose, also that IIF cp I is finite. Then the extension of rp to D described above is a valuation on V. (This is a special case of the lemma on page 329 of [Pl. See also Proposition 1 on page 182 of [Se4].)
Corollary 1.7 Let D satisfy the conditions of (1.6). Then 1. Ocp/Pcp is a finite field, an extension of IFcp of degree n where n 2 dimJF(D). 2. There is a maximal field l[ = IF((pnr_l) cD where IOcp(IF)/PI = pro
Proof. Let 7rD E Pcp be a uniformizing parameter. Let 7rJF be a uniformizing parameter for IF. Then there is an e 2: 1 so that rp(7rD)e = rp(7rJF).,Thus 7rJFOcp = 7r DOcp. But 7rJFOcp ~ {Ocp(IF)/(7r)}n2, while we have an alternate calculation of 10 cp / (7rD ) I = 10cp / (7r D) Ie from the form of the power series expansion in (1.4). Hence we have IOcp/PI = IOcp(IF)/'Pln2 Ie. The next step is to choose an element kED so that the image of k in Ocp/'Pcp is a multiplicative generator. Since kP' - l = 1 mod 'Pcp where s = rn 2 /e, we can use Hensel's lemma to replace k by an element, k' E D, for which (k,)pS-l = 1. If we use this root of unity k' we find that l[ = IF((p~-l) C D. Hence e 2: n, since dimlF(l[) = s ::; n. On the other hand JF(1l'cp) is an extension of IF of degree at least e, so e ::; n. It follows that e = n. 0 Corollary 1.8 Let D satisfy the conditions of (1.5), and 1K be the field of (1.7.2). Then Gal(lK/IF) = Z/n. Moreover, let g be the "Frobenius" generator
of Gal(IK/W), ( t---+ (pr, then there is an element 7r E D with 7rk7r- 1 = g[k] for all k E IK. Also gn = 7r~ where (t, n) = 1 and 7rlF E IF is a uniJormizing
Proof. There is a short exact sequence in cohomology
parameter for IF. t is well defined and depends only on D.
Proof. For the most part this follows from the Noether-Skolem theorem. The rest follows from (1.7). 0
In particular tin is a well defined invariant of D in Q/7L By construction, it follows that every division algebra D over a complete field IF with finite IF <.p is cyclic, of the form A(IK, g, 7rt) , with IK as above. Indeed, it is easily checked, using the Noether-Skolem theoremthat tin is independent of the explicit maximal subfield W((prn_d = lK C D which is selected. The following result is standard and summarizes the most important facts about simple algebras over a field JF as above. Theorem 1.9 Let IF be a finite extension of Qp. 1. An algebra of the form A(lK, g, 7r t ), as above, is a division algebra precisely when t ~ u mod dimlF(lK) where u is a unit. 2. If(t,n) = s > 1 thenA(lK,g,7r t ) = Ms(D) where D is the division algebra A(lK',g,tls) and dimlF(lK') = nls. 3. The Brauer group B(W) ~ Q/Z = lim H2(Zln; IF((prn_lt). nl--+oo
The following result is a special case of Proposition 7 on page 193 of [Se4]. Proposition 1.10 Let 1F be a finite extension of Qp, and suppose that lK is a degree n extension oflF. Then, in the identification of B(lF) and B(lK) with Q/Z in (1.9), the following diagram commutes B(i)
E(lF)
~
1~
E(lK)
1~ n
Q/Z
~
Z/Z
where E (i) is the map of Brauer groups induced by A
t---+
A 0lF IK .
Corollary 1.11 Suppose IF is as in (l.10) and suppose lK is ramified oj degree n over iF and has Gal(lK/lF) = 'LIn with n prime to p. Suppose also that a primitive nth root of unity, (n is contained in IF. Then the algebras A(1K., T, (~),' 0 < i < n, are central simple W-algebras and generate the kernel of.H(i):E(lF)~E(1K.).
and it suffices to check that the generators of H 2 (7Lln; lKO) are the maps (e2 t---+ (i) for the resolution of 7L(7Lln) given in (II.3.S). But o2:lK°---+lKo is B t---+ T(e)/B where T generates Zln, so all co cycles are the elments in lFo. Likewise, the coboundary map is e t---+ N(e). So it suffices to observe that the (~ are not in the image of the norm. To see this consider the induced norm on OociPoc. Since the extension is totally ramified, we have OlF I PlF
= Ooc I Poc
and the map induced by the norm is just x
t---+
xn. (1.11) follows.
0
2. The Brauer Group and the Schur Subgroup for Finite Extensions of Q The Brauer Group of a Finite Extension of Q Let IF be a finite extension of Q. Then OlF, the ring of integers in IF is the set of all elements in IF which are roots of a non-trivial monic polynomial with integer entries. It is a Dedekind ring. Let P be a prime ideal of OlF· Then there is a unique prime ideal of Z, (p), so that OlF n 7L = (p), and P is said to lie over (p) or be an extension of (p). More generally, if we have Q C LeW, then OL n P is a unique prime ideal, PL, in OL and P is an extension of PL and lies over it. Likewise, given any prime ideal PL there is at least one prime ideal of OlF lying over it. Example 2.1 Let IF = Q( (n) and let (p) be a prime of Z. This extension has dimension ¢(n) where ¢(n) is the Euler ¢-function. Suppose that (p, n) = 1. Then there is a finite extension of the finite field IF p which contains a primitive nth root of unity. The smallest such field has order pT where r is the smallest positive integer so that pT ~ 1 mod (n). Then r divides ¢( n) and the number of distinct primes lying over (p) is ¢( n) I r. These primes are obtained as follows. The Galois group Zir of lFpr over lFp acts on the primitive nth roots of unity to break them into ¢(n)lr orbits, each of length r. Consider the polynomial Pi(X) = TIlT (x - Aj ) where'Aj runs over t he '/,th , orbit. This polynomial has coefficients in IF p and hence lifts to a polynomial Pi (x) E Z [x]. Then the prime ideals have the form (p, P'i ((n) ), for a fixed primitive nth root (n' In particular, consider the primes over (2) in 0Q(7)' Since IFs contains six primitive seventh roots of unity, they split into two orbits there {(7, (1, (i}
296
2. The Brauer Group and the Schur Subgroup for Finite Extensions of Q
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
and {a, (~, (~}, and the two polynomials are x 3 ideals are (2, + (7 + 1), (2, (~ + (? + 1).
a
+ x + 1, x 3 + x 2 + 1, so the
For each prime P C OIF there is a valuation tpp, the associated completion of IF at the valuation, IF p, and the inclusion ip: IF c IF p. This inclusion induces a map of Brauer groups B(lF)---'B(IFp) obtained on the one hand by tensoring A f-----t A0IF IF p, and on the other via coefficient mappings of second cohomology groups. Also, for IF as above there are k embeddings of IF into C and r embeddings of IF into IR, where 2k + r = n, the dimension of IF over Q. The Brauer group of C is 0, but the Brauer group ()f IR is Z/2 with generator lHI, the quaternions. Consequently, the r real embeddings, ei, give r homomorphisms, ei,*: B (IF) ---.Z/2. Taken together we get a homomorphism r
E: B(lF)-+
11 B(lR) EB 11 B(IFp)
297
On the other hand, by class field theory, every abelian extension of finite extensions of Q or Qp is cyclotomic. Thus, for the field lK above, we have that lK
c
IF cyd
=
lim (IF( (n)) , nf-+(X)
and limn H2(Gal(lF((n)/lF); IF((n)·)-+H2(lF) = B(lF) must be surjective. In fact, this map is actually an isomorphism (see e.g., [8e4]). Thus, for these fields the Brauer group is given strictly in terms of cyclotomic extensions. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
Let G be a finite group, then the group ring IF( G) is semi-simple for any IF of characteristic zero, or if char(lF) is prime to the order of G. Hence we can write
r
IIZ/2 EB II Q/Z .
p
p
(A priori, one would have expected that the image of E was in the direct product over all P, but, in fact, a major theorem here asserts that the image of a central simple IF-division algebra is non-trivial at only a finite number of primes.) The main result here, and one of the main results of class field theory is that E is an injection with cokernel a single copy of Q/Z. Indeed, B(lF) can be identified with the kernel of the sum homomorphism
where IF is a subfield of finite index in the center Z(D i ), and Di is a division algebra of finite dimension over the field Z(Di). Of course, when IlFl < 00, the division algebra Di must be a finite field, and the group ring is a sum of matrix algebras over fields. However, when IF has characteristic zero the structure of the resulting division algebras, D i , can be quite complex. Example 2.4 Consider the split extension Z/7 x T Zig, where the action of Z/g is given by g(t) = t 2 , t E Z/7, where 9 generates the Zig. Then there is a cyclic algebra direct summand,
r
II Z/2 EB IIp Q/Z-+Q/Z, 1
Example 2.2 In the case IF = Q and D is the usual quaternion algebra
Q(Q(i),g,g2 = -1) , where 9 acts on Q(i) as conjugation, then D has image 1/2 at the single real embedding, and image 1/2 in B(Q~). For general fields the determination of the Brauer group is much more complex. There are a number of special circumstances in the case of finite extensions of Q which make things simpler. We now quote some of these properties. Theorem 2.3 Let F be a finite extension of Q or QPJ and suppose that A is a central simple IF -algebra of dimension 71,2 over IF. Then there is a cyclic extension IK of F of degree 71" and, if T is a generator for Gal(lK/lF) = Z/n we have that A is the cyclic algebra A(lK, T, Tn = .:\) for some .:\ E IF·.
A(Q((2d,g,g3
= (3)
c Q(G) ,
where g[(21] = 0: 16 . Thus, g[(;l] = aI' while g[(~l] = (~I' so the center is IF = Q((3, ~). We now verify that this algebra has order 3 in the Brauer group of IF . We work at the prime (7). There are two primes over (7) in the ring of integers, O(lF), PI = (~, ( - 2) and P2 = (~, (2 - 2), over (7), each ramified of degree 2 over (7) C Z and each with quotient isomorphic to lF 7. Moreover, in O(Q((21)) there is a unique prime over each of these Pi, each ramified of degree 3. In particular, each quotient by each of the primes above is a copy oflF7. Choose one of these primes, say PI = P, and complete at it. Then the completion of Q( (2r) at the prime over P is still ramified of degree 3, and is Galois over IFp with Galois group Z/3. Then (1.11) applies and the algebra is a division algebra at each prime, with invariants 1/3 and 2/3 respectively. Definition 2.5 Let IF have characteristic zero. Then the subset of the Brauer
group of IF, B(lF), which consists of division algebras which occur as Di in the expansion, (0.1), with center IF, as G runs over all finite groups, is called the Schur subgroup of B(lF). It is denoted S(lF).
Vllap\J~:a
J~.
~.1.Lv
U\,...o..l..I.LLL
~'-A."""o-""'-r
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ....
Remark 2.6 In particular, the terminology implies that S(JF) is a subgroup of B(IF). Indeed, if Mni (D1) is a summand of IF( G 1 ), Mmi (D 2 ) is a summand of IF(G2 ), then Mnimi (Dl ®F D2) is a summand of JF( G1 x G2). Moreover, if we define GOp as G with the reversed multiplication 91 . 92 = 9291, then GOp is a group, and, if Mn(D) occurs as a summand of JF(G) then Mn(D)OP occurs as a summand of JF(GoP). But Mn(D)OP represents the inverse of {D} in the Brauer group of JF. The Group (Q/Z) and its Aut Group
p
3 5 7 11
generator
2
2
3
2
13 2
17 3
19 2
23 5
29 2
31 3.
Consequently we have Proposition 2.7 Aut(QjZ) e:: TIp prime UZ p , the infinite direct product of the units in the valuation ring Zp as p runs over all primes, where UZ p is Aut( (Z/Z)p). Proof. The inclusion Z/pn C Z/pn+1 defines a restriction map
The discussion above shows two things that we should take account of. First, it is sufficient to study the Schur subgroup in the case where JF is a cyclotomic extension of Q, and second, we do not need to consider all finite extensions of Q, but only the cyclotomic ones. The universal cyclotomic extension is
and in this subsection, in preparation for this analysis, we determine the structure of G = Aut(Q/Z) = Gal(Qcycz/Q). The Sylow p subgroup of Q/Z is the set of all fractions m/pi with denominator a power of p. It can also be described as the direct limit (Q/Z)p = lim (Z/pn), so we have the sequence of-inclusions ----+
There is only one subgroup isomorphic to Z/pn, the set of equivalence classes of rational fractions with denominator pn, Z/pn ~ {m/pn I 0 ::; m ::; pn -I}. Hence if a E Aut(Q/Z)p then a restricted to (Z/pn) is an isomorphism Z/pn~Z/pn.
where r(m) is multiplication by m again. In particular r is surjective with kernel Zip. Now, choose an infinite sequence o,f integers A = (aI, a2, a3,' .. an· .. ) so that ai+l == ai (mod pi) for all i, and for definiteness assume 0 ::; ai < pi so we may write ai+l = ai + jpi, with 0 ::; j < p. Clearly such a sequence A defines an element in Aut((QjZ)p) given explicitly as {m/pn~anm/pn}, and conversely any element in Aut((Q/Z)p) defines such a sequence. Note that we may also give such a sequence as a (formal) power series
A
=
a1
+ a2P + a3P2 + ." + a n +1pn + ...
0 ~ ai
< p for all i .
Moreover, the condition that A denote an element in Aut((Q/Z)p) is precisely that a1 =1= 0, and this identifies Aut( (Q/Z)p) with UZ p as desired. 0
3. The Explicit Generators of the Schur Subgroup Cyclotomic Algebras and the Brauer-Witt Theorem
For m and n relatively prime we have
a mn
c
d
m
n
-=-+-
where a = en + dm, it follows that Q/Z = U(Q/Z)p, so Aut(Q/Z) I1 Aut((Q/Z)p), and Aut( (Q/Z)p)
lim (Aut(Z/pn)) . f--
Recall from (I.1.4) that Aut (Z/pn ) { Aut(Z/2n)
= Zip - 1 x Z/pn-1 if p is odd, = 1£/2 x Z/2 n - 2 otherwise.
The generators of Aut(Z/2n) are multiplication by -1 and by 5. For odd primes the generator of order pn-1 is 1 + p while the generator of Z/(p - 1) is fairly hard to predict, but in the first few cases can be chosen as
Let G be a group together with a representation £ of G as an extension of the form
=
(?l/n, G,
1----+?l / n ----+ G ----+ V ----+ 1
where
1
W- v- (vW)
A~(v)
v E V,
A E
?lin,
= 8(W)-18(v)-18(vw)
E
?l/n
for all v, W in V.
Similar algebras were discussed in (1.8), but the algebras above are distinguished by the fact that the factor set {8( v) I v E V} are all roots of unity. Such algebras are called cyclotomic algebras.
300
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
3. The Explicit Generators of the Schur Subgroup
A key result in the theory of finite groups, the Brauer-Witt theorem ([YJ, pp. 20-34), states that as the pairs (G, £) run over all extensions of the form above, then the classes of the algebras A( G, E) in their respective Brauer groups generate the Schur subgroups S(IF). In order to put this into the context of cohomology we need the maximal cylcotomic extension of IF and its Galois group. The Galois Group of the Maximal Cyclotomic Extension of IF
Let IF c Q((n) be a cyclotomic field and GlF = Gal(QcYcl/IF). This subgroup of Aut(Q/Z) is fundamental in what follows so we discuss it in some detail now. To begin consider the extension Q '--). Q( (n). Vve have an exact sequence l-,Gal(Qcycl /Q( (n)) ---+Gal(Qcycl/Q) ---+Gal(Q( (n) /Q)---+ 1 and Gal(Q((n)/Q) = Aut(Z/n). Moreover, if we write n = 2rp~2 ... p~s where the Pj are odd, then from (I.1.4) Aut(Z/n) = (Z/2 x Z/2 r -
2
)
x
IT Z/(p -
Gv = V x
it x IT
zt,
q prime
where G v is independent of the particular prime overp in IF and V ifp is odd while V = Z/2 or {I} for p = 2.
C
Z/(p-l)
Proof. That fact that G v is independent of the particular prime P over (p) used to define v is due to the fact that in a cyclotomic field all the primes over (p) are permuted transitively by Gal(IF /Q) and the Galois groups are all abelian so conjugate subgroups are actually equal. We now determine G v beginning with Gp = Gal(Qg,cycl/Qp). Write n = p1fJ with (fJ,p) = 1. Then, if pB is the first power of p which is congruent to 1 mod (fJ) we have that Qp( (n) = Qp( (pj, (ps-I) and Gal(Qp((n)/Qp)= Aut(Zjp1) x Z/ s. Moreover, the generator of the Z/ s can be selected to act trivially on (pi and as ( ~ (P on (ps -1. In any case, passing to limits we obtain lim Aut(Z/p1) x lim (Z/s) +---
+---
q
1) x Z/pij-I
prime
Z/(p-l) x
I
for r > 2 and the first term is missing otherwise. Fr~m' (2.7) Aut(Q/Z) = TIp UZ p where UZ p = Z/ (p - 1) x zt for p odd
301
(Zt)2 II it, X
q:f.p
and G v = Gal(Qp,cycl/JFv) has finite index in G p • This completes the proof.
o
and is Z/2 'x zt for p = 2. In particular, The Cohomological Reformulation of the. Schur Subgroup
where the copy of zt for pin is really the ideal pij-Izt C zt. From this we get the form of the general case since Q C IF c Q( (n) for some n: Gal(Qcycl/IF) = TI(n,p)=1 UZ p x vV(IF) where W(IF) C TIpln UZ p and GlF/GQ((n)
~ Gal(Z((n)/IF) .
+---
Since every finite index subgroup of zt is isomorphic to zt we can write
(3.1)
GlF =
{w
tor
x
II
(p,n)=1
Z/(p -I)} x
We extend the definition of the limit cohomology group used in (I.8) to define the Brauer group to more general coefficients and arrive at the notion of continuous cohomology with general coefficients. The conditions for the definition of continuous cohomology are that we have a group G given as an inverse limit, G = lim (G i ), and coefficients, A,
IT
given as a direct limit A = lim (Ai) where the limits are taken over surjections ---+ p: G HI -+G i , and and injections i j : Aj -+A j + 1 so
zt·
p prime
We now consider the groups Gv for v a non-archimedean valuation on IF' c Q((n), where G v is defined as Gal(Qp,cycljJF v )' Theorem 3.2 Let v be a non-archimedean valuation over p in IF. Then
The groups G and A must also satisfy the consistency condition that for each n, G n acts on An and pg(a) = g(i(a)) for all n, a E An and 9 E G n+1 • Then H~ont(G; A) is defined as lim (H*(G n ; An). A simple argument shows that ---+ H~ont(G;
A)
= limn limm
H*(G n+m; An) where Gn+m acts on An through
the iterate projection of G n +m onto G n . We clearly have that if An = En ED en, in = in,A ED in,B for each n, then
_
....... _,.... ..............
-
-~
~
-- ....
-
------
"- --
u
Thus we have shown that the group S(IF) is determined as the subgroup spanned by the images of the compositions
H;ont(G; B EB C) = H;ont(G; B) EB H;ont(G; C) . Next suppose that we have a product G x H = lim Gn x Hn. Then we
H~(V; 7ljn)---tH~(V; Q((nt)---tB(lF) .
f-
have Lemma 3.3 H;ont(G x H; A) = H;ont(G; H;ont(H; A)) if G acts trivially on A. Otherwise, there is a spectral sequence converging to H;ont (G x H; A) with E 2 -termH;ont(G; H;ont(Hj A)).
Proof. Assume that G = lim (G n ), H = lim (Hm). Then we can choose f-
f-
as our resolution of G n x Hm the tensor product of a resolution of G n with a resolution of Hm. Filtering this by dimension in the complex for G n gives the spectral sequence. Then, taking E 2 -terms at each level gives H*(G n ; H*(Hn+m; An)). In the case of trivial G-action E2 = Eoo at each level and the coefficient group need not be An, so we can pass to limits fixing G n but varying Hn+m and the coefficients. In general we can pass to limits separately over m and n. So we fix An C A, pass to limits over m so that H*(G n ; H;ont(Hj An)) = H;ont(G n X H; An). Then pass to limits over n to obtain our E2 term for the calculation of H;ont(G x Hj A). 0
Example. H;ont (Grr ; Qj7l) is given as the limit over all m so that IF C Q( Cm) of the cohomology groups H*(Vm(lF); 2/m) where Vm(lF) = Grr/GQ((rn) and the limit is taken by noting that if m' = mn then Vnm (IF) surjects onto Vm (IF) and 2/m ~ 2/nm as a unique subgroup, so we have the composition 71'
.
The last composition is obtained by identifying V with Gal(Q(Cn)/IF) and then taking the composition *
.
H 2 (Gal(Q(Cn)/IF'j Q(Cnt) ~ H2(G rr ;Q(Cnt) ~ H2(Gll"; Qcycl) = B(IF) where 11": Grr--V is the induced map of Galois group and i: Q((n) "---+ Qcycl is the inclusion of coefficients. (Again this is discussed in 1. 8.) These maps from H~(Vj '.l/n) to B(IF) all factor through the composition
H;(G rr ; '.l/n)---tH;ont(GFi Q/71)---tH;ont(G F i Qcycl)
o
and the theorem follows.
Remark. Continuous cohomology can be treated in terms of continuous cochains and has been usefully looked at from this point of view. Further discussion can be found in [Se4]. Now, suppose that v is a valuation on IF oyer the valu~tion p on Q. Let C G F c Aut(Q/'.l) be the Galois group of Qp,cycl over lFv. Then we have, as above, that the Schur subgroup of B(IFv) is given as the image of the coefficient map
Gv
.
~.
H*(Vm(lF); 7l/m) ---t H*(Vnm(lF); 7l/m) ---t H*(Vnmj 7l/nm) .
(3.5)
Using this definition we have the following cohomological reformulation of the Brauer-Witt theorem. Theorem 3.4 Let IF be a cyclotomic field. Then the Schur subgroup S(lF) of the Brauer group B(lF) is the subgroup of H;ont( G rr ; Q~ycl) = B(lF) given as
and consequently we have Corollary 3.6 Let res: B(lF)--B(IFv) be the map of Brauer groups ind'l.Lced by tensoring with IFv, then the map on Schur subgroups is given by the com-
mutative diagram
the image under the coefficient map
H~ont(Grr; Q/7l)--'tH~ont(Grr; Q~ycl) . Proof. The algebra A( G, £) is completely specified by its co cycle !f/
E
C~(V; Q(Cn)e), where
!f/(Ivlwl) = 8(w) -18(v)-18(vw) and the action of V on 7ljn is given by
7l,/n--G--V in C~(V;7l,/n).
H;ont (G v ; Q;,CYcl) In particular, since I1r~:B(lF)-- UB(IFv) x UB(lB'oo,i) is injective, the determination of S(lF) breaks up into three steps: 1. the evaluation of the groups H;ont(G F ; Q/'.l) and H;ont(G v ; Q/'.l), 2. the evaluation of the coefficient maps
304
305
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group 2
2
~
b. If G
Hcont(G v ; QjZ)--+Hcont(Gv ; Q;,cycl) ,
= Z/2 r and the generator is not 1 f---+
-1, then
Hi (G; 7l/2i) = 0, j > 0, HO(G; 7l/2 i ) = invG(71/2i).
3. the evaluation of the restriction maps
r~: H;ont(GlF ; Q/Z)--+H;ont(Gv ; Q/Z) , and the map at the infinite primes. We answer these questions in order in the next two sections.
4. The Groups H~ont(GlF; Q/Z) and H~ont(Gv; Q/Z) In this section we determine the cohomology groups with coefficients in Q/Z of the subgroups of Aut(Q/Z) associated to the cyclotomic fields IF and JF v discussed above. It turns out that they are isomorphic to untwisted cohomology groups with coefficients in the roots of unity contained in IF or JFv , and rather than taking cohomology of the entire GlF or G v with these coefficients we only need the torsion part.
Proof of (4.2). For P odd G is cyclic, so we use the resolution in (II.3.8) and the formulae there for calculating cohomology groups. The things to note are that Homz(z/n) (Z(71/n), A) ~ A and T, the generator of Z/n can be chosen so that it acts as multiplication by u + pi where u ¢. Omod (p). If u ¢. 1 mod (p), (w~ich is the case when IVI -f 1), then T -1 is multiplication by a unit, so the cohmology trivializes. Otherwise T - 1 is multiplication by pr but an easy calculation shows that ~~n-r -1 Ti = pn-r W where w is a unit mod (pn) and the cohomology trivializes except in dimension O. As is usual here, the case p = 2 is slightly different. If G is cyclic we can use the resolution of (11.3.8) again, but if not then it is most convenient to first calculate cohomology with respect to Z/2 r and then the cohmology of the resulting complex with respect to Z/2. 0 We now return to the proof of (4.1). Write
H~ont(GF; Q/Z) = Let GlF be given in the notation of (3.1) where W tor x I1(p,n)=l Z/(p - 1) is the torsion subgroup, G~or. Suppose, also that Z/m c Q/Z is the fixed set, (Q/Z)GF. Then we have Theorem 4.1 H~ont(GlF;Q/Z) = H~ont(G~or;Z/m) where the action ofG~or is trivial on the coefficients Z/m. In particular we have
H~ont(G~or; Z/m) = H*(W tor·; Z/m) x H~ont(
II H;ont(G
F;
(Q/Z)p)
p
The Cohomology Groups H~ont(GlF; Q/Z)
II
Z/(p - 1); Z/m) .
(p,n)=l
Proof. We begin with some preliminary calculations for A = Z/pi and G c Aut(A). Lemma 4.2 Let A = Z/pi and suppose G C Aut(A). 1. Suppose p is odd, then G = V x Z/pr where IVI divides p - 1 and a. If V = e, then H*(G; Z/pi) = HD(G; Z/pi) = (Z/pi)G. b. If V -f e then H*(G; Z/pi) = O.
2. Suppose that p is even. a. If G = 2/2 x 2/2 r with the first 2/2 generated by 1
f---+
-1 then
generator 2i - 1 for j even, genemtoT 1 faT j odd.
as p runs over all the primes of Z. Fix p and consider the projection
'ifp is surjective and split except at the primes which divide n. More generally, it is also possible that 'ifp is not surjective but its image still lifts to a direct summand of GlF. In this case GlF = Ker('ifp) ED Up where Up ~ UZ p and H~ont(GlF; (Q/Z)p) = H;ont(Ker('ifp);H;ont(Up; (Q/Z)p)) .
But (4.2) shows that H;ont(Up; (Q/Z)p) ~ 0 if the torsion subgroup of Up in non-empty. Hence, when trp is surjective and split there is no contribution at that prime. Assume now that p divides n. Then W tor = L1 EBZ/d where L1 C Ker( 7rp), so G~or = L ED Z/d with L C ker(7rp). As regards the summands, only the where q = p or q divides p - 1 can fail to be in the kernel of 'ifp. Consequently, we can write
zt
zt
. GlF = GF(q) ED (Z/d ED
zt ED IT zt) ql(p-l)
where GlF(q) lies in ker(7rp), and we have
H;ont(GlF ; (Q/Z)p)
= H;ont(GlF(p);H;ont('Z/dEDzt
x
II ql(p-l)
zt; (Q/Z)p)).
The summand zt c Aut((Q/Z)p) is the kernel ofrestriction to Zip c (Q/Z)p and consequently, the coefficient cohomology groups can be obtained from the
spectral sequence with E2-term
IT
H;ont(Z/d x
Z;; H;ont(Z;; (Q/Z)p))
and it is only at W tOT that tricky things can happen in cohomology. It is convenient to choose a basis aI, ... ,as for vV so that the projection of ai onto 7l/2 = {±1} is trivial for i 2:: 2. Also, let Aq represent a generator for Z / (q - 1) when (q, 2n) = 1. Then the K unneth theorem and (4.1) show that H2(Grrc; Q/Z) has generators of the form
ql(p-1)
= H;ont(Z/d
x
IT
Z;; Z/pi)
ql(p-1) wher~ Z/pi is the subgroup of (Q/Z)p fixed under the action of zt. A second application of (4.2) shows that if Z/l x I1 ql(p-1) zt acts non-trivially on Z/pi, then the cohomology groups above are identically zero provided that p is odd. On the other hand, the only way they will act trivially is if a primitive root (pi E F. We thus have that for p odd, the contribution of (Q/Z)p 'is obtained as the untwisted cohomology groups
H;ont ( G~OT; H;ont (I1q;6pZt; Z/pi) ) On the other hand, since (q,p) = 1, we have that the second term is just Z/pi in degree 0 and the calculation gives the untwisted cohomology groups H;ont(G~or; Z/m), where Z/m is the cyclic group of odd roots of unity in F.
(Z/21 x zt) where, if on (Q/Zh by x ~ -x, while the generator of acts via multiplication by (_3)2f' for an appropriate
Only the case p = 2 remains. Here GF = G F(2)
zt
H;ont(GF(2); H;ont(Z/2 1 x zt; (Q/Zh)) H;ont(GF(2); H;ont(Z/2 l ; Z/2 T+2 )).
> 0 then H~ont (Z/21; Z/2 T+2 ) = Z/2 which, in turn, is isomorphic to Hi(Z/21; Z/2) for all i 2:: o. If l = 0 then a primitive 2r+2 root of unity is present in F. But in each case the group is H;ont(G~OT; Z/2 S ) where Z/2 s is the cyclic group of even roots of unity in F. This completes the proof. 0
If l
Remark 4.3 In the isomorphism above there is no difficulty except when the only even roots of unity in Fare ±l. In this case, while the groups are given correctly by the theorem, the cochains which represent them at the prime 2 cOJ!le from the twisted cohomology of Z/2 1 with coefficients in Z/2 T+2 , and this must be recalled when making explicit calculations. (See also (4.6).) Remark. Note that W tOT
C G~OT
We Z/2
X
Additionally, if there is an element a1 E G~OT which acts on (Q/Zh as x ~ -x, then the further classes (a1) 0 (aj), (a1) 0 (Aq), are also required. More precisely, the terms (*) 0 (*) in (4.4) can be derived as follows. Let 4.B.1
be the evident projection sending ai to the first generator, Aq to the second and all others to O. Similarly for ¢)..q'>v' etc. Then the ¢*,* induce restriction maps
X
of Z/2 1 acts
l > 0, the generator the righthand copy of r 2:: O. Then
(4.4)
the Bockstein of (ai), order g.c.d (order(ai), m), the Bockstein of (Aq), order g.c.d(order(A q ), m), i 2:: 2, i > j 2:: 2, p and q prime to 2n.
is given as a subgroup
Z/(P1 - 1) x ... x Z/(Pr - 1) ,
and (ai) 0 (Aq) is in the image of res(ai' Aq), etc. Again, the classes involving a1 are slightly different. Here the map is
where the generator of Z/Iall acts as multiplication by -Ion Z/2 T2 -I-l, and this map carries a class of H*(Z/Iall x Z/(q - 1); Z/2 T2 ) onto (a1) 0 (A q ).
The Local Cohomology with Q/Z Coefficients To this point we have determined the cohomology for the global situation. It remains to determine the cohomology groups for the various completions of F.
Theorem 4.5 Let v be a non-archimedean valuation over p in IF. We have 1. Ifp is odd then H;ont(Gv;Q/Z) = Z/Ilfl· 2. If p = 2 then If = Z/2 or If = {I}. When If = {I} we have H;'ont(G v ; Q/Z) = 0, but if If = Z/2 then H;'ont(G v ;Q/Z) = Z/2 EB Z/2. Proof. To begin consider the homomorphism 7r: G v -+ lim Aut(Z/~)-+Z:. f---
The subgroup Ker(7r) is a split summand of G v with complementary summand it. Hence we have
308
309
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
where Z/pr is the subgroup of invariants under the action of the complementary copy of Z: on (Q/7l)p. We can write Ker(7r) = Z: x (V x fIq~p Z;) and so we have a spectral sequence with Ez-term
H;ont(Z:; H;ont(V x
II zt; Z/pr))
zt
q~p
Z;
converging to H;ont(G v ;(Q/7l)p). But unless V == {I} and the all trivially on Z/pr the second factor trivializes to O. When V = {I} and action is trivial we obtain H;ont(Zt; 7l/pr) where we can assume that action is trivial. Passing to limits through the inverse system which gives to we see that
Z:
+ _ {z/pr H~ont(Zp ; Z/pr) 0 •
A
Remark 4.6 As was the case for (4.1), the explicit co cycle representatives for the two copies of (Z/2) in (4.5) are somewhat deceptive. The explicit representatives can be given as follows. First, since V = Z/2, if we take the resolution of Z/2 in (II.3L8), then (e2-t~) E Hom(Z(Zj2), QjZ) represents the first generator. For the second generator, there are two components needed, V and the copy of which acts trivially on (Q/Zh. A (continuous) resolution of has two generators eo in dimension zero and el in dimension one, with 8(el) = (T - l)eo. Here T is a (continuous) generator for Tensoring the two resolutions we obtain a representative for the second generator as
act the the rise
i = 0 or 1,
it
zt.
The Explicit Form of the Evaluation Maps at the Finite Valuations
otherwise,
when the action is trivial. It remains to study the situation for (Q/Z)q with q -=1= p. We assume that p is odd, and we have that Z/(pS - 1) C lF e is the subgroup of roots of unity of order prime to p in IF. Then we need to determine lim (H*(V x Z: x
Let v be a finite odd prime and ¢ E G v be the Frobenius element. Suppose also that w generates the torsion subgroup V. Write
+--
7l/r;Z/(prs -1)) where the limit is taken over r. Since the action of Z/r on Z/(prs - 1) is non-trivial, this becomes H*(V; Z/(pS - 1)) Z / (p8 - 1) {
Z/IVI
in G v and similarly w = Aq { w = ll'v,iO'.i
*=
0, * > O.
Finally, we consider the case p = 2. We may assume that V = Z/2 since otherwise the calculation goes exactly as above and the result is zero. When we consider the coefficients (Q/Z)q with q odd the calculation also goes as before, and, since 28 - 1 is prime to 2, the result is again zero. It remains to determine H;ont(G v ; (Q/Z)z). As before let 7r: G v -tAut((Q/Z)2), then Ker( 7r) = fIq prime Z;, and the image of 7r is Z/2 x Thus
zt.
if v lies over q otherwise.
Let 9 be the generator g: e2-t .~l of H2(G v ; Q/Z). Also, denote by order of the class w. Then we have .
Iwl
the
Theorem 4.7 Suppose v lies over an odd prime q not dividing n, then 1. (3(Aq)-tg, (3(O'.i)-tO, (3(Aql )-to for q' =1= q, 2. (Aq') 0 (A q") -to unless q' or q" = q, and then
zt;
H;ont(Ker(7r); H;ont(Z/2 x (Q/Zh)) H;ont(Ker(7r); H*(7l/2; Z/2r))
H;ont(Zt; Z/2) 0 H*(7l/2; Z/2r) A+ H;ontCl.Z ; Z/2) 0lFde], Theorem 4.8 If v lies over an odd prime p which divides n, then
where e is one dimensional. Now we have already seen that
1. (3(O'.i) ~ ~'v,i9, (3(A q )-tO,
Hi (Z+' 7l/2) = {Z/2 i = 0,1, cont 2' 0 otherwise, so we have that H2(G v ; (Q/Z))
=
Z/2 E8 Z/2 as asserted. (4.5) follows.
0
2. (a r ) @ (as) H (1fll(arli;(~8)ll'v,ifv,s + (I'v,r!J,v,s -l'v,s!J,v,r) '(aJ~~a.)d g where pi is the residue class degree of lFv.
Brom (4.5.1) we have HZont (G v ;(Jj71) = 7l/IVI for v over an odd prime (p), and the group is 7l/2 ffi 'll/2 if v lies over (2) with V i= {I}. In the case v over (2) explicit generators are given in (4.6). We now determine the map
It remains to describe the maps on the classes involving 0:1, (0:1) ® (O:il' and (0:1) ® (Aq). Theorem 4.9 1. Let q be an odd prime prime to n. Assume plication by (-1 + J1-2 r2 ). Then
HZont(G v ; Q/'ll)----+B(Wv) = Qj'll cp(q)
given by the coefficient map i~: H;ont(G v ; Q/71)-+H;ont(Gv ; Q;,cycl)' The result is
acts on (Q/'llh as multii I
2. Let p be an odd prime dividing n, and assume multiplication by (-1 + v2 r2 ), then
cpP
acts on (Q/'llh as
Theorem 5.1 1. i~ is injective for all odd p. 2. For p = 2 the first Z/2 injects only if the degree of 18' v over Q2 is odd, but the second 1./2 always injects. Proof. We start with the proof of (5.1.1). Consider the ramified extension 18'w = lFv((p), and note that Gal(lFw/lFv) = V. Assume that 7l/(pT' - 1) is
{Here Z/2 r2 is the invariant subgroup of (Qj'llh under the action of the torsion free part of C v . That is, it is determined by the projection Gv-+zt c
the subgroup of the roots of unity in (pr-1 = ( be a generator. We have
IFw
having order prime to p, and let
U2.) At the prime 2 we need the non-ramified Probenius. This is the class which acts as the identity on m/2i and acts as multiplication by 28 on mjn with n odd. ' Theorem 4.10 Let v by dyadic and write the non-ramified Probenius at v as UWiO:i x IlwqAq x (tor free), then
(0:1) ® (O:i) (0:1) 0 (Aq) jJ(o:I)
f-+
Wi X (second factor), Wq x (second factor),
f-+
(first generator),
f-+
Lemma 5.2 The generator of H2(V; IF:') can be taken as (e~ -+(). Proof of {5.2}. V = 'll/n is cyclic and lFw/lFv is totally ramified so (5.2) is a direct application of (1.11). 0
Now (5.1.1) follows from the fact that inflation is an injection and the fact that e2 -+ pr ~ 1) generates H2 (G v ; Q/1.). We now turn to the proof of (5.1.2).
Lemma 5.3 Theimageof(e~-+~) inB(lFv) is~ if and only ifdeg(W v ) over
and the remaining terms map to O.
Q2
is odd.
The map to the infinite primes will be given in (5.6). Proof of {5.3}. We first verify directly that for lFv = Q2 the image of the first class is ~ E B(Q2)' Also, write U2 for Aut( (Q/1.h) = 1./2 x Then, passing to H 's we have
zt.
5. The Explicit Structure of the Schur Subgroup, S (JF) At this point what remains is the determination of the two i*: H~ont(Cv; QI'll)-+H~ont(Gv; Q;,cycl)'
mapsr~
and takes
(e2 -+~)
to the same class for
IFv'
But in the commutative diagram
312
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
5. The Explicit Structure of the Schur Subgroup, S(lF)
res ---+
where the generator of the it corresponds to 2r +I - 2 g, that is the extension JF w of JF1) for which the Galois group of Qp,cycl over JFw is the subgroup above. Clearly
res ---+
res ---+
~ih~Inap
313
and Gal(JFw/JFv ) = Z/2 x it where the generator 1 acts as (2i it fixes (2t2.+n -1' h acts, ignoring a possible unit, as
f-+
(;1, while
B(lFv)
in the bottom line is multiplication by deg(lFv) over
,to (LIb),'.,'
Q2
according
We calculate as before, obtaining
H2(Gal(lFw/lFv); Z/2 r+l x lim (Z/(2 t28 +
0
n -
1)) =
n~oo
,., It re~ains to consider the second class in (4.6). The situation is this, we have an embedding ~+ A+ G "----r U X Z2 X Zp v
2
and the second generator is represented by the cochain
II
c
pi'2
corresponding to the inclusion Q2 C IF 1)' Let 9 be the infinite generator of U2 , (g: ~;}), and cp the (2-adic) Frobenius, the element which acts as x I----t x 2 on (Q/Zh and is the identity on the rest of (Q/Z). Then the embedding sends the generators of the piece (71/2 x x onto Z/2 = (I) producted with a finite index subgroup of (it)2. Such a subgroup has one of three forms:
N ow consider the diagram
is
zt zt)
21'-2 g + ).,21'-2+8cp, 21'-2+8+1cp, )., a unit, l, s ~ I, 2s cp + ).,2 8+1g, 28+I+1'-2g, )., a unit, l ~ I, r ~ 3, 21' - 2 g, 2 8 cp, r ~ 2, s ~ O.
h 1 e 1 ---+ 21'+1 .
T
= e1 0
H2(Gal(Ww/Wv); Z/21'+I) (5.4)
1'" H2(G v ;Q/Z)
We claim first that res( {c}) is the class of the second co chain in (4.6). Indeed, a simple chain approximation shows that under the restriction
However, in the second case it is convenient to rewrite the basis as
(2 8+1g+).,'2 8cp, 28+1'-2cp) , so that all three cases have the form 21'-2 g + ).,2 8cp, 28+1cp. In particular JF v is contained in «Jb((2r+1, (n) where n "= t2 8 +1 - 1 for some odd t, as a sub field of index 2l. But the odd roots of unity which are present in JF 1) form a copy of the cyclic group Z/ (2 t2S - 1) so this extension is non-ramified except for the action of T which gives rise to ramification of degree two. We now break the process of determining the cohomology map into two steps. First we show that there is a corresponding non-zero class in a maximal totally ramified extension, and then, using the known behavior of the cohomology restriction map when the coefficients lie in a complete local field the result will follow. Consider the totally ramified extension corresponding to
and
Since 9 is mUltiplication by -3 it follows that r > 1, and we now show that the map iw when restricted to {c} is non-trivial. To see this, restrict to some extension
JF~ = Q2((2
r ,
(2t28+n_1) :)
IFv
with Galois group Z/2 x Z/2 where n ~ l + r. Let JF~ be the invariant sub field under T in JF~, then JF~ is the maximal unramified extension of JF v in n
lF~. (1
A uniformizing parameter for },~ is (2r+1 - 1 = 7r, and one for IF~ is for some unit B E lF~. The inflation map
+ 1)1T' = B1T'2
7l/2 n
=
H 2(71/2 n ; W~·)-+H2(71/2 x 7l/2n; W::)
1. ,oo({3(Aq))
is injective, taking the generator to
roo (f3( ai))
{eo 0 e~ -+BB1r2 } where B E W~ is another unit and BB1r2 E Wv ' Thus the class of the co cycle above has order 2n in H2(71/2 x 7l/2n; W~).
Lemma 5.5 For n > l +, we have that the norm map Nh(1r)
Pro%l(S.S). rN h (1r)
if
...
=
N- h(1"':.2 r+1 ) t hen N h( (2r+1 ) ~~.
E
2r - 2
':.2 r +1
= [N- h( (2r+1 )]2
n -
1
+··+(-3)
= 1, so
2 r - 2 (2 1
Now we can complete the proof of (5.1). Calculating explicitly,
lF~, A
9' ql;-l(e 2)
Proof. We consider the composite
,
D
But N h (1r) = j.L1r 2" for j.L some unit in
TCO(Aq) 0 (Aql) =
1)
"mvanant and so belongs Nh (1r)· IS
rv
if j.Loo,i 1'- 0 mod 2.
only
0 (*) = o. ,(X) (ail 0 (aj I = j.Loo,if.Loo,j (e 2 )) 2 T·oo(ai) 0 (Aq) = 9f.L00,i(e )) ,oo(al)
-_
- (2 r
8[-(eo 0 e~-tNh(1r))] is (eI 0 e~-t(2r+l)
2. 3.
#0 #0
7l/2)-+H2(7Lj2; 7L/2) = B(lR) we have
otherwise. In particular) the evaluation is the same at each infinite prime.
Wv '
N h (r(1r)) = N h(-(2"+I1r) = N h ((2r+I)N h (1r). But,
_ 1"1+(-3) -
Too; H;ont(G~or;
Then, in the map
where i(T) = r, and we construct a chain approximation using the diagonal approximation ei f-t :z= ej 0 Tj ei-j of (IV.3.6) and the easily derived chain approximation for the map of groups i: 7l/2-+7L/2n sending T to an. Using the resolutions of (II.3.8) we obtain that a chain approximation is
(eo 0 e~-tNh(1r)) .
and hence, from (5.5) we have
N h (1r) = (1r 2()B)2
1
n -
Combining these we get a chain approximation for
W
cPo; ,>..q
•i
as
where W E JF v is a unit, and hence the norm of something in W~, so we have the equivalence of co cycles,
(eo 0 e~-tNh(1r))
rv
2n-l{eo 0 e~-t()B1r2}
which is the element of order 2 in H2(71/2 x 7l/2n; W~). This completes the proof of (5.1). 0
+ 5.7
e
The Invariants at the Infinite Real Primes Since IF is a cyclotomic field it has a real valuation if and only if complex conjugation is an element of OF' But this is the case if and only if r: x ~ -x E GF . If r E G F then (Q/71)G w = 7l/2 and H;ont(G~or; 7l/2) is determined in (4.4). We now give the evaluation result for infinite real places.
Theorem 5.6 Write r
---+ 2
A(q-l)/2 - 1 q
Aq - 1
A(q-l)/2 e q 2
+ eo 0
p. '
eO, 0 e>..q 0
e
0
1
C>:/:oo,; _ 1)(1 +( t
A(q-l)/2) q e (ai _ 1) (Aq _ 1) 1
P. '
e
1
e2·
From this (5.6.1) and (5.6.3) follow directly. To get (5.6.2) note that a chain for (a1) 0 (Aq) is given by the formula 5.8
Now 'note that in this case 2a1 = e, and use (5.7) to show that cPOl,>"q ·i)#(c) = O. This completes the proof of (5.6) and forms a good model for the remain0 ing calculations at the finite primes.
316
Chapter X. The Schur Subgroup of the Brauer Group
The Remaining Local Maps
Lemma 5.9 Let IF v be the completion of IF at v and Fv be its residue field which has order pS. Let'1/J be the Probenius map, '1/J((n) = (~s for (n,p) = l. Then, in H2(V x TIq Zips - 1) the mixed class ('1/J) (9 (v) maps to -g.
zt;
Proof. We construct a specific cohomology between the two classes:
From (5.9) theorems (4.7) and (4.8) follow easily but (4.9) is slightly more delicate. From (5.8) we have the expression for the required cocycle. We consider the composition 5.10 where the Z/2 represents the action of a1 on (Q/Z)2 . Assume that '1/) --+ (uv,lal) x Bv,qAq v --+ Aq and, in order for there to be anything interesting, clearly U v ,l must be odd. So we assume this also. Then the chain of (5.8) maps back to
£
u
(vel
(9
..b
by multiplying it by -1
1)
eo1/) --+ 2T2 + 1
+ A2T2
and we have
=
and (4.9.1) follows from (5.9). (4.9.2) follows similarly.
317
The considerations leading to (4.10) are essentially the same. Here the important'lj; is the generator of the c x which is the kernel of the projection 7r: G v --+U2 , since the second generator of H2(G v ; Q/Z) is
zt zt zt
The techniques above work equally well at the finite places. Indeed there are only a few things to be careful about. The following lemma is the key to calculating the images of the mixed terms (Aq, Aql), (ai, Aq) etc. at the v lying over odd primes. The notation is that established in (4.7) through (4.10).
Now, '1/J acts on
5. The Explicit Structure of the Schur Subgroup, S(lF)
References
J.F. Adams, Structure and applications of the Steenrod algebra, Comm. Math. Helv.32 (1958), 180-214. J.F. Adams, On the non-existence of elements of Hopf invariant One, [Ad2] Ann. Math.72 (1960), 20-104. A. Adem,. Cohomological non-vanishing for modules over p-groups, J. [AI] Algebra 141 No.2 (1991), 376-381. A. Adem, Cohomological restrictions on finite group actions, J. Pure and [A2] Applied Algebra 54 (1988), 117-139. A. Adem, W. Browder, The free rank of symmetry of (sn)k, Inv. Math.92 [AB] (1988), 431-440. A. Adem, RJ. Milgram, As-invariants, the cohomology of L3(4) and [AMI] related extensions, Proc. Lond. Math. Soc. 66(1993), 187-224. A. Adem, RJ. Milgram, Invariants and cohomology of groups, Bo1. Soc. [AM2] Math. Mex., (to appear). A. Adem, RJ. Milgram, The geometry and cohomology of the O'Nan [AM3] Group 0' N, in preparation. A. Adem, R.J. Milgram, The cohomology of the Mathieu Group Mn, [AM4] Topology, (to appear). [AMM1] A. Adem, J. Maginnis, RJ. Milgram, Symmetric invariants and cohomology of groups, Math. Ann. 287 (1990), 391-411. [AMM2] A. Adem, J. Maginnis, R.J. Milgram, The geometry and cohomology of the Mathieu group JviI2, J. Algebra 139 (1991),90--133. [Adem] J. Adem, The relations on Steenrod powers of cohomology classes, Algebraic Geometry and Topology, Princeton (1957), 191-238. C. Allday, V. Puppe, Gohomological Methods in Transformation Groups, [AP] Cambridge Studies in Advanced Mathematics 32, Cambridge University Press (1993). . J. Alperin, L. Evens, Representations, resolutions and Quillen's dimension [AE] theorem, J.Pure & Applied Algebra 22 (1981), 1-9. Artin, Nesbitt, Thrall, Rings With Minimal Condition, U. of MIchigan [ANT] Press, (1944). M. Barratt, S. Priddy, On the homology of non-connected monoids and [BP] their associated groups, Comm. Math. Relv. 47 (1972), 1-14. [BDH] G. Baumslag, M. Dyer, A. Heller, The topology of discrete groups, J.Pure & Applied Algebra 16 (1980), 1-49. H. Behr, J. Mennicke, A presentation of the group PSL(2,p), Can. J. [BM] Math 20 (1968), 1432-1438. M. Benard, The Schur subgroup I, J. of Algebra 22 (1972),374-377. [Be] [BeS] M. Benard, M. Schacher, The Schur subgroup II, J. of Algebra 22 (1972), 378-385. [Ad1]
320
References
References
[B]
H. Bender, On groups with abelian 2-Sylow subgroups, Math. Zeit. 117 (1970),164-176. D. Benson, Representations and Cohomology II: Cohomology of Groups [Be] and Modules, Cambridge Studies in Advanced Mathematics, Cambridge University Press (1991). D. Benson, J. Carlson, Complexity and multiple complexes, Math. Zeit. [BC1] 195 (1987), 221-238. D. Benson, J. Carlson, Projective resolutions and Poincare duality com[BC2] plexes, to appearD. Benson, J. Carlson, Diagrammatic methods for modular representa[BC3] tions and cohomology, Comm. Algebra 15 (1987), 53-121. D. Benson, J. Carlson, G. Robinson, On the vanishing of group cohomol[BCR] ogy, J. Algebra 131 (1990),40--73. A. Borel, Seminar on Transformation Groups, Ann. of Math. Studies 46 [Bo1] Princeton U. Press, (1960). A. Borel, La cohomologie mod 2 de certains espaces homogenes, Comm. [Bo2] Math. Helv. 27 (1953), 165-197. [BHMM] C. Boyer, J. Hurtubise, B.M. Mann, RJ. Milgram, The topology of instanton moduli spaces, I: The Atiyah-Jones conjecture, Ann. of Math., (to appear). G. Bredon, Introd'uction to Compact Transformation Groups, Academic [BreI] Press New York, (1972). G. Bredon, Equivariant Cohomology Theories, Lecture Notes in Mathe[Bre2] matics, 34 (1967), Springer Berlin. W. Browder, Cohomology and group actions, Inv. Math. 71 (1983),599[Brow] 608. [Brown] K. Brown, Cohomology of Groups, Springer-Verlag Graduate Texts in Mathematics 87, (1982). F_ Buekenhout, S. Rees, The subgroup structure of the Mathieu group, [BR] Math. of Computation, 50(1988), 595-605. H. Cardenas, El algebra de cohomologfa del grupo simetrico de grado p2, [Card] Boletfn Sociedad Matematica Mexicana 10 (1965), 1-30. J. Carlson, The varieties and cohomology ring of a module, J. Algebra [C] 85 (1983), 104-143. G. Carlsson, On the rank of abelian groups acting freely on (sn)k, Inv. [Cal Math. 69 (1982), 393-404. H. Cartan, Sur l'iteration des operations de Steenrod, Comm. Math. Helv. [Car] 29 (1955),40-58. H. Cartan, S. Eilenberg, Homological Algebra, Princeton University Press, [CE] Princeton NJ (1956). [Carter] R Carter, Simple Groups of Lie Type, Wiley, New York (1972). J.vV.S. Cassels, A. Frohlich, Algebraic Number Theor'Y, Academic Press, [CF] (1967). T. Chang, T. Skjelbred, Group actions on Poincare duality spaces, Bull. [CS] A.M.S., 78 (1972), 1024-1026. G.R Chapman, Generators and relations for the cohomology ring of J1, [Ch] in LMS Lecture Notes 71 (1982), Cambridge University Press. A.M. Cohen, D.B. Wales, Finite subgroups of G2 (C), Comm. in Algebra, [CW] 11 (1983),441-459. F.R. Cohen, Two-primary analogues of Selick's theorem and the Kahn[Coh] Priddy theorem for the 3-sphere, Topology, 23 (1984), 401-421.
[CMN] [Co] [Cox] [DM] [DM2]
[D] [Do] [DT] [DW] [DL]
[E] [EM] [Ev1] [Ev2]
JFP] [FH] [FM] [FW]
[G] [Gi] [Go] [Gor] [Gr1] [Gr2] [Ha]
[H]
321
F.R Cohen, R1. Cohen, B.M. Mann, RJ. Milgram, The topology of rational functions and divisors of surfaces, Acta Math., 166 (1991), 163221. F.R Cohen, J.C. Moore, J.A. Neisendorfer, The double suspension and exponents of the homotopy groups of spheres, Ann. Math., 118 (1979), 549-565. J.H. Conway, RT. Curtis, S.P. Norton, RA. Wilson, Atlas of Finite Groups, Clarendon Press, Oxford (1985). H.S.M. Coxeter, Integral Cayley numbers, Duke J., 13(1946), 561-578. J.F. Davis, RJ. Milgram, A Survey of the Spherical Space Form Problem, Mathematical Reports, 2 Part 2, Harwood Press, (1985). J.J. Davis, R.J. Milgram, Semicharacteristics, bordism, and free group actions, Trans. A.M.S., 312 (1989), 53-83. L. Dickson, The alternating group on eight letters and the quaternary . linear congruence group modulo two, Math. Ann. 54 (1901), 564-569. A. Dold, 'Homology of symmetric products and other functors of complexes, Ann. Math., 68 (1958), 54-80. A. Dold, R Thorn, Quasifaserungen und unendliche symmetrische Produkte, Ann. Math. 67 (1958), 239-281. W.G. Dwyer, C.W. Wilkerson, A new finite loop space at the prime 2, J.A.M.S., 6(1993), 37-64. E. Dyer, R. Lashof, Homology of iterated loop spaces, Am.J. Math. 84 (1962), 35-88. B. Eckmann, Cohomology of groups and transfer, Ann. Math. 58 (1953), 481-493. S. Eilenberg, S. MacLane, Cohomology theory in abstract groups I & II, Ann. Math. 48 (1947), 51-78 and 326-341. L. Evens, The cohomology ring of a finite group, Trans.' A.M.S. 101 (1961), 224-239. 1. Evens, Cohomology of Groups, Oxford University Press'(1992). S. Fiedorowicz, S. Priddy, Homology of Classical' Groups over Finite Fields and their Associated Infinite Loop Spaces, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, 674, Springer-Verlag (1978). K.L. Fields, LN. Herstein, On the Schur subgroup of the Brauer group, J. of Algebra, 20 (1972), 70--71. P. Fong, RJ. Milgram, On the geometry and cohomology of the simple groups G2(q) and 3D4 (q), preprint, Stanford University (1990). . P. Fong, W. Wong, A Characterization of the finite simple groups PSp(4, q), G2(q), D~(q) I, Nagoya J. Math. 36 (1969), 143-184. W. Gaschiitz, Kohomologische Trivialitaten un aussere automorphismen von p-gruppen, Math. Zeit. 88 (1965), 432-433. C. Giffen, List of Problems, Contemporary Mathematics 19 (1983). D. Goldschmidt, Automorphisms of trivalent graphs, Ann. Math. 111 (1980),377-406. D. Gorenstein, Finite Simple Groups: An Introduction to Their Classification, University Series in Mathematics, Plenum Press (1982). K. Gruenberg, Relation Modules of Finite Groups, AMS Regional Conf. Series 25, (1976). K. Gruenberg, Cohomological Topics in Group Theory, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 143, Springer-Verlag (1970). M. Hall Jr., The Theory of Groups, M acmilli an , (1959).
J.e. Hausmann, Manifolds with a Given Homology and Fundamental Group, Comm. Math. Helv. 53 (1978), 113-134.
[HH] [He]
[HS] [HiS] [Hu] [Jam] [Ja] [J] [KP] [KT] [KI] [K] [Ku] [La] [La2] [Li] [L] [MM] [Ma] [MMl] [MM2] [Mau] [Mac] [Ml] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5]
J.C. Hausmann, D. Husemoller, Acyclic maps, UEnseignement Math.25 (1979), 53-75. T. Hewett, Thesis, Stanford University (1991). G. Hochschild, J.P. Serre, Cohomology of group extensions, Trans. A.M.S. 74 (1953), 110-134. P. Hilton, U. Stammbach, A Course in Homological Algebra, SpringerVerlag (1971). Hungerford, Algebra, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 73, Springer-Verlag (1974). 1.M. James, On the suspension sequence, Ann. Math., 65 (1957),74-107. Z. Janko, A characterization of the Mathieu simple groups, J. Algebra, 9(1968), 1-19. G.J. Janusz, The Schur group of an algebraic number field, Ann. of Math., 103 (1976), 253-281. D. Kahn, S. Priddy, On the transfer in the homology of symmetric groups, Math. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc. 83 (1978), 91-101. D. Kan, W. Thurston, Every connected space has the cohomology of a K(7r, 1), Topology 15 (1976), 253-258. S.N. Kleinerman, The Cohomology of Chevalley Groups of Exceptional Lie type, AMS Memoir (1982). N. Kuhn, Chevalley group theory and the transfer in the homology of the symmetric groups, Topology 24 (1985), 247-264. T. Kuo, On the exponent of Hn(G,Z), J. Algebra 7 (1967), 160-167. S. Lang, Algebra, Addison-Wesley (1971). S. Lang, Algebraic Number Theory, Addison-Wesley, (1973). A. Liulevicius, A theorem in homological algebra and stable homotopy of projective spaces, Trans. A.M.S., 109(1963), 540-552. R Lyndon, The cohomology theory of group extensions, Duke Math. J. 15 (1948), 271-292. 1. Madsen, RJ. Milgram, The Classifying Spaces for Surgery and Cobordism of Manifolds, Ann. Math. Studies 92, Vo1.92 Princeton University Press, (1979). B.M. Mann, The cohomology of the symmetric groups, Trans. A.M.S. 242 (1978), ' B.M. Mann, RJ. Milgram, Some space of holomorphic maps to complex Grassmann manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 33 (1991), 301-324. B.M. Mann, RJ. Milgram, On the moduli space of SU(n) monopoles and holomorphic maps to flag manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 38(1993), 39-103. C.RF. Maunder, A short proof of a theorem of Kan and Thurston, Bull. London Math. Soc. 13 (1981); 325-327. S. Maclane, The Milgram bar construction as a tensor product of functors, Saunders Maclane Selected Papers, 435-453, Springer-Verlag, (1979). R.J. Milgram, The mod 2 spherical characteristic classes, Ann. Math. 92 (1970), 238-261. RJ. Milgram, On the geometry and cohomology of the simple groups G2 (q) and 3 D4(q), II, Preprint, Stanford University, (1989). RJ. Milgram, The homology of symmetric products, Trans. A.M.S. 138 (1969), 251-265. R.J. Milgram, The bar construction and abelian H-spaces, Ill. J. Math. 11 (1967), 242-250. R.J. Milgram, The cohomology of the Mathieu group M 23 , (preprint, Stanford University, 1993).
[Mi] [Mi2] [MS] [Mu] [Na] [N] [P] [Q1] [Q2] [Q3] [Q4] [Q5] Q6
fQV]] [RS] [R] [RSY] [S] [Sell [Se1] [Se2] [Se3] [Se4] [SnJ [Sp] [St] [Ste] [Ste2] [SE] [SlJ
J. Milnor, The Steenrod algebra and its dual, Ann. Math. 67 (1958), 150-171. J. Milnor, Groups which act on without fixed points, Amer. J. Math., 79 (1957), 623-630. J. Milnor, J. Stasheff, Characteristic Classes, Ann. Math. Studies 76, Princeton University Press, (1974). H. Mui, Modular invariant theory and cohomology algebras of the symmetric groups, J. Fac. Sci. Tokyo 22 (1975),310-369. M. Nakaoka, Homology of the infinite symmetric group, Ann. Math. 73 (1961), 229-257. T. Nakayama, On modules of trivial cohomology over a finite group r, Ill. J. Math. 1 (1957),36-43. R Pierce, Associative Algebras, Graduate Texts in Mathematics, 83 Springer-Verlag (1980). D. Quillen, The spectrum of an equivariant cohomology ring I & II, Ann. Math. 94 (1971), 549-602. D. Quillen, Cohomology of groups, rCM Proceedings, Nice 1970, Gauthier Villars (1971), Vol. II , 47-51. D. Quillen, On the cohomology and K-theory of the general linear groups over a finite field, Ann. Math. 96 (1972), 552-586. D. Quillen, The mod 2 cohomology rings of extra-special 2-groups and the spinor groups, Math. Ann. 194 (1971), 197-212. D. Quillen, Homotopy properties of the poset of non-trivial p-subgroups of a group, Adv. Math. 28 (1978), 101-128. D. Quillen, The Adams conjecture, Topology 10 (1971), 67-80. D. Quillen, B. Venkov, Cohomology of finite groups and elementary abelian subgroups, Topology 11 (1972), 317-318. M. Richardson, P.A. Smith, Periodic transformations of complexes, Ann. Math. 39 (1938), 611-633. D.S. Rim, Modules Over finite groups, Ann. Math. 69 (1959), 700-712. A. Ryba, S. Smith, S. Yoshiara, Some projective modules determined by sporadic geometries, UIC preprint (1988). G. Segal, The topology of rational functions, Acta Math., 143 (1979), 39-72. P. Selick, Odd primary torsion in 7rk(S3), Topology, 17 (1978), 407-412. J.P. Serre, Cohomologie modulo 2 des complexes d' Eilenberg-MacLane, Comm. Math. Helv. 27 (1953), 198-132. J.P. Serre, Sur la dimension cohomologique des groupes profinis, Topology 3 (1965), 413-420. J.P. Serre, Trees, Springer-Verlag (1980). J.P. Serre, Local Fields, Graduate Texts in Mathematics, 67, SpringerVerlag, (1979). V. Snaith, A stable decomposition for nn En X, J. London Math. Soc. 7 (1974), 577-583. E. Spanier, Algebraic Topology, Springer Verlag (1989). R Stanley, Invariant theory, Bull. A.M.S. (1979) N. Steenrod, Homology groups of symmetric groups and reduced power operations, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 39 (1953), 213-217. N. Steenrod, Milgram's classifying space of a topological group, Topology 7 (1968), 319-368. N. Steenrod, D. Epstein, Cohomology Operations, Ann. Math. Studies 50, Princeton University Press (1962). RO. Swan, The p-period of a finite group, Ill. J. Math. 4 (1960), 341-346.
sn
[S2] [S3] [TY] [Th]
[V] tWa] [We]
[W] tWo] [Y]
R.C. Swan, Minimal resolutions for finite groups, Topology 4 (1965), 193-208. R.G. Swan, A new method in fixed-point theory, Comm. Math. Helv. 34, (1960). M. Tezuka, N. Yagita, The cohomology of subgroups of GLn(lF q ), Contemporary Math. 19 (1983),379-396. C. Thomas, Characteristic Classes and the Cohomology of Finite Groups, Cambridge Studies in Advanced Mathematics 9, Cambridge University Press (1986). B. Venkov, Cohomology algebras for some classifying spaces, Dokl. Akad. Nauk. SSR 127 (1959), 943-944. C.T.C. Wall, Resolutions for extensions of groups, Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., 57(1961), 251-255. . P. Webb, A local method in group cohomology, Comm. Math. Helv. 62 (1987), 135-167. C. Wilkerson, A primer on Dickson invariants, in Contemporary Math. 19 (1983), 421-434. J. Wolf, Spaces of Constant Curvature, Publish or Perish, Inc. (1977). T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of the Brauer Group, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 397, Springer-Verlag, (1974).
Index
acyclic map 273 acyclic space 273 Adem relations 55 Adem, A. 85, 163 Adem, J. 181, 183, 205 algebraically closed group 285 Alperin, J. 166 augmentation ideal 61, 200 automorphism group 8 - of 7l.,/n 10 - relative 87 bar construction 59 - chain approximation to diagonal Barratt, M. 206 Behr, H. 151 Benard, M. 289 Bender, H. 80 binary icosahedral group 147 binary octahedral group 147,150 binary tetrahedral group 147,150 Bockstein operation 54 Borel, A. 161,162,166, 183 - Borel construction 162 Brauer group 44, 294, 296 Brauer-Witt theorem 299,302 Browder, W. 163, 167 Brown, K. 161,171,176 Cardenas, H. 114,205 - calculation of Sp2 195 Carlsson, G. 163 Cartan formula 55 Cartan, H. 56, 76, 158, 162 Cartesian product 46 central product 30 central simple IF-algebra 36 chain approximation to the diagonal 136 chain homotopy 60
66
chain multiplication for commutative group 137 Chang, T. 163 change of rings 126 Chern classes. 169· classification of finite simple groups 251 closed system 113 coboundary map 32 cohomological triviality 85 cohomology groups 61 - of PSL 2 (IF 2n) 81 - of S6 211 - of S8 212 - of SlO 213 - of S12 214 - of Soo 205 - of A4 96 - of A6 216 - of A8 216 - of AlO 218 - of A12 218 - of G 2 (q) 250 - of GLn(q) 234 - of h 254 - of Mll 253 - of M12 262 - of M22 270 - of M 23 272 - of O'N 267 - of the finite orthogonal groups 241 - with twisted coefficients 58,61 cohomology operation 53 - Adem relations 55 - Cartan formula 55 - stable 54 - Steenrod algebra 54 complete group 23 complete resolution 81 complexity 145, 166 continuous cohomology 301
Coxeter, H.S.M. 250 cyclic algebra 38 cyclotomic field 295 Dedekind domain 290 detection by abelian subgroups 141 Dickson algebra 102, 192 - generators 101 - Mui's exterior generators 104 - Mui's generalization 105 Dickson, L.E. 102 dihedral group 11, 121, 126, 128, 129 divided power algebra 205 Dold, A. 181,205 double coset decomposition - symmetric groups 78 double coset formula 77 - stable elements 77 Dwyer, W.G 115 Dyer, E. 181 Eckmann, B. 69 Eilenberg, S. 7, 76 Eilenberg-MacLane space 47 Epstein, D.B.A. 156 equivalent extensions 28 equivariant cohomology 162 Evens, L. 143,166 Evens-Venkov Theorem 143 exponent of a group 166 exponent of an element 167 Ext~(G)(M; A) 60 , extended binary octahedral group 151 extended binary tetrahedral group 151 exterior algebra 56 extraspecial 2-group 133 F-isomorphism 146 fiber bundle 46 - associated bundle 46 - associated principal bundle 46 - classifying space 47 - explicit classifying space 49 - Steenrod recognition principle 47 Fields, K. 289 Frobenius generator 294 F'robenius map 74 G-CW complex 161 Gaschiitz 86, 91 generalized quaternion group graded illgebra 197
17, 147
graded coalgebra 198 group actions 161 growth rate 145 Gruenberg resolution 65 Gruenberg, K. 64 Gysin sequence 7'3 Herstein, 1. 289 homology groups of G 61 Hopf Algebra 198 Hopf algebra 57 - Hopf algebra map 200 - indecomposable 201 - primitive 201 - primitively generated Hopf algebra 201 -quotient Hopf algebra 200 - sub-Hopf ,algebra 200 Hopf, H. 183 hyperbolic quadratic form 227 hypercohomology 164 , inflation map Inn(N) 9 Janusz, G. Jordan, C.
43
289 217
Kahn, D. 75 Kan-Thurston Theorem 284 Krull Dimension 143, 144 Kuhn, N. 114 Kuo, T. 85 Lashof, R. 181 Leray, J. 162 Lyndon, R. 162
l'v1acLane, S. 7 Mann, B.M. 193,196,197 Mennicke, J. 151 metabelian group 11 Milnor, J. 57,147,154 mitosis 284 mitotic group 284 Mui, H. 114 Nakaoka, M. 141,181,205 Nakayama 85 NDR pair 46 Noether-Skolem theorem 37 Noetherian ring 143 non-singular bilinear form 220
Norm
- Bockst.ein 54 St.eenrod algebra 54 Steenrod squares 157 Steenrod: N. 50,53,75,140,156,181,
13
obstruction
Out(N)
23
9
183)205 p-Sylow subgroup of symmetric group 185 period 146 periodic group 146 plus construction 277 Poincare series 95 paset 170 - Ap(G) - Sp(G)
170 170
poset slmce 170 Priddy, S. 75,206 pull back 20 quaternion group 128,131 quaternions 12 Quillen, D. 141,145,161,166,171, 173,206,234 - Atiyah-Evens-Swan conjecture 144 resolution - bar construction 59 - minimal resolution 83 resolution of Mover G 58 restriction 57 Richardson, M. 53 Rim 85 Schacher, M. 289 Schur subgroup 298 second cohomology group of G section 11 semi-direct product 11 Serre, J.P. 56 singular set of G action 174 Skjelbred, T. 163 Smith, P. 53, 163 Snaith, V. 75 split extension 11 sporadic simple groups 251 stable operation
31
Suzuki, M. 148, 154 Swan, R. 79,84,165 symmetric groups 181 Tate cohomology - Tate hypercahomology groups 165 third cohomology group of G 27 Thom, R. 182,205 Tits building 173 Tor~G (1" A) 61 transfer 69 twisted group rings 37 universal cyclotomic extension
298
valuation - p-adic 290 - completion with respect to 291 - equivalent valuations 290 - non-archimedean 290 - power series representation 291 - residue class field 291 - uniformizing parameter 291 - valuation ring 290 Venkov, B. 143 weakly closed system 113 Webb, P. 161,1'77 Wedderburn theorem 36 Weyl group 58 Wilkerson, C.W 115 Wolf, J. 154 wreath product 74,119,184 - classifying space 119 - collapse of Serre spectral sequence 120 Yamada, T.
289
Za.'3senhaus, H.
¢".
i ..
L'
148, 154